## ug932021 1 Syllabus Mumbai University by munotes

## Page 2

## Page 3

Copy to : -

1. The Deputy Registrar, Academic Authorities Meetings and Services

(AAMS),

2. The Deputy Registrar, College Affiliations & Development

Department (CAD),

3. The Deputy Registrar, (Admissions, Enrolment, Eligibility and

Migration Department (AEM),

4. The Deputy Registrar, Research Administration & Promotion Cell

(RAPC),

5. The Deputy Registrar, Executive Authorities Section (EA),

6. The Deputy Registrar, PRO, Fort, (Publi cation Section),

7. The Deputy Registrar, (Special Cell),

8. The Deputy Registrar, Fort/ Vidyanagari Administration Department

(FAD) (VAD), Record Section,

9. The Director, Institute of Distance and Open Learni ng (IDOL Admin),

Vidyanagari,

They are requested to treat this as action taken report on the concerned

resolution adopted by the Academic Council referred to in the above circular

and that on separate Action Taken Report will be sent in this connection.

1. P.A to Hon’ble Vice -Chancellor,

2. P.A Pro -Vice-Chancellor,

3. P.A to Registrar,

4. All Deans of all Faculties,

5. P.A to Finance & Account Officers, (F.& A.O),

6. P.A to Director, Board of Examinations and Evaluation,

7. P.A to Director, Innovation, Incubation and Linkages,

8. P.A to Director, Board of Lifelong Learning and Extension (BLLE),

9. The Director, Dept. of Information and Communication Technology

(DICT) (CCF & UCC), Vidyanagari,

10. The Director of Board of Student Development,

11. The Director, Dep artment of Students Walfare (DSD),

12. All Deputy Registrar, Examination House,

13. The Deputy Registrars, Finance & Accounts Section,

14. The Assistant Registrar, Administrative sub -Campus Thane,

15. The Assistant Registrar, School of Engg. & Applied Sciences, Kalyan ,

16. The Assistant Registrar, Ratnagiri sub -centre, Ratnagiri,

17. The Assistant Registrar, Constituent Colleges Unit,

18. BUCTU,

19. The Receptionist,

20. The Telephone Operator,

21. The Secretary MUASA

for information.

## Page 4

AC -23/02/2021

Item No. – 6.11-1

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI

Bachelor of Engineering

in

Civil Engineering

Direct Second Year (Sem. III) Admitted Students for the

current Academic Year 2020 -21(Only)

(REV - 2019 ‘C’ Scheme) from Academic Year 2019 – 20

Under

FACULTY OF

SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY

(As per AICTE guidelines with effect from the academic year 2019 –2020)

## Page 5

2

Program Structure for Second Year Engineering

Semester III & IV

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI

(With Effect from 2020 -2021 )

Semester - III

Course

Code Course Name Teaching Scheme

(Contact Hours) Credits Assigned

Theory Pract Tut Theory Pract. Tut. Total

CEC301 Engineering Mathematics -III 3 - 1 3 - 1 4

CEC302 Mechanics of Solids 4 4 4

CEC303 Engineering Geology 3 3 3

CEC304 Architecture planning and

Design of Building 2 - - 2 - - 2

CEC305 Fluid Mechanics - I 3 - - 3 - - 3

CEL301 Mechanics of Solids - 2 - - 1 - 1

CEL302 Engineering Geology - 2 - - 1 - 1

CEL303 Architectural Planning &

Design of Buildings - 2 - - 1 - 1

CEL304 Fluid Mechanics - I - 2 - - 1 - 1

CEL305 Skill Based Lab Course -I 3 - 1.5 1.5

CEM301 Mini Project – 1 A - 3$ - - 1.5 - 1.5

Total 15 14 1 15 7 1 23

Examination Scheme

Course

Code Course Name Internal

Assessment End

Sem

Exam Exam

Durati

on

(Hrs.) -

Term

Work

Prac.

/Oral

Total

Test

I Test

II Av

g

CEC301 Engineering

Mathematics -III 20 20 20 80 3 25 - 125

CEC302 Mechanics of Solids 20 20 20 80 3 - - 100

CEC303 Engineering Geology 20 20 20 80 3 - - 100

CEC304 Architectural Planning &

Design of Buildings 20 20 20 80 3 - - 100

CEC305 Fluid Mechanics - I 20 20 20 80 3 - - 100

CEL301 Mechanics of Solids - - - - - 25 25 50

CEL302 Engineering Geology - - - - - 25 25 50

CEL303 Architectural Planning &

Design of Buildings - - - - - 25 25 50

CEL304 Fluid Mechanics - I - - - - - 25 25 50

CEL305 Skill Based Lab Course -I - - - - - 50 - 50

CEM301 Mini Project – 1 A - - - - - 25 25 50

Total 100 400 - 200 125 825

## Page 6

3

CEC301 Engineering Mathematics -III

Course Code Course Name Credits

CEC 301 Engineering Mathematics -III 04

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total

03 - 01 03 - 01 04

Theory Term

Work/Practical/Oral

Total Internal Assessment End

Sem.

Exam Duration of

End Sem.

Exam TW PR OR Test-I Test-II Average

20 20 20 80 03 hrs 25 - - 125

Pre-requisite: Engineering Mathematics -I,

Engineering Mathematics -II,

Course Objectives:

1. To familiarize with the Laplace Transform, Inverse Laplace Transform of various

functions, its applications.

2. To acquaint with the concept of Fourier Series, its complex form and enhance the

problem solving skills.

3. To familiarize with the concept of complex variables, C -R equation s with applications.

4. To study the application of the knowledge of matrices and numerical methods in

complex engineering problems.

Course Outcomes: Learner will be able to….

1. Apply the concept of Laplace transform to solve the real integrals in engineering

problems.

2. Apply the concept of inverse Laplace transform of various functions in engineering

problems.

3. Expand the periodic function by using Fourier series for real life problems and complex

engineering problems.

4. Find orthogonal trajectories and analytic function by using basic concepts of complex

variable theory.

5. Apply Matrix algebra to solve the engineering problems.

6. Solve Partial differential equations by applying numerical solution and analytical

methods for one dimensional heat and wave equat ions.

## Page 7

4

Module Detailed Contents Hrs.

01 Module: Laplace Transform

1.1 Definition of Laplace transform, Condition of Existence of Laplace

transform,

1.2 Laplace Transform (L) of Standard Functions like 𝑒𝑎𝑡, 𝑠𝑖𝑛(𝑎𝑡),

𝑐𝑜𝑠(𝑎𝑡), 𝑠𝑖𝑛ℎ(𝑎𝑡), 𝑐𝑜𝑠ℎ(𝑎𝑡) and 𝑡𝑛 ,𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒 𝑛≥0.

1.3 Properties of Laplace Transform: Linearity, First Shifting theorem,

Second Shifting Theorem, change of scale Property, multiplication by t,

Division by t, Laplace Transform of derivatives and integrals (Properties

without proof).

1.4 Evaluation of integrals by using Laplace Transformation.

Self-learning topics: Heaviside’s Unit Step function, Laplace Transform.

of Periodic functions, Dirac Delta Function. 07 Hrs.

02 Module: Inverse Laplace Transform

2.1 Inverse Laplace Transform, Linearity property, use of standard

formulae to find inverse Laplace Transform, finding Inverse Laplace

transform using derivative

2.2 Partial fractions method & first shift property to find inverse Laplace

transform.

2.3 Inverse Laplace transform using Convolution theorem (without proof)

Self-learning Topics: Applications to solve initial and boundary value

problems involving ordinary differential equations. 06 Hrs.

03 Module: Fourier Series:

3.1 Dirichlet’s conditions, Definition of Fourier series and Parseval’s

Identity

(without proof)

3.2 Fourier series of periodic function with period 2π and 2l,

3.3 Fourier series of even and odd functions

3.4 Half range Sine and Cosine Series.

Self-learning Topics: Complex form of Fourier Series, orthogonal and

orthonormal set of functions, Fourier Transform.

07Hrs.

04 Module: Complex Variables:

4.1 Function f(z) of complex variable, limit, continuity and

differentiability of f(z),

Analytic function, necessary and sufficient conditions for f(z) to be

analytic (without proof),

4.2 Cauchy -Riemann equations in cartesian coordinates (without proof)

4.3 Milne -Thoms on method to determine analytic function f(z) when real

part (u) or Imaginary part (v) or its combination (u+v or u -v) is given.

4.4 Harmonic function, Harmonic conjugate and orthogonal trajectories

Self-learning Topics: Conformal mapping, linear, bilinea r mapping,

cross ratio, fixed points and standard transformations

07Hrs.

## Page 8

5

05 Module: Matrices:

5.1 Characteristic equation, Eigen values and Eigen vectors, Properties

of Eigen values and Eigen vectors. ( No theorems/ proof )

5.2 Cayley -Hamilton theorem (without proof): Application to find the

inverse of the given square matrix and to determine th e given higher

degree polynomial matrix.

5.3 Functions of square matrix

5.4 Similarity of matrices, Diagonalization of matrices

Self-learning Topics: Verification of Cayley Hamilton theorem,

Minimal polynomial and Derogatory matrix & Quadratic Forms

(Congruent transformation & Orthogonal Reduction) 06 Hrs.

06 Module: Numerical methods for PDE

6.1 Introduction of Partial Differential equations, method of separation of

variables, Vibrations of string, Analytical method for one dimensional

heat and wave equations. (only problems)

6.2 Crank Nicholson method

6.3 Bender Schmidt method

Self-learning Topics: Analytical methods of solving two and three

dimensional problems. 06 Hrs.

Total 39

Term Work:

General Instructions:

1 Batch wise tutorials are to be conducted. The number of student’sperbatch should be as per

University pattern for practicals.

2 Students must be encouraged to write at least 6 class tutorials on entire syllabus.

3 A group of 4 -6 students should be assigned a s elf-learning topic. Students should prepare a

presentation/problem solving of 10 -15 minutes. This should be considered as mini project in

Engineering Mathematics. This project should be graded for 10 marks depending on the

performance of the students.

The distribution of Term Work marks will be as follows –

1 Attendance (Theory and Tutorial) 05 marks

2 Class Tutorials on entire syllabus 10 marks

3 Mini project 10 marks

Assessment:

Internal Assessment for 20 marks: Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests First test based

on approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remaining contents (approximately

40% but excluding contents covered in Test I). Duration of each test shall be one hour.

End Semester Examina tion: Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be

proportional to number of respective lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum.

## Page 9

6

1 Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks

2 Question 1 will be compulsory a nd should cover maximum contents of the curriculum

3 Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from module 3

then part (b) will be from any module other than module 3)

4 Only Four questions need to be solved.

References:

1 Engineering Mathematics, Dr. B. S. Grewal, KhannaPublication

2 Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Erwin Kreyszig, Wiley EasternLimited,

3 Advanced Engineering Mathematics, R. K. Jain and S.R.K. Iyengar, Narosapublication

4 Advanced Engineering Mathematics, H.K. Da s, S. Chand Publication

5 Higher Engineering Mathematics B.V. Ramana, McGraw HillEducation

6 Complex Variables and Applications, Brown and Churchill, McGraw -Hilleducation,

7 Text book of Matrices, Shanti Narayan and P K Mittal, S. ChandPublication

8 Laplace transforms, Murray R. Spiegel, Schaum’s OutlineSeries

*****************

CEC302 - Mechanics of Solids

Semester -III

Course Code Course Name Credits

CEC302 Mechanics of Solids 4

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total

4 -- 4 -- -- 4

Theory Term

Work/Practical/Oral

Total Internal Assessment End

Sem.

Exam Duration

of End

Sem

Exam

Test-I

Test-II

Average

TW

PR

OR

20 20 20 80 3 Hours -- -- -- 100

Rationale

Civil Engineering structures are made using various engineering materials such as steel,

concrete, timber, other metals or their composites. They are subjected to force systems resulting

into axial forces, bending moments, shear forces, torsion and their c ombinations. Different

materials respond differently to these by getting deformed and having induced stresses.

Determination of stress, and strain experienced by structural elements when subjected to diverse

loads is prerequisite for an economical and safe design.

In this course, learners will understand the internal response behavior of material under

different force systems. The knowledge of ‘Mechanics of Structures’ will be foundation of

essential theoretical background for the courses like Structural Analysis and Structural Design.

Objectives

1) To compute the stresses developed and deformations of thin cylindrical shell and spherical

shell subjected to internal pressure.

## Page 10

7

2) To learn to represent graphically the distribution of axial force, shear force and bending

moment for statically determinate portal frames.

3) To study the circular shafts under the action of twisting moment.

4) To determine the principal planes and s tresses.

6) To compute strain energy in elastic members.

6) To learn the general theorems.

Detailed Syllabus

Module Course Modules/Contents Hours

1 Module Name -Stresses and strains in Thin Cylindrical and Spherical

Shells (03)

1.1 Thin cylindrical shell subjected to internal pressure; determination

of hoop stress, longitudinal stress, shear stress and volumetric

strain. 2

1.2 Thin spherical she ll subjected to internal pressure; determination of

hoop stress, shear stress and volumetric strain. 1

2 Module Name - Axial Force, Shear Force and Bending Moment

Diagrams for Portal Frames (06)

2.1

Concept of Axial Force, Shear Force and Bending Moment.

02

2.2 A.F., S.F. and B.M Diagrams for statically determinate 3-

member simple Portal Frames without internal hinges.

04

3 Module Name - Torsion in Circular Shafts (05)

3.1 Torsion in solid and hollow circular shafts; shafts with varying

cross sections.

3

3.2 Shafts transmitting and receiving power at different points. Stresses

in Shafts while transmitting power.

2

4 Module Name - Principal Planes and Stresses, Strain Energy (08)

4.1 General equation for transformation of stress, Principal planes

and principal stresses, maximum Shear stress, stress

determination by analytical and Graphical method (using

Mohr’s circle).

06

4.2 Strain energy due to axial force and impact loads in columns,

due to bending in beams, due to torsion of shaft.

02

5 Module Name - General Theorems (03)

5.1 General theorems: Betti’s and Maxwell’s reciprocal theorems,

principle of superposition. 02

5.2 Principle of virtual work, Castigliano’s theorem. 01

Total Hours 25

Contribution to Outcome

On completion of this course, the learners will be able to:

1) Evaluate stresses and strains in thin cylindrical and spherical shells subjected to internal

pressure.

2) Draw variation of axial force, shear force and bending moment diagram for statically

## Page 11

8

determinate portal frames.

3) Predict the angle of twist and shear stress developed due to torsion of circular shaft and

compute power transmitted by the shaft.

4) Locate principal planes in members and calculate principal stresses using analytical and

graphical method.

5) Calculate strain energy stored in the members due to elastic deformation.

6) Explain the general theorems.

Internal Assessment (20 Marks):

One Compulsory Class Test, based on approximately 40% of contents and another on 40% from

the remaining content shall be conducted. Average of the two will be considered as IA Marks.

End Semester Examination (80 Marks):

Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to the number of

respective hours mentioned in the curriculum.

1) Question paper will comprise of total six questions , each carrying 20 marks.

2) Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum.

3) Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from module

3 then part (b) will be from any module other than module 3)

4) Totally Four questions need to be solved .

Reco mmended Books:

1. Strength of Materials: S. Ramamrutham , Dhanpatrai Publishers.

2. Strength of Materials: R.K. Rajput , S. Chand Publications.

3. Mechanics of Materials: Vol -I: S.B. Junnarkar and H.J. Shah , Charotar Publications.

4. Strength of Materia ls: Subramanian , Oxford University Press

5. Strength of Materials: S.S. Rattan , Tata Mc -Graw Hill, New Delhi

6. Strength of Materials (Mechanics of Materials): R.S. Lehri and A.S. Lehri , S.K. Kataria

Publishers, New Delhi

7. Strength of Materials: Dr. V .L. Shah , Structures Publications, Pune

Reference Books:

8. Mechanics of Materials: James, M. and Barry J .; Cengage Learning.

9. Mechanics of Materials: Andrew Pytel and Jaan Kiusalaas , Cengage Learning.

10. Mechanics of Materials: Timoshenko and Gere , Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.

11. Mechanics of Materials: James M. Gere , Books/Cole.

12. Strength of Materials: G.H. Ryder , Mc-Millan.

13. Mechanics of Materials: E.P. Popov , Prentice Hall India (PHI) Pvt. Ltd.

14. Mechanics of Materials: Pytel and Singer , Mc-Graw Hill, New Delhi.

15. Strength of Materials: William A. Nash and Nillanjan Mallick , Mc -Graw Hill Book Co.

(Schaum’s Outline Series)

****************

## Page 12

9

CEC303 - Engi neering Geology

Course Code Course Name Credits

CEC303 Engineering Geology 4

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total

3 2 - 3 1 - 4

Theory Term

Work/Practical/Oral

Total Internal Assessment End

Sem

Exam Duration of

End Sem Exam TW PR OR Test-I Test-

II Averag

e

20 20 20 80 3 Hours 25 - 25 50

Rationale

Engineering geology is an applied geology discipline that involves the collection, analysis, and

interpretation of geological data and information required for the safe development of civil works.

The objective of this course is to focus on the core activities of engineering geologists – site

characterization, geologic hazard identification and mitigation. Through lectures, labs, and case

study examination student will learn to couple geologic expertise with the engineering properties

of rock in the characterization of geologic sites for civil work projects. Understanding of the

foundation rocks and structures present in them is of utmost importance for the safety and

stability of Civil engineering structures. The study also helps in the assessment of groundwater,

oil and gas and mineral resource evaluation.

Objectives

1. To acquire basic knowledge of Geology and to understand its significance in various civil

engineering projects.

2. To study minerals and rocks in order to understand their fundamental characteristics and

engineering properties.

3. To study structural geology for characterization of site, analysis and report geologic data

using standards in engineering practice.

4. To understand advantages and disadvantages caused due to geological conditions and

assessment of site for the construction of civil structures.

5. To study the suitability of rock mass for the construction of tunnels and assessment of rock

as source of ground water.

6. To study the control of geology over the natural hazards and their preventive measures.

## Page 13

10

Modul

e Course Modules / Contents Periods

1 Introduction & Physical Geology 3

1.1 Branches of geology useful to civil engineering, Importance of

geological studies in various civil engineering Projects.

1.2 Internal structure of the Earth and use of seismic waves in

understanding the interior of the earth.

Theory of Plate Tectonics.

1.3 Weathering and its types, engineering consideration of weathering

2 Mineralogy and Petrology 5

2.1 Identification of minerals with the help of physical properties, rock

forming minerals, study of common ore minerals.

2.2 Igneous Petrology - Mode of formation, Texture (Equigranular,

Porphyritic, Poikilitic, Intergrowth), Structure (Flow structure,

vesicular and amygdaloidal structure) Classification (depth wise

and classification based on silica percentage), Engineering aspect

of Granite and Basalt.

2.3 Sedimentary Petrology - Mode of formation, Textures, Structures

(lamination, bedding, current bedding), classification, and

engineering consideration of sedimentary rocks.

2.4 Metamorphic Petrology - Mode of formation, agents and types of

metamorphism, classification (Foliated and non -foliated) and

engineering consideration of metamorphic rocks.

3 Structural Geology and Stratigraphy 5

3.1 Dip and Strike. Outcrop and width of outcrop. Inliers and Outliers.

Fold: Terminology, Classification on the basis of position of axial

plane and engineering consideration of folds.

Fault: Terminology, Classification on the basis of movement of

faulted bl ock and Engineering consideration of faults.

Joints & Unconformity: Types and geological importance.

3.2 Determination of thickness of the strata with the help of given

data.

3.3 General principles of Stratigraphy.

4 Geological Investigation, study of dam and reservoir site: 3

4.1 Required geological consideration for selecting dam and reservoir

site. Favorable & unfavorable conditions in different types of

rocks in presence of various structural features, precautions to be

taken to counteract unsuitable conditions.

4.2 Rock Quality Designation and its importance to achieve safety

and economy of the projects like dams and tunnels.

5 Tunnel Investigation and Ground Water Control 3

5.1 Importance of geological considerations while choosing tunnel

sites and alignments of the tunnel, safe and unsafe geological and

structural conditions.

5.3 Sources, zones, water table, unconfined, confined and Perched

water tables. Factors controlling water bearing capacity of rocks,

Cone of Depression and its use in Civil engineering.

## Page 14

11

6 Geological Disasters and Control Measures 2

6.1 Landslides -Types, causes and preventive measures for landslides.

6.2 Volcano - Central type and fissure type, products of volcano.

6.3 Earthquake - Causes, Terminology, Earthquake waves, and

Preventive measures for structures constructed in Earthquake prone

area.

Contribution to Outcome

On completion of this course, the students will be able to:

⚫ Explain the concepts of Geology and its application for safe, stable and economic design of

any civil engineering structure.

⚫ Interpret the lithological characters of the rock specimen and distinguish them on the basis

of studied parameters.

⚫ Describe the structural elements of the rocks and implement the knowledge for collection

and analysis of the geological data.

⚫ Interpret the geological conditions for the dam site and calculate RQD for the assessment of

rock masses.

⚫ Analyze the given data and assess tu nneling and groundwater conditions.

⚫ Interpret the causes of geological hazards and implement the knowledge for their prevention.

Internal Assessment (20 Marks):

Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests

First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remaining contents

(approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in Test I)

End Semester Examination (80 Marks):

Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of

respective lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum.

1. Question paper will comprise of total six questions , each carrying 20 marks.

2. Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum

3. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from

module 3 then part (b) will be from any module other than module 3)

4. Only Four questions need to be solved .

Recommended Books:

1. Text book of Engineering Geology: N. Chenna, Kesavulu, Mc -Millan.

2. Text book of Engineering and General Geo logy, 8th edition (2010): Parbin Singh, S K

Kataria & Sons.

3. Text book of Engineering Geology: P. K. Mukerjee, Asia.

4. Text book of Engineering Geology: Dr. R. B. Gupte, Pune Vidyarthi Griha

Prakashan, Pune.

## Page 15

12

5. Principles of Engineering Geology: K. M. Banger.

Reference Books:

1. A Principles of Physical Geology: Arthur Homes, Thomas Nelson Publications,

London.

2. Structural Geology, 3rd edition (2010): Marland P. Billings, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd.

New Delhi

3. Earth Revealed, Physical Geology: David McGeeary and Charles C. Plummer

4. Principles of Geomorphology: William D. Thornbury, John Wiley Publications, New

York.

5. Geology for Civil Engineering: A. C. McLean, C.D. Gribble, George Allen &

UnwinLondon.

6. Engineer ing Geology: A Parthsarathy, V. Panchapakesan, R Nagarajan, Wiley India

2013.

****************

CEC304 - Architectural Planning & Design of Buildings

Course Code Course Name Credits

CEC304 Architectural Planning & Design of Buildings 02

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total

02 - - 02 - - 02

Theory Term

Work/Practical/Oral

Total Internal Assessment End Sem

Exam Duration of

End Sem

Exam TW PR OR Test-I Test-

II Ave

20 20 20 80 3 Hours - - 100

Rationale

Drawing is the language of Civil Engineers to communicate. Drawing is one of the most

essential documents as far as civil engineering is concerned. It provides guidance and

instructions to architects, engineers and workmen at field, on how to construct structures

according to the figures and dimensions shown in the drawing. Approved drawings are also

essential for the estimation of cost and materials; as well as a very important contract document.

Objectives

1) To remember and recall the intricate details of building design and drawing.

2) To gain an understanding of the basic concepts of building design and drawing.

3) To learn how to apply professional ethics and act responsibly pertaining to the norms of

building desig n and drawing practices, rules, regulation and byelaws, Building codes

## Page 16

13

4) To identify, analyze, research literate and solve complex building design and drawing

problems.

5) To have new solutions for complex building design and drawing problems.

6) To effectively c ommunicate ideas, related to building design and drawing, both orally as

well as in written format like reports & drawings.

Course Outcomes

At the end of the course learners will be able to:

1. Students will be able to design and draw plans, elevations and sections of public buildings

2. Students will be able to draw foundation plans and roof plans

3. Students will be able to draw perspective drawings

4. Students will be able to explain town planning

5. Students will be able to explain green buildings

6. Students will be able to summarize an overview of CAD

Modules Sub-Modules/Contents Periods

1. Principles and Codes of Practice for Planning and Designing of

Buildings

5 1.1. Study of National Building Code of India 2016:

a) Classification of Buildings

b) Development Control Rules (for Public Buildings)

1.2. Principles of Planning of Public Buildings (School or Hospital)

1.3. Planning and Designing of Public Buildings (School or Hospital)

1.4. Sun Path Diagram, Wind Rose Diagram and Sun Shading Devices

1.5. Principles of Architectural Planning

2. Components of Buildings

2 2.1. Types of Foundations and Foundation Plan

2.2. Types of Roofs and Roof Plan (for flat roof only)

3. Perspective Drawings

2 3.1. Introduction to Perspective Drawings

3.2. Two Point Perspective Drawing

4. Town Planning

2 4.1. Objectives and Principles of Town Planning

4.2. Master plan, Redevelopment of Buildings, Slum Rehabilitation

5. Green Buildings

1 5.1. Introduction and Overview

5.2. Green Building Rating System – LEED, TERI, GRIHA, IGBC (any

one)

6. Computer Aided Drawing 3

6.1 Introduction and Overview of any one professional CAD software

6.2 Study and demonstration of any one of the professional CAD

software’s

Theory Examination:

1) Only 4 questions (out of 6) need to be attempted.

2) Question no. 1 will be compulsory and based on the drawing work of any one building,

may be residential or publi c building.. Some questions from the remaining may be on

Theory portion.

## Page 17

14

3) 4. Any 3 out of the remaining 5 questions need to be attempted.

4) In question paper, weightage of each module maybe approximately proportional to the

number of lecture hours assigned to it in the syllabus.

Internal Assessment:

There will be Two class tests (to be referred to as an ‘ Internal Assessment’ ) to be conducted in

the semester. The first internal assessment (IA -I) will be conducted in the mid of the semester

based on the 50% of the syllabus. It will be of 20 marks. Similarly, the second internal assessment

(IA-II) will be conducted at the end of the semester and it will be based on next 50% of the

syllabus. It will be of 20 marks. Lastly, the average of the marks scored by the students in both

the Internal Assessment will be considered. Duration of both the IA examination will be of one

hour dura tion, respectively. Civil Engineering Drawing (including Architectural aspect) by M.

Chakraborti (Monojit Chakraborti Publications, Kolkata)

Recommended Books

1) Planning and Designing Buildings by Y. S. Sane (Modern Publication House, Pune)

2) Building Drawing and Detailing by B.T.S. Prabhu, K.V. Paul and C. V. Vijayan (SPADES

Publication, Calicut)

3) Building Planning by Gurucharan Singh (Standard Publishers & Distributors, New Delhi)

References:

1) IS 962: 1989 – Code of Practice for Architectural and Building Drawings.

2) National Building Code of India – 2005 (NBC 2005)

3) Development Control Regulations for Mumbai Metropolitan Region for 2016 – 2036

(https://mmrda.maharashtra.gov.in )

4) Development Control Regu lations for Navi Mumbai Municipal Corporation – 1994

(https://www.nmmc.gov.in/development -control -regulations )

5) Development Plan and Control Regulation KDMC, https://mmrda.maharashtra.g ov.in

Reference Codes:

1) National Building Code of India, 2005

2) IS 779 -1978 Specification for Water Meter

3) IS 909 -1975 Specification for Fire Hydrant

4) IS 1172 -1983 Code of Basic Requirement for Water Supply, Drainage & Sanitation

5) IS 1742 -1983 Code of Practice f or Building Drainage

*******

## Page 18

15

CEC305 - Fluid Mechanics - I

Course Code Course Name Credits

CEC305 Fluid Mechanics - I 03

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total

3 - - 03 - - 03

Theory Term

Work/Practical/Oral Tota

l Internal Assessment End

Sem

Exam Duration of

End Sem Exam TW PR OR Test-I Test-

II Averag

e

20 20 20 80 03 Hours - - - 100

Rationale

The concept of fluid mechanics in civil engineering is essential to understand the processes and

science offluids. The course deals with the basic concepts and principles in hydrostatics, hydro

kinematics andhydrodynamics with their applications in fluid f low problems.

Objectives

The students will be able to learn:

1. The properties & types of fluids, units and dimensions

2. Principle of buoyancy and stability of floating body

3. Kinematic and Dynamic behavior through various laws of fluids like continuity, Euler’s,

Bernoulli’s equations.

4. Importance of fluid flow and various velocity measuring and discharge measuring devices.

5. The basic difference between in -compressible and compressible flow, Propagation of

pressure waves and stagnation points.

Detailed Syllabus

Module Course Modules / Contents Periods

1 Properties of Fluids - 02

1.1 Types of fluids, and introduction to real life applications.

2 Buoyancy and flotation: 04

2.1 Archimedes principle, Meta -Centre, metacentric height,

Stability of floating and submerged bodies, determination of

metacentric height, Experimental and analytical methods,

metacentric height for floating bodies containing liquid.

3 Fluid Kinematics 06

3.1 Types of fluid flow, description of flow pattern, Lagrangian

methods, Eulerian method, continuity equation, velocity and

## Page 19

16

acceleration of fluid particles. Stream line, Equipotential line,

flow net and its uses.

4 Fluid Dynamics 06

4.1 Forces acting on fluid in motion, Navier Stokes Equation,

Euler’s Equation of motion, Integration of Euler’s equations of

motion, Bernoulli’s Theorem (Numerical Only), Practical

applications of Bernoulli’s Equation to Venturimeter, Orifice

meter, pitot tub e.

5 Compressible flow 04

5.1 Basic equation of flow (elementary study), velocity of sound or

pressure wave in a fluid, Mach number, propagation of pressure

waves, area -velocity relationship, Stagnation properties.

Contribution to Outcome

Upon completion of the course, students shall have ability to:

1) Describe various properties of fluids and types of flow

2) Determine the pressure difference in pipe flows, application of Continuity equation and

Bernoulli’s theorem to determine velocity and discharg e

3) Apply hydrostatic and dynamic solutions for fluid flow applications

4) Analyse the stability of floating bodies

5) Apply the working concepts of various devices to measure the flow through pipes and

channels

6) Explain the compressible flow, propagation of pr essure waves and stagnation properties

Internal Assessment (20 Marks):

Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests:

First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remainingcontents

(approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in Test I)

End Semester Examination (80 Marks):

Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be prop ortional to number of

respective lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum.

1) Question paper will comprise of total six questions , each carrying 20 marks.

2) Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum

3) Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from module

3 then part (b) will be from any module other than module 3)

4) Only Four questions need to be solved .

Recommended Books:

1) Hydraulics and Fluid mechanics: Dr. P.M. Modi a nd Dr. S.M. Seth, Standard Book House,

Delhi

2) Theory and Application of Fluid Mechanics: K. Subramanian, Tata McGraw hill publishing

company, New Delhi.

## Page 20

17

3) Fluid Mechanics: Dr. A.K Jain, Khanna Publishers.

4) Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulics: Dr. S.K. Ukarande, Ane ’s Books Pvt.Ltd. (Revised Edition

2012), ISBN 97893 8116 2538

5) Fluid Mechanics and fluid pressure engineering: Dr. D.S. Kumar, F.K. Kataria and sons

6) Fluid Mechanics: R.K. Bansal Laxmi Publications (P) Ltd.

Reference Books:

1) Fluid Mechanics: Frank M. White, Tata McGraw Hill International Edition.

2) Fluid Mechanics: Streeter White Bedford, Tata McGraw International Edition.

3) Fluid Mechanics with Engineering Applications: R.L. Daugherty, J.B. Franzini, E.J.

Fennimore, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.

4) Hydraulics : James F. Cruise, Vijay P. Singh and Mohsen M. Sherif, CENGAGE Learning

India (Pvt.) Ltd.

5) Introduction to Fluid Mechanics: Edward J. Shaughnessy, Jr, Ira M. Katz, James P. Schaffer.

Oxford Higher Education.

_______________________*****___________________ ___

Civil Engineering Semester – III -LAB

CEL301 - Mechanics of Solids

Semester - III

Course Code Course Name Credits

CEL301 Mechanics of Solids - LAB 01

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total

- 02 - - 01 - 01

Theory Term

Work/Practical/Oral

Total Internal Assessment End

Sem

Exam Duration of

End Sem Exam TW PR OR Test-I Test-II Average

- - - - - 25 - 25 50

Objectives

1) To learn stress - strain behavior and physical properties of materials and to compute the

stresses developed and deformation of elastic members.

2) To study circular shafts under the action of twisting moment.

3) To study the bending stresses induced in the specimen.

4) To learn about the compressive strength of an engineering material.

## Page 21

18

Outcomes

Learner will be able to…

1) Evaluate stress - strain behavior of materials and assess the structural behavior by the virtue

of stresses developed and deformation of elastic members.

2) Analyze the material response under the action of flexure (bending).

3) Predict the angle of twist and shear stress developed due to torsion.

4) Evaluate the compressive strengt h of a specimen.

Term Work: Term work comprises of Laboratory work and assignments.

Laboratory Work: CEL301

Mechanics of Solids (Practical Performance)

Experiment

No. Name of the Experiment Duration

(Hours)

1 Tension test on circular Mild Steel rod 02

2 Compression test on timer block 02

3 Pure bending test on timber beam. 02

4 Torsion test on circular mild steel specimen 02

Assignments:

At least 1 assignment from each module as per the course instructor’s guidelines is to be written.

It is to be assessed during the laboratory hours. In order to avoid Copying/ repetition, course

instructor may give different assignments to different groups.

Mechanics of Solids

Assignment

No. Name of the Assign ment Duration

(Hours)

1 Stresses and strains in Thin Cylindrical and Spherical Shells 02

2 Axial Force, Shear Force and Bending Moment Diagrams for Portal

Frames 02

3 Torsion in Circular Shafts 02

4 Principal Planes and Stresses, Strain Energy 02

5 General Theorems

Important Websites:

1) http://www.iitk.ac.in/mseold/mse_new/facilities/laboratories/Material Testing Lab /

MSE313A.pdf

2) https://home.iitm.ac.in/kramesh/Strength of Materials Laboratory Manual.pdf

3)https://www.researchgate.net/publication/338139499_Me_8381 -

Strength_Of_Materials_Lab_Manual

Assessment:

• Term Work

## Page 22

19

Including both the Laboratory Work and Assignments, distribution of marks for Term Work shall

be as follows:

Laboratory work: 15 Marks

Assignments: 10 Marks

The sum will be multiplied by a factor of attendance between 0.5 (for poor attendance) to 1 (ve ry

good attendance).

• End Semester Oral Examination

Oral examination will be based on the entire syllabus.

****************

CEL302 - Engineering Geology

Course Code Course Name Credits

CEL302 Engineering Geology Lab. Practice 1

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total

- 2 - - 1 - 1

Theory Term

Work/Practical/Oral

Total Internal Assessment End

Sem

Exam Duration of

End Sem

Exam TW PR OR Test-I Test-

II Averag

e

- - - - 25 - 25 50

Objectives

Objectives:

• To acquire basic knowledge of Geological Lab practices and apply it for the safe

development of Civil Engineering works.

• To examine the mineral and identify their physical properties.

• To examine the rock sample and understand their fundamental properties for their

evaluation as construction and foundation material.

• To Study the drilling data and calculate RQD for assessment of rock masses for Civil

Engineering purposes.

Outcomes: Learner will be able to…

• Identify various rock forming minerals on the basis of physical properties.

• Explain the characteristics of Igneous, Sedimentary and Metamorphic rocks and assess

their suitability as construction material and foundation rock.

## Page 23

20

• Interpret the rock characteristics and comment on their suitability as water bearing

horizons.

• Calculate RQD and evaluate the rock masses for Civil Engineering Works.

A) List of Experiments

Module

Detailed Contents Lab

Sessions

/Hr

1 Study of Physical Properties of Minerals:

Identification of common Rock forming minerals on the basis of

physical Properties - Silica Group: Quartz and its varieties;

Cryptocrystalline silica: Jasper and Agate; Feldspar Group:

Orthoclase, Plagioclase; Carbonate Group: calcite;

2

2 Amphibole Group: Asbestos, Actinolite and Hornblende; Pyroxene

Group: Augite; Mica Group: Muscovite, Biotite and Talc; Element

Group: Graphite.

Identification of Metallic minerals: Galena, Pyrite, Hematite,

Magnetite. 2

3 Identification of rocks:

Igneous Rocks -Granite and its varieties, Basalt and its varieties 2

4 Sedimentary Rocks - Conglomerate, Breccia, Sandstone, Shales,

Limestones, Laterites. 2

5 Metamorphic Rocks - Schist, Gneiss, Slate, Marbles and Quartzite. 2

6 Calculation of RQD from the given data and assessment of rock

quality. 2

B) Assessment:

⚫ Term Work

Including Laboratory Work and Assignments both, Distribution of marks for Term Work shall

be as follows:

Laboratory work - : 10 Marks

Assignments - : 10 Marks

Attendance : 05 Marks

⚫ End Semester Oral Examination

Pair of Internal and External Examine r should conduct Oral examination.

## Page 24

21

CEL303 - Architectural Planning & Design of Buildings

Course Code Course Name Credits

CEL 303 Architectural Planning & Design of Buildings 01

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total

- 02 - - 01 - 01

Theory Term Work/Practical/Oral

Total Internal Assessment End

Sem

Exam Duration of

End Sem

Exam TW PR OR Test-I Test-

II Average

- - -

- - 25 - 25 50

@ For the course ‘ Architectural Planning & Design of Buildings , the oral examination

shall be conducted in conjunction with the sketching examination.

Rationale

Drawing is the language of Civil Engineers to communicate. Drawing is one of the most

essential documents as far as civil engineering is concerned. It provides guidance and

instructions to architects, engineers and workmen at field, on how to construct structures

according to the figures and dimensions shown in the drawing. Approved drawings are also

essential for the estimat ion of cost and materials; as well as a very important contract document.

Course Outcomes for Practicals

1. Students will be able to design and draw plans, elevations and sections of public buildings

2. Students will be able to draw foundation plans and roof plans

3. Students will be able to draw perspective drawings

Sr. No. Practical Periods

1 i) Developed plans, ii) elevation and iii) section (passing through

staircase and one sanitary unit) of (G+1) Public Buildings - RCC

Framed Structure 3

2 i) Foundation Plan and ii) Roof Plan of (G+1) Public Buildings - RCC

Framed Structure 1

3 Two – Point Perspective 2

## Page 25

22

Practical Examination (Oral and Sketching)

Practical examination will consist of sketching and oral examination based on the entire

syllabus.

Term Work:

Drawings:

1) Ground floor plan, first floor plan, elevation, section passing through at least one sanitary

unit & staircase, Site plan, Foundation Plan and details of one FOOTING, Roof

Plan ,schedule of opening and construction notes of a public building to be construc ted

as a (G+1) R.C.C. framed structure ( only Manual Drawing)

2) Foundation Plan and Roof Plan of Sheet 1

3) Two -Point Perspective Drawing

Assignment: Short notes on theory topics of syllabus (green building, town planning etc.)

Distribution of Term -work Marks:

The marks of term -work shall be judiciously awarded depending upon the quality of the term

work. The final certification acceptance of term -work warrants the satisfactorily the appropriate

completion of the required quality & quantity of work for the mini mum passing marks to be

obtained by the students. Broadly, the split of the marks for term work shall be as given below.

However, there can be further bifurcation in the marks under any of the heads to account for

any sub -head therein.

Particulars Marks

1 Drawing Sheet (Manual) 15 Marks

2 Assignments 5 Marks

3 Attendance 5 Marks

Total 25 Marks

Further, while giving weightage of marks on the attendance, following guidelines shall be

resorted to. 75% 80%: 03 Marks; 81% 90%: 04 Marks 91% onwards: 05 Marks (Consider

Practical attendance)

Recommended Books:

• Building Drawing with an Integrated Approac h to Built Environment by M. G. Shah, C.

M. Kale, S.Y. Patki (Tata McGraw -Hill Education)

• Civil Engineering Drawing (including Architectural aspect) by M. Chakraborti

(MonojitChakraborti Publications, Kolkata)

• Planning and Designing Buildings by Y. S. Sane (Modern Publication House, Pune)

• Building Drawing and Detailing by B.T.S. Prabhu, K.V. Paul and C. V. Vijayan

(SPADES Publication, Calicut)

• Building Planning by Gurucharan Singh (Standard Publishers & Distributors, New Delhi)

References:

## Page 26

23

• IS 962: 1989 – Code of Practice for Architectural and Building Drawings.

• National Building Code of India – 2005 (NBC 2005)

• Development Control Regulations for Mumbai Metropolitan Region for 2016 – 2036

(https://mmrda.maharashtra.gov.in )

• Development Control Regulations for Navi Mumbai Municipal Corporation – 1994

(https://www.nmmc.gov.in/d evelopment -control -regulations )

• Development Plan and Control Regulation KDMC, https://mmrda.maharashtra.gov.in

Reference Codes:

• National Building Code of India, 2016

• IS 779-1978Specification for water meter

• IS 909 -1975 Specification for fire hydrant

• IS 1172 -1983 Code of basic requirement for water supply ,drainage & sanitation

• IS 1742 -1983 code of practice for building drainage

****************

CEL304 - Fluid Mechanics - I

Semester - III

Course Code Course Name Credits

CEL304 Fluid Mechanics – I (Lab) 01

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total

- 02 - - 01 - 01

Theory Term

Work/Practical/Oral

Total Internal Assessment End

Sem

Exam Duration of

End Sem

Exam TW PR OR Test-I Test-II Average

- - - - - 25 - 25 50

Course Objectives:

The students will be able to learn:

1. The basic fluid mechanics concepts

2. Measuring pressure, velocity and discharge of fluid flow through pipes and channels

Course Outcomes:

At the end of the course, l earner will be able to:

1. Calculate the metacentric height

2. Verify the Bernoulli’s theorem

3. Determine the discharge coefficients

4. Measure fluid flow using various devices

5. Determine the hydraulic coefficients of an orifice

## Page 27

24

Module

Detailed Contents Lab

Sessions/ Hr

1 Determination of the Metacentric height of a floating body 2

2 Determination of coefficient of discharge of Venturimeter. 2

3 Determination of coefficient of discharge of Orifice meter. 2

4 Determination of coefficient of discharge of Notches (Rectangular

and Triangular notch). 2

5 To determine the value of coefficient of contraction, coefficient of

velocity and coefficient of discharge for the given orifice 2

Assessment:

Term Work

Including Laboratory Work and Assignments both, Distribution of marks for Term Work shall

be as follows:

Laboratory work : 15 Marks

Assignments : 05 Marks

Attendance : 05 Marks

End Semester Oral Examination

Oral examination will be based on entire syllabus.

Reference Books:

• Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines: R. K. Rajput, S. Chand and Company

• Hydraulics and Fluid mechanics: Dr.P.M. Modi and Dr. S.M. Seth, Standard Book House,

Delhi

• Hydraulics Fluid Mechanics and Fluid Machines: S. Ramamrutham, DhanpatRai Publishing

Company (P) Ltd -New Delhi

• Theory and Application of Fluid Mechanics: K. Subramanian, Tata McGraw hill publishing

company, New Delhi.

• Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulics: Dr. S.K. Ukarande, Ane’s Books Pvt. Ltd. (Revised Edition

2012), ISBN 97893 8116 2538

• Fluid Mechanics and fluid pressure engineering: Dr. D.S. Kumar, F.K. Kataria and sons

• Fluid Mechanics: R.K. Bansal Laxmi Publications (P) Ltd.

NOTE –

1: For Detailed Course Schemes, Course Objectives, Internal & External Assessment

process, End Semester Examination, Recommended & reference Books please refer

MU syllabus of Second year (C -Scheme / R -19) Civil Engineering.

2: Theory and Practical Examination will be strictly based on above compressed

syllabus.

## Page 28

AC -23/02/2021

Item No. – 6.11-10

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI

Bachelor of Engineering

in

Electrical Engineering

Direct Second Year (Sem. III) Admitted Students for the

current Academic Year 2020 -21(Only)

(REV - 2019 ‘C’ Scheme) from Academic Year 2019 – 20

Under

FACULTY OF

SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY

(As per AICTE guidelines with effect from the academic year 2019 –2020)

## Page 29

University of Mumbai, Electrical Engineering, Rev. 2019 ‘C’ Scheme

U

Program Structure for Second Year Engineering

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI

(With Effect from 2020 -2021 )

Semester I II

Course

Code Course Name Teaching Scheme

(Contact Hours) Credits Assigned

Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total

EEC301 Engineering Mathematics -

III 3 -- 1 3 -- 1 4

EEC302 Electrical Circuit Analysis 3 -- 3 -- 3

EEC303 Fundamentals of Electri cal

Machine s &

Measurement s 4 -- -- 4 -- -- 4

EEC304 Electrical Power System I 3 -- -- 3 -- -- 3

EEC305 Analog Electronics 3 -- -- 3 -- -- 3

EEL301 Electrical Machines &

Measurement s Lab -- 2 -- -- 1 -- 1

EEL302 Electronics Lab -I -- 2 -- -- 1 -- 1

EEL303 Simulation Lab -I -- 2 -- -- 1 -- 1

EEL304 SBL-I: Applied Electrical

Engineering Lab -- 4 -- -- 2 -- 2

EEM301 Mini Project – 1A -- 4$ -- -- 2 -- 2

Total 16 14 1 16 07 1 24

Examination Scheme

Course

Code Course Name Theory

Term

Work Pract/

Oral Total Internal Assessment End

Sem.

Exam Exam.

Duration

(in Hrs) Test

I Test II Avg

EEC301 Engineering

Mathematics -III 20 20 20 80 3 25 -- 125

EEC302 Electrical Circuit

Analysis 20 20 20 80 3 -- -- 100

EEC303 Fundamentals of

Electrical Machines &

Measurement s 20 20 20 80 3 -- -- 100

EEC304 Electrical Power

System -I 20 20 20 80 3 -- -- 100

EEC305 Analog Electronics 20 20 20 80 3 -- -- 100

EEL301 Electrical Machines &

Measurement s Lab -- -- -- -- -- 25 25 50

EEL302 Electronics Lab -I -- -- -- -- -- 25 25 50

EEL303 Simulation Lab -I -- -- -- -- -- 25 25 50

EEL304 SBL-I: Applied

Electrical Engineering

Lab -- -- -- -- -- 50 -- 50

EEM301 Mini Project – 1A -- -- -- -- -- 25 25 50

Total -- -- 100 400 -- 175 100 775

$ indicates work load of Learner (Not Faculty), for Mini Project

## Page 30

University of Mumbai, Electrical Engineering, Rev. 2019 ‘C’ Scheme

U Semester -III

Course

Code Course Name Teaching Scheme

(Contact Hours) Credits Assigned

Theory Pract. Tut. Theory TW/Pract. Tut. Total

EEC301 Engineering

Mathematics -III 03 - 01 03 - 01 04

Examination Sche me

Theory Term Work/Practical/Oral

Total Internal Assessment End Sem

Exam Duration of

End Sem.

Exam Term Work Pract. Oral Test-I Test-II Average

20 20 20 80 03 Hrs 25 - - 125

Pre-requisite: Engineering Mathematics -I, Engineering Mathematics -II, Scalar and Vector P roduct:

Scalar and vector pr oduct of three and four vectors.

Course

Objectives The course is aimed :

1. To familiarize with the Laplace Transform, Inverse Laplace Transform of various

functions, and its applications.

2. To acquaint with the concept of Fourier Series, its complex form and enhance the

problem solving skills

3. To familiarize the concept of complex variables, C -R equations, harmonic functions, its

conjugate and mapping in complex plane.

4. To understand the basics of Linear Algebra a nd its applications

5. To use concepts of vector calculus to analyze and model engineering problems .

Course

Outcomes On successful completion of course learner/student will be able to:

1. Apply the concept of Laplace transform to solve the real integrals in e ngineering

problems.

2. Apply the concept of inverse Laplace transform of various functions in engineering

problems.

3. Expand the periodic function by using Fourier series for real life problems and complex

engineering problems.

4. Find orthogonal trajectories a nd analytic function by using basic concepts of complex

variables.

5. Illustrate the use of matrix algebra to solve the engineering problems.

6. Apply the concepts of vector calculus in real life problems.

Module Detailed Contents Hours

1. Module: Laplace T ransform

1.1 Definition of Laplace transform, Condition of Existence of Laplace transform.

1.2 Laplace Transform (L) of Standard Functions like 𝑒𝑎𝑡, 𝑠𝑖𝑛(𝑎𝑡), 𝑐𝑜𝑠(𝑎𝑡),

𝑠𝑖𝑛ℎ(𝑎𝑡), 𝑐𝑜𝑠ℎ(𝑎𝑡) and 𝑡𝑛,𝑛≥0.

1.3 Properties of Laplace Transf orm: Linearity, First Shifting theorem, Second

Shifting Theorem, change of scale Property, multiplication by t, Division by t,

Laplace Transform of derivatives and integrals (Properties without proof).

1.4 Evaluation of integrals by using Laplace Transformati on.

Self-learning Topics: Heaviside’s Unit Step function, Laplace Transform of Periodic

functions, Dirac Delta Function. 07

## Page 31

University of Mumbai, Electrical Engineering, Rev. 2019 ‘C’ Scheme

U 2. Module: Inverse Laplace Transform

2.1 Inverse Laplace Transform, Linearity property, use of standard formulae to

find inverse Laplace Transform, finding Inverse Laplace transform using

derivatives.

2.2 Partial fractions method to find inverse Laplace transform.

2.3 Inverse Laplace transform using Convolution theorem (without proof).

Self-learning Topics: Applica tions to solve initial and boundary value problems

involving ordinary differential equations. 06

3. Module: Fourier Series:

3.1 Dirichlet’s conditions, Definition of Fourier series and Parseval’s Identity

(without proof).

3.2 Fourier series of periodic function with period 2𝜋 and 2l.

3.3 Fourier series of even and odd functions.

3.4 Half range Sine and Cosine Series.

Self-learning Topics: Complex form of Fourier Series, Orthogonal and orthonormal

set of functions. Fourier Transform. 07

4. Module: Complex Variables:

4.1 Function f(z) of complex variable, limit, continuity and differentiability of

f(z)Analytic function, necessary and sufficient conditions for f(z) to be analytic

(without proof).

4.2 Cauchy -Riemann equ ations in cartesian coordinates (without proof).

4.3 Milne -Thomson method to determine analytic function f(z)when real part (u) or

Imaginary part (v) or its combination (u+v or u -v) is given.

4.4 Harmonic function, Harmonic conjugate and orthogonal t rajectories

Self-learning Topics: Conformal mapping, linear, bilinear mapping, cross ratio,

fixed points and standard transformations. 07

5. Module: Linear Algebra: Matrix Theory

5.1 Characteristic equation, Eigen values and Eigen vec tors, Example based on

properties of Eigen values and Eigen vectors. (Without Proof).

5.2 Cayley -Hamilton theorem (Without proof), Examples based on verification of

Cayley - Hamilton theorem and compute inverse of Matrix.

5.3 Similarity of matrices, Diagonalization of matrices. Functions of square matrix

Self-learning Topics: Application of Matrix Theory in machine learning and google

page rank algorithms, derogatory and non -derogatory matrices . 06

6. Module: Vector Differentiation and Integra l

6.1 Vector differentiation : Basics of Gradien t, Divergence and Curl (Without Proof)

6.2 Properties of vector field: Solenoidal and irr otational (conservative) vector fields

6.3 Vector integral: Line Integral, Green’s theorem in a plane (With out Proof),

Stokes’ theorem (Without Proof) only evaluation.

Self-learning Topics: Gauss’ divergence Theorem and applications of Vector

calculus. 06

Term Work:

General Instructions:

1. Students must be encouraged to write at least 6 class tutori als on entire syllabus.

2. A group of 4 -6 students should be assigned a self -learning topic. Students should prepare a

presentation/problem solving of 10 -15 minutes. This should be considered as mini project in

## Page 32

University of Mumbai, Electrical Engineering, Rev. 2019 ‘C’ Scheme

U Engineering M athematics. This project should be graded for 10 marks depending on the

performance of the students.

The distribution of Term Work marks will be as follows –

1. Attendance (Theory and Tutorial) 05 marks

2. Class Tutorials on entire syllabus 10 marks

3. Mini project 10 marks

Asses sment:

Internal Assessment Test:

Assessment consists of two class tests of 20 marks each. The first class test (Internal

Assessment -I) is to be conducted when approx. 40% syllabus is completed and second class

test (Internal Assessment -II) when additional 40% (approx.) syllabus is completed. Duration

of each test shall be one hour.

End Semester Theory Examination:

1. Question paper will comprise of total 06 questions, each carrying 20 marks.

2. Total 04 questions need to be solved.

3. Question No: 01 will be comp ulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein 4 sub -questions of

5 marks each will be asked.

4. Remaining questions will be randomly selected from all the modules.

5. Weightage of each module will be proportional to number of respective lecture hours as

mentioned in the syllabus.

References Books:

1. Advanced engineering mathematics, H.K. Das, S. Chand, Publications

2. Higher Engineering Mathematics, B. V. Ramana, Tata Mc -Graw Hill Publication

3. Advanced Engineering Mathematics, R. K. Jain and S. R. K. Iyengar, Nar osa publication

4. Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Wylie and Barret, Tata Mc -Graw Hill.

5. Theory and Problems of Fourier Analysis with applications to BVP, Murray Spiegel,

Schaum’s Outline Series

6. Vector Analysis Murry R. Spiegel, Schaum’s outline series, Mc -Graw Hill Publication

7. Beginning Linear Algebra, Seymour Lipschutz, Schaum’s outline series, Mc -Graw Hill

Publication

8. Higher Engineering Mathematics, Dr. B. S. Grewal, Khanna Publication

********************************************************************

## Page 33

University of Mumbai, Electrical Engineering, Rev. 2019 ‘C’ Scheme

U Semester -III

Course

Code Course Name Teaching Scheme

(Contact Hours) Credits Assigned

Theory Pract. Tut. Theory TW/Pract. Tut. Total

EEC302 Electrical Circuit

Analysis 03 03 03

Examination Scheme

Theory Term Work/Practical/Oral

Total Internal Assessment End Sem

Exam Duration of

End Sem.

Exam Term Work Pract. Oral Test-I Test-II Average

20 20 20 80 03 Hrs - - - 100

Course

Objectives

The course is aimed :

1. To impart the knowledge of various fundamental electrical theorems for anal ysis of

electrical circuits from application point of view.

2. To inculcate the problem solving and analysis skills in students.

Course

Outcomes Upon successful completion of this course, the learner will be able to

1. Apply network theorems for the analysis of electrical circuits.

2. Obtain the transient and steady -state response of electrical circuits.

3. Develop and analyse transfer function model of system using two port network

parameters.

4. Analyse time domain behaviour from pole zero plot.

5. Analyse electric al network using graph theory.

6. Analyse the effect of switching conditions on electrical networks using differential

equations and Laplace Theorem.

Module Detailed Contents Hours

1. First and Second Order Circuits :

Solution of first and second order differential equations for Series and parallel R -L,

R-C, R-L-C circuits, initial and final conditions in network elements, forced and free

response, time constants, steady state and transient state response. 06

2. Electrical Circuit Analysis Using Laplace Transforms :

The Laplace transform and its application in electrical circuit analysis, transient and

steady state response to step , ramp and impulse signals. 06

3. Two port parameters:

Open circuit, short circuit, transmission and hybrid Parameters, relationships

between parame ter sets, reci procity and symmetry conditions;

Self-learning Topics : Parallel connection of two port networks, cascade connection

of two -port networks . 04

4. Network Functions - Poles and Zeros:

Network functions for one port and t wo port networks, Driving point and transfer

functions, poles and zeros of network functions, restrictions on Pole and zero

locations for driving point functions and Transfer functions, time domain behavior

from pole - zero plot.

Self-learning Topics : Ladder netwo rk, General network. 04

## Page 34

University of Mumbai, Electrical Engineering, Rev. 2019 ‘C’ Scheme

U Additional Self- learning Topics : Electrical Circuit An alysis -With DC Dependent Sources: Mesh

analysis, Sup er mesh analysis, Nodal analysis, Super node analysis, Source transformation and Source

shifting. Superposition theorem, Thevenin’s theorems and Norton’s theorem and Maximum power

transfer theorem; Graph Theory and Network Topology: Introduction, Graph of network, Tree, Co -

tree, Loop incidence matrix, Cut set matrix, Tie set matrix and Loop current matrix, Number of possible

tree of a graph, Analysis of network equilibrium equa tion.

Assessment:

Internal Assessment Test:

Assessment consists of two class tests of 20 marks each. The first class test (Internal Assessment -

TEST -I) is to be conducted when approx. 40% syllabus is completed and second class test (Internal

Assessment Test -II) when additional 40% syllabus is completed. Duration of each test shall be one

hour.

End Semester Theory Examination:

1. Question paper will comprise of total 06 questions, each carrying 20 marks.

2. Total 04 questions need to be so lved.

3. Question No. 1 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus where in 4 sub -questions of 5

marks each will be asked.

4. Remaining questions will be randomly selected from all the modules.

5. Weightage of each module will be proportional to number of respe ctive lecture hours as

mentioned in the syllabus.

Books Recommended:

Text Books:

1. W H Hayt, S M Durbin, J E Kemmerly, Engineering Circuit Analysis, Tata McGraw -Hill

Education, 2013.

2. M. E. Van Valkenburg, Network Analysis, 3rd Edition, PHI Learning.

3. D. R oy Choudhury, Networks and System, 2nd Edition, New Age International.

4. M. E. Van Valkenburg, Linear Circuits , Prentice Hall.

5. C. K. Alexander and M. N. O. Sadiku, Electric Circuits , McGraw Hill Education, 2004.

6. K. V. V. Murthy and M. S. Kamath, Basic Circ uit Analysis , Jaico Publishers, 1999

Reference Books:

1. F. F. Kuo, Network Analysis and Synthesis , John Wiley and sons.

2. N Balabanian and T.A. Bickart, Linear Network Theory: Analysis, Properties, Design and

Synthesis , Matrix Publishers.

3. C. L.Wadhwa, Netw ork Analysis and Synthesis , New Age International.

4. B. Somanathan Nair, Network Analysis and Synthesis , Elsevier Publications.

NPTEL/ Swayam Course:

1. Course: Basic Electric Circuits By Prof. Ankush Sharma ( IIT Kanpur);

https:// swayam.gov.in/nd1_noc19_ee36/preview

2. Course: Basic Electrical Circuits by Prof. Nagendra Krishnapura (IIT Madras)

https://nptel.ac.in/noc/courses/noc20/SEM2/no c20-ee64/

## Page 35

University of Mumbai, Electrical Engineering, Rev. 2019 ‘C’ Scheme

U Semester -III

Course

Code Course Name Teaching Scheme

(Contact Hours) Credits Assigned

Theory Pract. Tut. Theory TW/Pract. Tut. Total

EEC303 Fundamentals of

Electrical Machines

& Measurements 04 - - 04 - - 04

Examination Scheme

Theory Term Work/Practical/Oral

Total Internal Assessment End Sem

Exam Duration of

End Sem.

Exam Term Work Pract. Oral Test-I Test-II Average

20 20 20 80 03 Hrs - - - 100

Course

Objectives The course is aimed :

1. To study the c oncepts of magnetism and e nergy conversion.

2. To familiarize with the operational characteristics of DC machines and their

applications.

3. To learn the w orking principles of various analog and digital instruments & devices used

for measurement of the various electrical and electronic p arameters.

Course

Outcomes Upon successful completion of this course, the learner will be able to:

1. Illustrate the principle of energy conversion in single and double excited machines.

2. Understand and analyze the significance of the DC machines performanc e

parameters.

3. Implement various starting methods and speed control methods for DC machines

applications

4. Evaluate the working of various sensors, transducers and analog / digital instruments

used in electrical and electronic measurements.

5. Analyze the use a nd performance of bridges used in electrical and electronic

measurements.

6. Illustrate the need for extension of range of meters and calibration in instruments.

Module Detailed Contents Hours

1 Electromechanical Energy Conversion:

Principle, Energy stored in magnetic field, Field and co energy, Force and torque

equations, Torque in singly and doubly excited systems, Magnetic field in rotating

machines, Rotating MMF wave Leakage flux and magnetic saturation.

Self-learning Topics : MMF in distributed windings Winding inductance 06

2 DC Machines:

Review of construction and components of DC machine ; Characteristics of DC

generators and motors (s peed – torque and performance); B raking methods, Losses

and efficiency, Swinburne’s, Hopkinson’s and Ret ardation tests; 05

3 Potentiometers, Bridges and Transducers:

Potentiometers : Basic potentiometer circuit;

Bridges : Wheatstone, Kelvin’s double bridge, Maxwell’s bridge, Schering Bridge, Q

meter.

Transducers: Class ification of transducers, Hall effect, Optical and digital

transducers.

05

## Page 36

University of Mumbai, Electrical Engineering, Rev. 2019 ‘C’ Scheme

U Basic requirements of signal conditioning circuits. Amplifier, Filter, and linearization

circuit.

Self-learning Topics : Hay’s bridge, Anderson’s b ridge , velocit y, force and torque

measurement .

4 Digital Measurements:

Advantages of digital meters over analog meters, Resolution & sensitivity of digital

meters, Working principles of digital V oltmeter and Ammeter,

Working principles and features of Digital Tachometer and Digital Megger

Self-learning Topics : Multi -meter ; Digital Storage O scilloscope ; Introduction to

MEMS (micro -electromechanical systems) technology and their applications in

electrical and automotive domain . 06

Assessment:

Internal Assessment Test:

Assessment co nsists of two class tests of 20 marks each. The first class test (Internal Assessment -

I) is to be conducted when approx. 40% syllabus is completed and second class test (Internal

Assessment -II) when additional 40% (approx.) syllabus is completed. Duration of each test shall

be one hour.

End Semester Theory Examination:

1. Question paper will comprise of total 06 questions, each carrying 20 marks.

2. Total 04 questions need to be solved.

3. Question No: 01 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein 4 su b-questions of 5

marks each will be asked.

4. Remaining questions will be randomly selected from all the modules.

5. Weightage of each module will be proportional to number of respective lecture hours as

mentioned in the syllabus.

Books Recommended:

Text Book s:

1. Bimbhra P. S., Electric Machinery , Khanna Publisher,

2. Bimbhra P. S., Generalized Machine Theory , Khanna Publisher,

3. S. K. Pillai, A first course on Electrical Drives, New Age Publication

4. V. K. Mehta, Principles of Electrical Machines, S Chand Publicat ions

5. AK Sawhney, Electrical & Electronic Measurements and Instrumentation , Dhanpat Rai & Sons

6. Helfric and Cooper, Modern Electronic Instrumentation and Measurement Techniques , PHI

7. H.S.Kalsi, Electronic Instrumentation , Third Edition, Tata McGraw Hill

8. Ramo n Pallaá S -Areny and J. G. Webster, Sensors And Signal Conditioning , Second Edition,

John Wiley & Sons, Inc.

Reference Books:

1. M. G. Say and E. O. Taylor, Direct current machines , Pitman publication

2. Ashfaq Husain, Electric Machines , Dhanpat Rai and Co . Publications

3. Alan.S.Moris, Principle of Measurement & Instrumentation , Prentice Hall of India

4. RS Sirohi & Radhakrisnan, Electrical Measurement & Instrumentation , New Age International

5. M. V. Deshpande, Electric Machines , PHI

6. Vedam Subramanyam, Electric al Drive -concept and applications , TMH Publication

7. Sabrie Soloman, Sensor s Handbook , Second Edition, McGraw Hill

NPTEL/ Swayam Co urse:

Course: Electrical Machines – I By Prof. Tapas Kumar Bhattacharya (IIT Kharagpur)

https://swayam.gov. in/nd1_noc20_ee60/preview

## Page 37

University of Mumbai, Electrical Engineering, Rev. 2019 ‘C’ Scheme

U Semester -III

Course

Code Course Name Teaching Scheme

(Contact Hours) Credits Assigned

Theory Pract. Tut. Theory TW/Pract. Tut. Total

EEC304 Electrical Power

System -I 03 - - 03 - - 03

Examination Scheme

Theory Term W ork/Practical/Oral

Total Internal Assessment End Sem

Exam Duration of

End Sem.

Exam Term Work Pract. Oral Test-I Test-II Average

20 20 20 80 03 Hrs - - - 100

Course

Objectives The course is aimed:

1. To learn basics of electrical power systems and its different components.

2. To acquaint knowledge of transmission / distribution line and its parameters.

3. To learn representation and performance evaluation of power systems.

4. To understand electric cable and earthing

Course

Outcomes Upon successful comple tion of this course, the learner will be able to:

1. Understand the power system and its components.

2. Categorize the ac transmission / distribution lines and understand the insulators.

3. Evaluate the parameters of different types of ac transmission / distributi on lines.

4. Draw the PU reactance diagram of a power system for analysis.

5. Analyse the performance of transmission lines.

6. Study the performance parameters of electric cable and earthing.

Module Detailed Contents Hours

1 Transmission / Distribution Syste ms and Line Parameters:

Definition of inductance, internal and external flux linkage of single conductor,

inductance of single phase two wire line, inductance of three phase three wire line with

symmetrical and unsymmetrical spacing, concept of GMR and GMD, inductance of

three phase double circuit line, inductance of bundled conductor lines, Capacitance of

transmission line, capacitance of single phase line, capacitance of three phase line with

symmetrical and unsymmetrical s pacing, effect of earth on transmission line

capacitance (single phase only)

Self-learning Topics : Basic structure o f power system: generation, transmission and

distribution; Types of AC Transmission / Distribution Lines : single phase two wire,

three phase three wire (symmetrical and unsymmetrical spacing ), three phase double

circuit, three phase four wire, concept of composite and bundle conductor . 10

2 Representation of Power System Components:

Per Unit (PU) system, advantage of PU system, PU impedance diagram, representation

of load (Numerical). 02

3 Performance of Transmission Line:

Ferranti effect, evaluation and estimation of generalized circuit constant (A BCD) for

short and medium lines.

Self-learning Topics : surge impedance loading, tuned power line . 03

## Page 38

University of Mumbai, Electrical Engineering, Rev. 2019 ‘C’ Scheme

U 4 Electric Cable and Earthing:

Electric Cable: Classification and co nstruction of cable , insulation resistance of

cable, capacitance of single core and three core cable, grading of cable, inter -sheath

grading, capacitance grading

Earthing: Earthing definition, step and touch potentials; neutral grounding and its

methods. 05

Assessment:

Internal Assessment Test:

Assessment consists of two class tests of 20 marks each. The first class test (Internal Assessment -

I) is to be conducted when approx. 40% sy llabus is completed and second class test (Internal

Assessment -II) when additional 40% (approx.) syllabus is completed. Duration of each test shall

be one hour.

End Semester Theory Examination:

1. Question paper will comprise of total 06 questions, each carr ying 20 marks.

2. Total 04 questions need to be solved.

3. Question No: 01 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein 4 sub -questions of 5

marks each will be asked.

4. Remaining questions will be randomly selected from all the modules.

5. Weightage of ea ch module will be proportional to number of respective lecture hours as

mentioned in the syllabus.

Books Recommended:

Text Books:

1. Fredrick T Morse , Power Plant Engineering, East-West Press Pvt Ltd

2. Mahesh Verma , Power Plant Engineering, Metrolitan Book C o Pvt Ltd

3. RK Rajput , A Text Book of Power System engineering, Laxmi Publication

4. George W Sutton -(Editor) , Direct Energy Conversion, Lathur Unive rsity, Electronic Series Vol -

3 McGraw Hill

5. D. P. Kothari, I. J. Nagrath, Power System Engineering , 3 Edition, Mc Graw Hill

6. B.R. Gupta, Power System Analysis And Design , S.Chand

7. J B. Gupta, A Course in Power System , S. K. Kataria & Sons

8. Mehta V.K., Principles of Power System , S Chand

Reference Books: -

1. Stevenson and Grainger, Modern Power System Analysis , 1 Edit ion, TMH publication

2. W. D. Stevenson, Elements of Power System , 4 Edition TMH

NPTEL/ Swayam Co urse:

Course : Power System Analysis, By Prof. Debapriya Das (IIT Kharagpur)

https ://swayam.gov.in/nd1_noc19_ee62/preview

## Page 39

University of Mumbai, Electrical Engineering, Rev. 2019 ‘C’ Scheme

U Semester -III

Course

Code Course Name Teaching Scheme

(Contact Hours) Credits Assigned

Theory Pract. Tut. Theory TW/Pract. Tut. Total

EEC305 Analog Electronics 03 - - 03 03

Examination Scheme

Theory Term Work/Practical/Oral

Total Internal Assessment End Sem

Exam Duration of

End Sem.

Exam Term Work Pract. Oral Test-I Test-II Average

20 20 20 80 03 Hrs - - - 100

Course

Objectives

The course is aimed:

1. To understand the characteristics of diode, transistors and FETs.

2. To understand design of different biasing circuits of BJT and MOSFET.

3. To understand the functioning of Op -Amplifier and design of Op - amp based circuits.

4. To understand the functioning of linear voltage regulators and IC 555.

Course

Outcomes Upon successful completion of this course, the learner will be able to :

1. Analyze the performance of various rectifiers and filter circuits.

2. Illustrate the use DC and AC parameters of BJT in analysis of amplifier circuits .

3. Apply the knowledge of MOSFET’s DC/ AC parameters in analysis of amplifier and

switching applications of MOSFET.

4. Understand the functioning of OP -AMP and design OP -AMP based circuits.

5. Illustrate the p ractical design aspect of regulated power supply circuits using linear

regulators.

6. Understand applications of commonly used special semiconductor devices.

Module Detailed Contents Hours

1 Bipolar Junction Transistor:

BJT as an amplifier

DC Circuit Analysis: Types of biasing circuits, load line , thermal runa way.

AC Circuit Analysis: Small sign al analysis of CE configurations with different biasing

network using H-parameter m odel; Amplification derivation of expression for voltage

gain, current gain, input impedance and output impedance of CE amplifiers .

Self-learning Topics : BJT’s hybrid -pi model and re Model ; Study of freque ncy

response of BJT amplifier. 05

2 Field Effect Transistor:

Types of FETs, basics of construction and working principle; MOSFET structure and I -

V chara cteristics . MOSFET as an amplifier

DC Circuit Analysis : Types of biasing circuits of MOSFET and region of operation.

Self-learning Topics : Small signal model of MOSFET CS amplifier, derivation of

expressions for voltage gain and output im pedance of MOSFET CS amplifier . 04

## Page 40

University of Mumbai, Electrical Engineering, Rev. 2019 ‘C’ Scheme

U 3 Operational Amplifiers:

Differential amplifier, direct coupled multi -stage amplifier, Block diagram of Op -amp,

ideal op -amp, non -idealities in an op -amp, Frequenc y response; Idealized analysis and

design of Inverti ng and Non -inverting amplifier.

Design of different Op -amp circuits - adder, integrator and differentiator .

Self-learning Topics : Comparator (ZCD, window comparator); Instrumentation

amplifier ( using 3 Op-amp); F irst order Low Pass Filter using op -amp; Oscillator (Wein

bridge), Square -wave generator; 05

4 Linear Voltage Regulator s and Timer :

Design of voltage supply using IC -7805 and LM317 (Numerical) .

IC-555- Functional block diagram, study of Mono -stable and As table Multivibrator

using IC555. 03

5 Special Purpose Semiconductor Devices :

Applications of rectifier diode and zener diode as clippers; Princ iple of operation and

applications of Schottky diode ; Basics of Opto -isolator.

03

Assessment:

Internal Assessment Test:

Assessment consists of two class tests of 20 marks each. The first class test (I nternal Assessment -

I) is to be conducted when approx. 40% syllabus is completed and second class test (Internal

Assessment -II) when additional 40% (approx.) syllabus is completed. Duration of each test shall

be one hour.

End Semester Theory Examination:

1. Question paper will comprise of total 06 questions, each carrying 20 marks.

2. Total 04 questions need to be solved.

3. Question No: 01 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein 4 sub -questions of 5

marks each will be asked.

4. Remaining questions will be randomly selected from all the modules.

5. Weightage of each module will be proportional to number of respective lecture hours as

mentioned in the syllabus.

Books Recommended:

Text Books: -

1. Neamen D.A., Electronic Circuit Analysis and Design , McGraw Hil l International.

2. Robert Boylestad and Louis Nashelsky, Electronic Devices and Circuits , PHI

3. Ramakant A. Gayakwad, Op-Amps and Linear Integrated Circuits , PHI, 2000

4. Millman and Halkias, Electronic Devices and Circuits , Tata McGraw -Hill.

5. A. S. Sedra and K. C. Smith, Micro -electronic Circuits , Oxford University Press, 1998.

Reference Books: -

1. David Bell, Electronic Devices and Circuits , Oxford University Press

2. Thomas Floyd, Electronic Devices , PHI

3. S. Salivahanan and N. Suresh Kumar, “ Electronic Devices and Circuits, TMH

4. P. Horowitz and W. Hill, The Art of Electronics, Cambridge University Press, 3rd Edition

NPTEL/ Swayam Co urse:

1. Course : Analog Electronic Circuits By Prof. Pradip Mandal (IIT Kharagpur)

https://swayam.gov.in/nd1_noc20_ee45/preview

2. Course: Analog Electronic Circuit By Prof. Shouribrata Chatterjee (IIT Madras)

https://nptel.ac.in/noc/courses/noc20/SEM2/noc20 -ee89/

Semester -III

## Page 41

University of Mumbai, Electrical Engineering, Rev. 2019 ‘C’ Scheme

U Course

Code Course Name Teaching Scheme

(Contact Hours) Credits Assigned

Theory Pract. Tut. Theory TW/Pract. Tut. Total

EEL301 Electrical Machines and

Measurements Lab - 02 - - 01 - 01

Examination Scheme

Theory Term Work/Practical/Oral

Total Internal Assessment End Sem

Exam Duration of

End Sem.

Exam Term Work Pract. /

Oral Oral Test-I Test-II Average

- - - - - 25 - 25 50

Course

Objectives To impart the knowledge on the following :

1. Practical underst anding of DC machines and their applications.

2. Working principles of various sensors, transducers and instruments used for measurement

of the various physical parameters.

Course

Outcomes Upon successful completion of this course, the learner will be able t o

1. Illustrate and analyze the performance of DC machines .

2. Demonstrate different speed control methods of DC motors.

3. Illustrate and analyze the working of various sensors, transducers and instruments used for

measurement of the various physical parameters .

4. Demonstrate the use of bridges for measurements of passive electrical components.

5. Understand and analyse the working signal processing circuits used in measurements and

instruments

Syllabus: Same as EEC303: Fundamentals of Electrical Machines and Measurem ents

Suggested List of Laboratory Experiments: Minimum Two from 1 – 9 and Two from 10 – 16, in all

minimum Four experiments need to be performed.

1. Open circuit and load characteristics of DC shunt generator.

2. Load characteristics of DC compou nd generator with differential and cumulative connections .

3. Load test on DC shunt motor.

4. Load test on DC compound motor.

5. Load test on DC series motor.

6. Speed control of DC shunt motor.

7. Retardation test of DC motor.

8. Swinburne's test on DC motor.

9. Hopkinson's test on DC motor.

10. Measurement of the medium resistance using Wheatstone bridge.

11. Measurement of the low resistance using Kelvin’s double bridge.

12. Measurement of inductance using Maxwell’s bridge.

13. Measurement of capacitance using Schering’s bridge.

14. Measu rement of R/L/C using a bridge technique as well as LCR meter.

15. Current Measurement using Shunt, CT, and Hall Sensor.

16. Measu rement of temperature using RTD/ Thermistor

17. Measu rement of Pre ssure using Pressure transducer.

18. Study of Signal Processing circuits use d for sensors/ transducers.

19. Range E xtension of meters used in electrical and electronic measurements.

## Page 42

University of Mumbai, Electrical Engineering, Rev. 2019 ‘C’ Scheme

U Any other experiments based on syllabus which will help students to understand topic/concept.

Note:

Students and teachers are encouraged to use the v irtual labs whose links are as given below The

remote -access to Labs in various disciplines of Science and Engineering is available. Students can

conduct online experiments which would help them in learning basic and advanced concepts through

remote experi mentation.

Virtual Lab Website Reference

1. http://vlab.co.in/broad -area-electrical -engineering

2. http://vlab.co. in/broad -area-electronics -and-communications

Term work:

Term work shall consist of minimum 08 experiments. The distribution of marks for term work shall be

as follows:

Laboratory Performance : 10 marks

Journal : 10 marks

Attendance : 05 marks

The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures the minimum passing in the term

Work.

Oral Examination:

Oral examination will be based on entire syllabus of EEC303: Fundamentals of Electrical Machines

& Measurements

## Page 43

University of Mumbai, Electrical Engineering, Rev. 2019 ‘C’ Scheme

U Semester -III

Course

Code Course Name Teaching Scheme

(Contact Hours) Credits Assigned

Theory Pract. Tut. Theory TW/Pract. Tut. Total

EEL302 Electronics Lab -I - 02 - - 01 - 01

Examination Scheme

Theory Term Work/Practical/Oral

Total Internal Assessment End Sem

Exam Duration of

End Sem.

Exam Term Work Pract. /

Oral Oral Test-I Test-II Average

- - - - - 25 25 - 50

Course

Objectives The course is aimed :

1. To understand the basic concept of various electronic devices, circuits and their application.

2. To develop ability a mong students to design and implement electronic circuits.

Course

Outcomes Upon successful completion of this course, the learner will be able to :

1. Identify the different types of semiconductor devices and demonstrate their applications in

electronic ci rcuits.

2. Analyse the performance of different types of rectifier with and without filter.

3. Determine the dc and ac parameters of various semiconductor devices.

4. Illustrate the frequency response of BJT/ MOSFET amplifier.

5. Understand the practical use of Op -amps in signal processing and waveform generators.

Syllabus: Same as that of Course EEC305 Analog Electronics

Suggested List of Laboratory Experiments: Minimum Four experiments need to be performed.

1. Use of diode as clipper.

2. BJT biasing network and stability analysis

3. BJT Input and Output Characteristics for CE configuration

4. Frequency response of BJT CE amplifier

5. Study of MOSFET characte ristics and calculation of parameters

6. Frequency response of MOSFET CS amplifier

7. Study of differential BJT amplifier

8. Design of OP -AMP based Inverting amplifier and Non -inverting Amplifier

9. Study of OP -AMP as Adder and Subtractor

10. Design of adjustable Voltage regulator based on IC 78XX

11. Design of adjustable Voltage regulator based on LM317

12. Study of V-I characteristics of Schottk y diode.

13. Study of opto -isolators

Any other experiment based on syllabus which will help students to understand topic/concept.

Note:

Students and teachers are encouraged to use the virtual labs whose links are as given below The

remote -access to Labs in various disciplines of Science and Engineering is available. Students can

conduct experiments which would help them in learning basic and advanced concepts through remote

experimentation.

## Page 44

University of Mumbai, Electrical Engineering, Rev. 2019 ‘C’ Scheme

U Virtual Lab Website Reference

1. http://vlab.co.in/broad -area-electrical -engineering

2. http://vlab.co.in/broad -area-electronics -and-communications

Term work:

Term work shall consist of minimum 08 experiments. The distribution of marks for term work

shall be as follows:

Laboratory Performance : 10 marks

Journal : 10 marks

Attendance : 05 marks

The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures the minimum passing in the term

Work.

Practical & Oral Examination:

Practical exam will be based on all the experiments carried out & Oral examination will be based on

entire syllabus of EEC305 Analog Electronic s.

The dist ribution of marks for practical/ oral examination shall be as follows:

Practical Exam : 15 marks

Oral Exam : 10 marks

## Page 45

University of Mumbai, Electrical Engineering, Rev. 2019 ‘C’ Scheme

U Semester -III

Course

Code Course Name Teaching Scheme

(Contact Hours) Credits Assigned

Theory Pract. Tut. Theory TW/Pract. Tut. Total

EEL303 Simulation Lab-I - 02 - - 01 - 01

Examination Scheme

Theory Term Work/Practical/Oral

Total Internal Assessment End Sem

Exam Duration of

End Sem.

Exam Term Work Pract. /

Oral Oral Test-I Test-II Average

- - - - - 25 - 25 50

Course

Objectives

The cou rse is aimed :

1. To understand basic block sets of different simulation platform used in electrical /electronic

circuit design.

2. To understand use and coding in different software tools used in electrical/ electronic

circuit design

Course

Outcomes Upon successful completion of this course, the learner will be able to :

1. Develop the skill to use the software packages to model and program electrical and

electronics systems

2. Model different electrical and electronic systems and analyze the results

3. Articulate importance of software packages used for simulation in laboratory

experimentation /research /industry by analyzing the simulation results.

4. Simulate electric machines/circuits for performance analysis.

Suggested Software Tools to be Used for Simulation L ab-I:

1. Students should be encouraged to use open source softwares such as SCILAB, LTSPICE , Texas

Instrument’s ‘ Webbench ’, Ngspice, Solve Elec etc. for carrying out the lab simulation listed below.

2. Use of Professional Licensed versions of softwares like MATLAB , Proteus , LabVIEW , NI

Multisim, PSpice, PowerSim, TINA etc. is also allowed .

3. Use of ‘Python’ platform for simulating components / circuit behaviour.

Suggested List of Laboratory Experiment: Minimum Four experiments need to be performed

from var ious subjects domain

1. Introduction to basic block sets of simulation platform.

2. Algorithm on matrix operations

3. Simulation of transmission line model

4. Algorithms to determine transmission line performance and parameters

5. Simulation of differential equations

6. Simulation to verify different network theorems with dependent and independent sources

7. Algorithm for generation of standard test signals

8. Simulation / Algorithms to draw the response o f electrical network for standard test signals.

9. Simulation / Algorithms to draw the pole zero plot of electrical networks

10. Simulation of DC motor performance characteristics

11. Simulation of various measurement bridges l Maxwell’s bridge, Hay’s bridge etc.

12. Design of OP -AMP based Inverting amplifier and Non -inverting Amplifier

13. Study of OP -AMP as Adder and Subtractor

## Page 46

University of Mumbai, Electrical Engineering, Rev. 2019 ‘C’ Scheme

U Any other simu lations / algorithms based on third semester syllabus, which will help students to

understand topic / concept.

Note:

Students and teachers are also encouraged to use the virtual labs whose links are as given below.

The remote -access to Labs in various disc iplines of Science and Engineering is available. Students can

conduct experiments which would help them in learning basic and advanced concepts through remote

experimentation.

Virtual Lab Website Reference:

1. http://vlab.co.in/broad -area-electrical -engineering

2. http://vlab.co.in/broad -area-electronics -and-communications

Term work:

Term work consists of minimum 08 simulation / algorithms from various subject domain s. The

distribution of the term work shall be as follows:

Simulation / Algorithm : 20 marks

Attendance : 05 marks

The final certification and acceptance of term -work ensures the minimum passing i n the term -work.

Oral Examination:

Oral examination will be based on all the laboratory experiments carried out in Simulation Lab -I

## Page 47

University of Mumbai, Electrical Engineering, Rev. 2019 ‘C’ Scheme

U Semester -III

Course

Code Course Name Teaching Scheme

(Contact Hours) Credits Assigned

Theory Pract. Tut. Theory TW/Pract. Tut. Total

EEL3 04 Skill Based Lab (SBL -I)

Applied Electrical

Engineering Lab - 04 - - 02 - 02

Examination Scheme

Theory Term Work/Practical/Oral

Total Internal Assessment End Sem

Exam Duration of

End Sem.

Exam Term Work Pract. /

Oral Oral Test-I Test-II Average

- - - - - 50 - - 50

Course

Objectives

The course is aimed :

1. To provide hands on experience to use laboratory instruments for testing and measurement.

2. To develop the ability to repair and maintain electrical equipment/ applianc es

3. To impart the knowledge of electrical installation on institute campus.

4. To impart the knowledge of Electrical fire and shock hazards safety.

Course

Outcomes Upon successful completion of this course, the learner will be able to

1. Demonstrate the effecti ve use of various electrical and electronic measuring lab

equipments.

2. Identify various electrical LV/HV substation, supply equipments and their network

connection

3. Identify and use different low voltage protective switchgears along with residential /

indust rial wiring practices.

4. Illustrate the understanding of Repair and maintena nce of common electrical appliances.

5. Handle Electrical fire and shock hazards safety challenges in real practice.

Module Detailed Contents Hours

1 Use of Lab Equipments:

Standard Lab Equipments : Multi -meter, Power Supply, Function Generator,

Tachometer, thermometer, clamp -on meter, DSO etc. ( Study two the equipments )

Special Measuring Equipments : True RMS multi -meter, Lux meter, Megger, LCRQ

meter, Power Meter, Thermal Ana lyser, Anemometer, Humidity Meter, Earthing

Resistance meter, Insulation Resistance meter etc. ( Study at least one such

equipments )

Lab Activities : Students should be trained to use these classes of lab equipments with

good expertise achieved. Students should clearly understand and differentiate the

situations in which use of each of these equipments is best suitable.

04

2 Electrical LV/HV Substation and Supply Equipments :

Electrical LV/HV Substation: RMU, Transformer, HV switchgear and panels, LV

switchgears and panels, HT metering, LT metering APFC panel, Backup DG sets, UPS,

Changeover switchgears, Feeder Pillar, So lar PV Installation. Single line diagram

(SLD), Supply Utility service: Electricity bills and details.

Students should study the actual electrical supply system on institute campus,

prepare SLD for the network and detailed report on actual ratings of the complete

system. 06

## Page 48

University of Mumbai, Electrical Engineering, Rev. 2019 ‘C’ Scheme

U 3 Residential/ Industrial Wiring and switch -gears

Wiring materials, selection of wire, conductor sizing, Cables and cable management

Estimation and costing of residential wiring ( Simple numerical on wiring of single

room ); Fire ret ardant wires.

Different switching and protection devices (MCBs/ Fuses/Relays), selection and sizing

connection of energy meter and distribution board, wiring standards (IS -732, section 4).

(Students should be given demonstration of real life devices and DB s in use ).

Students should perform following experiments (Any Two )

1. Identify different types of cables/wires, switches and their uses.

2. Identify different types of fuses & fuse carriers, MCB and ELCB, MCCB with

ratings and usage.

5. Wiring of simple l ight circuit for controlling light/fan point (PVC conduit wiring

and wiring accessories)

6. Wiring of fluorescent lamps and light sockets (6 A).

7. Wiring of Power circuit for controlling power device (16A socket)

8. Design of Staircase wiring / Go -down wiring / Tunnel wiring

9. Demonstration and measurement of power/energy consumption and repair

maintenance of electric iron/mixer grinder/ washing machine/refrigerator/ air

conditioner/water heater/geyser/single phase pump/exhaust fan. 06

4 Repair and Maintenan ce of Hou se-hold Appliances and Machines:

Testing, fault finding, Dismantling, assembling and testing after repairs of house hold

appliances like standard fan and regulator, BLDC fan, heater, geyser, mixer, washing

machine, microwave oven, LED lamps/tubes, Induction Cooker, Air cooler etc.

(Minimum one such appliances must be studied )

Troubleshooting of 1 ph and 3ph transformers and motors ( Any one) 04

5 Electrical Fire Prevention and Safety in Buildings :

Guidelines and charts for electrical fire prevention, role of electrical switchgear and

protection devices, Earth leakage and Earth Resistance measurements, Preventive

maintenance, Thermal analysis of electrical installations, Electrical Fire mitigation ;

Electrical Shock safety, symptoms and emergency first aid;

Self Study: Indian Electricity A ct and National Electrical Code

(Training of Electrical Fire Prevention and Safety must be provided to all the

students) 04

Term Work:

Term work shall consis t of minimum requirement as given in the syllabus. The distribution of marks

for term work shall be as follows:

Laboratory Performance : 30 marks

Journal : 10 marks

Attendance : 10 marks

The final certification and acceptance of term work ens ures the minimum passing in the term work.

Books Recommended:

1. J. B. Gupta, Electrical Installation Estimating & Costing, S. K. Kataria & Sons, 2009

2. Raina Bhattachraya, Electrical Design Estimating And Costing, New Age International ,

3. K B. Bhatia, Elect rical Appliances and Devices, Khanna Publications

4. K B. Bhatia, Fundamentals of Maintenance of Electrical Equipments, Khanna Publications

5. BIS SP 30:National Electrical Code

6. Electricity Act 2003

## Page 49

University of Mumbai, Electrical Engineering, Rev. 2019 ‘C’ Scheme

U Semester -III

Course

Code Course Name Teaching Scheme

(Conta ct Hours) Credits Assigned

Theory Pract. Tut. Theory TW/Pract. Tut. Total

EEM3 01 Mini P roject – 1A - 04$ - - 02 - 02

$ indicates work load of Learner (Not Faculty)

Examination Scheme

Theory Term Work/Practical/Oral

Total Internal Assessment End Sem

Exam Duration of

End Sem.

Exam Term Work Pract. /

Oral Oral Test-I Test-II Average

- - - - - 25 - 25 50

Course

Objectives

The course is aimed:

1. To acquaint with the process of identifying the needs and converting it into the problem.

2. To famil iarize the process of solving the problem in a group.

3. To acquaint with the process of applying basic engineering fundamentals to attempt

solutions to the problems.

4. To inculcate the process of self -learning and research.

Course

Outcomes Upon successf ul completion of this course, the learner will be able to :

1. Identify problems based on societal /research needs.

2. Apply Knowledge and skill to solve societal problems in a group.

3. Develop interpersonal skills to work as member of a group or leader.

4. Draw th e proper inferences from available results through theoretical/

experimental/simulations.

5. Analyse the impact of solutions in societal and environmental context for sustainable

development.

6. Use standard norms of engineering practices

7. Excel in written and oral communication.

8. Demonstrate capabilities of self -learning in a group, which leads to life long learning.

9. Demonstrate project management principles during project work.

General Guidelines for Mini Project 1A/ 1B

Students shall form a group of 3 to 4 students, while forming a group shall not be allowed less than

three or more than four students, as it is a group activity.

Students should do survey and identify needs, which shall be converted into problem statement for mini

project in consultation wit h faculty supervisor/head of department/internal committee of faculties.

Students hall submit implementation plan in the form of Gantt/PERT/CPM chart, which will cover

weekly activity of mini project.

A log book to be prepared by each group, wherein group can record weekly work progress,

guide/supervisor can verify and record notes/comments.

Faculty supervisor may give inputs to students during mini project activity; however, focus shall be on

self-learning.

Students in a group shall understand proble m effectively, propose multiple solution and select best

possible solution in consultation with guide/ supervisor.

Students shall convert the best solution into working model using various components of their domain

areas and demonstrate.

The solution to be validated with proper justification and report to be compiled in standard format of

University of Mumbai.

## Page 50

University of Mumbai, Electrical Engineering, Rev. 2019 ‘C’ Scheme

U With the focus on the self -learning, innovation, addressing societal problems and entrepreneurship

quality development within the students throug h the Mini Projects, it is preferable that a single project

of appropriate level and quality to be carried out in two semesters by all the groups of the students. i.e.

Mini Project -1 in semester III and IV. Similarly, Mini Project 2 in semesters V and VI.

However, based on the individual students or group capability, with the mentor’s recommendations, if

the proposed Mini Project adhering to the qualitative aspects mentioned above gets completed in odd

semester, then that group can be allowed to work on th e extension of the Mini Project with suitable

improvements/modifications or a completely new project idea in even semester. This policy can be

adopted on case by case basis.

Mini Project 1A/1B –General Guidelines for Execution

Design and Fabrication

a. Initial fabrication of the project by students can be done using standard devices/material/software

tools to verify the circuit functionalities Initial project fabrication and testing is expected to be done

by soldering/assembling on general purpose PCB/ Bakelite boards or suitable platforms required for

the electrical/electronic/digital components. Avoid the use of breadboards.

b. If essential, use of a simulation/ emulation software tools to test and verify the performance of the

circuit should be encourage d.

c. Students should prepare the proper drawings (electrical/ mechanical), schematics/ layouts of the

project.

d. For final implementation of the circuit, preparation of PCB (if any required) using suitable CAD tools

and fabricating the same in the lab is exp ected.

Devices/ Components/ Systems to be Used:

Students are encouraged to use passive components like resistors, capacitors, inductors etc. If any

specialize inductor is not readily available, the fabrication of the same in the lab should be encour aged.

Other components like: Transistors, diodes, voltage regulators, logic gates, Op -amps, general purpose

microcontroller, DC motors/ AC motors, sensors, actuators, relays etc. (Students may add more

components as per the requirement of project).

Testing and analysis of the Project

Students should test the circuit using suitable laboratory equipments like power supply, multi -meter,

CRO, DSO etc. In case of any debugging requirement, students should record the problems faced

during the testing and sol utions sought after for the fault in the circuit.

All the testing results must be well documented in the final project report verifying the functionalities

of the propose project.

Use of Reference Material/Literature :

Students are advised to refe r Application Notes, research publications & data sheets of various

electrical/electronic/digital devices from Texas Instruments, Microchips, International Rectifiers, ST

Microelectronics, Philips, NXP and many other manufacturers.

Self-learning and Skil l Set Development

Students should be encouraged to develop/ improve their understanding and skill sets by attending various

online/offline expert lectures / video lectures/ courses/ webinars/ workshops etc. to facilitate the smooth

execution of mini proje ct

1. Understanding passive components viz. resistors, capacitors and inductors from practical point of view:

types/ varieties, device packages, applications and cost.

2. Understanding semiconductor components viz. diodes, BJT and JFET/MOSFETs from practical po int

of view: types/ varieties, device packages, applications and cost.

3. Design principles of simple electrical / electronic circuits with some examples.

4. Selection of switches and circuit protection components.

5. Selection and sizing of wires and conductors.

6. Soldering Practice.

## Page 51

University of Mumbai, Electrical Engineering, Rev. 2019 ‘C’ Scheme

U 7. Heat -sinking and Enclosure design concepts

8. Overall workmanship while working on the project fabrication.

9. Use of different software tools for design and development of circuits

10. Use of standard as well as advanced laboratory equipments n eeded for testing of such projects

Suggested Application Domains for Mini Projects:

List of key application domains from where students are encouraged to derive Mini Projects topics:

1. Home/Office automation

2. Renewable Energy

3. Energy Conservation

4. Energy St orage

5. Battery Charging and Protection

6. Fire Safety

7. Electrical System Protection

8. Lighting Control

9. Wireless Power Transfer

10. Electrical Components Testing

11. Electrical Parameters Measurement

12. Non-conventional Electricity Generation

13. Laboratory Equipments

14. E-Mobi lity

15. Video Surveillance Systems

16. Robotics for Hazardous applications

17. Waste Management System 2.

18. Smart City Solutions

19. Smart Classrooms and learning Solutions

20. Smart Agriculture solutions etc.

21. Health/ Biomedical

Students can identify the mini pr oject topi cs either from above suggested domains or any other relevant

engineering domains .

Guidelines for Assessment of Mini Project:

Term Work

The review/ progress monitoring committee shall be constituted by head of departments of each

institute. The progress o f mini project to be evaluated on continuous basis, minimum two reviews

in each semester.

In continuous assessment focus shall also be on each individual student, assessment based on

individual’s contribution in group activity, their understanding and resp onse to questions.

Distribution of Term work marks for both semesters shall be as below;

o Marks awarded by guide/supervisor based on log book : 10

o Marks awarded by review committee : 10

o Quality of Project report : 05

Review/progress monitoring commi ttee may consider following points for assessment based on

either one year or half year project as mentioned in general guidelines.

One-year Mini P roject:

In first semester entire theoretical solution shall be ready, including components/system selection

and cost analysis. Two reviews will be conducted based on presentation given by students group.

First shall be for finalization of problem

## Page 52

University of Mumbai, Electrical Engineering, Rev. 2019 ‘C’ Scheme

U Second shall be on finalization of proposed solution of problem.

In second semester expected work shall be procurem ent of components /systems, building of

working prototype, testing and validation of results based on work completed in an earlier

semester.

First review is based on readiness of building working prototype to be conducted.

Second review shall be based on p oster presentation cum demonstration of working model in

last month of the said semester .

Half -year Mini Project:

In this case in one semester students’ group shall complete project in all aspects including,

Identification of need/problem

Proposed final s olution

Procurement of components/systems

Building prototype and testing

Two reviews will be conducted for continuous assessment,

First shall be for finalization of problem and proposed solution

Second shall be for implementation and testing of solution .

Assessment criteria of Mini Project.

Mini Project shall be assessed based on following criteria;

1. Quality of survey/ need identification

2. Clarity of Problem definition based on need.

3. Innovativeness in solutions

4. Feasibility of proposed problem solutions a nd selection of best solution

5. Cost effectiveness

6. Societal impact

7. Innovativeness

8. Cost effectiveness and Societal impact

9. Full functioning of working model as per stated requirements

10. Effective use of skill sets

11. Effective use of standard engineering norms

12. Contribution of an individual’s as member or leader

13. Clarity in written and oral communication

In one year, project , first semester evaluation may be based on first six criteria’s and remaining may

be used for second semester evaluation of performance of st udents in mini project.

In case of half year project all criteria’s in generic may be considered for evaluation of performance

of students in mini project .

Guidelines for Assessment of Mini Project Practical/Oral Examination:

Report should be prepared as per the guidelines issued by the University of Mumbai.

Mini Project shall be assessed through a presentation and demonstration of working model by the

student project group to a panel of Internal and External Examiners preferably from industry or

research organizations having experience of more than five years approved by head of Institution.

Students shall be motivated to publish a paper based on the work in Conferences/students

competitions.

Oral Examination:

Mini Project shall be assessed based on f ollowing points;

1. Quality of problem and Clarity

2. Innovativeness in solutions

3. Cost effectiveness and Societal impact

## Page 53

University of Mumbai, Electrical Engineering, Rev. 2019 ‘C’ Scheme

U 4. Full functioning of working model as per stated requirements

5. Effective use of skill sets

6. Effective use of standard engineering norms

7. Contrib ution of an individual’s as member or leader

8. Clarity in written and oral communication

Reference Books:

1. P. Horowitz and W. Hill, “The Art of Electronics”, 3rd Edition, Cambridge University Press, 2015

2. R. S. Khandpur, “Printed Circuit Board”, McGraw -Hill Ed ucation; 1st edition, 2005.

3. Simon Monk, “Hacking Electronic: Learning Arduino and Raspberry Pi”, McGraw -Hill

Education TAB; 2 edition (September 28, 2017).

Suggested Software T ools:

1. LTspice: https://www.analog.com/en/design -center/design -tools -and-calculators/ltspice -

simulator.html#

2. Eagle : https://www.autodesk.in/products/eagle/overview

3. OrCAD: https://www.orcad.com/

4. Multisim : https://www.multisim.com/

5. Webbench: http://www.ti.com/design -resources/design -tools -simulation/webench -power -

designer.html

6. Tinkercad : https://www.tinkercad.com/

7. Raspbian OS: https://www.raspb errypi.org/downloads

8. Arduino IDE: https://www.arduino.cc/en/main/software

Online Repository:

1. https://www.electronicsforu.com

2. https://circuitdigest.com

3. https://www.electronicshub.org

4. Github

*****************

## Page 54

AC -23/02/2021

Item No. – 6.11-11

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI

Bachelor of Engineering

in

Electronics Engineering

Direct Second Year (Sem. III) Admitted Students for the

current Academic Year 2020 -21(Only)

(REV - 2019 ‘C’ Scheme) from Academic Year 2019 – 20

Under

FACULTY OF

SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY

(As per AICTE guidelines with effect from the academic year 2019 –2020)

## Page 55

Programme Structur e for Direct Second YearAdmitted Students in Electronics Engineering of AY 2020 -21 only

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B. E. (ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING) 2

Program Structure for Second Year Electronics Engineering

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI

(With Effect from 2020 -2021)

SEMESTER III

Course

Code

CourseName Teaching Scheme

( Contact Hours)

Credits Assigned

Theory Practical

and Oral Tutorial Theory Practical

And

Oral Tutorial Total

ELC301 Engineering

Mathematics -III 3 -- 1 3 -- 1 4

ELC302 Electronics Devices and

Circuits -I 3 -- 3 -- 3

ELC303 Digital Logic Circuits 3 -- -- 3 -- -- 3

ELC304 Electrical Networks

Analysis and Synthesis 3 -- 1 3 -- 1 4

ELC305 Electronic Instruments

and

Measurements

3

--

--

3

--

--

3

ELL301 Electronics Devices and

circuits -I Lab -- 2 -- -- 1 -- 1

ELL302 Digital Logic Circuits

Lab -- 2 -- -- 1 -- 1

ELL303 Electronic Instruments

and

Measurements Lab -- 2 -- -- 1 -- 1

ELL304 Skill base Lab

OOPM

(Java)

--

4

--

--

2

--

2

ELM301 MiniProject – 1A -- 4$ -- -- 2 -- 2

Total 15 14 2 15 07 2 24

$ indic ates workload of Learner(Not Faculty), for Mini Project

## Page 56

Programme Structur e for Direct Second YearAdmitted Students in Electronics Engineering of AY 2020 -21 only

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B. E. (ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING) 3

Cours

e

Code

Course

Name ExaminationScheme

Theory Ter

m

Wor

k Practica

l

&Oral Tota

l

InternalAssessment EndSem

. Exam Exam.

Duratio

n

(inHrs)

Test

1 Test

2 Avg

.

ELC301 Engineering

Mathematics -III 20 20 20 80 3 25 -- 125

ELC302 Electronics

Devices and

circuits -I 20 20 20 80 3 -- -- 100

ELC303 Digital Logic

Circuits 20 20 20 80 3 -- -- 100

ELC304 Electrical

Networks

Analysis and

Synthesis 20 20 20 80 3 25 -- 125

ELC305 Electroni c

Instruments and

Measurement

s

20

20

20

80

3

--

--

100

ELL301 Electronics

Devices and

circuits -I Lab -- -- -- -- -- 25 25 50

ELL302 Digital Logic

Circuits Lab -- -- -- -- -- 25 25 50

ELL303 Electronic

Instruments and

Measurements

Lab -- -- -- -- -- 25 25 50

ELL304 Skill base Lab -

OOPM

(Java)

--

--

--

--

--

50

--

50

ELM301 MiniProject –1 A -- -- -- -- -- 25 25 50

Total -- -- 100 400 -- 200 100 800

## Page 57

Programme Structur e for Direct Second YearAdmitted Students in Electronics Engineering of AY 2020 -21 only

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B. E. (ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING) 4

Note:

1. Studentsgroup andloadof facultyperweek.

MiniProject 1 and2:

Students canformgroups withminimum 2(Two)and notmorethan 4(Four)

FacultyLoad :1 hourperweekperfourgroups

MajorProject 1 and2:

Students canformgroupswith minimum 2(Two)and notmorethan 4(Four)

FacultyLoad : InSemester VII– ½ hour perweek per projectgroup

InSemester VIII – 1 hour perweek perproject group

2. Out of 4 hours/week allotted for the mini -projects 1 -A and 1 -B, an expert lecture of at least one hour

per week from industry/institute or a field visit to nearby domain specific industry should be

arranged.

3. Mini -projects 2 -A and 2 -B should be based on DLOs .

## Page 58

Programme Structur e for Direct Second YearAdmitted Students in Electronics Engineering of AY 2020 -21 only

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B. E. (ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING) 5

Course

Code Course Name Teaching Scheme

(Contact Hours) Credits Assigned

Theory Pract. Tutorial Theory TW/Pract. Tutorial Total

ELC301 Engineering

Mathematics -III 03 - 01 03 - 01 04

Course

Code Course Name Examination Scheme

Theory

Term

Work Pract. Oral Total Internal Assessment End

Sem

Exam Test

1 Test 2 Avg of

Test 1

& 2

ELC301 Engineering Mathematics -

III 20 20 20 80 25 - - 125

Pre-requisite:

Engineering Mathematics -I, Engineering Mathematics -II, Scalar and Vector Product: Scalar and vector product

of three and four vectors,

Course Objectives: The course is aimed

1. To familiarize with the Laplace Transform, Inverse Laplace Transform of various functions, and its

applications.

2. To acquaint with the c oncept of Fourier Series, its complex form and enhance the problem solving skills

3. To familiarize the concept of complex variables, C -R equations, harmonic functions, its

conjugate and mapping in complex plane.

4. To understand the basics of Linea r Algebra and its applications

5. To use concepts of vector calculus to analyze and model engineering problems.

Course Outcomes: On successful completion of course learner will be able to;

1. Apply the concept of Laplace transform to solve the real integrals in engineering problems.

2. Apply the concept of inverse Laplace transform of various functions in engineering problems.

3. Expand the periodic function by using Fourier series for real life problems and complex engineering problems.

4. Find orthogonal trajector ies and analytic function by using basic concepts of complex variables.

5. Illustrate the use of matrix algebra to solve the engineering problems.

6. Apply the concepts of vectorcalculus in real life problems.

## Page 59

Programme Structur e for Direct Second YearAdmitted Students in Electronics Engineering of AY 2020 -21 only

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B. E. (ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING) 6

Module

No Contents Hrs.

01 Module 1: Laplace Transform

1.1 Definition of Laplace transform, Condition of Existence of Laplace transform.

1.2 Laplace Transform (L) of Standard Functions like

and

.

1.3 Properties of Laplace Transform: Lin earity, First Shifting theorem, Second Shifting

Theorem, change of scale Property, multiplication by t, Division by t, Laplace

Transform of derivatives and integrals (Properties without proof).

1.4 Evaluation of integrals by using Laplace Transformation.

Self-learning Topics: Heaviside’s Unit Step function, Laplace Transform of Periodic

functions, Dirac Delta Function.

7

02 Module 2: Inverse Laplace Transform

2.1. Inverse Laplace Transform, Linearity property, use of standard formulae to find

inverse Lap lace Transform, finding Inverse Laplace transform using derivatives.

2.2 Partial fractions method to find inverse Laplace transform.

2.3 Inverse Laplace transform using Convolution theorem (without proof).

Self-learning Topics: Applications to solve initi al and boundary value problems involving

ordinary differential equations.

6

03 Module 3: Fourier Series

3.1 Dirichlet’s conditions, Definition of Fourier series and Parseval’s Identity

(withoutproof).

3.2 Fourier series of periodic function with pe riod 2

and 2l.

3.3 Fourier series of even and odd functions.

3.4 Half range Sine and Cosine Series.

Self-learning Topics: Complex form of Fourier Series, Orthogonal and orthonormal set of

functions.Fourier Transform.

7

04 Module 4: Compl ex Variables

4.1Function f(z)of complex variable, limit, continuity and differentiability of f(z)Analytic

function, necessary and sufficient conditions for f(z) to be analytic (without proof).

4.2 Cauchy -Riemann equations in cartesian coordinates (without p roof).

4.3 Milne -Thomson method to determine analytic function f(z)when real part(u)

orImaginary part (v) or its combination (u+v or u -v) is given.

4.4 Harmonic function, Harmonic conjugate and orthogonal trajectories 7

## Page 60

Programme Structur e for Direct Second YearAdmitted Students in Electronics Engineering of AY 2020 -21 only

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B. E. (ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING) 7

Self-learning Topics: Conformal mappi ng, linear, bilinear mapping, cross ratio, fixed

points and standard transformations.

05 Module 5: Linear Algebra: Matrix Theory

5.1 Characteristic equation, Eigen values and Eigen vectors, Example based on properties

of Eigen values a nd Eigen vectors.(Without Proof).

5.2 Cayley -Hamilton theorem (Without proof), Examples based onverification ofCayley -

Hamilton theorem and compute inverse of Matrix.

5.3 Similarity of matrices, Diagonalization of matrices. Functions of square matrix

Self-learning Topics: Application of Matrix Theory in machine learning and google page

rank algorithms, derogatory and non -derogatory matrices .

6

06 Module 6: Vector Differentiation and Integra l

6.1 Vector differentiation :Basics of Gradient, Divergence and Curl (WithoutProof).

6.2 Properties of vector field: Solenoidal and irrotational(conservative) vector fields.

6.3 Vector integral: LineIntegral,Green’s theorem in a plane(Without Proof),Stokes’

theorem (Without Proof) only evaluation.

Self-learning Topics: Gauss’ divergence Theorem and applications of Vector calculus.

6

Total 39

Term Work:

General Instructions:

1. Students must be encouraged to write at least 6 class tutorials on entire syllabus.

2. A group of 4 -6 students should be assigned a self -learning topic. Students should prepare a

presentation/problem solving of 10 -15 minutes. This should be considered as mini project in Engineering

Mathematics. This project should be graded for 10 marks depending on the performance of the students.

The distributio n of Term Work marks will be as follows –

1. Attendance (Theory and Tutorial) 05 marks

2. Class Tutorials on entire syllabus 10 marks

3. Mini project 10 marks

Assessment :

Internal Assessment Test:

## Page 61

Programme Structur e for Direct Second YearAdmitted Students in Electronics Engineering of AY 2020 -21 only

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B. E. (ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING) 8

Assessment consists of two class tests of 20 marks each. The first -class test (Internal Assessment I) is to be

conducted when approx. 40% syllabus is completed and secondclass test (Internal Assessment II) when additional

35% syllabus is completed. Duration of each test shall be one hour.

End Semester Th eory Examination:

1. Question paper will comprise of total 06 questions, each carrying 20 marks.

2. Total 04 questions need to be solved.

3. Question No: 01 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein 4 sub -questions of 5 marks each will

be asked.

4. Rema ining questions will be randomly selected from all the modules.

5. Weightage of each module will be proportional to number of respective lecture hours as mentioned in the

syllabus.

References:

1. Advanced Engineering Mathematics ,H.K. Das, S. Chand, Publicatio ns

2. Higher Engineering Mathematics, B. V. Ramana, Tata Mc -Graw Hill Publication

3. Advanced Engineering Mathematics, R. K. Jain and S. R. K. Iyengar, Narosa publication

4. Advanced Engineering Mathematics,Wylie and Barret, Tata Mc -Graw Hill.

5. Theory and Problems o f Fourier Analysis with applications to BVP, Murray Spiegel, Schaum’s Outline Series

6. Vector Analysis Murry R. Spiegel, Schaum’s outline series, Mc -Graw Hill Publication

7. Beginning Linear Algebra, Seymour Lipschutz, Schaum’s outline series, Mc -Graw HillPubli cation

8. Higher Engineering Mathematics, Dr. B. S. Grewal, Khanna Publication

## Page 62

Programme Structur e for Direct Second YearAdmitted Students in Electronics Engineering of AY 2020 -21 only

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B. E. (ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING) 9

Course

Code

Course

Name Teaching Scheme Credits Assigned

Theory Practical

and

Oral Tutorial Theory TW/Practical

and Oral Tutorial Total

ELC302 Electronic Devices

& Circuits -I 03 -- -- 03 -- -- 03

Course

Code Course

Name Examination Scheme

Theory Marks Term

Work Practical

and Oral Total

Internal assessment End

Sem.

Exam Exam

duratio n

Hours - - -

Test

1 Test

2 Avg of

Test 1

and Test 2 - - - -

ELC

302 Electronic

Devices &

Circuits -I 20 20 20 80 03 - - 100

Course Objectives:

1. To deliver the knowledge about physics of basic semiconductor devices and circuits.

2. To enhance comprehension capabilities of students through understanding of electronic devices and circuits

3. To introduce and motivate students to the use of advanced microelectronic devices

4. To analyze and design electronic circuits using semiconductor devices.

Course Outcomes:

After successful completion of the course students will be able to:

1. Student s will be able to explain working of semiconductor devices.

2. Students will be able to analyze characteristics of semiconductor devices.

3. Students will be able to perform DC and AC analysis of Electronics circuits.

4. Students will be able to compare various biasing circuits as well as various configurations of BJT and

MOSFETs.

5. Students will be able to select best circuit for the given specifications/application.

6. Students will be able to design electronics circuits for given specifications.

## Page 63

Programme Structur e for Direct Second YearAdmitted Students in Electronics Engineering of AY 2020 -21 only

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B. E. (ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING) 10

Module

No. Unit

No, Contents Hrs

## Page 64

Programme Structur e for Direct Second YearAdmitted Students in Electronics Engineering of AY 2020 -21 only

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B. E. (ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING) 11

Text Books: 1. PN Junction Diode

2 1.1 Fermi level concepts, Basic Diode Structure, Energy Band Diagrams, drift

and diffusion current, junction capacitance.

2. Bipolar Junction Transistor 6

2.1 DC Circuit Analysis: biasing circuits, bias s tability and

Compensation, analysis and design of biasing circuits

2.2 AC Analysis of BJT Amplifiers: AC load line, small signal models: h -

parameter model, re model, Hybrid -pi model. AC equivalent circuits and

analysis to obtain voltage gain, current g ain, input impedance, output

impedance of CE, CB and CC amplifiers using Hybrid -pi model only.

3. Field Effect Devices 8

3.1 MOSFET: Construction, operation and characteristics of D -MOSFET and E -

MOSFET

3.2 DC Circuit Analysis: DC load line and regi on of operation, Common -

MOSFETs configurations, Analysis and Design of Biasing Circuits

3.3 AC Analysis: AC load line, Small -Signal model of

MOSFET and its equivalent Circuit, Small -Signal

Analysis MOSFET Amplifiers (Common -Source,

Source Follower, C ommon Gate)

4 Design of Electronic Circuits 4

4.1 Design of single stage CE amplifier

4.2 Design of single stage CS MOSFET amplifier

4.2 Design of full wave rectifier with LC and pi filter.

Total: 20

## Page 65

Programme Structur e for Direct Second YearAdmitted Students in Electronics Engineering of AY 2020 -21 only

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B. E. (ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING) 12

1. Donald A. Neamen, “Elect ronic Circuit Analysis and Design”, TATA McGraw Hill, 2nd Edition

2. Adel S. Sedra, Kenneth C. Smith and Arun N Chandorkar, “Microelectronic Circuits Theory and

Applications”, International Version, OXFORD International Students Edition, Fifth Edition.

Refe rence Books:

1. Boylestad," Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory", Pearson

2. David A. Bell, “Electronic Devices and Circuits”, Oxford, Fifth Edition.

3. Muhammad H. Rashid, “Microelectronics Circuits Analysis and Design”, Cengage

4. S. Salivahanan, N. Suresh Kuma r,“Electronic Devices and Circuits”, Tata McGraw Hill

5. Millman and Halkies, “Integrated Electronics”, TATA McGraw Hill.

Internal Assessment (IA):

Two tests must be conducted which should cover at least 80% of syllabus. The average marks of both the test will be

considered as final IA marks

End Semester Examination:

1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each of 20 marks.

2. Total 4 questions need to be solved.

3. Question No.1 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein sub questions of 2 to 5 marks will

be asked.

4. Remaining questions will be selected from all the modules

## Page 66

Programme Structur e for Direct Second YearAdmitted Students in Electronics Engineering of AY 2020 -21 only

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B. E. (ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING) 13

Course

Code Course

Name Teaching Scheme Credits Assigned

Theory Practical

and oral Tutorial Theory Practical

and oral Tutorial Total

ELC303 Digital Logic

Circuits 03 -- -- 03 -- -- 03

Course

Code Course

Name Examination Scheme

Theory Marks Term

Work Practical

and

Oral Total

Internal assessment End

Sem.

Exam Exam

duration

Hours -- --

Test

1 Test

2 Avg of Test

1 and Test 2 -- -- -- -- --

ELC303 Digital

Logic

Circuits 20 20 20 80 03 -- --

100

Course Pre -requisite:

Basic Electrical & Electronics Engineering

Course Objectives:

1. To understand various number system & codes and to introduce the students to various logic gates,SOP,

POS form and t heir minimization techniques.

2. To teach the working of combinational circuits, their applications and implementation of combinational logic

circuits using MSI chips.

3. To teach the elements of sequential logic design, analysis and design of sequential circuits.

4. To understand various counters and shift registers and its design using MSI chips.

5. To explain and describe various logic families and Programmable Logic Devices.

6. To train students in writing program with Verilog hardware description languages.

Course Outcome :

After successful completion of the course students will be able to ;

1. Perform code conversion and able to apply Boolean algebra for the implementation and minimization of logic

functions.

2. Analyse, design and implement Combi national logic circuits.

3. Analyse, design and implement Sequential logic circuits.

4. Design and implement various counter using flip flops and MSI chips.

5. Understand TTL & CMOS logic families, PLDs , CPLD and FPGA.

6. Understand basics of Verilog Hardware Description Language and its programming with combinational and

## Page 67

Programme Structur e for Direct Second YearAdmitted Students in Electronics Engineering of AY 2020 -21 only

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B. E. (ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING) 14

sequential logic circuits.

Module

No. Unit

No, Contents Hrs

## Page 68

Programme Structur e for Direct Second YearAdmitted Students in Electronics Engineering of AY 2020 -21 only

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B. E. (ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING) 15

Text Books:

1. R. P. Jain, M odern Digital Electronics, Tata McGraw Hill Education, Third Edition 2003. 1. Fundamentals of Digital Design

2 1.1 Review of Number System, Weighted code, Parity Code: Hamming Code

2. Combin ational Circuits using basic gates as well as MSI devices 2

2.1 Arithmetic Ripple carry adder, Carry Look ahead adder,

2.2 MSI devices: IC7483, IC74151, IC74138, IC7485.

3. Sequential Logic Design 6

3.1 Sequential Logic Design: Mealy and Moore Mac hines, Clocked synchronous state

machineanalysis, State reduction techniques (inspection, partition and implication

chart method) andstate assignment,sequence detector, Clocked synchronous state

machine design

3.2 Sequential logic design practices:MSI c ounters (7490, 7492, ,7493,74163, 74169)

andapplications, MSI Shift registers (74194) and their applications.

4. Logic Families and Programmable Logic Devices 4

4.1 CMOS Logic : - CMOS inverter,CMOS NAND and CMOS NOR, Interfacing

CMOS to TTLand TTL to C MOS.

4.2 Introduction to CPLD and FPGA architectures, Numerical based on PLAand PAL.

5. Introduction to Verilog HDL 6

5.1 Basics: Introduction to Hardware Description Language and its core features,

synthesis in digitaldesign, logic value system, da ta types, constants, parameters,

wires and registers.

Verilog Constructs: Continuous & procedural assignmentstatements, logical,

arithmetic,relational, shift operator, always, if, case, loop statements, Gate level

modelling, Moduleinstantiation statements.

5.2 Modelling Examples : Combinational logic eg. Arithmetic circuits,

Multiplexer,Demultiplexer, decoder, Sequential logic eg. flip flop, counters.

Total 20

## Page 69

Programme Structur e for Direct Second YearAdmitted Students in Electronics Engineering of AY 2020 -21 only

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B. E. (ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING) 16

2. Morris Mano, Digital Design, Pearson Education, Asia 2002.

3. J. Bhaskar, A Verilog HDL Primer, Third Edition, Star Galaxy Publishing, 2018.

Reference Books:

1. Digital Logic Applicat ions and Design – John M. Yarbrough, Thomson Publications, 2006

2. John F. Warkerly, Digital Design Principles and Practices, Pearson Education, Fourth Edition, 2008.

3. Stephen Brown and ZvonkoVranesic, Fundamentals of digital logic design with Verilog des ign,

McGraw Hill, 3rd Edition.

4. Digital Circuits and Logic Design – Samuel C. Lee , PHI

5. William I.Flectcher, “An Engineering Approach to Digital Design”, PrenticeHall of India.

6. Parag K Lala, “Digital System design using PLD”, BS Publications, 2003.

7. Charle s H. Roth Jr., “Fundamentals of Logic design”, Thomson Learning, 2004.

Assessment:

Internal Assessment Test:

Assessment consists of two class tests of 20 marks each. The first -class test (Internal Assessment

I) is to be conducted when approx. 40% sylla bus is completed and second class test (Internal

Assessment II) when additional 40% syllabus is completed. Duration of each test shall be one

hour.

End Semester Theory Examination:

1. Question paper will comprise of total 06 questions, each carrying 20 mark s.

2. Total 04 questions need to be solved.

3. Question No: 01 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein 4 sub -questionsof 5

marks each will be asked.

4. Remaining questions will be randomly selected from all the modules.

Weightage of each module wil l be proportional to number of respective lecture hours as mentioned in the

syllabus.

## Page 70

Programme Structur e for Direct Second YearAdmitted Students in Electronics Engineering of AY 2020 -21 only

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B. E. (ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING) 17

Course

Code Course

Name Teaching Scheme Credits Assigned

Theory Practical

and Oral Tutorial Theory Practical

and oral Tutorial Total

ELC304 Electrical

Network Analysis

& Synthesis 03 -- 01 03 -- 01 04

Course

Code Course

Name Examination Scheme

Theory Marks Term

Work Practical

and

Oral Total

Internal assessment End

Sem.

Exam Exam

duration

Hours

Test

1 Test

2 Avg of Test

1 and Test

2

ELC304 Electrical

Network

Analysis &

Synthesis 20 20 20 80 03 25 -- 125

Course Pre -requisite:

1.Basic Electrical Engineering

2.Engineering Mathematics I and II

Course Objectives:

1. To learn electrical networks and its analysis in time and frequency domain.

2. To un derstand synthesis of electrical networks .

3. To understand various types of filters .

Course Outcomes:

After successful completion of the course students will be able to ;

1. Explain basic electrical circuits with nodal and mesh analysis and apply network the orems.

2. Apply Laplace Transform for steady state and transient analysis.

3. Determine different network functions and solve complex circuits using network parameters.

4. Realize electrical networks for given network functions using synthesis concepts.

5. Design v arious types of filters.

## Page 71

Programme Structur e for Direct Second YearAdmitted Students in Electronics Engineering of AY 2020 -21 only

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B. E. (ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING) 18

Module

No. Unit

No, Contents Hrs

1. Analysis of Circuits 2

1.1 Analysis of coupled circuits: Solution using loop analysis.

2. Time and Frequency Domain Analysis of Electrical Networks 6

2.1 Time Domain Analysis of Electri cal Networks: Forced and natural response,

Initial and final conditions in network elements, Solution of first and second

order differential equations for series and parallel R -L, R-C, R-L-C circuits,

Transient and steady state response.

2.2 Frequency D omain Analysis of Electrical Networks: S -domain representation,

Concept of complex frequency, Applications of Laplace Transform in solving

electrical networks.

3. Two Port Networks 4

3.1 Two Port Parameters: Transmission and Hybrid parameters, relation ships

among parameters, reciprocity and symmetry conditions

4 Synthesis of Electrical Networks 6

4.1 Realizability Concept: Hurwitz polynomial, Concept of positive real function,

testing for necessary and sufficient conditions for positive real functio ns.

4.2 Synthesis of RC, RL, LC circuits: Concepts of synthesis of RC, RL, LC driving

point

functions, Foster and Cauer forms.

5 Introduction to Filters 2

5-1 Basic Filters and Design and analysis of Constant K filters

Total: 20

## Page 72

Programme Structur e for Direct Second YearAdmitted Students in Electronics Engineering of AY 2020 -21 only

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B. E. (ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING) 19

Text Book s:

1. Network Analysis, M. E. Van Valkenburg/T.S. Rathore, Pearson Education, 3rd Edition (2019).

2. Engineering Circuit Analysis, William H. Hayt, Jack Kemmerly, Jamie Phillips, Steven Durbin McGraw Hill,

9th Edition (2018).

3. Networks and Systems, Ashfaq Husain, Khanna Book Publishing Co. (P) Ltd.; 2nd Edition (2019).

4. Circuits and Networks: Analysis and Synthesis, A. Sudhakar and S.P. Shyammohan McGraw Hill Education

(India) Private Limited; 5th edition (2015).

Reference Books:

1. Circuit Theory Analysis and Synthe sis, A. Chakrabarti, DhanpatRai& Co., Seventh - Revised edition (2018)

2. MahmoodNahvi and Joseph A. Edminister, “Schaum’s Outline of Electrical Circuits”,McGraw -Hill Education,

7th Edition (2017).

3. Problems and Solutions of Electrical Circuit Analysis, R.K. M ehta & A.K. Mal, CBS Publishers and

Distributors Pvt Ltd (2015).

4. Networks and systems, D. Roy Choudhary, New Age International Publishers, 2nd Edition (2013).

Term Work:

This shall consist of at least 10 tutorials based on the entire syllabus.Each tuto rial shall have a minimum of four

numerical problems solved and duly graded.

Internal Assessment (IA):

Two tests must be conducted which should cover at least 80% of syllabus. The average marks of both the test will be

considered as final IA marks

End S emester Examination:

1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each of 20 marks.

2. Total 4 questions need to be solved.

3. Question No.1 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein sub - questions of 2 to 5 marks will

be asked.

4. Remaining questions will be selected from all the modules.

## Page 73

Programme Structur e for Direct Second YearAdmitted Students in Electronics Engineering of AY 2020 -21 only

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B. E. (ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING) 20

Course

Code Course

Name Teaching Scheme Credits Assigned

Theory Practical

and Oral Tutorial Theory Practical

and Oral Tutorial Total

ELC305 Electronic

Instruments and

Measurements 03 -- -- 03 -- -- 03

Course

Code Course

Name Examination Scheme

Theory Marks Term

Work Practical and

Oral Total

Internal assessment End

Sem.

Exam Exam

duration

Hours

Test

1 Test

2 Avg of Test

1 and Test

2

ELC305 Electronic

Instruments

and

Measurements 20 20 20 80 03 -- 100

Course Pre -requisite:

1. FEC105 -Basic Electrical Engineering

2. FEC101 -Engineering Mathematics -I

3. FEC201 -Engineering Mathematics -II

Course Objectives:

1. To develop understanding of fundamental principles of electronic measurements.

2. To dissemina te basic methods for measurements of electrical quantities.

3. Toimpart knowledge of analog and digital instrumentation.

Course Outcomes:

After successful completion of the course students will be able to:

1. Recall and define instrument characteristics as wel l as interpret errors in measurements.

2. Understand and Measure various variables or value of unknown element.

3. Illustrate digital instruments like digital voltmeter, signal generator, wave analyzer.

4. Explain various components of oscilloscopes.

5. Choose appropr iate transducer for measurement of distance, temperature and pressure.

## Page 74

Programme Structur e for Direct Second YearAdmitted Students in Electronics Engineering of AY 2020 -21 only

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B. E. (ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING) 21

6. Develop a calibration scheme for given instrument.

Module

No. Unit

No, Contents Hrs

## Page 75

Programme Structur e for Direct Second YearAdmitted Students in Electronics Engineering of AY 2020 -21 only

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B. E. (ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING) 22

Text Books:

1. David Bell, “Electronic Instrumentation and Measurements”, Oxford Publishing, 2nd edition, 2003. 1. Fundamental Principles of Measurement 3

1.1 Instrument characteristics: Static (accuracy, pr ecision, linearity, drift, sensitivity,

resolution, hysteresis, dead band). Dynamic (Speed of response, fidelity, lag and

dynamic error)

1.2 Instrument characteristics: Static (accuracy, precision, linearity, drift, sensitivity,

resolution,hysteresis, d ead band). Dynamic (Speed of response, fidelity, lag and

dynamic error)

2. Measurement of Resistance, Inductance and Capacitance 7

2.1 The concept of measurement with bridge, measurement of low, medium and high

resistancesusing Wheatstone bridge, Kelv in double bridge and mega -ohm bridge

(Megger). Numericalproblems (computation of sensitivity, resolution, range,

errors)

2.2 Measurement of Inductance, Capacitance and Frequency: Maxwell bridge,

Anderson bridge,Hay’s bridge, Schering bridge, Wien’s brid ge. LCR -Q meter.

Numerical problems(computation of sensitivity, resolution, range, errors)

3. Electronic Instruments

3.1 3.1 Digital DC Voltmeters (DVM): Ramp, dual slope, integrating, successive

approximation. ACVoltmeters: Rectifier, average respond ing, peak responding,

true RMS meter. Digitalmultimeter (DMM), Digital phase meter. 7

3.2 3.2 Signal Generators: Low frequency signal generator, function generator, pulse

generator,sweep frequency generator.

3.3 3.3 Wave analyzer: Basic wave analyzer, frequency selective and heterodyne.

Harmonicdistortion analyzer, spectrum analyzer.

4 Instrument Calibration 3

4.1 Principles and characteristics of calibration. Need of calibration

4.2 Calibration of potentiometer. Use of potentiometer for calib ration of voltmeter.

DMM asstandard instrument for calibration.

Total: 20

## Page 76

Programme Structur e for Direct Second YearAdmitted Students in Electronics Engineering of AY 2020 -21 only

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B. E. (ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING) 23

2. A. D. Helfrick, W. D. Cooper, “Modern Electronics Instrumentation and Measurement Techniques”, NJ.:

Prentice Hall, 2002.

3. H. S. Kalsi, “Electronic Instrumentation”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2nd edition, 2004.

Reference Books:

1. C. S. Rangan, G. R. Sarma, V. S. V. Mani, “Instrumentation: Devices and Systems”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2nd

edition, 2004.

2. A. K. Sawhney, “Electrical and Electronic Instruments and Measurements”, DhanpatRai& Sons, Delhi,

2015.

3. D. Prensky, “Electronic Instrumentation”, Prentice Hall Publication.

4. S. K. Singh, “Industrial Instrumentation and Control”, Tata McGraw Hill, 3rd Edition, 2017.

Internal Assessment (IA):

Two tests must be conducted which should cover at least 80% of syllabus. The average marks of both the test will be

considered as final IA marks

End Semester Examination:

1. Question paper will comprise o f 6 questions, each of 20 marks.

2. Total 4 questions need to be solved.

3. Question No.1 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein sub questions of 2 to 5 marks will

be asked.

4. Remaining questions will be selected from all the module

## Page 77

Programme Structur e for Direct Second YearAdmitted Students in Electronics Engineering of AY 2020 -21 only

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B. E. (ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING) 24

Course

Code Course

Name Teaching Scheme Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total

ELL301 Electronic

Devices&Circuits -

I Lab -- 02 -- -- 01 -- 01

Course

Code Course

Name Examination Scheme

Theory Marks

Term Work Practica l

And

Oral Total

Internal assessment End

Sem.

Exam Exam

duration

Hours

Test

1 Test

2 Avg of

Test 1 and

Test 2

ELL301 Electronic

Devices &

Circuits -I

Lab -- -- -- -- -- 25 25 50

Term Work:

At least 06 experiments covering entire syllabus o f ELC 302 (Electronic Devices and Circuits I)should be set to have

well predefined inference and conclusion. The experiments should be student centric and attempt should be made to

make experiments more meaningful, interesting. Simulation experiments are al so encouraged. Experiment s must be

graded from time to time. The grades should be converted into marks as per the Credit and Grading System manual

and should be added and averaged. The grading and term work assessment should be done based on this scheme.

The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures satisfactory performance of laboratory work and

minimum passing marks in term work. Practical and Oral exam will be based on the entire syllabus.

Suggested List of Experiments

Sr.

No. Experimen t Title

1 To study passive(R,L,C) and active (BJT,MOSFTET) components.

2 To study equipment (CRO, Function Generator, Power supply).

3 To perform characteristics of PN junction diode.

4 To perform Clippers and Clampers.

## Page 78

Programme Structur e for Direct Second YearAdmitted Students in Electronics Engineering of AY 2020 -21 only

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B. E. (ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING) 25

5 To perform analysis and des ign Fixed bias, voltage divider bias for CE amplifier.

6 To perform CE amplifier as voltage amplifier (Calculate Av, Ai, Ri, Ro).

7 To perform CS MOSFET amplifier as voltage amplifier and measurement of its performance parameters.

8 To perform Full wave /Bridge rectifier with LC/pi filter.

9 To perform Zener as a shunt voltage regulator.

10 To design Full wave/Bridge rectifier with LC/pi filter.

11 To design single stage CE Amplifier.

12 To design single stage CS Amplifier.

Suggested Simulation Ex periments:

Sr.

No. Experiment Title

1 SPICE/NGSPICE simulation of and implementation for junction analysis

2 SPICE/NGSPICE simulation of and implementation for BJT characteristics

3 SPICE/NGSPICE simulation of and implementation for JFET characteristi cs

4 SPICE/NGSPICE simulation of for MOSFET characteristics

5 SPICE/NGSPICE simulation of Full wave/Bridge rectifier with LC/pi filters.

6 SPICE/NGSPICE simulation of CE amplifier

7 SPICE/NGSPICE simulation of CS MOSFET amplifier.

(Expected percent age of H/w and software experiments should be 60% & 40% respoectively)

Note:

Suggested List of Experiments is indicative. However, flexibilities lies with individual course instructor todesign

and introduce new, innovative and challenging experiments, (l imited to maximum 30% variation to the suggested

list) from within the curriculum, so that, the fundamentals can be explored to the students with greater clarity, ease

and motivate to think differently.

## Page 79

Programme Structur e for Direct Second YearAdmitted Students in Electronics Engineering of AY 2020 -21 only

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B. E. (ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING) 26

Course

Code Course

Name Teaching Scheme Credit s Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total

ELL302 Digital Logic

Circuits Lab -- 02 -- -- 01 -- 01

Course

Code Course

Name Examination Scheme

Theory Marks

Term

Work Practical &Oral Total

Internal assessment

End

Sem.

Exam Exam

duration

Hours

Test

1 Test

2 Avg of

Test 1

and

Test 2

ELL302 Digital

Logic

Circuits

Lab -- -- -- -- -- 25 25 50

Term Work:

At least 06 experiments covering entire syllabus of ELC 303 (Digital Logic Circuits) should be set to have w ell

predefined inference and conclusion. The experiments should be student centric and attempt should be made to make

experiments more meaningful, interesting. Simulation experiments are also encouraged. Experiment must be graded

from time to time. The gra des should be converted into marks as per the Credit and Grading System manual and

should be added and averaged. The grading and term work assessment should be done based on this scheme. The

final certification and acceptance of term work ensures satisfact ory performance of laboratory work and minimum

passing marks in term work. Practical and Oral exam will be based on the entire syllabus.

Course Objective: -

1. To learn the functionality of basic logic gates.

2. To Construct combinational circuits and verify th eir functionalities.

3. To learn the functionality of flip flops and their conversion.

4. To Design and implement synchronous and asynchronous counters, Shift registers using MSI.

5. To simulate various combinational and sequential circuits and analyze the results using Verilog HDL.

Suggested List of Experiments:

Sr.

No. Hardware Experiment Title

1 To verify different logic gates and implement basic gates using universal gates

2 To implement Boolean function in SOP and POS form

3 To implement half adder, fu ll adder, half Subtractor, full Subtractor

## Page 80

Programme Structur e for Direct Second YearAdmitted Students in Electronics Engineering of AY 2020 -21 only

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B. E. (ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING) 27

4 To implement BCD adder using binary adder IC 7483

5 To implement logic equations using Multiplexer IC 74151

6 To verify truth table of SR,JK,T and D flip flops

7 To perform Flip flop conversion JK to D, JK t o T and D to T flip flop

8 To implement MOD N counter using IC 7490/7492/7493

9 To implement Synchronous counter using IC 74163/74169 OR To implement universal shift register using

IC 74194

Simulation/Software Experiments

Sr.

No. Software Experiment Title

1 To design and simulate Full adder/full subtractor using Verilog HDL

2 To design and simulate Multiplexer/Demultiplexer using Verilog HDL

3 To design and simulate decoder 74138 using Verilog HDL

4 To simulate basic flip flops using Verilog HDL

5 To design and simulate 4 bit counter / up -down counter using Verilog HDL

6 To design and simulate Shift register using Verilog HDL

(Additionalsuggested experiments (optional) Implementation of any of above using FPGA/CPLD )

Note:

Suggested List of E xperiments is indicative. However, flexibilities lies with individual course instructor todesign

and introduce new, innovative and challenging experiments, (limited to maximum 30% variation to the suggested

list) from within the curriculum, so that, the f undamentals can be explored to the students with greater clarity,

ease and motivate to think differently.

## Page 81

Programme Structur e for Direct Second YearAdmitted Students in Electronics Engineering of AY 2020 -21 only

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B. E. (ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING) 28

Course

Code Course

Name Teaching Scheme Credits Assigned

Theory Practical

and Oral Tutorial Theory Practical

and Oral Tutorial Total

ELL3 03 Electronic

Instruments and

Measurements Lab -- 02 -- -- 01 -- 01

Course

Code Course

Name Examination Scheme

Theory Marks

Term

Work Practical/Oral Total

Internal assessment End

Sem.

Exam Exam

duration

Hours

Test

1 Test

2 Avg of

Test 1 and

Test 2

ELL303 Electronic

Instruments

and

Measurements

Lab -- -- -- -- -- 25 25 50

Course Outcomes:

After successful completion of the course students will be able to:

1. Demonstrate the instrument characteristics as well as interpret errors in measur ements.

2. Measure various variables or value (R, L and C) of unknown element.

3. Illustrate digital instruments like digital voltmeter, signal generator, wave analyzer.

4. Explain various functions of oscilloscopes.

5. Choose appropriate transducer for measurement of distance, temperature and pressure.

6. Develop a calibration scheme for given instrument.

Term Work:

At least 06 experiments covering entire syllabus of ELC303 ( Electronic Instruments and Measurements ) should

be set to have well predefined inference and con clusion. The experiments should be student centric and attempt

should be made to make experiments more meaningful, interesting. Simulation experiments are also encouraged.

Experiment must be graded from time to time. The grades should be converted into mar ks as per the Credit and

Grading System manual and should be added and averaged. The grading and term work assessment should be done

based on this scheme. The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures satisfactory performance of

laboratory wo rk and minimum passing marks in term work. Practical and Oral exam will be based on the entire

syllabus.

## Page 82

Programme Structur e for Direct Second YearAdmitted Students in Electronics Engineering of AY 2020 -21 only

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B. E. (ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING) 29

Suggested List of Experiments :

Sr.

No. Hardware Experiment Title

1 Study of DSO for measurements of voltage, frequency and phase.

2 Measurement of resistance using wheat -stone /kelvin bridge.

3 Measurement of inductance and Q -factor using Hay’s bridge.

4 Measurement of capacitance using Schering bridge.

5 Measurement of frequency using Wien bridge.

6 Study characteristics and use of LVDT.

7 Measurement of temperature using RTD/Thermister.

8 Measurement of displacement using strain gauge.

9 Calibration of potentiometer.

10 Calibration of voltmeter using potentiometer/DMM.

Simulation/Software Experiments

Sr.

No. Software Experiment Title

1 Simulation of the zeroth, first order and second order Instrument to understand its dynamic characteristics.

2 Simulation of measurement of rms , average with error indication

3 Simulation of the Working of multichannel oscilloscope and demonstrate th e different modes

4 Simulation of measurement of various physical parameters such as Temperature, distance or pressure.

5 Simulation of DAS

6 Simulation of the calibration method and its performance evaluation

Preferably open source software should be used for implementation.

Note:

Suggested List of Experiments is indicative. However, flexibilities lies with individual course instructor todesign

and introduce new, innovative and challenging experiments, (limited to maximum 30% variation to the sugge sted

list) from within the curriculum, so that, the fundamentals can be explored to the students with greater clarity,

ease and motivate to think differently.

## Page 83

Programme Structur e for Direct Second YearAdmitted Students in Electronics Engineering of AY 2020 -21 only

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B. E. (ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING) 30

Course

Code Course Name Teaching Scheme

(Hrs.) Credits Assigned

Theory Practical

and Ora l Tutorial Theory Practical

and Oral Tutorial Total

ELL304 Skill based Lab

OOPM

(Java) -- 02* + 02 -- -- 02 -- 02

* Theory class to be conducted for full class

Course

Code Course

Name Examination Scheme

Theory Marks Term

Work Practical

And

Oral Total

Internal assessment End

Sem.

Exam Exam.

Duration

(in Hrs)

Test

1 Test

2 Avg. Of Test

1 and Test 2

ELL304 Skill based Lab

OOPM

( Java) -- -- -- -- -- 50 -- 50

Course Pre -requisites:

• Fundamentals of C -Programming

Course Objectives:

1. To understand Object Oriented Programming basics and its features.

2. To understand and apply Object Oriented Programming (OOP) principles using Java

3. Able to implement Methods, Constructors, Arrays, Multithreading and Applet in java

4. Able to use a programming language to resolve problems.

Course Outcomes:

After successful completion of the course student will be able to ;

1. Understand fundamental features of an object -oriented language: object classes and interfaces, exceptions and

libraries of object collecti ons.

2. Understand Java Programming.

3. To develop a program that efficiently implements the features and packaging concept of java in laboratory.

4. To implement Exception Handling and Applets using Java .

## Page 84

Programme Structur e for Direct Second YearAdmitted Students in Electronics Engineering of AY 2020 -21 only

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B. E. (ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING) 31

## Page 85

Programme Structur e for Direct Second YearAdmitted Students in Electronics Engineering of AY 2020 -21 only

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B. E. (ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING) 32

Module

No. Unit

No, Contents Hrs

1. Introduction to Ja va 6

1.1 Programming paradigms - Introduction to programming paradigms, Introduction to

four main Programming paradigms like procedural, object oriented, functional, and

logic & rule based. Difference between C++ and Java.

1.2 Java History, Java Featu res, Java Virtual Machine, Data Types and Size (Signed

vs.Unsigned, User Defined vs. Primitive Data Types, Explicit Pointer type),

Programming Language JDK Environment and Tools.

2. Inheritance, Polymorphism, Encapsulation using Java 10

2.1 Classes and Methods: class fundamentals, declaring objects, assigning object

referencevariables, adding methods to a class, returning a value, constructors, this

keyword, garbage collection, finalize() method, overloading methods, argument

passing, object as paramete r, returning objects, access control, static, final, nested

and inner classes, command line arguments, variable -length Arguments.

String: String Class and Methods in Java

2.2 Inheritances: Member access and inheritance, super class references, Us ing super,

multilevel hierarchy, constructor call sequence, method overriding, dynamic

method dispatch, abstract classes, Object class.

Packages and Interfaces: defining a package, finding packages and CLASSPATH,

accessprotection, importing packages, inter faces (defining, implementation,

nesting, applying), variables in interfaces, extending interfaces, instance of

operator.

3. Exception Handling and Applets in Java

3.1 Exception Handling: fundamental, exception types, uncaught exceptions, try,

catch, throw, throws, finally, multiple catch clauses, nested try statements, built -in

exceptions,custom exceptions (creating your own exception subclasses).

Managing I/O: Streams, Byte Streams and Character Streams, Predefined Streams,

Reading console Input, Wri ting Console Output, and Print Writer class.

Threading: Introduction, thread life cycle, Thread States: new, runnable, Running,

Blocked and terminated, Thread naming, thread join method, Daemon thread . 8

3.2 Applet: Applet Fundamental, Applet Architectur e, Applet Life Cycle, Applet

Skeleton,Requesting Repainting, status window, HTML Applet tag, passing

parameters to Applets,Applet and Application Program.

Total: 24

## Page 86

Programme Structur e for Direct Second YearAdmitted Students in Electronics Engineering of AY 2020 -21 only

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B. E. (ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING) 33

Textbooks:

1. D. T. Editorial Services, “Java 8 Programming Black Book”, Dreamtech Pres s, Edition, 2015.

2. YashwantKanitkar, “Let Us Java”, BPB Publications, 4nd Edition, 2019.

Reference Books:

1. Herbert Schidt, “The Complete Reference”, Tata McGraw -Hill Publishing Company Limited, 10th

Edition, 2017.

2. Harvey M. Deitel, Paul J. Deitel, Java: How to Program, 8th Edition, PHI , 2009.

3. Grady Booch, James Rumbaugh, Ivar Jacobson, “The Unified ModelingLanguageser Guide”, Pearson

Education.

4. SachinMalhotra, SaurabhChaudhary “Programming in Java”, Oxford University Press, 2010

Software Tools:

1. Raptor -Flow chart Simulation:http://raptor.martincarlisle.com/

2. Eclipse: https://eclipse.org/

3. Netbeans:https://netbeans.org/downloads/

4. CodeBlock:http://www.codeblocks.org/

5. J-Edit/J -Editor/Blue J

Online Repository:

1. Google Drive

2. GitHub

3. Code Guru

Suggested list of Expe riments:

Sr.

No. Write JAVA Program to

1 Display addition of number

2 Accept marks from user, if Marks greater than 40,declare the student as “Pass” else “Fail””

3 Accept 3 numbers from user. Compare them and declare the largest number (Using if -else statement).

4 Display sum of first 10 even numbers using do -while loop.

5 Display Multiplication table of 15 using while loop.

6 Display basic calculator using Switch Statem ent.

7 Display the sum of elements of arrays.

8 Accept and display the string entered and execute at least 5 different string functions on it.

9 Read and display the numbers as command line Arguments and display the addition of them

10 Define a class, describe its constructor, overload the Constructors and instantiate its object.

## Page 87

Programme Structur e for Direct Second YearAdmitted Students in Electronics Engineering of AY 2020 -21 only

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B. E. (ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING) 34

11 Illustrate method of overloading

12 Demonstrate Parameterized Constructor

13 Implement Multiple Inheritance using interface

14 Create thread by implementing 'runnable' i nterface or creating 'Thread Class.

15 Demonstrate Hello World Applet Example

Note:

Suggested List of Experiments is indicative. However, flexibilities lies with individual course instructor todesign

and introduce new, innovative and challenging exper iments,from within the curriculum, so that, the

fundamentals can be explored to the students with greater clarity, ease and motivate to think differently.

Term Work:

At least 10experiments covering entire syllabus should be set to have well predefined inference and conclusion.

Teacher should refer the suggested experiments and can design additional experiment to maintain better

understanding and quality.

The experiments should be students centric and attempt should be made to make experiments more meani ngful,

interesting and innovative. Term work assessment must be based on the overall performance of the student with every

experiments and are graded from time to time.

The grades will be converted to marks as per “ Choice Based Credit and Grading System ” manual and should be

added and averaged. Based on above scheme grading and term work assessment should be done.

The practical and oral examination will be based on entire syllabus. Students are encourages to share their

experiments codes on online reposit ory. Practical exam slip should cover all 16 experiments for examination.

## Page 88

Programme Structur e for Direct Second YearAdmitted Students in Electronics Engineering of AY 2020 -21 only

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B. E. (ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING) 35

Course code Course Name Credits

ELM 301 Mini Project -1A 02

Course

Code Course Name Examination Scheme

Theory Marks Term

Work Practical/

Oral Total

Internal Assessment End

Sem.

Exam Exam

duration

Hours

Test

1 Test

2 Avg. of

Test 1 and

Test 2

ELM

301 Mini

Project - 1A -- -- -- -- -- 25 25 50

Objectives

1. To acquaint with the process of identifying the needs and converting it into the problem.

2. To familiarize the process of solving the problem in a group.

3. To acquaint with the process of applying basic engineering fundamentals to attempt solutions to the problems.

4. To inculcate the process of self -learning and research.

Outcomes:

Learner will be able to…

1. Identify problems based on societal /research needs.

2. Apply Knowledge and skill to solve societal problems in a group.

3. Develop interpersonal skills to work as member of a group or leader.

4. Draw the proper inferences from available results through theoretical/ expe rimental/simulations.

5. Analyse the impact of solutions in societal and environmental context for sustainable development.

6. Use standard norms of engineering practices

7. Excel in written and oral communication.

8. Demonstrate capabilities of self -learning in a gr oup, which leads to life long learning.

9. Demonstrate project management principles during project work.

## Page 89

Programme Structur e for Direct Second YearAdmitted Students in Electronics Engineering of AY 2020 -21 only

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B. E. (ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING) 36

Guidelines for Mini Project -1A (Especially for DSE Admitted Students in A.Y. 2020 -21 only)

Students from among the DSE admitted students shall form a group of 3 to 4 students, while forming a group

shall not be allowed less than three or more than four students, as it is a group activity.

Students should do survey and identify needs, which shall be converted into problem statement for mini project

in consultation with faculty supervisor/head of department/internal committee of faculties.

Student s shall submit implementation plan in the form of Gantt/PERT/CPM chart, which will cover weekly

activity of mini project.

A log book to be prepared by each group , wherein group can record weekly work progress, guide/supervisor

can verify and record notes/comments.

Faculty supervisor may give inputs to students during mini project activity; however, focus shall be on self -

learning.

Students in a group shall und erstand problem effectively, propose multiple solution and select best possible

solution in consultation with guide/ supervisor.

As a special case for DSE Admitted Students in AY 2020 -21 only, a single project of appropriate level

and quality need to be ca rried out in two semesters by all the groups of the students. i.e. Mini Project

1A in semester III and Mini Project 1B in semester IV.

Since the two semesters i.e. sem -III and IV would be progressing simultaneously for these students as a

special case, Mi ni Project -1A shall cover only the detailed survey, Problem definition and report

writing for the same for the chosen project which shall constitute the term work of Mini Project -1A.

The detailed implementation, presentation and final report writing sha ll be covered in Mini Project 1B

which shall also constitute the term work of Mini Project 1B in sem -IV.

The report to be compiled in standard format of University of Mumbai.

Guidelines for Assessment of Mini Project:

Term Work

The review/ progress mo nitoring committee shall be constituted by head of departments of each institute.

The progress of mini project to be evaluated on continuous basis, minimum two reviews in each

semester.

In continuous assessment focus shall also be on each individual studen t, assessment based on individual’s

contribution in group activity, their understanding and response to questions.

Distribution of Term work marks for both semesters shall be as below;

o Marks awarded by guide/supervisor based on log book : 10

o Marks awarded by review committee : 10

o Quality of Project report : 05

## Page 90

Programme Structur e for Direct Second YearAdmitted Students in Electronics Engineering of AY 2020 -21 only

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B. E. (ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING) 37

Review/progress monitoring committee may consider following points for assessment based on either

one year or half year project as mentioned in general guidelines.

Assessment criteria of M ini Project:

Mini Project shall be assessed based on following criteria;

1.Quality of survey/ need identification

2.Clarity of Problem definition based on need.

3.Innovativeness in solutions

4.Feasibility of proposed problem solutions and selection of best sol ution

5.Cost effectiveness

6.Societal impact

7.Innovativeness

8.Cost effectiveness and Societal impact

9.Effective use of skill sets

10.Effective use of standard engineering norms

11.Contribution of an individual’s as member or leader

12.Clarity in written and oral commun ication

Guidelines for Assessment of Mini Project Practical/Oral Examination:

Report should be prepared as per the guidelines issued by the University of Mumbai.

Mini Project shall be assessed through a presentation of the detailed survey carried out, Pr oblem identification

and proposal of the best solution being showcased to a panel of Internal and External Examiners preferably

from industry or research organisations having experience of more than five years approved by head of

Institution.

Students shal l be motivated to publish a paper based on the work in Conferences/students competitions.

Mini Project shall be assessed based on the following points;

1. Quality of problem and Clarity

2. Innovativeness in solutions

3. Cost effectiveness and Societal impact

4. Full functioning of working model as per stated requirements

5. Effective use of skill sets

## Page 91

Programme Structur e for Direct Second YearAdmitted Students in Electronics Engineering of AY 2020 -21 only

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B. E. (ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING) 38

6. Effective use of standard engineering norms

7. Contribution of an individual’s as member or leader

8. Clarity in written and oral communication

## Page 92

AC -23/02/2021

Item No. – 6.11-12

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI

Bachelor of Engineering

in

Electronics and Telecommunication Engineering

Direct Second Year (Sem. III) Admitted Students for the

current Academic Year 2020 -21(Only)

(REV - 2019 ‘C’ Scheme) from Academic Year 2019 – 20

Under

FACULTY OF

SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY

(As per AICTE guidelines with effect from the academic year 2019 –2020)

## Page 93

Program Structure for Second Year Engineering Semester

III & IV

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI

(With Effect from 2020 -2021)

Semester III

Course

Code

Course Name Teaching Scheme

(Contact Hours)

Credits Assigned

Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total

ECC301 Engineering Mathematics -

III 3 -- 1* 3 -- 1 4

ECC302 Electronic Devices &

Circuits 3 -- -- 3 -- -- 3

ECC303 Digital System Design 3 -- -- 3 -- -- 3

ECC304 Network Theo ry 3 -- 1 3 -- 1 4

ECC305 Electronic Instrumentation

& Control Systems 3 -- -- 3 -- -- 3

ECL301 Electronic Devices &

Circuits Lab -- 2 -- -- 1 -- 1

ECL302 Digital System Design Lab -- 2 -- -- 1 -- 1

ECL303 Electronic Instrumentation

& Control Systems L ab -- 2 -- -- 1 -- 1

ECL304 Skill Lab: C++ and Java

Programming -- 4 -- -- 2 -- 2

ECM301 Mini Project 1A -- 4$ -- -- 2 -- 2

Total 15 14 2 15 07 2 24

* Should be conducted batch wise.

$ Indicates work load of a learner (Not Faculty) for Mini Project 1A . Faculty Load: 1 hour per week per four groups.

Course

Code

Course Name Examination Scheme

Theory

Term

Work

Pract.

& oral

Total Internal Assessment End

Sem.

Exam Exam.

Duration

(in Hrs)

Test 1

Test 2

Avg.

ECC301 Engineerin g

Mathematics -III 20 20 20 80 3 25 -- 125

ECC302 Electronic Devices &

Circuits 20 20 20 80 3 -- -- 100

ECC303 Digital System Design 20 20 20 80 3 -- -- 100

ECC304 Network Theory 20 20 20 80 3 25 -- 125

ECC305 Electronic

Instrumentation &

Control Syste ms

20

20

20

80

3

--

--

100

ECL301 Electronic Devices &

Circuits Lab -- -- -- -- -- 25 25 50

ECL302 Digital System Design

Lab -- -- -- -- -- 25 -- 25

ECL303 Electronic

Instrumentation &

Control Systems Lab

--

--

--

--

--

25

--

25

ECL304 Skill Lab: C++ and Java

Programming -- -- -- -- -- 25 25 50

ECM301 Mini Project 1A -- -- -- -- -- 25 25 50

Total -- -- 100 400 -- 175 75 750

## Page 94

ECC301 Engineerin g Mathematics -III

Course

Code Course Name Teaching Scheme

(Contact Hours) Credits

Assigned

Theory Pract. Tut. Theory TW/Pract Tut. Total

ECC301 Engineering

Mathematics -III 03 - 01* 03 - 01 04

Course

Code Course Name Examination

Scheme

Theory Exam

Dura -

tion

(in

Hrs.) Term

Work Pract

&

Oral Total

Internal Assessment End

Sem

Exam Test1 Test2 Avg of

Test 1

& 2

ECC301 Engineering

Mathematics -III 20 20 20 80 03 25 - 125

* Should be conducted batch wise.

Pre-requisite:

1. FEC101 -Engineering Mathematics -I

2. FEC201 -Engineering Mathematics -II

3. Scalar and Vector Product: Scalar and vector product of three and four vectors

Course Objectives: The course is aimed

1. To learn the Laplace Transform, Inverse Laplace Transform of various functions and its

applications.

2. To understand the concept of Fourier Series, its complex form and enhance the problem solving

skill.

3. To understan d the concept of complex variables, C -R equations, harmonic functions and its conjugate

and mapping in complex plane.

4. To understand the basics of Linear Algebra.

5. To use concepts of vector calculus to analyze and model engineering problems.

Course Outcomes : After successful completion of course student will be able to:

1. Understand the concept of Laplace transform and its application to solve the real integrals in

engineering problems.

2. Understand the concept of inverse Laplace transform of various functions and its applications in

engineering problems.

3. Expand the periodic function by using Fourier series for real life problems and complex

engineering problems.

4. Understand complex variable theory, application of harmonic conjugate to get orthogonal

trajectories and analytic function.

5. Use matrix algebra to solve the engineering problems.

6. Apply the concepts of vector calculus in real life problems.

## Page 95

Module Detailed Contents Hrs.

01 Module: Laplace Transform

Definition of Laplace transform, Condition of Existe nce of Laplace transform.

Laplace Transform (L) of Standard Functions like 𝑒𝑎𝑡, 𝑠𝑖𝑛(𝑎𝑡), 𝑐𝑜𝑠(𝑎𝑡),

𝑠𝑖𝑛ℎ(𝑎𝑡), 𝑐𝑜𝑠ℎ(𝑎𝑡) and 𝑡𝑛, 𝑛 ≥ 0.

Properties of Laplace Transform: Linearity, First Shifting theorem, Second Shifting

Theorem, c hange of scale Property, multiplication by t, Division by t, Laplace Transform

of derivatives and integrals (Properties without proof).

Evaluation of integrals by using Laplace Transformation.

Self-learning Topics: Heaviside’s Unit Step function, Laplace Transform of

Periodic functions, Dirac Delta Function.

7

02 Module: Inverse Laplace Transform

2.1 Inverse Laplace Transform, Linearity property, use of standard formulae to find

inverse Laplace Transform, finding Inverse Laplace transform using derivat ives.

2.2 Partial fractions method to find inverse Laplace transform.

2.3 Inverse Laplace transform using Convolution theorem (without proof).

Self-learning Topics: Applications to solve initial and boundary value problems

involving ordinary differential equation s.

6

03 Module: Fourier Series:

3.1 Dirichlet’s conditions, Definition of Fourier series and Parseval’s Identity

(without proof).

3.2 Fourier series of periodic function with period 2𝜋 and 2l.

3.3 Fourier series of even and odd functions.

3.4 Half range Sine and Cosine Series.

Self-learning Topics: Complex form of Fourier Series, Orthogonal and

orthonormal set of functions. Fourier Transform.

7

04 Module: Complex Variables:

4.1 Function f(z) of complex variable, limit, continuity and differentiability of

f(z)Analytic function, necessary and sufficient conditions for f(z) to be

analytic (without proof).

4.2 Cauchy -Riemann equations in cartesian coordinates (without proof).

4.3 Milne -Thomson method to determine analytic function f(z)when real part

(u) or Imaginary part (v) or its combination (u+v or u -v) is given.

4.4 Harmonic function, Harmonic conjugate and orthogonal trajectories

Self-learning Topics: Conformal mapping, linear, bilinear mapping, cro ss ratio, fixed

points and standard transformations.

7

05 Module: Linear Algebra: Matrix Theory

5.1 Characteristic equation, Eigen values and Eigen vectors, Example based on

properties of Eigen values and Eigen vectors.(Without Proof).

5.2 Cayley -Hamilton theorem (Without proof), Examples based on verification of

Cayley - Hamilton theorem and compute inverse of Matrix.

5.3 Similarity of matrices, Diagonalization of matrices. Functions of square

matrix

Self-learning Topics: Application of Matrix Theory in machi ne learning and

google page rank algorithms, derogatory and non -derogatory matrices .

6

06 Module: Vector Differentiation and Integra l

6.1 Vector differentiation : Basics of Gradient, Divergence and Curl (Without

Proof).

6.2 Properties of vector field: Solenoi dal and irrotational (conservative) vector

6

## Page 96

fields.

6.3 Vector integral: Line Integral, Green’s theorem in a plane (Without Proof),

Stokes’ theorem (Without Proof) only evaluation.

Self-learning Topics: Gauss’ divergence Theorem and applications of Ve ctor

calculus.

Total 39

References:

1. Advanced engineering mathematics, H.K. Das, S . Chand, Publications

2. Higher Engineering Mathematics, B. V. Ramana, Tata Mc -Graw Hill Publication

3. Advanced Engineering Mathematics, R. K. Jain and S. R. K. Iyengar, Naros a publication

4. Advanced Engineering Mathe matics, Wylie and Barret, Tata Mc -Graw Hill.

5. Theory and Problems of Fourier Analysis with applications to BVP, Murray Spiegel, Schaum’s

Outline Series

6. Vector Analysis Murry R. Spiegel, Schaum’s outline series, Mc -Graw Hill Publication

7. Beginning Linear Algebra, Seymour Lipschutz, Schaum’s outline series, Mc -Graw Hill Publication

8. Higher Engineering Mathematics, Dr. B. S. Grewal, Khanna Publication

Term Wo rk:

General Instructions:

1. Batch wise tutorials are to be conducte d. The number of students per batch should be as per University pattern

for practicals.

2. Students must be encouraged to write at least 6 class tutorials on entire syllabus.

3. A group of 4 -6 stud ents should be assigned a self -learning topic. Students should pr epare a

presentation/problem solving of 10 -15 minutes. This should be considered as mini project in Engineering

mathematics. This project should be graded for 10 marks depending on the perfor mance of the students.

The distribution of Term Work marks will be as follows –

1. Attendance (Theory and Tutorial) 05 marks

2. Class Tutorials on entire syllabus 10 marks

3. Mini project 10 marks

Internal Assessment Test (20 -Marks):

Assessment consists of two class tests of 20 marks each. The first -class test (In ternal Assessment

I) is to be conducted when approx. 40% syllabus is completed and second class test (Internal Assessment II)

will be based on remaining contents (approximately 40% syllabus but excluding contents covered in Test I).

Duration of each test s hall be one hour.

End Semester Theory Examination (80 -Marks):

Weightage to each of the modules in end -semester examination will be proportional to number of respective

lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum.

1. Question paper will comprise of total 06 qu estions, each carr ying 20 marks.

2. Question No: 01 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein 4 to 5 sub - questions will

be asked.

3. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature and randomly selected from all the modules.

4. Weightage of each module w ill be proportional to number of respective lecture hours as mentioned in the

syllabus.

5. Total 04 questions need to be solved.

## Page 97

ECC302 - Electronic Devices & Circuits

Subject

Code Subject Name Teaching Scheme

(Hrs.) Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total

ECC302 Electronic

Devices &

Circuits 3 - -- 3 -- -- 3

Subject

Code Subject

Name Examination Scheme

Theory Marks Term

Work Practical

and Oral Oral Total

Internal assessment End Sem.

Exam Test

1 Test

2 Avg. Of Test

1 and Test 2

ECC302 Electronic

Devices &

Circuits 20 20 20 80 -- -- -- 100

Course pre-requisite:

FEC:102 - Engineering Physics -I

FEC:201 - Engineering Physics -II

FEC:105 - Basic Electrical Engineering

Course Objectives:

1. To ex plain functionality different electronic devices.

2. To perform DC and AC analysis of small signal amplifier circuits.

3. To analyze frequency response of small signal amplifiers.

4. To compare small signal and large signal amplifiers.

5. To explain wor king of differential amplifiers and it's applicatio ns in Operational Amplifiers

Course Outcome:

After successful completion of the course student will be able to : -

1.Know functionality and applications of various electronic devices.

2.Explain working of various electronics devices with the help of V -I characteristics.

3.Derive expressions for performance parameters of BJT and MOSFET circuits.

4. Evaluate performance ofElectronic circuits (BJT and MOSFET based).

5. Select appropriat e circuit for given application.

6.Design electroni c circuit (BJT, MOSFET based) circuits for given specifications.

## Page 98

Text books:

1. D. A. Neamen, “Electronic Circuit Analys is and Design,” Tata McGraw Hill, 2ndEdition.

2. A. S. Sedra, K. C. Smith, and A. N. Chandorkar, “Microelectronic Circuits Theory and Applications,”

International Version, OXFORD International Students, 6thEditi on

3. Franco, Sergio. Design with operation al amplifiers and analog integrated circuits. Vol. 1988. New York:

McGraw -Hill, 2002.

References:

1. Boylestad and Nashelesky, “Electronic Devices and Circuits Theory,” Pearson Education, 11th Edition.

2. A. K. Maini, “Electronic Devices and Circuits,” Wi ley.

3. T. L. Floyd, “Electronic Devices,”Prentice Hall, 9th Edition, 2012.

4. S. Salivahanan, N. Suresh Kumar, “Electronic Devices and Circuits”, Tata Mc -Graw Hill, 3rd Edition

5. Bell, David A. Electronic devices and circuits. Prentice -Hall of India, 1999.

Module

No. Unit No. Topics Hrs.

1.0 Small Signal Amplifiers 06

1.1 Concept of AC load lineand Amplification , Small signa l analysis

(Zi, Zo, Av and Ai) of CE amplifier using hybrid pi model.

1.2 Small signal analysis (Zi, Zo, Av) of CS (for EMOSFET)

amplifiers.

1.3 Introduction to multistage amplifiers.(Concept, advantages &

disadvantages)

2.0 Frequency response of Small signal Amplifiers:

08

2.1 Effects of coupling, bypass capacitors and parasitic capacitors

on frequency response of single stage amplifier, Miller effect

and Miller capacitance.

2.2 High and low frequency analysis of CE amplifier.

2.3 High and low frequency analysis of CS( E-MOSFET ) amplifier.

3.0 Power Amplifiers and Differential Amplifiers 06

3.1 Classification of Power Amplifiers, analysis of Class A

transformer coupledpower amplifier

3.2 E-

MOSFETDifferentialAmplifier,DCtransfe rcharacteristics,operatio

nwithcommonmodesignalanddifferentialmodesignal

3.3 Differentialandcommonmodegain,CMRR,differentialandcommon

modeInputimpedance

Total 20

## Page 99

Internal Assessment (IA):

Two tests must be conducted which should cover at least 80% of syllabus. The average marks ofboth the tests will be

considered as final IA marks

End Semester Examination :

1. Question paper will comprise of 6 ques tions, each carrying 20 marks.

2. The students need to solve total 4 questions.

3: Question No.1 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus.

4: Remaining question (Q.2 to Q.6) will be sel ected from all the modules.

**********

## Page 100

ECC303 - Digital System Design

Course

Code Course

Name Teaching Scheme (Contact

Hours) Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total

ECC303 Digital

System

Design

02

--

--

02

--

--

02

Course

Code Course

Name Examination Scheme

Theory Marks Exam

Duration

(Hrs.) Term

Work Practical

and Oral Total

Internal Assessment End Sem.

Exam. Test1 Test2 Avg.

ECC303 Digital

System

Design

20

20

20

80

03

--

--

100

Course Pre -requisite:

FEC105 – Basic Electrical Engineering

Course Objectives:

1. To understand number system representations and their inter -conversions used in digital electronic circuits.

2. To analyze digital logic processes and to implement logical operations using various combination al logic

circuits.

3. To analyze, design and implement logical operations using various sequential logic circuits.

4. To study the characteristics of memory and their classifica tion.

5. To learn basic concepts in VHDL and implement combinational and sequential circuits using VHDL.

Course Outcomes:

After successful completion of the course student will be able to:

1. Understand types of digital logic, digital circuits and logic families.

2. Analyze, design and implement combinational logic circuits.

3. Analyze, design and implement sequential logic circuits.

4. Develop a digital logic and apply it to solve real life problems.

5. Classify different types of memories and PLDs.

6. Simulate and implement basic combinational and sequential circuits using VHDL/Verilog.

## Page 101

Unit

No. Topics Hrs.

1.0 Number system & Logic Gates 06

1.1

Review of Binary, Octal and Hexadecimal Number Systems, their

inter-conversion, Binary code, Gray code and BCD code,

Binary Arithmetic, Addition, Subtraction using 1’s and 2’s 04

1.2

Digit al logic gates, Universal gates, Realization using NAND and

NOR gates, Boolean Algebra, De Morgan’s Theorem 02

2.0 Combinational & Sequential Logic Circuits Logic Circuits

11

2.1 SOP and POS representation, K -Map up to four variables and

Quine -McClusky method for minimization of logic expressions 04

2.2 Arithmetic Circuits: Half adder, Full adder, Half Subtractor, Full

Subtractor, Carry Look ahead adder and BCD adder, Magnitude

Comparator 04

2.3 Flip flops: RS, JK, Master slave flip flops ; T & D flip flops with,

Conversion of flip flops, Registers: SISO, SIPO, PISO, PIPO.

03

3.0

Different Types of Memories and Programmable Logic Devices,

Introduction to VHDL

03

3.1 Introduction: Programmable Logic Devices (PLD),

Programmable L ogic Array (PLA), Programmable Array Logic

(PAL) 01

3.2 Basics of VHDL/Verilog Programming, Design and implementation

of adder, subtractor, multiplexer and flip flop using VHDL/Verilog 02

Total 20

## Page 102

Suggested list of experiments:

1. Sim plification of Boolean functions.

2. Design AND, OR, NOT, EXOR, EXNOR gates using Universal gates: NAND and

NOR.

3. Implement Half adder, Full adder, Half subtractor and Full subtractor circuits.

4. Verify truth table of different types of flip flops.

5. Flip flop conversions JK to D, JK to T and D to TFF.

6. Design asynchronous/s ynchronous MOD N counter using IC7490.

7. Write VHDL/Verilog simulation code for different logic gates.

Term Work:

At least 05 experiments covering the entire syllabus must be giv en “Batch Wise” .

Teacher should refer the suggested list of experiments and can design additional

experiments to acquire practical design skills. The experiments \should be students

centric and attempt should be made to make experiments more meaningful, i nteresting

and innovative

Text Books:

1. John F. Warkerly, “Digital Design P rinciples and Practices”, Pearson Education, Fifth

Edition (2018).

2. Morris Mano, Michael D. Ciletti, “Digital Design”, Pearson Education, Fifth Edition (2013).

3. R. P. Jain, “Modern D igital Electronics”, Tata McGraw Hill Education, Forth Edition (2010).

4. A. Anand Kumar, “Fundamentals of Digital Circuits”, PHI, Fourth Edition (2016).

5. Volnei A. Pedroni, “Digital Electronics and Design with VHDL” Morgan Kaufmann

Publisher, First Edition (2008).

6. Stephen Brown & Zvonko Vranesic , “Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design”,

Third Edition, MGH (2014).

Reference Books:

1. Thomas L. Floyd, “Digital Fundamentals”, Pearson Prentice Hall, Eleventh Global

Edition (2015).

2. Mandal, “Digital Elect ronics Principles and Applications”, McGraw Hill Education,

First Edition (2010).

3. Ronald J. Tocci, Neal S. Widmer, Gregory L. Moss “Digital Systems Principles and

Applications”, Ninth Edition, PHI (2009).

4. Donald P. Leach / Albert Paul Malvino/Gautam Saha, “Digital Principles and

Applications”, The McGraw Hill, Eight Edition (2015).

5. Stephen Brown & Zvonko Vranesic, “Fundamentals of Digital Logic Design with

VHDL”, Second Edition, TMH (2009).

6. J. Bhasker, “A Verilog HDL Primer”, Star Galaxy Press, Third Editio n (1997).

NPTEL / Swayam Course:

1. Course: Digital Circuits By Prof. Santanu Chattopadhyay (IIT Kharagpur);

## Page 103

https://swayam.gov.in/nd1_noc20_ee70/preview

Internal Assessment (20-Marks):

Internal Assessment (IA) consists of two class tests of 20 marks each. IA -1 is to be

conducted on approxim ately 40% of the syllabus completed and IA-2 will be based on

remaining contents (approximately 40% syllabus but excluding contents covere d in IA -

I). Duration of each test shall be one hour. Average of the two tests will be considered

as IA marks.

End Seme ster Examination (80 -Marks):

Weightage to each of the modules in end -semester examination will be proportional to

number of respective lec ture hours mentioned in the curriculum.

1. Question paper will comprise of total 06 questions, each carrying 20 marks .

2. Question No: 01 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein 4 to 5

sub-questions will be asked.

3. Remaining questions will be mixe d in nature and randomly selected from all the

modules.

4. Weightage of each module will be proportional to number of respective lecture

hours as mentioned in the syllabus.

5. Total 04 questions need to be solved.

## Page 104

ECC3 04 - Network Theory

Course

Code Course Name Teaching Scheme

(Hrs.) Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total

ECC 305 Network Theory 03 -- 01 03 -- 01 04

Course

Code Course Name Examination Scheme

Theory Marks Exam.

Duration

(in Hrs) Term

Work Practical

And Oral Total

Internal assessment End Sem.

Exam Test

1 Test

2 Avg. Of Test 1

and Test 2

ECC 305 Network Theory 20 20 20 80 03 25 -- 125

Course Pre -requisite:

Basic Electrical Engineering

Solution to Differential Equations and Laplace Transform

Course Objectives:

1. To analyze the Circuits in time and frequency domain

2. To study network Topology, network Functions, two port network

3. To synthesize passive network by various methods

Course O utcome:

After successful completion of the course student will be able to

1. Apply their knowledge in analyzing Circuits by using network theorems.

2. Apply the time and frequency method of analysis.

3. Evaluate circuit using graph theory.

4. Find the va rious parameters of two port network.

5. Apply network topology for analyzing the circuit.

6. Synthesize the network using passive elements.

## Page 105

Textbooks :

1.Franklin F Kuo, “Network Analysis and Synthesis”, Wiley Toppan, 2nd.ed. ,1966 .

2. M E Van Valkenburg, “Network Analysis”, Prentice -Hall of India Pvt Ltd, New Delhi,

26th Indian Reprint, 2000.

Reference Books:

1. A. Chakrabarti , “Circuit Theory”, DhanpatRai& Co., Delhi, 6th Edition.

2. A. Sudhakar, Shyammohan S. Palli “Circuits an d Networks”, Tata McGraw -Hill education.

3. SmarajitGhosh“Network Theory Analysis & Synthesis”, PHI learning.

4. K.S. Suresh Kumar, “Electri c Circuit Analysis” Pearson, 2013.

5. D. Roy Choudhury, “Networks and Systems” , New Age International, 1998.

Module

No. Unit

No. Topics Hrs.

1.0 Electrical circuit analysis and Graph Theory 09

1.1 Analysis of DC Circuits: Analysis of Circuits with dependent

sources using generalized loop and node analysis, super

mesh and super node analysis technique

Circuit Theorems: Superposition, Theremin’s, Norton’s,

Maximum Power Transfer (No numerical with AC source in

ESE).

1.2 Graph Theory: Linear Oriented Graphs, graph

terminologies

Matrix representation of a graph: Incidence matrix, Circuit

matrix, Cut -set matrix, reduced Incident matrix, Tieset

matrix, f -cutset matrix. Relationship between sub matrices

A, B &Q KVL& KCL using matrix (No numerical) .

2.0 Time&Frequency domain analysis and Network

Function 8

2.1 Time domain analysis of R -L and R -C Circuits: Forced and

natural response, initial and final values Solution using first

order differential usi ng step signals.

Time and frequency domain analysis of R -L-C Circuits:

Forced and natural response, effect of da mping factor (no

numerical )

2.2 Network functions for the one port and two port networks,

Driving point and transfer functions, Poles and Z eros of

Network functions, necessary condition for driving

pointfunctions, necessary condition for transfer functions

3.0 Two port Networks 03

3.1 Parameters: Open Circuits, short Circuit and Transmission

parameters, conditionsfor reciprocity and sym metry

3.2 Interconnections of Two -Port networks T & π representation

(Numerical on it are NOT expected in ESE).

Total 20

## Page 106

Internal Assessment (IA):

Two tests must be conducted which should cover at least 80% of syllabus. The average marks ofboth the test will

be considered as final IA marks.

End Semester Examination :

1. Question paper will comprise of 06 questions, each carryin g 20 marks.

2. The students need to solve total 04 questions.

3: Question No.1 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus.

4: Remaining question (Q.2 to Q.6) will be selected from all the modules.

Term Work :

At least 05 assignments covering entire s yllabus must be given during the “ Class Wise Tutorial” . The assignments

should be students’ centric and an attempt should be made to make assignments more meaningful, interesting and

innovative.

Term work assessment must be based on the overall performan ce of the student with every assignment graded from

time to time. The grades will be converted to marks as per “ Credit and Grading System” manual and should be

added and averaged. Based on above scheme grading and term work assessment sho uld be done.

## Page 107

ECC305 - Electronic Instrumentation & Control Systems

Subject

Code Subject Name Teaching Scheme Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory TW/Practical Tutorial Total

ECC305

Electronic

Instrumentation

& Control

System 03 -- ----- 03 -- --- 03

Subject

Code Subject Name Examination Scheme

Theory Marks Term

Work Practical

& Oral Oral Total

Internal assessment End

Sem.

Exam Test 1 Test 2 Ave. Of Test

1 and Test 2

ECC305

Electronic

Instrumentation

& Control

System 20

20 20 80 -- -- -- 100

Prerequisites: Basics of Electronics and Electrical Engineering.

Course Objectives:

1.To provide basic knowledge about the various sensors and transducers

2. To provide fundamental concepts of control system su ch as mathematical modeling, time response and

Freque ncy response.

3. To develop concepts of stability and its assessment criteria.

Course Outcomes: Students will be able to:

1. Identify various sensors, Transducers and their brief performance speci fication.

2. Understand principle of working of various transducer used to measure Temperature, Displacement, level

and

their application in industry

3. Determine and use models of physical systems in forms suitable for use in the analysis and design of control

systems.

## Page 108

4. Evaluate the transfer functions for a given Control system.

5. Understand the analysis of system in time domain and frequency domain.

6. Predict stability of given system using appropriate criteria.

Module

No. Section No. Topics Hrs.

1. Principle of Measurement, Testing and Measuring

instruments 05

1.1 Introduction to Basic instruments: Components of

generalized measurement system, Concept of accuracy,

precision, linearity, sensitivity, resolution, hysteresis,

calibration.

1.2 Measurement of Resistance : Kelvin’s double bridge,

Wheatstone bridge and Mega ohm bridge

Measurement of Inductance: Maxwell bridge and Hey

bridge

Measurement of Capacitance: Schering bridge

2. Stability Analysis in Tim e Domain

05

2.1 Root locus Analysis: Root locus concept, general rules for

constructing root -locus,

Root locus analysis of control system

3

Stability Analysis in frequency domain

10

3.1 Introduction: Frequency domain specification,

Relationship between time and frequency domain

specification of system, stability margins

3.2 Bode Plot: Magnitude and phase plot, Method of plotting

Bode plot, Stability margins and analysis using bode plot.

Frequency resp onse analysis of RC, RL, RLC circuits

3.3 Nyquist Criterion: Concept of Polar plot and Nyquist plot,

Nyquist stability criterion, gain and phase margin

Total 20

Textbooks :

1. A.K. Sawhney, “Electrical & Electronic Measurement & Instru mentation” – DRS . India

2. B.C Nakra, K.K. Cahudhary, Instrumentation Measurement and Analysis, Tata

Mc Graw Hill .

3. W.D. Cooper, “Electronic Instrumentation And Measuring Techniques” – PHI

4. Nagrath, M.Gopal, “Control System Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill.

## Page 109

5. Rangan C. S., Sarma G. R. and Mani V. S. V., "Instrumentation Devices And

Systems", Tata McGraw -Hill, 2nd Ed., 2004.

6. K.Ogata, “Modern Control Engineering, Pearson Education”, IIIrd edition.

Reference Books:

1. Helfrick&Copper, “Modern Electronic Instrumentation & Measuring Techniques” – PHI

2. M.M.S. Anand, “Electronic Instruments and instrumentation Technology”.

3. Gopal M., “Control Systems Principles and Design”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd. New

Delhi, 1998.

4. Benjamin C.Kuo, “Automatic Control Systems, Eears on education”, VIIth edition

5. Doeblin E.D., Measurement system, Tata Mc Graw Hill., 4th ed, 2003.Madan Gopal,

“Control Systems Principles and Design”, Tata McGraw hill, 7th edition,1997.

6. Normon, “Control System Engineering”, John Wiley & sons, 3rd edition.

Internal Assessment (IA):

Two tests must be conducted which should cover at least 80% of syllabus. The average marks of both the test

will be considered as final IA marks

End Semester Examination :

1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, eac h carrying 20 marks.

2. The st udents need to solve total 4 questions.

3: Question No.1 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus.

4: Remaining question (Q.2 to Q.6) will be selected from all the modules.

Term Work :

Term work assessment must be based on the overall performance of the student with every assignment graded

from time to time. The grades will be converted to marks as per “ Credit and Grading System” manual and

should be added and averaged. Based on above scheme grading and term work as sessment should be done.

## Page 110

ECL303 – Electronic Instrumentation & Control Systems Lab

Subject

Code Subject Name Teaching

Scheme

(Hrs.) Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory TW/Pracs Tutorial Tot

al

ECL305 Electronic

Measurement

and Control

system

Laboratory -- 02 -- -- 1 -- 1

Subject

Code

Subject

Name Examination Scheme

Theory Marks

Term

Work

Practica

l &

Oral

Ora

l

Tot

al Internal assessment End

Sem.

Exam Test 1 Test

2 Avg. Of Test 1

and Test 2

ECL305 Electronic

Mea suremen

t and Control

system

Laboratory -- -- -- -- 25 - -- 25

Course Pre -requisites: Basics of Electrical and Electronics Engineering

Signals and Systems

Course Objectives:

● Introduction to Electronics instrument s for measurement of different physical and electrical parameter.

● To simulate and analyze different parameters of control system.

● To dis cuss stability of control system using various criteria.

Course outcomes: After successful completion of the course stud ent will be able to

1. Explain the principle of working of various transducers and their application in industry.

2. Measure the physical and electrical parameters of various transducers and sensors.

3. Understand the concept of first order and second order system s with their frequency response.

4. Solve problems and calculate the time response specification of control system.

Laboratory plan

Maximum of 5 practicals

List of Experiments

1. Designing DC bridge for Resistance Measurement (Quarter, Half and Full brid ge)

2. Designing AC bridge Circuit for capacitance measurement.

3. To inspect the relative stability of systems Root -Locus using Simulation Software.

4. To determine the frequency specification from Polar plot of system.

5. To inspect the stability of sy stem by Nyquist plot using Simulation software.

6. To inspect the stability of system by Bode plot using Simulation software.

## Page 111

Term Work :

At least 05 Experiments covering entire syllabus must be given during the “ Laboratory session batch wise” .

Comput ation/simulation -based experiments are also encouraged. The experiments should be students centric and attempt should

be made to make experiments more meaningful, interesting and innovative.

## Page 112

ECL304 - Skill Lab: C++ and Java Programming

Course

Code Course Name Teaching Scheme

(Hrs.) Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total

ECL304 Skill Lab: C++

and Java

Programming

--

04

--

--

02

--

02

Course

Code Course

Name Examination Scheme

Theory Marks

Term

Work

Practical

And Oral

Total Internal assessment End

Sem.

Exam Test

1 Test

2 Avg. Of

Test 1 and

Test 2

ECL304 Skill Lab: C++

and Java

Programming

--

--

--

--

25

25

50

Note: Before perf orming practical ‘Necessary Theory’ will be taught by concern

faculty

Course Pre -requisites:

1. FEL204 - C-Programming

Course Objectives:

1. Describe the principles of Object Oriented Programming (OOP).

2. To understand object -oriented concepts such as data ab straction, encapsulation,

inheritance and polymorphism.

3. Utilize the object -oriented paradigm in program design.

4. To lay a foundation for advanced programming.

5. Develop programming insight using OOP constructs.

Course Outcomes:

After successful completion o f the course student will be able to:

1. Describe the basic principles of OOP.

2. Design and apply OOP principles for effective programming.

3. Develop programming applications using OOP language.

4. Implement different programming applications using packaging.

5. Analy ze the strength of OOP.

6. Percept the Utility and applicability of OOP.

## Page 113

Module

No. Unit

No. Topics Hrs.

1.0 C++ Control Structures 05

1.1 Branching - If statement, If -else Statement, Decision.

Looping – while, do -while, for loop

Nested control struct ure- Switch statement, Continue statement, Break

statement.

1.2 Array - Concepts, Declaration, Definition, Accessing array element,

One-dimensional and Multidimensional array.

2.0 Object -Oriented Programming using C++ 10

2.1 Operator Overloading - concept of overloading, operator overloading,

Overloading Unary Operators, Overloading Binary Operators, Data

Conversion, Type casting (implicit and explicit), Pitfalls of Operator

Overloading and Conversion, Keywords explicit and mutable.

Function - Function prototype, accessing function and utility function,

Constructors and destructors, Copy Constructor, Objects and Memory

requi rements, Static Class members, data abstraction and information hiding,

inline function.

Constructor - Definition, Types of Construc tor, Constructor Overloading,

Destructor.

2.2 Inheritance - Introduction, Types of Inheritance, Inheritance, Public and Private

Inheritance, Multiple Inheritance, Ambiguity in Multiple Inheritance, Visibility

Modes Public, Private, Protected and Friend, Aggregation, Classes Within

Classes. Deriving a class from Base Class, Constructor and destructor in Derived

Class, Overriding Member Functions, Class Hierarchies,

Polymorphism - concept, relationship among objects in inheritance

hierarchy, Runtime & Compil e Time Polymorphism, abstract classes, Virtual

Base Class.

3.0 Java : Introduction, Inheritance, Polymorphism & Encapsulation 09

3.1 Programming paradigms - Introduction to programming paradigms,

Introduction to four main

Programming paradigms like pro cedural, object oriented, functional, and logic

& rule based. Difference between C++ and Java.

3.2 Classes and Methods: class fundamentals, declaring objects, assigning object

reference variables, adding methods to a class, returning a value, constructo rs,

this keyword, garbage collection, finalize() method, overl oading methods,

argument passing, object as parameter, returning objects, access control, static,

final, nested and inner classes, command line arguments, variable -length

Arguments.

String: String Class and Methods in Java.

3.3 Inheritances: Member access and inheritance, super class references, Using

super, multilevel hierarchy, constructor call sequence, method overriding,

dynamic method dispatch, abstract classes, Object class.

Packages and Interfaces: defining a package, find ing packages and

CLASSPATH, access protection, importing packages, interfaces (defining,

implementation, nesting, applying), variables in interfaces, extending

interfaces, instance of operator.

Total 24

## Page 114

Suggested list of Experiments:

Note: Before performing practical necessary Theory will be taught by concern faculty

Sr.No Write C++ Program to

1 Add Two Numbers

2 Print Number Entered by User

3 Swap Two Numbers

4 Check Whether Number is Even or Odd

5 Find Largest Number Among Thre e Numbers

6 Create a simple class and object.

7 Create an object of a class and access class attributes

8 Create class methods

9 Create a class to read and add two distance

10 Create a class for student to get and print details of a student.

11 Demonstrate example of friend function with class

12 Implement inheritance.

Sr.

No. Write JAVA Program to

1 Display addition of number

2 Accept marks from user, if Marks greater than 40,declare the student as

“Pass” else “Fail””

3 Accept 3 numbers from user. Compare them and declare the largest

number (Using if -else statement).

4 Display sum of first 10 even numbers using do -while loop.

5 Display Multiplication table of 15 using while loop.

6 Display basic calculator using Switch Statement.

7 Display the sum of elements of arrays.

8 Accept and display the string entered and execute at least 5 different string

functions on it.

9 Read and display the numbers as command line Arguments and display

the addition of them

10 Define a class, describe its constructor, overload the Constructors and

instantiate its object.

11 Illustrate method of overloading

12 Demonstrate Parameterized Constructor

13 Implement Multiple Inheritance using interface

14 Create thread by implementing 'runnable' interface or creating 'Thread

Class.

15 Demonstrate Hello World Applet Example

## Page 115

Textbooks:

1. Bjarne Stroustrup, “The C++ Programming language”, Third edition, Pearson Education.

2. Yashwant Kanitkar, “Let Us Java”, 2nd Edition, BPB Publications.

3. D.T. Editorial Serv ices, “Java 8 Programming Black Book”, Dreamtech Press,

Edition: 2015

4. Deitel, “C++ How to Program”, 4th Edition, Pe arson Education.

Reference Books:

1. Herbert Schidt, “The Complete Reference”, Tata McGraw -Hill Publishing

Company Limited, Ninth Edition.

2. Java: How to Program, 8/e, Dietal, PHI.

3. Grady Booch, James Rumbaugh, Ivar Jacobson, “The Unified Modeling

Languageser Guide”, Pearson Education.

4. Sachin Malhotra, Saurabh Chaudhary “Programming in Java”, Oxford

University Press, 2010.

Skill -Enhancement:

1. The students should be trained to code in Eclipse (an industry accepted software

tool). Also, for a given problem statement, there is need to include external

library files (other than JDK files). Moreover, the students need to be trained on

Maven (a build tool).

2. Real-life mini -problem statements from software companies (coming in for

placement) to be de legated to groups of 3 -4 students each and each group to

work on the solution for 8 -12 hours (last 2 lab sessions).

Software Tools:

1. Raptor -Flowchart Simulation :http://raptor.martincarlisle.com/

2. Eclipse: https://eclipse.org/

3. Netbeans:https://netbeans.org/downloads/

4. CodeBlock: http://www.codeblocks.org/

5. J-Edit/J -Editor/Blue J

Online Repository:

1. Google Drive

2. GitHub

## Page 116

Term Work:

At least 08 experiments ( 04 experiments each on C++ and JAVA ) covering entire syllabus shou ld be

set to have well predefined inference and conclusion. Teacher should refer the su ggested experiments

and can design additional experiment to maintain better understanding and quality.

The experiments should be students centric and attempt should be m ade to make experiments more

meaningful, interesting and innovative.

Term work assessment must be based on the overall performance of the student with every

Experiments are graded from time to time.

The grades will be converted to marks as per “ Choice Bas ed Credit and Grading System ” manual

and should be added and averaged. Based on above scheme grading and term work assessment should

be done.

The practical and oral examination will be based on entire syllabus. Students are encouraged to share

their exper iments codes on online repository. Practical exam should cover all 08 experimen ts for

examination.

## Page 117

ECM301 - Mini Project 1A

Course

Code Course Name Teaching Scheme

(Hrs.) Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total

ECM301 Mini Project 1A -- 04$ -- -- 2 -- 2

Course

Code Course Name Examination Scheme

Theory Marks Term

Work Practical

And Oral Total

Internal assessment End

Sem.

Exam Test1 Test2 Avg. Of

Test1

and

Test2

ECM301 Mini Project 1A -- -- -- -- 25 25 50

$ Indicate s work load of a learner (Not Faculty) for Mini Project 1A. Faculty Load: 1 hour per

week per four groups.

Objectives

1. To acquaint with the process of identifying the needs and converting it into the

problem.

2. To familiarize the process of solving the proble m in a group.

3. To acquaint with the process of applying basic engineering fundamentals to attempt

solutions to the problems.

4. To inculcate the process of self -learning and research.

Outcome: At the end of the course learners will be able to…

1. Identify problem s based on societal /research needs.

2. Apply Knowledge and skill to solve societal problems in a group.

3. Develop interpersonal skills to work as member of a group or leader.

4. Draw the proper inferences from available results through theoretical/

experimental/s imulati ons.

5. Analyse the impact of solutions in societal and environmental context for sustainable

development.

6. Use standard norms of engineering practices

7. Excel in written and oral communication.

8. Demonstrate capabilities of self -learning in a group, which leads to life long learning.

9. Demonstrate project management principles during project work.

## Page 118

Guidelines for Mini Project

• Students shall form a group of 3 to 4 students, while form ing a group shall not be

allowed less than three or more than four students, as it is a group activity.

• Students should do survey and identify needs, which shall be converted into problem

statement for mini project in consultation with faculty supervisor/h ead of

department/internal committee of faculties.

• Students shall submit impl ementation plan in the form of Gantt/PERT/CPM chart,

which will cover weekly activity of mini project.

• A log book to be prepared by each group, wherein group can record weekly work

progress, guide/supervisor can verify and record notes/comments.

• Faculty su pervisor may give inputs to students during mini project activity; however,

focus shall be on self -learning.

• Students in a group shall understand problem effectively, propose multiple solution and

select best possible solution in consultation with guide/ supervisor.

• Students shall convert the best solution into working model using various components

of their domain areas and demonstrate.

• The solution to be validated with proper justification and report to be compiled in

standard format of University of Mumb ai.

• With the focus on the self -learning, innovation, addressing societal problems and

entrepreneurship quality development within the students through the Mini Projects, it

is preferable that a single project of appropriate level and quality to be carried out in

two semesters by all the groups of the students. i.e. Mini Project 1 in semester III and

IV. Similarly, Mini Project 2 in semesters V and VI.

• Howev er, based on the individual students or group capability, with the mentor’s

recommendations, if the pr oposed Mini Project adhering to the qualitative aspects

mentioned above gets completed in odd semester, then that group can be allowed to

work on the exte nsion of the Mini Project with suitable improvements/modifications or

a completely new project idea in even semester. This policy can be adopted on case by

case basis.

Guidelines for Assessment of Mini Project: Term

Work

• The review/ progress monitoring committee shall be constituted by head of

departments of each institute. The progress of mini project to be evaluated on

continuous basis, minimum two reviews in each semester.

• In continuous assessment focus shall also be on each individual stud ent,

assessment based on individual’s contribution in group activity, their

understanding and response to questions.

• Distribution of Term work marks for both semesters shall be as below;

o Marks awarded by guide/supervisor based on log book : 10

o Marks awarde d by review committee 10

o Quality of Project report 05

Review/progress monitoring committee may consider following po ints for assessment

based on either one year or half year project as mentioned in general guidelines.

## Page 119

AC -23/02/2021

Item No. – 6.11-13

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI

Bachelor of Engineering

in

Instrumentation Engineering

Direct Second Year (Sem. III) Admitted Students for the

current Academic Year 2020 -21(Only)

(REV - 2019 ‘C’ Scheme) from Academic Year 2019 – 20

Under

FACULTY OF

SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY

As per AICTE guidelines with effect from the academic year 2019 –2020)

## Page 120

Program Structure for Second Year Instrumentation Engineering

Scheme for Semester - III

Course

Code Course Name Teaching Scheme

(Contact Hours)

Credits Assigned

Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total

ISC301 Engineering Mathematics -III

3 -- 1 3 -- 1 4

ISC302 Transducers -I 4 -- 4 -- 4

ISC303 Analog Electronics 3 -- -- 3 -- -- 3

ISC304 Digital Electronics 3 -- -- 3 -- -- 3

ISC305 Electrical Networks and

Measurements 4 -- -- 4 -- -- 4

ISL301 Transducers -I - Lab -- 2 -- -- 1 -- 1

ISL302 Analog Electronics - Lab -- 2 -- -- 1 -- 1

ISL303 Digital Electronics - Lab -- 2 -- -- 1 -- 1

ISL304 Object Oriented

Program ming Lab -- 3# -- -- 1.5 -- 1.5

ISM301 Mini Project – 1 A -- 3$ -- -- 1.5 -- 1.5

Total 17 12 1 17 06 1 24

Course

Code Course Name Examination Scheme

Theory Term

Work PR &

OR Total

Internal Assessment End

Sem.

Exam Exam.

Duration

(in Hrs)

Test 1 Test2 Avg.

ISC301 Engineering Mathematics -III

20 20 20 80 3 25 -- 125

ISC302 Transducers -I 20 20 20 80 3 -- -- 100

ISC303 Analog Electronics 20 20 20 80 3 -- -- 100

ISC304 Digital Electronics 20 20 20 80 3 -- -- 100

ISC305 Electrical Networks and

Measurements 20 20 20 80 3 -- -- 100

ISL301 Transducers -I - Lab -- -- -- -- -- 25 25 50

ISL302 Analog Electronics - Lab -- -- -- -- -- 25 25 50

ISL303 Digital Electronics - Lab -- -- -- -- -- 25 25 50

ISL304 Object Oriented

Programming Lab -- -- -- -- -- 25 25 50

ISM301 Mini Project – 1 A -- -- -- -- -- 25 25 50

Total -- -- 100 400 -- 150 125 775

## Page 121

Subject

code Subject Name Teaching scheme Credit assigned

ISC301 Engineering

Mathematics -

III Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total

3 -- 1 3 -- 1 4

Subject

code Subject Name Examination scheme

Theory (out of 100)

Term

work Pract.

and

Oral Oral Total Internal

Assessment End

sem

Exam Test1 Test2 Avg.

ISC301 Engineering

Mathematics -

III 20 20 20 80 25 - - 125

Subject Code Subject Name Credits

ISC30 1 Engineering Mathematics -III 4

Course Objectives The course is aimed

1. To familiarize with the Laplace Transform, Inverse Laplace

Transform of various functions, and its applications.

2. To acquaint with the concept of Fourier Series, its complex

form and enhance the problem solving skills

3. To familiarize the concept of complex variables, C -R

equations, harmonic functions, its conjugate and mapping in

complex plane.

4. To understand the basics of Linear Algebra and its

applications

5. To use concepts of vector calculus to analy ze and model

engineering problems.

Course Outcomes On successful completion of course learner/student will be able

to:

1. Apply the concept of Laplace transform to solve the real

integrals in engineering problems.

2. Apply the concept of inverse Laplace transform of various

functions in engineering problems.

3. Expand the periodic function by using Fourier series for real

life problems and complex engineering problems.

4. Find orthogonal trajectories and analytic function by using

basic concepts of complex variables.

5. Illustrate the use of matrix algebra to solve the engineering

problems.

6. Apply the concepts of vector calculus in real life problems.

## Page 122

Pre-requisite: Engineering Mathematics -I, Engineering Mathematics -II, Scalar and Vector

Product: Scalar and vector pr oduct of three and four vectors.

Module Detailed Contents Hrs.

01 Module: Laplace Transform

1.1 Definition of Laplace transform, Condition of Existence of Laplace transform.

1.2 Laplace Transform (L) of Standard Functions like ( ) ( )

( ) ( ) and .

1.3 Properties of Laplace Transform: Linearity, First Shifting theorem, Second

Shifting Theorem, change of scale Property, multiplication by t, Division by t,

Laplace Transform of derivatives and integrals (Properties without proof).

1.4 Evaluation of integrals by using Laplace Transformation.

Self-learning Topics: Heaviside’s Unit Step function, Laplace Transform of

Periodic functions, Dirac Delta Function. CO-1

7

02 Module: Inverse Laplace Transform

2.1 Inverse Laplace Transform, Linearity proper ty, use of standard formulae to find

inverse Laplace Transform, finding I nverse Laplace transform using derivatives.

2.2 Partial fractions method to find inverse Laplace transform.

2.3 Inverse Laplace transform using Convo lution theorem (without proof).

Self-learning Topics: Applications to solve initial and boundary value problems

involving ordinary differential equations. CO-2

6

03 Module: Fourier Series:

3.1 Dirichlet’s conditions, Definition of Fourier series and Parseval’s Identity

(without proof).

3.2 Fourier series of periodic function with period 2 and 2l.

3.3 Fourier series of even and odd functions.

3.4 Half range Sine and Cosine Series.

Self-learning Topics: Complex form of Fourier Series, Orthogonal and orthonormal

set of functions. Fourier Transform. CO-3

7

04 Module: Complex Variables:

4.1 Function f(z) of complex variable, limit, continuity and differentiability of f(z)

Analytic function, necessary and sufficient conditions for f(z) to be analytic (without

proof).

4.2 Cauchy -Riemann equations in cartesian coordinates (without proof).

4.3 Milne -Thomson method to determine analytic function f(z)when real part (u) or

Imagina ry part (v) or its combination (u+v or u -v) is given.

4.4 Harmonic function, Harmonic conjugate and orthogonal trajec tories

Self-learning Topics: Conformal mapping, linear, bilinear mapping, cross ratio, CO-4

7

## Page 123

fixed points and standard transformations.

05 Module: Linear Algebra: Matrix Theory

5.1 Characteristic equation, Eigen values and Eigen vectors, Example based on

properties of Eigen values and Eigen vectors. (Without Proof).

5.2 Cayley -Hamilton theorem (Without proof), Ex amples based on verification of

Cayley - Hamilton theorem and compute inverse of Matrix.

5.3 Similarity of matrices, Diagonalization of matri ces. Functions of square matrix

Self-learning Topics: Application of Matrix Theory in machine learning and google

page rank algorithms, derogatory and non -derogatory

matrices . CO-5

6

06 Module: Vector Differentiation and Integra l

6.1 Vector differentiation : Basics of Gradient, Divergence and Curl (Without

Proof).

6.2 Properties of vector field: Solenoidal and irrotational (conservative) vector

fields.

6.3 Vector integral: Line Integral, Green’s theorem in a plane (Without Proof),

Stokes’ theorem (Without Proof) only evaluation.

Self-learning Topics: Gauss’ divergence Theorem and applications of Vector

calculus . CO-6

6

Term Work:

General Instructions:

1. Students must be encouraged to write at least 6 class tutorials on entire syllabus.

2. A group of 4 - 6 students should be assigned a self -learning topic. Students should prepare

a presentation/ problem solving of 10 -15 minutes. This should be considered as mini

project in Engineering mathematics. This project should be graded for 10 marks d epending

on the performance of the students.

The distribution of Term Work marks will be as follows –

1. Attendance (Theory and Tutorial) 05 marks

2. Class Tutorials on entire syllabus 10 marks

3. Mini project 10 marks

## Page 124

Assessment :

Internal Assessment Test:

Assessment consists of two class tests of 20 marks each. The first -class test (Internal

Assessment I) is to be conducted when approx. 40% syllabus is completed and second

class test (Internal Assessment II) when additional 35% syllabus is completed. Duration

of each test shall be one hour.

End Semester Theory Examination:

1. Question paper will comprise of total 06 questions, each carrying 20 marks.

2. Total 04 questions need to be solved.

3. Question No: 01 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein 4 sub -questions

of 5 marks each will be asked.

4. Remaining questions will be randomly selected from all the modules.

5. Weightage of each module will be proportional to number of respective lecture hours as

mentioned in the syllabus.

Reference s:-

1. Advanced engineering mathematics, H.K. Das, S. Chand, Publications

2. Higher Engineering Mathematics, B. V. Ramana, Tata Mc -Graw Hill Publication

3. Advanced Engineering Mathematics, R. K. Jain and S. R. K. Iyengar, Narosa publication

4. Advanced E ngineering Mathematics, Wylie and Barret, Tata Mc -Graw Hill.

5. Theory and Problems of Fourier Analysis with applications to BVP, Murray Spiegel,

Schaum’s Outline Series

6. Vector Analysis Murry R. Spiegel, Schaum’s outline series, Mc -Graw Hill Publication

7. Beginning Linear Algebra, Seymour Lipschutz, Schaum’s outline series, Mc -Graw Hill

Publication

8. Higher Engineering Mathematics, Dr. B. S. Grewal, Khanna Publication

## Page 125

Subject

code Subject Name Teaching scheme Credit assigned

ISC302 Transducers –I Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total

4 - - 4 - - 4

Subject

code Subject Name Examination scheme

Theory (out of 100)

Term

work Pract.

and

Oral Oral Total Internal Assessment End

sem

Exam Test1 Test2 Avg.

ISC302 Transducers –I 20 20 20 80 - - - 100

Subject

Code Subject Name Credits

ISC302 Transducers -I 4

Course

objectives 1.To introduce the students for the purpose of explaining the

measurement systems, errors of measurement.

2.To understand the sensors and transducers concept, operation and its

applications in the various industry.

3.To familiarize the student with the Identification, classification,

construction, working principle and application of various

transducers used for Displacement, level, temperat ure, speed and

vibration measurement.

Course

Outcomes The students will be able to:

1.Explain the measurement systems, sources errors of measurement

2.List various standards used for selection of transducers/sensors.

3.To describe, draw, classify and produced sketches, drawings to

explain working principles of various displacement sensors and

transducers.

4.Interpret the characteristics of different temperature

transducers/sensors also discuss working principle of transducers used

for temperature measu rement.

5. To create, design, formulate, generate and deliver the solutions for

given applications using best applicable level sensors and transducer

6. To analyze the problem using basic principles for development of

speed and vibration measurement pro ject for Automobiles,

Environmental, agriculture, biomedical, Petrochemical or other process

industries.

## Page 126

Details of Syllabus:

Module Contents Hours CO

mapping

1. Instrumentation System

Introduction, block diagram, functional elements of

measurement system, static and dynamic characterstics of

transducer, measurement and calibration systems. 2 CO1

2. Sensor and Transducer:

Definition, working principle, classification (active,

passive, primary, secondary, mechanical, electrical, analog,

digital), selection criteria. 2 CO2

3. Displacement transducers : Resistive type transducers:

potentiometer (linear and logarithmic), piezo -resistive effect.

Inductive type transducers: LVDT, RVDT

(transferfunction, linearity, sensitivity, source, frequency

dependence, phase null, and signal conditioning).

Capacitive type transducers: Linear and rotary (with

change in distance between plates, change in dielectric

constant and change in o verlapping area). 6 CO3

4. Temperature transducers:

Resistance temperature detector (RTD): Principle, types,

Configurations, construction and working of RTD, Material

for RTD, Signal Measurement techniques for RTD,

Comparative Response curves for RTD, 2 wire,3 wire and 4

wire RTD Element, Lead wire Compensation in RTD, self -

heating effect, Specifications, advantages, disadvantages and

applications of RTD and sums. Thermistors: Principle, types

(NTC and PTC), characteristics, Construction and working

of Thermistor, Materials, specifications of Thermistor,

applications and sums.

Thermocouples: Principle, thermoelectric effect, See beck

effect, Peltier effect, laws of thermocouple, types of

thermocouple with characteristic curve, thermocouple table,

Sensitivity, constructional features of Thermocouples.

Thermocouple specifications, cold junction Compensation

method and sums.

Pyrometers: Principle, Construction and working of

Radiation and optical pyrometers and its applications.

Comparative study for Temperature Transducers. 7 CO4

5. Level Transducers :

working principle, types, materials, design criterion: float,

displacers, bubbler, and DP - cell, ultrasonic, capacitive

types. 4 CO5

6. Speed and Vibration Measurement: electromagnetic

transducers (moving coil, moving magnet), AC and DC

tachometers: Hall Effect proximity pickup, photoelectric,

LVDT. 3 CO6

## Page 127

Internal Assessment:

Internal Assessment consists of two tests out of which, one should be a

compulsory class test (on minimum 02 Modules) and the other is either a class

test or assignment on live problems or course project.

Theory Examination:

1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 Marks.

2. Total 4 questions need to be solved.

3. Question No. 1 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein sub

questions of 4 to 5 marks will be asked.

4. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature.

5. In question paper weightage of each module will be proportional to number of

respective lecture hours as menti oned in the syllabus.

Text Books:

1. B.C Nakra, K.K. Chaudhary, Instrumentation, Measurement and Analysis, Tata

McGraw -Hill Education, 01 -Oct-2003 - Electronic instruments - 632 page .

2. Patranabis D , Sensors and Transducers, Prentice Hall India Learning Private

Limited; 2 edition (2003) - 344 pages.

3. A. K. Sawhney, Puneet Sawhney,A course in Electrical and Electronic

Measurement and Instrumentation, Dhanpat Rai and Co. Rai, 1996 -

4. Rangan, Mani, Sharma.Instrumentation systems and Devices,2ndEd.,Tata McGraw

Hill.

5. D.V.S. Murthi, “Instrumentation and Measurement Principles”, PHI, New Delhi,

Second ed. 2003.

Reference Books:

1. Doeblin E.D., Measurement system, Tata McGraw Hill., 4th ed, 2003.

2. Bela G. Liptak , Instrument Engineers' Ha ndbook, Fourth Edition, Volume One:

Process Measurement and Analysis, June 27, 2003.

3. Neubert Hermann K. P., Instrument Transducer, 2nd ed., Oxford University Press,

New Delhi, 2003.

4. Johnson Curtis D., Process Control Instrumentation Technology, 8th Ed., 2005

5. S.P. Sukhatme, Heat Transfer, 3rd edition, University Press.

6. B.E. Jones, Instrument Technology.

7. Chortle Keith R., Fundamentals of Test, Measurement Instrument Instrumentation,

ISA Publication.

8. Alan S Morris, Measurement and Instrumentation Principles; 3rd Edition

## Page 128

Subject

code Subject Name Teaching scheme Credit assigned

ISL301 Transducers –I

Lab Practice Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total

- 02 - - 1 - 1

Subject

code Subject Name Examination scheme

Theory (out of 100)

Term

work Pract.

and

Oral Oral Total Internal Assessment End

sem

Exam Test1 Test2 Avg.

ISL301 Transducers –I

Lab Practice - - - - 25 25 - 50

Subject

Code Subject Name Credits

ISL301 Transducer –I Lab Practice 1

Course

objective 1. To make students understand the Identification, construction, working

principle of various transducers used for Displacement measurement,

Temperature measurement, Level measurement and miscellaneous

measurement

2. To experimentally verify the principle and characteristics of various

transducers

Course

Outcome The students will be able to

1. Demonstrate various measurement techniques and measuring instruments.

2. Classify sensors, Transducers, and their brief Performance specifications

3. Plot and validate the performance characteristics of displacement

transducers

4. Validate the characteristics of various temperature transducers.

5. Describe the construction and operation of various level transducers

6. To demonstrate the performance characteri stics of miscellaneous

transducers.

Syllabus: Same as that of Subject ISC302 Transducers - I.

## Page 129

List of Laboratory Experiments:

Sr.

No. Detailed Contents CO

mapping

1. Demonstrate the basic measurements techniques and Measuring

Instruments. CO1

2. Displacement measurement using Potentiometer. CO3

3. To determine characteristics of RTD CO4

4. To determine characteristics of various Thermocouples. CO4

5. To determine characteristics of Thermistors. CO4

6. To study Temperature Measurement with and without Thermo -well. CO4

7. Liquid Level Measurement using DP Cell. CO5

8. To evaluate performance characteristics capacitive level sensor. CO5

9. Liquid Level Measurement using Tubular Level Gauge and ultra -

sonic sensor CO5

10. To determine the LVDT characteristics. CO3

Any other experiments based on syllabus which will help students to understand

topic/concept.

Term Work:

Term work shall consist of minimum five experiments .

The distribution of marks for term work shall be as follows:

Laboratory work (Experiments): 10 Marks

Laboratory work (programs / journal): 10 Marks

Attendance (Practical): 5 Marks

The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures the satisfactory

performance of Laboratory work and minimum passing in the term work.

Practical/Oral Examination:

Practical/Oral examination will be based on entire syllabus.

## Page 130

Subject

code Subject

Name Teaching scheme Credit assigned

ISC303 Analog

Electronics Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total

3 - - 3 - - 3

Sub

Code Subject

Name Examination scheme

Theory (out of 100)

Term

work Pract.

and

Oral Oral Total Internal Assessment End

sem

Exam Test1 Test2 Avg.

ISC303 Analog

Electronics 20 20 20 80 - - - 100

Subject Code Subject Name Credits

ISC303 Analog Electronics 3

Course Objectives 1. To familiarize the student with basic electronic devices and

circuits.

2. To provide understanding of applications of diodes, bipolar and

MOS FET, DC biasing circuits, AC analysis and low and high

Frequency response ,

3. To introduce the students the basic construction of differential

amplifier and its types. Different types of power amplifiers.

Course Outcomes Students will be able to :

1. Explain working of Diode and DC analysis of Transistor.

2. Analyze, simulate, and design amplifiers using BJT biasing

techniques, frequency response.

3. Analyze circuits using FET characteristics and DC analysis.

4. Analyze circuits using MOS FET characteristics and analysis,

Frequency response.

5. Differential amplifier configurati on using transistor and frequency

response.

6. Types of power amplifiers and power supply.

## Page 131

Module Contents Hrs. CO

mapping

Pre-requisite

Introduction of P N junction,

1. Bipolar Junction Transistor:

Bipolar Junction Transistor, Device structure and physical

operation, characteristics, the BJT as an amplifier and a switch,

DC Analysis of BJT Circuits (Potential Divider Circuit only) ,

Biasing BJT Amplifier Circuits, 05 CO1

2. BJT AC Analysis:

Amplification in AC domain, BJT transistor modelling, The r e

Transistor model, Single stage BJT amplifiers CE configuration

(with and without feedback), Small Signal equivalent circuit,

frequency response of a CE amplifier, 03 CO2

3. Field effect Transistors:

Introduction to JFET, Types, Construction, Operation, Static

Characteristics, Pinch off voltage, FET Configurations (CS).

Biasing of FET.

03 CO3

4. MOS Field effect Transistors:

Introduction to MOSFET as basic element in VLSI, Device

structure and physical operation, current – voltage

characteristics, the MOSFET as an amplifier and a switch, DC

Analysis of MOSFET Circuits, Biasing MOSFET (No

Numricals) 03 CO4

5. Differential and Multistage Amplifiers:

Preview, the Differential Amplifier, Basic BJT Differential Pair

(SIBO, SIUO, DIBO, DIUO), Capacitive coupled and Direct

coupled multistage amplifier.

02 CO5

6. Power Amplifier:

Definition and amplifier types, Series fed class A amplifier,

Class B amplifier operation and circuits, Voltage regulation,

Basic linear series and shunt Regulators,

Power supply design using 78xx series, 79xx series and

adjustable voltage IC regulators 317. Switched Mode Power

Supply (SMPS) block Diagram. 04 CO6

## Page 132

Internal Assessment:

Internal Assessment consists of two tests out of which, one should be compulsory class

test (on Minimum 02 Modules) and the other is either a class test or assignment on live

problems or Course project.

Theory Examination:

1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 Marks.

2. Total 4 questions need to be solved.

3. Question No. 1 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein sub

questions of 4 to 5 marks will be asked.

4. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature.

5. In question paper weightage of each module will be proportional to number of

respective lecture hours as mentioned in the syllabus.

Text Books:

1. Robert L. Boyl estad, Louis Nashelsky, “Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory”, PHI

publishers, 2004

2. Thomas L. Floyd,” Electronic Devices”, Pearson 2015.

3. Adel S. Sedra, Kenneth C. Smith & Arun N. Chandorkar , “ Microelectronic Circuits,:

Theory and Applications” , OUP, 2013

4. D. A. Neamen, “Micro Electronic Circuit Analysis and Design ”, McGraw -Hill, New

Delhi, 2010.

Reference Books:

1. J. Millman and C. C. Halkias , “Integrated Electronics: Analog and Digital Circuits

and Systems”, Tata McGraw -Hill Publishing Compa ny, 1988.

2. D. A. Bell, “Electronic Devices and Circuits ”, OUP, India, 2010.

3. T. F. Boghart, J. S. Beasley and G. Rico, “Electronic Devices and Circuits ”, Pearson

Education, 2004.

## Page 133

Subject

code Subject Name Teaching scheme Credit assigned

ISL302 Analog

Electronics Lab

practice Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total

-- 2 -- -- 1 -- 1

Subject

Code Subject Name Examination scheme

Theory (out of 100)

Term

work Pract.

and

Oral Oral Total Internal

Assessment End

sem

Exam

Test1 Test2 Avg.

ISL302 Analog

Electronics Lab

practice -- -- -- -- 25 25 50

Subject Code Subject Name Credits

ISL302 Analog Electronics 1

Course Objectives 1. To familiarize the student with basic electronic devices and

circuits.

2. To provide understanding of applications of diodes, bipolar and

MOS FET, DC biasing circuits, AC analysis and low and high

Frequency response ,

3. To introduce the students the basic construction of differential

amplifier and its types. Different types of power amplifiers.

Course Outcomes Students will be able to :

1. Explain working of Diode and DC analysis of Transistor.

2. Analyze, simulate, and design amplifiers using BJT biasing

techniques, frequency response.

3. Analyze circuits using FET characteristics and DC analysis. .

4. Analyze circuits using MOS FET characteristics and analysis,

Frequency response.

5. Differential amplifier configuration using transistor and frequency

response.

6. Types of power amplifiers and power supply.

Syllabus : Same as that of Subject ISC303 Analog Electronics.

## Page 134

List of Experiment s:

Sr.

No Contents CO

mapping

1. Verify the input -output characteristics of BJT in CE configuration. CO1

2. Implement ation of a biasing circuit for BJT and estimate the parameters. CO1

3. Plot and validate the frequency response of BJT amplifier. CO1

4. Analyse the JFET circuit and validate its transfer characteristics. CO2

5. Plot and validate the frequency response of FET amplifier. CO3

6. Analyse the MOSFET circuit and validate its transfer characteristics. CO3

7. Simulate the multistage amplifier and analyse its frequency response with

the help of simulation software. CO4

8. Simulate the differential amplifier and analyse its frequency response with

the help of simulation software. CO4

9. Simulate the class A power amplifier and analyse with the help of

simulation software. CO5

10. Design of fixed voltage regulator using adjustabl e regulator IC. CO5

Any other experiment based on syllabus which will help stude nts to understand

topic/concept.

Practical and Oral Examination:

Practical and Oral examination will be based on entire syllabus of ISC303 Analog

Electronics .

Term Work:

Term work shall consist of minimum 0 4 experiments and any one practical should be verified

with software.

The distribution of marks for term work shall be as follows:

Laboratory work (Experiments) : 10 Marks

Laboratory work (progra ms / journal) : 10 Marks

Attendance : 05 Marks

The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures the satisfactory performance of

laboratory work and minimum passing in the term work.

## Page 135

Subject

code Subject

Name Teaching scheme Credit assigned

ISC304 Digital

Electronics Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total

3 - - 3 - - 3

Sub

Code Subject

Name Examination scheme

Theory (out of 100)

Term

work Pract.

and

Oral Oral Total Internal Assessment End

sem

Exam Test1 Test2 Avg.

ISC304 Digital

Electronics 20 20 20 80 - - - 100

Subject Code Subject Name Credits

ISC304 Digital Electronics 3

Course Objectives 1. To provide an understanding of the principles of digital

electronics and use of number systems .

2. To give knowledge about combinational circuits,

3. To describe working and design methods of sequential circuits.

4. To familiarize with the basics of asynchronous sequential circuits

and design techniques.

5. To provide understanding of memory devices and state machines.

6. To make the students understand basic logic families and their

applications.

Course Outcomes Students will be able to :

1. Represent numerical values in various number systems and

perform number conversions between different number systems.

2. Explain operation of logic gates using IEEE/ANSI standard

symbols. Analyze and design, digital combinational circuits.

3. Analyze and design, sequential logic circuits.

4. Analyze and design, asynchronous sequential logic circuits.

5. Explain nomenclature and technology in memory devices.

6. Analyze logic families and their application to design the digital

system.

Module Contents Hours

## Page 136

Pre-requisite

Knowledge of number systems and Boolean logic .

1. Binary number system:

Binary Arithmetic, Binary codes, Gray code, Error detecting code.

Reduction methods: De-Morgan’s Theorem, Sum of Products (SOP),

Product of Sums (POS), Karnaugh map Minimization, Don‘t care

conditions. 03

2. Design of combinational logic circuits:

Adders, Subtractors, Parity checker, Multiplexer, De multiplexer (up to

16:1 and 1:16) , Encoder and Decoder. Implementation of combinational

logic circuits using Multiplexer and Demultiplexer. 06

3. Sequential logic circuits :

Flip flops - SR, D and Master slave JK, T, Asynchronous & Synchronous

counters, shift registers. 03

4. Asynchronous sequential circuits:

Circuit Design – primitive state / flow table, Minimization of primitive

state table, Excitation table, 02

5. Logic families:

Basics of digital integrated circuits, basic operational characteristics and

parameters. TTL, tri -state gate ECL, CMOS , comparison of logic

families (TTL/ECL/CMOS) . 03

6. Memory and programmable logic devices:

PROM / EPROM / EEPROM / EAPROM Programmable Logic Devices

–Programmable Logic Array (PLA), Programmable Array Logic (PAL), 03

Internal Assessment: Internal Assessment consists of two tests out of which, one should be

compulsory class test (on Minimum 02 Modules) and the other is either a class test or

assignment on live problems or Course project.

Theory Examination:

1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 Marks.

2. Total 4 questions need to be solved.

3. Question No. 1 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein sub

questions of 4 to 5 marks will be asked.

4. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature.

5. In question paper weightage of each module will be proportional to number of

respective lecture hours as mentioned in the syllabus.

Text Books

1. M. Morris Mano, “Digital Design”, Prentice Hall of India, 2003.

2. John .M Yarbrough, “Digital Logic Applications and Design”, Thomson -Vikas

publishing house, 2002.

3. Barry B. Brey, “The Intel Microprocessors ”, Pearson/Prentice Hall, 2006.

## Page 137

4. B. Ram ,“Fundamentals of Microprocessors and Microcontrollers”, Dhanpat Rai

Publications , 2004.

References Books:

1. Charles H. Roth., “Fundamentals of Logic Design”, Thomson Publication

Company, 2003.

2. Donald P. Leach and Albert Paul Malvino , “Digital Principles and Applications”,

Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited, 2003.

3. R.P.Jain, “Modern Digital Electronics”, Tata McGraw –Hill publishing company

limited, 2003.

4. Thomas L. Floyd, “Digital Fundam entals”, Pearson Education, 2003 .

## Page 138

Subject

code Subject Name Teaching scheme Credit assigned

ISL303 Digital

Electronics Lab

practice Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total

-- 2 -- -- 1 -- 1

Subject

Code Subject Name Examination scheme

Theory (out of 100)

Term

work Pract.

and

Oral Oral Total Internal

Assessment End

sem

Exam

Test1 Test2 Avg.

ISL30 3 Digital

Electronics Lab

practice -- -- -- -- 25 25 50

Subject Code Subject Name Credits

ISL303 Digital Electronics 1

Course

Objectives 1. To provide an understanding of the principles of digital electronics and

use of number systems .

2. To give knowledge about combinational circuits,

3. To describe working and design methods of sequential circuits.

4. To familiarize with the basics of asynchronous sequential circuits

and design techniques.

5. To provide understanding of memory devices and state machines.

6. To make the students understand basic logic families and their

applications.

Course

Outcomes Students will be able to :

1. Represent numerical values in various number systems and

perform number conversions between different number systems.

2. Explain operation of logic gates using IEEE/ANSI standard

symbols. Analyze and design, digital combinational circuits.

3. Analyze and design, sequential logic circuits.

4. Analyze and design, asynchronous sequential logic circuits.

5. Explain nomenclature and technology in memory devices.

6. Analyze logic families and their application to design the digital

system.

Syllabus : Same as that of Subject ISC304Digital Electronics.

## Page 139

List of Experiments:

Sr.

No Detailed Contents CO

Mapping

1 Implement conversion of Gray/B inary code. CO1

2 Truth table verification and implementation of all gates using Universal gates . CO2

3 Implementation of half/ full adder/ Subtractor . CO2

4 Realise full adder using Multiplexer . CO3

5 Realise full Subtractor using Multiplexer . CO3

6 Implementation of various flip -flops . CO3

7 Implement BCD to seven segments display . CO4

8 Design and implement universal shift register . CO4

Any other experiment based on syllabus which will help stude nts to understand

topic/concept.

Practical and Oral Examination:

Practical and Oral examination will be based on entire syllabus of ISC304Digital

Electronics .

Term Work:

Term work shall consist of minimum 0 4 experiments and any ONE experiment should be

verify using any software.

The distribution of marks for term work shall be as follows:

Laboratory work ( Experiments) : 10 Marks

Laboratory work (programs / journal ): 10 Marks

Attendance : 05 Marks

The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures the satisfactory performance of

laboratory work and minimum pa ssing in the term work.

## Page 140

Subject

code Subject

Name Teaching scheme Credit assigned

ISC305 Electrical

Networks

and

Measurement Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total

2 - - 2 - - 3

Sub

Code Subject

Name Examination scheme

Theory (out of 100)

Term

work Pract.

and

Oral Oral Total Internal Assessment End

sem

Exam Test1 Test2 Avg.

ISC305 Electrical

Networks

and

Measurement 20 20 20 80 - - - 100

Subject Code Subject Name Credits

ISC305 Electrical Networks and Measurement 3

Course

Objectives 1. To introduce the concept of circuit elements lumped circuits, circuit laws and

reduction.

2. To introduce the concept of circuit elements and analyze DC and AC circuits

using various theorems.

3. To analyze the transient response of series and parallel A.C. circuits.

4. To analyze two port model of circuit and evaluate its parameters.

5. To synthesize the circuits using different techniques.

6. To demonstrate basic analog and digital Instrumen ts.

7. To identify the various techniques for measurement of R -L-C.

Course

Outcomes On successful completion of course learner/student will be able to:

1. Analyze AC and DC circuits using different theorems.

2. Evaluate transient and steady -state the parameters of passive electrical

networks.

3. Analyze network using poles and zeros and determine their parameters like

Z, Y, and ABCD.

4. Synthesize the networks using canonical forms.

5. Demonstrate construct ion and working principle and applications of analog

and digital instruments.

6. Formulate electrical bridges and evaluate electrical parameter like R, L, C.

## Page 141

Details of Syllabus:

Prerequisite: Knowledge of Matrix algebra, Root -locus, Bode -plot and Nyquist stability

criterion.

Module Contents Hrs. CO

mapping

1 Network Theorems

Analysis of networks with dependent sources: mesh analysis,

nodal analysis, superposition theorem, Thevenin ’s theorem ,

Norton s theorem, Ma imum power transfer theorem. 08 CO1

2 Transient Analysis

Initial Conditions in Elements, Solution of a First order and

Second order differential equations. 03 CO2

3 Network Functions and Two -Port parameters

Network functions for one port and two port networks,

driving point and transfer functions, poles and zeros of

network functions

Open circuit, Short circuit, parameters of two port network. 04 CO3

4 Fundamentals of Network Synthesis.

Causality and stability, Hurwitz polynomials, positive real

functions. Properties of R -L-C Circuits. 03 CO4

5 Analog & Digital Meters

D Arsonaval galvanometers, PMMC and PMMI instruments.

Construction and working principle of: ammeters, voltmeters,

ohmmeters, energy meter, digital multimeter. 03 CO5

6 Measurement of R, L, C

Measurement of medium, low and high resistance, Megger

AC bridges, measurement of self and mutual inductances

(Maxwell). Measurement of capacitance (Schering Bridge).

Derivations 03 CO6

Internal Assessment:

Internal Assessment consists of two tests out of which, one should be compulsory class

test (on Minimum 02 Modules) and the other is either a class test or assignment on live

problems or Course project.

## Page 142

Theory Examination:

1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 Marks.

2. Total 4 questions need to be solved.

3. Question No. 1 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein sub questions of 4

to 5 marks will be asked.

4. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature.

5. In question paper weightage of each module will be proportional to number of respective

lecture hours as mentioned in the syllabus.

Text Books:

1. Kuo Franklin F., “Network analysis and synthesis”, Wiley International, 1962.

2. Van Valkenburg M.E., “Network analysis”, Eastern Economy Edition, 19 83.

3. A. K. Sawhney, Puneet Sawhney, “A course in Electrical and Electronic Measurement and

Instrumentation”, Dhanpat Rai and Co. Rai, 1996.

Reference Books:

1. Hayt William, Kemmerly Jr.Jack E ., “Engineering circuit Analysis”, Tata McGraw Hill,

2002.

2. Edminister Joseph A., Nahvi Mohmood, “Electric Circuits”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1999.

3. Shyammohan Sudhakar, “Circuits and Networks Analysis and Synthesis”, Tata McGraw

Hill, 2000.

4. Ravish Singh, ― Electrical Networks Analysis and Synthesis‖, Mc -Graw Hill

## Page 143

Sub

Code Subject Name Examination scheme

Internal

Assessment End

Sem

Exam Term

work Pract.

and

Oral Oral Total

ISL304 Object Oriented

Programming and

Methodology - - - - 25 - 25 50

Subject

Code Subject Name Teaching Scheme Credits Assigned

ISL304 Object Oriented

Programming

and Methodology Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total

- 3 - - 2 - 2

#1 out of four hours two hours theory shall be taught to entire class and two hours practical in

batches

Details of Syllabus:

Prerequisite: Structured Programming Approach

Module Contents Hrs CO

Mapping

1 Introduction to Object Oriented Programming

OO Concepts: Object, Class, Encapsulation, Abstraction,

Inheritance, Polymorphism.

Features of Java, JVM

Basic Constructs/Notions: Constants, variables and data

types, Operators and Expressions, Revision of Branching and

looping 01 CO1

2 Classes, Object and Packages

Class, Object, Method.

Constructor, Static members and methods

Passing and returning Objects 02 CO2

## Page 144

Method Overloading, Packages in Java

3 Array, String and Vector

Arrays, Strings, String Buffer 01 CO3

4 Inheritance and Interface

Types of Inheritance, super keyword, Method Overriding 01 CO4

5 Exception Handling and Multithreading

Error vs Exception, try, catch, finally, throw, throws 01 CO5

6 GUI programming in JAVA

Event Handling: Event classes and event listener

Introduction to AWT: Working with windows, Using AWT

controls - push Buttons, Label, Text Fields, Text Area,

Checkbox and Radio Buttons. 01 CO6

Text books:

1. Herbert Schildt, ‘JAVA: The Complete Reference’, Ninth Edition, Oracle

Press.

2. Sachin Malhotra and Saurabh Chaudhary, “Programming in Java”, O ford

University Press, 2010

Reference Books:

1. Ivor Horton, ‘Beginning JAVA’, Wiley India.

2. Dietal and Dietal, ‘Java: How to Program’, 8/e, PHI

3. ‘JAVA Programming’, Black Book, Dreamtech Press.

List of Laboratory Experiments/ Assignments:

Sr.

No. Detailed Contents

1. Program on various ways to accept data through keyboard and unsigned

right shift operator.

## Page 145

2. Program on branching, looping, labelled break and labelled continue.

3. Program to create class with members and methods, accept and display

details for single object.

4. Program on constructor and constructor ov erloading

5. Program on method overloading

6. Program on passing object as argument and returning object

7. Program on 1D array

8. Program on String

9. Program on single and multilevel inheritance (Use super keyword)

11 Program to demonstrate try, catch, throw, throws and finally.

12 Program to create GUI application without event handling using AWT

controls

13 Mini Project based on content of the syllabus. (Group of 2 -3 students)

Term Work:

Students will submit term work in the form of journal that wi ll include:

1. At least 11 programs and mini project

2. ONE assignments/MCQ covering whole syllabus

3. Class test based on the above syllabus.

The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures the satisfactory

performance of laboratory work and minimum passing in the term work.

The distribution of marks for term work shall be as follows:

Total: 50 Marks (Total Marks) : 20 marks (Experiments),

10 marks (Mini Project),

05 marks (Assignments),

10 marks (Class Test),

05 ma rks (Attendance)

Practical and oral examination will be based on the suggested experiment list and

the entire syllabus.

## Page 146

AC -23/02/2021

Item No. – 6.11-14

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI

Bachelor of Engineering

in

Chemical Engineering

Direct Second Year (Sem. III) Admitted Students for the

current Academic Year 2020 -21(Only)

(REV - 2019 ‘C’ Scheme) from Academic Year 2019 – 20

Under

FACULTY OF

SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY

(As per AICTE guidelines with effect from the academic year 2019 –2020)

## Page 147

2

University of Mumbai

Program Structure for B.E. Chemical Engineering (Revised 2020- 2021)

Semester III

Course

code Course Name

Teaching Scheme

(Contact Hours) Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total

CHC301 Engineering Mathematics -III 3 - 1 3 - 1 4

CHC302 Industrial and Engineering

Chemistry I 3 - - 3 - - 3

CHC303 Fluid Flow Operations 3 - - 3 - - 3

CHC304 Chemical Engineering

Thermodynamics I 3 - - 3 - - 3

CHC305 Process Calculations 3 - - 3 - - 3

CHL301 Industrial and Engineering

Chemistry I Lab - 3 - - 1.5 - 1.5

CHL302 Fluid Flow Operation Lab - 3 - - 1.5 - 1.5

CHL303 Basic Chemical Engineering Lab - 3 - - 1.5 - 1.5

CHL304 Skilled Based Lab: Chemical

Technology Lab - 2*2 - - 2 - 2

CHM301 Mini Project 1A - 3# - - 1.5 - 1.5

Total 15 16 1 15 8 1 24

Course

code Course Name

Examination Scheme

Theory

Term

Work Pract/

Oral Oral Total Internal

Assessment End

Sem

Exam Exam

Duration

(in hrs) Test

1 Test

2 Avg

CHC301 Engineering Mathematics -III 20 20 20 80 3 25 - - 125

CHC302 Industrial and Engineering

Chemistry I 20 20 20 80 3 - - - 100

CHC303 Fluid Flow Operations 20 20 20 80 3 - - - 100

CHC304 Chemical Engineering

Thermodynamics I 20 20 20 80 3 - - - 100

CHC305 Process Calculations 20 20 20 80 3 - - - 100

CHL301 Industrial and Engineering

Chemistry I Lab - - - - 3 25 25 - 50

CHL302 Fluid Flow Operation Lab - - - - 3 25 25 - 50

CHL303 Basic Chemical Engineering Lab - - - - - 25 - 25 50

CHL304 Skilled Based Lab: Chemical

Technology Lab - - - - - 25 - 25 50

CHM301 Mini Project 1A - - - - - 25 - 25 50

Total - - 100 400 - 150 50 75 775

*Indicates Theory class to be conducted for full class

# indicates work load of Learner (Not Faculty), for Mini Project ;

faculty load : 1 hour per week per four groups , for Mini Project

## Page 148

3

Semester III

Course Code Course Name Credits

CHC30 1 Engineering Mathematics III 04

Course Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total

03 - 01 03 - 01 04

Theory Term

Work/Practical/Oral

Total Internal Assessment End

Sem

Exam Duration of

End Sem

Exam

TW

PR

OR Test-I Test-II Average

20 20 20 80 03 Hours 25 - - 125

Prerequisites

Engineering Mathematics -I, Engineering Mathematics -II,

Course Objectives

1. To familiarize with the Laplace Transform, Inverse Laplace Transform of various

functions, its applications.

2. To acquaint with the concept of Fourier Series, its complex form and enhance the problem

solving skills.

3. To familiarize with the concept of complex variables, C -R equations with applications.

4. To study the application of the knowledge of matrices and numerical methods in complex

engineering problems.

Detailed Syllabus

Module

No. Course Contents No. of

Hours.

01 Module: Laplace Transform

1.1 Definition of Laplace transform, Condition of Existence of Laplace

transform,

1.2 Laplace Transform (L) of Standard Functions like

𝑒𝑒𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎,𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎),𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑠𝑠(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎),𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠ℎ(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎),𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑠𝑠ℎ(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) and 𝑎𝑎𝑠𝑠 ,𝑤𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑠𝑠≥0.

1.3 Properties of Laplace Transform: Linearity, First Shifting theorem, Second Shifting Theorem, change of scale Property, mult iplication by t , Division by

t, Laplace Transform of derivatives and integrals (Properties without proof).

1.4 Evaluation of integrals by using Laplace Transformation.

Self-learning topics: Heaviside’s Unit Step function, Laplace Transform. of

Periodic functions, Dirac Delta Function. 07

## Page 149

4

02 Module: Inverse Laplace Transform

2.1 Inverse Laplace Transform, Linearity property, use of standard formulae to

find inverse Laplace Transform, finding Inverse Laplace transform using derivative .

2.2 Partial fractions method & first shift property to find inverse Laplace

transform.

2.3 Inverse Laplace transform using Convolution theorem (without proof)

Self-learning Topics: Applications to solve initial and boundary value

problems involving ordinary d ifferential equations. 06

03 Module: Fourier Series:

3.1 Dirichlet’s conditions, Definition of Fourier series and Parseval’s Identity

(without proof)

3.2 Fourier series of periodic function with period 2π and 2l,

3.3 Fourier series of even and odd functions

3.4 Half range Sine and Cosine Series. Self-learning Topics: Complex form of Fourier Series, orthogonal and

orthonormal set of functions, Fourier Transform. 07

04 Module: Complex Variables:

4.1 Function f (z) of complex variable, limit, continuity and differentiability of

f(z),

Analytic function, necessary and sufficient conditions for f (z) to be analytic

(without proof),

4.2 Cauchy -Riemann equations in cartesian coordinates (without proof)

4.3 Milne -Thoms on method to determine analytic function f (z) when real part

(u) or Imaginary part (v) or its combination (u+v or u- v) is given.

4.4 Harmonic function, Harmonic conjugate and orthogonal trajectories

Self-learning Topics: Conformal mapping, linear, biline ar mapping, cross

ratio, fixed points and standard transformations 07

05 Module: Matrices:

5.1 Characteristic equation, Eigen values and Eigen vectors, Properties of

Eigen

values and Eigen vectors. ( No theorems/ proof )

5.2 Cayley -Hamilton theorem (without proof): Application to find the inverse

of the given square matrix and to determine the given higher degree

polynomial matrix.

5.3 Functions of square matrix

5.4 Similarity of matrices, Diagonalization of matrices Self-learning Topics: Verification of Cayley Hamilton theorem, Minimal

polynomial and Derogatory matrix & Quadratic Forms (Congruent

transformation & Orthogonal Reduction) 06

06 Module: Numerical methods for PDE

6.1 Introduction of Partial Differential equations, method of separation of

variables, Vibrations of string, Analytical method for one dimensional heat and wave equations. (only problems)

6.2 Crank Nicholson method 06

## Page 150

5

6.3 Bender Schmidt method

Self-learning Topics: Analytical methods of solving two and three

dimensional problems.

Course O utcomes

On successful completion of course learner/student will:

1. Apply the concept of Laplace transform to solve the real integrals in engineering

problems.

2. Apply the concept of inverse Laplace transform of various functions in engineering problems.

3. Expand the periodic function by using Fourier series for real life problems and complex engineering problems.

4. Find orthogonal trajectories and analytic function by using basic concepts of complex variable theory.

5. Apply Matrix algebra to solve the engineering problems.

6. Solve Partial differential equations by applying numerical solution and analytical methods for one dimensional heat and wave equations

Term Work

General Instructions:

1. Batch wise tutorials are to be conducted. The number of student’s per batch should be as per University pattern for practical’s.

2. Students must be encouraged to write at least 6 class tutorials on entire syllabus.

3. A group of 4- 6 students should be assigned a self -learning topic. Students should

prepare a presentation/problem solving of 10- 15 minutes. This should be considered

as mini project in Engineering Mathematics. This project sho uld be graded for 10

marks depending on the performance of the students.

The distribution of Term Work marks will be as follows –

1. Attendance (Theory and Tutorial) 05 marks

2. Class Tutorials on entire syllabus 10 marks

3. Mini project 10 marks

Assessment

Internal Assessment Test:

Assessment consists of two class tests of 20 marks each. The first class test (Internal

Assessment I) is to be conducted when approx. 40% syllabus is completed and second class test (Internal Assessment II) when additio nal 35% syllabus is completed. Duration

of each test shall be one hour.

End Semester Theory Examination:

1. Question paper will comprise of total 06 questions, each carrying 20 marks.

2. Total 04 questions need to be solved.

## Page 151

6

3. Question No: 01 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein 4 sub-

questions of 5 marks each will be asked.

4. Remaining questions will be randomly selected from all the modules.

5. Weightage of each module will be proportional to number of respective lecture

hours as mentioned in the syllabus.

References

1. Engineering Mathematics, Dr. B. S. Grewal, KhannaPublication

2. Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Erwin Kreyszig, Wiley EasternLimited,

3. Advanced Engineering Mathematics, R. K. Jain and S.R.K. Iyengar, Narosapublication

4. Advanced Engineer ing Mathematics, H.K. Das, S. Chand Publication

5. Higher Engineering Mathematics B.V. Ramana, McGraw HillEducation

6. Complex Variables and Applications, Brown and Churchill, McGraw -Hilleducation,

7. Text book of Matrices, Shanti Narayan and P K Mittal, S. ChandPublication

8. Laplace transforms, Murray R. Spiegel, Schaum’sOutlineSeries .

## Page 152

7

Semester III

Course Code Course Name Credits

CHC302 Industrial and Engineering Chemistry – I 03

Course Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total

03 - - 03 - - 03

Theory Term

Work/Practical/Oral

Total Internal Assessment End

Sem

Exam Duration of

End Sem

Exam

TW

PR

OR Test-I Test-II Average

20 20 20 80 03 H ours - - - 100

Prerequisites

1.Basic knowledge of Vander -Waal’s forces, various bonds, octet rule, resonance theory,

and hybridization.

2.Knowledge of periodic table, properties of transition metals, non- metals, oxidation state,

variable valency, basic functional groups etc.

3. XII class chemistry

Course Objectives

1.To study nomenclature, shapes, stability of coordination compounds and its applications. 2.To understand structures of different bio- molecules and stereochemistry of organic

molecules.

3. To study structure and bonding of organometallic compounds and its industrial

applications.

4. To study applications of electrochemistry conductometrically and potentiometrically and

solvent extraction technique.

5. To study the effect of temperature on stabi lity of reactive intermediate and their reaction

mechanism.

6. To understand importance of dyes, fertilizers and their effects.

Detailed Syllabus

Module

No. Course Content No of

Hours

01 Applications of Electrochemistry - 04

## Page 153

8

Conductance, specific conductance, equivalent conductance, molar

conductance. Effect of dilution and temperature on conductance.

Transport number, moving boundary method and numerical.

Conductometry: Principle and types of titrations - Acid -base and

precipitation

02 Co-ordination chemistry & Organometallic compounds

Definitions: Co -ordination number/ligancy, Complex ion, Co-

ordination/dative bond. Nomenclature and isomerism (only

geometrical and structural) in co -ordination compounds w.r.t co-

ordination number 4 and 6. Effective Atomic Number (EAN) and

numericals. Crystal field theory (CFT), Application of CFT to

octahedral complexes and its drawbacks. Measurement of CFSE

(10Dq) and numericals. Applications of coordination compounds .

Organometallic compounds: Definition, metal clusters. Chemistry

of Fe -carbonyls [Fe (CO) 5]and [Fe 2(CO) 9 ] w.r.t preparation,

properties, structure and bonding . 08

03 Reaction pathways.

Difference between Transition state & intermediate. Equilibrium

(Thermodynamically) and Rate (Kinetically) controlled reactions -

explain w.r.t. sulphonation of naphthalene, Nitration of

Chlorobenzene, Friedel -Craft’s reaction. 03

04 Ion Exchange and solvent extraction techniques

Ion exchange resins, cation and anion exchangers. Desalination by

ion exchange and separation of lanthanides.

Liquid- Liquid solvent extraction, Nernst distribution law, distribution

ratio. Batch, continuous and counter current extraction. Numerical

based on solvent ext raction. 05

TOTAL 20

❖ One guest lecture from industry expert.

Course Outcomes

On completion of the course the students will:

1. Understand the different theories of chemical bonding, organometallic chemistry and

reactive intermediate.

2. Apply knowledge of dyes, fertilizers, analytical techniques of separation,

identification and quality of fertilizers.

3. Describe the reaction mechanisms, states of molecules, various types of dyes and

reaction pathway in biological process.

4. Justify stability of coordination compounds, kinetics and energy of reactions and

importance of organometallic compounds in biological process.

5. Express role of biomolecules, elemental constituents in fertilizers, and exchangers in

industries.

6. Apply concepts of electr ochemistry and its applications quantitatively.

Assessment

## Page 154

9

Internal Assessment (20 Marks) :

Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests . First test based on approximately 40% of

contents and second test based on remaining contents (approximately 40% but excluding

contents covered in Test I).

End Semester Examination (80 marks) :

1. Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of respective lectures.

2. Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks

3. Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the

curriculum.

4. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from

module 3 then part (b) will be from any module other than module3)

5. Only Four questions need to be solved .

Recommended Books

1.Engineering Chemistry - Jain& Jain Dhanpat Rai & Co. (P) Ltd

2.Engineering Chemistry - Satyaprakash& Manisha Agrawal, Khanna Book Publishing

3.Organic reaction Mechanisms - V.K. Ahluwalia , Rakesh Parashar, Narosa Publication

4. Industrial Chemistry – B K Sharma, Goel Publishing House

Reference Books

1. Principles of Physical Chemistry - B. R. Puri, L. R. Sharma, M.S. Pathania.

2. Principles of Inorganic Chemistry - Puri, Sharma, Kalia ,Milestone Publishers

3. Advanced Inorganic Chemistry – J. D. Lee

4. Organic Chemistry - I L Finar volume I and II.

5. Organic Chemistry – J. Clayden, Greeves, Warren, Wothers. Oxford university press

6. Principles Of Bioinorganic Chemistry - S.J. Lippard & J.M. Berg

7. Stereochemistry: Conformation and Mechanism by Kalsi, P.S, New Age International. Delhi

8. Stereochemistry of carbon compounds - Ernest Eliel, Tata McGraw Hill.

9. A textbook of Physical Chemistry - Glasston Samuel, Macmillan India Ltd. (1991)

10. Technology of Textile Processing Vol. 2: Chemistry of Dyes and Principles of

Dyeing - Prof. V. A. Shena

## Page 155

10

Course Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total

03 - - 03 - - 03

Theory Term

Work/Practical/Oral

Total Internal Assessment End

Sem

Exam Duration of

End Sem

Exam

TW

PR

OR Test-I Test-II Average

20 20 20 80 03 H ours -- -- -- 100

Students are assumed to have adequate background in physics, units and dimensions and

thermodynamics

1. Students should be able to understand the scope of the subject in chemical industry and

pressure drop - flow rate relationship.

2. They should be able to understand the boundary layer conditions and types of flow.

3. They should be able to understand the Bernoulli’s equation and its applications in transportation of fluids.

4. They should be able understand the relationship between pressure drop and flow rates in conduits for incompressible fluids.

5. They should be able understand the types of velocities and stagnation properties for compressible flow and viscosity using Stokes law.

6. They should be able understand the purpose and need of power requirement in agitation and selection and importance of pumps and valves.

Detailed Syllabus

Module

no. Course Contents No. of

Hours

1 Fluid and its properties, Newton’s law of viscosity, Kinematic

viscosity, Rheological behavior of fluid, Reynold’s experiment and

Reynold’s number, Laminar and turbulent flow in boundary layer,

Boundary layer formation in straight tube, Transition length for laminar

and turbulent flow.Boundary layer formation in straight tube,

Transition length for laminar and turbulent flow. 03

2 Bernoulli’s equation, Euler’s equation, Modified Bernoulli’s equation. 03 Semester III

Course Code Course Name Credits

CHC303 Fluid Flow Operations 03

Prerequisites

Course Objectives

## Page 156

11

Practical Application of Bernoulli’s Equation (Venturimeter &

Orificementer)

3 Derivation of Hagen – Poiseullie equation, Friction factor, Darcy -

Weisbach equation, Moody diagram, Equivalent diameter for circula r

and non- circular ducts. Major and minor losses 04

4 Flow of Compressible Fluids:

Mach number, Sonic, Supersonic and Subsonic flow, Continuity

equation and Bernoulli’s equation Flow past immersed bodies:

Drag Forces, Coefficient of Drag, One dimensional motion of particle through fluid, Terminal Settling Velocity, Stoke’s law, Stagnation Point

. 04

5 Classifiction of pumps, Centrifugal Pump - Construction & working,

Characteristics of pumps (curves), Cavitation, NPSH, NPSHA,

NPSHR, Priming.

Power Consumption in Agitation: Purpose of Agitation, Types of

Impellers, Prevention of Swirling, Power Curves, Power Number 04

TOTAL 18

Course Outcome s

On completion of the course the students will:

1. Acquire basic concepts and pressure measurement methods.

2. Learnkinematics of flow, rheological behavior of fluid and boundary layer conditions.

3. Learn Bernoulli’s equation and apply it in practical applications of various problems

in Chemical Engineering.

4. Learn flow equations and evaluate the losses in incompressible flow.

5. Learn the behavior of compressible fluids and Stokes Law and also able to apply these concepts for estimation of stagnation properties.

6. Gain the knowledge of various pumps, choice of pumps, valves and agitators and

would be able to calculate power requirement for pumps as well as for agitators.

Assessment

Internal Assessment (20 Marks) :

Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests .

Firsttestbasedonapproximately40%ofcontentsand secondtest basedonremaining contents

(approximately) 40% but excluding contents covered in Test 1).

End Semester Examination (80 marks) :

1. Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to

number of respective lectures .

2. Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20marks .

3. Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the

Curriculum.

4. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from

Module 3 thenpart (b) will be from any module other than module3).

5. Only Four Q uestions need to besolved.

Recommended Books

## Page 157

12

1.Warren L. Mccabe, Julian C. Smith, Peter Harriott, Unit Operations of Chemical

Engineering, McGraw Hill International Edition.

2. Coulson J. M., Richardson J. F., Backhurst J. R. and J. H. Harker, Chemical

Engineering, Vol. 1 and2.

3. Dr. R. K. Bansal, Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines, Laxmi Publications

Pvt.Ltd.

Reference Books

1. Cengel, Y. A. (2006). Fluid mechanics: fundamentals and applications. New Delhi,

India: Tata McGraw -Hill Publishing.

2. Darby, R. (2001). Chemical Engineering Fluid M echanics (2nd ed., rev.). New York:

Marcel Dekker.

3. Douglas, J. F. (2001). Fluid mechanics (5th ed.). New Delhi, India: Pearson Education

4. Batchelor, G. K. (1999). Introduction to Fluid Dynamics. New Delhi, India: Cambridge

University Press.

5. Rajput, R. K. (1998). A Textbook of Fluid M echanics. New Delhi, India: S Chand and co

6. Mohanty , A. K. (2009). Fluid M echanics (2nd ed.). New Delhi, Indi a: PHI Learning.

## Page 158

13

Semester III

Course Code Course Name Credits

CHC304 Chemical Engineering Thermodynamics I 03

Course Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total

03 - - 03 - - 03

Theory Term

Work/Practical/Oral

Total Internal Assessment End

Sem

Exam Duration of

End Sem

Exam

TW

PR

OR Test-I Test-II Average

20 20 20 80 03 Hrs -- -- -- 100

1. Basic thermodynamic properties, laws and equations.

2.Engineering Mathematics : Differential and Integral Calculus, Linear Algebraic

Equations.

3. Engineering Physics and Engineering Chemistry.

1. To apply the first law of thermodynamics to chemical engineering systems.

2. To apply the second law of thermodynamics to chemical engineering systems.

3. To predict the P -V-T behavior of ideal gases and real gases.

4. To explain various thermodynamic concepts such as Entropy, Exergy and Fugacity.

5. To perform calculations involving the applications of the laws of thermodynamics to flow

processes.

6. To demonstrate the use of thermodynamic charts and diagrams.

Detailed Syllabus

Module

No Course Contents No. of

Hours

1 Review of First Law of Thermodynamics for flow and

nonflow processes. 04

2 Concepts of heat engine, heat pump and refrigerator ,

Carnot Cycle and Carnot Principle 04

3 Concept of Exergy, Applications of Exergy 02 Prerequisites

Course Objectives

## Page 159

14

4 Equations of state for non -ideal gases: van der Waals equation of

state.Redlich -Kwong equation of state. 03

5 Maxwell’s Equations ,Enthalpy and Entropy departure functions (van

der Waals and Redlich -Kwong EOS ), Fugacity and fugacity

coefficient (van der Waals and Redlich -Kwong EOS) 06

TOTAL 19

Course Outcomes

On completion of the course the students will:

1. Apply the First Law of Thermodynamics to flow and non- flow Chemical Engineering

processes.

2. Compute the thermal efficiencies of various engines and machines using Second Law

ofThermodynamic and Entropy concepts.

3. Apply t he concept of Exergy to engineering applications and utilize the laws of

thermodynamics to analyze flow processes.

4. Compute the properties of real fluids using different equations of state.

5. Compute property changes of non- ideal gas systems using d eparture functions.

6. Use thermodynamic charts and diagrams for estimation of various thermodynamic

properties.

Assessment

Internal Assessment (20 Marks) :

Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests . First test based on approximately 40% of

contents and second test based on remaining contents (approximately 40% but excluding

contents covered in Test I).

End Semester Examination (80 marks) :

1. Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number

of respective lectures.

2. Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks.

3. Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the

curriculum.

4. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from

module 3 then part (b) will be from any module other than module 3).

5. Only Four questions need to be solved.

Recommended Books

1. J.M. Smith, H.C. Van Ness, M.M. Abbot, M.T. Swihart, Introduction to Chemical

Engineering Thermodynamics, 8

th Edition, McGraw -Hill Education, 2017.

2. K.V. Narayanan, A Textbook of Chemical Engineering Thermodynamics, 2nd Edition,

Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 2013.

3. Y.V.C. Rao, Chemical Engineering Thermodynamics, Universities Press, 1997.

Reference Books

1. M.J. Moran, H.N. Shapiro, D.D. Boettner, M.B. Bailey, Fundamentals of Engineering

Thermodynamics, 9th Edition, Wiley, 2018.

2. Gopinath Halder, Introduction to Chemical Engineering Thermodynamics, 2nd Edition,

Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 2014.

## Page 160

15

3. M.D. Koretsky, Engineering and Chemical Thermodynamics, John Wiley and Sons,

2009.

4. J. Richard Elliot and Carl T. Lira, Introductory Chemical Engineering

Thermodynamics, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall, 2012.

Semester III

Course Code Course Name Credits

CHC305 Process Calculations 03

Course Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total

03 - - 03 - - 03

Theory Term

Work/Practical/Oral

Total Internal Assessment End

Sem

Exam Duration of

End Sem

Exam

TW

PR

OR Test-I Test-II Average

20 20 20 80 03 hours -- -- -- 100

1. Linear algebra

2. Differential equations

1

Familiarize various systems of units and conversion.

2 Learn about material balance of various unit operations for both steady and

unsteady state operations.

3 Understand the material balance of various unit processes.

4 To have the knowledge of recycle, bypass and purge operations.

5 Understand the energy balance calculations over various processes with and

without chemical reactions.

6 Development of the material balance and energy load of a binary distillation

column.

Detailed Syllabus

Module

No. Course Contents No. of

Hours

1 Introduction : Basic Chemical Calculations. Density, specific volume,

specific gravity, concentration & composition of mixtures and solutions.

Ideal Gas law, Dalton’s law, Amagat’s law and Raoult’s law. 02 Prerequisites

Objectives

## Page 161

16

2 Material Balance without Chemical Reactions: Solving material

balance problems for various unit operations (Absorption, Distillation,

Extraction and Crystallization) 03

3 Material Balance with Chemical Reactions: Concept of limiting and

excess reactants, conversion and yield, selectivity and degree of

completion of reaction. 04

4 Recycle, Bypass and Purge Operations : Material Balance

calculations for both with and without chemical reactions. 02

5 Energy Balance: Heat capacity, sensible heat, latent heat, calculation of

enthalpy changes. General energy balance equation. Energy balances for

process involving chemical reaction including adiabatic reactions . 04

6 Combined Material and Energy Balance: Material and energy balance

for binary distillation . 01

TOTAL 16

Course Outcome

On completion of the course the students will:

1 Identify the various systems of units and conversion and apply principles of basic

chemical calculations .

2 Apply the material balance for various unit operations for both steady and unsteady

state operations .

3 Compute the material balance of various unit processes .

4 Evaluate recycle, bypass and purge operations and itsstreams .

5 Perform energy balance calcula tions over various processes with and without

chemical reactions .

6 Assess the material balance and energy load of a binary distillation column .

Assessment

Internal Assessment (20 Marks):

Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests .First test based on approximately 40% of

contents and second test based on remaining contents (approximately 40% but excluding

contents covered in TestI).

End Semester Examination (80 marks):

1. Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to

number of respective lecture.

2. Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20marks .

3. Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of

thecurriculum.

4. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from

module 3 thenpart (b) will be from any module other than module3) .

5. Only Four questions need to besolved .

Recommended Books

1. Narayan, K. V. and Lakshmikut ty, B. “Stioichiome try and Process Calculations”, 1stedition,

Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi (2006)

2. Bhatt, B. I. and Thakore, S. B., “Stoichimetry, 5thedition, Tata McGraw Hill Education

Private Limited, New Delhi

## Page 162

17

3. Ch. Durga Prasad Rao and D. V. S. Murthy, “Process Calculations for Chemical

Engineers”, McMillan India Ltd. (2010)

4. O. A. Hougen, K. M. Watson, and R. A. Ragatz., “Chemical process principles -part 1,

Material and Energy Balances”. Second Edition. John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York

(1954).

Reference Books

1. Himmelblau, D. M. and Riggs, J. B., “Basic Principles and Calculations in Chemical

Engineering, 7 th edition, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi (2009)

Semester III

Course Code Course Name Credits

CHL301 Industrial and Engineering Chemistry Lab -I 1.5

Course Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total

- 03 - - 1.5 - 1.5

Theory Term

Work/Practical/Oral

Total Internal Assessment End

Sem

Exam Duration of

End Sem

Exam

TW

PR/OR

OR Test-I Test-II Average

- - - - - 25 25 -- 50

1. Basic knowledge of quantitative terms, Mole fractions, Normality, Morality etc.

2. Basic identification of salts, acids, bases, indicators etc.

3. Basic introduction of lab safety and handling of glass wares.

1. To enable students to prepare the standard solutions, carry out volumetric analysis to

check their accuracy and present the outcome of the experiment in statistical format to

calculate standard deviation.

2. To provide students an insight of titrimetry to determine contents of solution

quantitatively.

3. To enable students to apply knowledge of instrumental analysis to carry out acid- base

titrations without indicators , to calculate solubility product etc.

4. To make students learn the estimation of organic compound from given solution

quantitatively.

5. To make students understand the concept and importance of gravimetric analysis in

determination of amount of element in given solution.

6. To enable students carry out synthesis of chemicals by laboratory methods

Prerequisites

Lab Objectives

Lab Outcomes

## Page 163

18

On completion of the course the students will:

1. Prepare standard solutions, check their accuracy and present results in statistical format

to calculate standard deviation.

2. Perform titrations and determine contents of solution quantitatively.

3. Apply knowledge of instrumental analysis like Conductometry and Potentiometry.

4. Learn methods of estimation of organic compounds quantitatively.

5. Carry out gr avimetric analysis systematically with proper understanding.

6. Carry out synthesis of chemicals in laboratory.

Experiment

no. Details of Experiment Lab

Hours

1 Volumetric analysis:

Preparation of standard solutions and to find normality, strength

and deviation factor. 3

2 Titrimetric analysis:

Analysis of talcum powder for Mg content by EDTA method 3

3 Potentiometric Titrations

Titration of strong acid and strong base potentiometrically. 3

4 Organic estimations

Estimation of phenol /Aniline 3

5 Gravimetric estimation of

Nickel as Ni D.M.G. 3

6 Preparation.

Preparation of Methyl Salicylate 3

7 Nitrationof Aromatic compounds:Nitration of

Nitrobenzene/Acetanilide 3

Assessment

Term Work (25 marks) :

Distribution of marks will be as follows:

Laboratory work: 15 marks

Assignments: 05

Attendance: 05

End Semester Practical Examination/orals (25 marks) :

Practical Examination will be on experiments performed in the laboratory

Reference Books

1.Vogel’s Quantitative Chemical Analysis -David J. Barnes J. Mendham, R.C. Denney,

M.J.K ThomasPearson Education; 6 edition

2. Laboratory Manual Engg. Chemistry - Anupma Rajput, Dhanpat Rai & Co.

3. Vogel’s Textbook of Practical organic chemistry.

List of Experiments (Minimum Five)

## Page 164

19

Semester III

Course Code Course Name Credits

CHL302 Fluid Flow Operations Lab 1.5

Course Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total

- 03 - - 1.5 - 1.5

Theory Term

Work/Practical/Oral

Total Internal Assessment End

Sem

Exam Duration of End

Sem

Exam

TW

PR/OR

OR Test-I Test-II Average

- - - - - 25 25 - 50

1. Knowledge of physical sciences and units and dimensions.

2. Knowledge of properties of fluids, law of conservation of mass and law of momentum.

3. Knowledge of flow and pressure measurement devices.

4. Knowledge of different flow patterns and pumps.

Students should be able to:

1. Understand the basic properties and concepts of the fluid behavior in chemical industry.

2. Understand various flow patterns and boundary layer conditions.

3. Understand applications of flow and pressure measuring devices.

4. Understand various pipe fittings, valves and its applications.

5. Understand working and operations of various pumps.

6. Understand Working and application of agitated vessel and use of different impellers in process industries.

Lab Outcome

On completion of the course the students will:

1. Determine viscosity by stokes law.

2. Distinguish different flow patterns and calculations involving Reynolds number.

3. Find coefficient of discharge for various flow measuring devices. Prerequisites

Lab Objectives

## Page 165

20

4. Evaluate minor losses and frictional losses for various pipe fittings and network.

5. Calculate power required and efficiency for various pumps.

6. Find power requirement for var ious impellers in agitated vessel.

List of Experiments (Minimum Four )

Experiment

No. Details of Experiment Lab

Hours

1 To determine the coefficient of discharge for Orifice meter.

3

2 To determine minor losses in pipes.

3

3 To find out Reynolds number for the fluid flow using

Reynolds’s apparatus

3

4 To study the characteristics of centrifugal pumps.

3

5 To verify Bernoulli’s theorem.

3

6 To determine the coefficient of discharge for horizontal Venturi

meter.

3

Assessment

Term Work (25 marks) :

Distribution of marks will be as follows: Laboratory work: 15 marks

Assignments: 05

Attendance: 05

End Semester Practical Examination/Orals (25 marks):

Practical Examination will be based on experiments performed in the la boratory.

Reference Books

1. Warren L. Mccabe, Julian C. Smith, Peter Harriott, Unit Operations of Chemical

Engineering, McGraw Hill International Edition.

2. Coulson J. M., Richardson J. F., Backhurst J. R. and J. H. Harker, Chemical Engineering, Vol. 1 and 2.

3. Batchelor, G. K. (1999). Introduction to fluid dynamics. New Delhi, India: Cambridge University Press.

4. Darby, R. (2001). Chemical engineering fluid mechanics (2nd ed., rev.). New York: Marcel Dekker.

## Page 166

21

Semester III

Course Code Course Name Credits

CHL303 Basic Chemical Engineering Lab 1.5

Course Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total

- 03 - - 1.5 - 1.5

Theory Term

Work/Practical/Oral

Total Internal Assessment End

Sem

Exam Duration of End

Sem

Exam

TW

PR/OR

OR Test-I Test-II Average

- - - - - 25 25 50

1. Knowledge of Inorganic, Organic and Physical Chemistry

2. Knowledge of Physics and 3. Knowledge of Mathematics

1. To understand basic chemical engineering concepts such as vapor pressure, surface

tension, heat of reaction, solubility, colligative properties etc.

2. To apply knowledge of chemistry to do experimental set up and carry out experiment

3. To understand different errors, sampling methods and sample size in laboratory experiments.

4. To collect data after experiments

5. To study applications of experimental methods in practical situations

6. To become aware of industrially important reactions and operations

Lab Outcome s

On completion of the course t he students will:

1. Apply basic principles of chemistry and chemical engineering to solve and analyze

complex industrial problems Prerequisites

Lab Objectives

## Page 167

22

2. Apply mathematical skills to perform calculations on data obtained and use required

formulas to do the same

3. Evaluate sampling methods, required sampling size and reduce measurement errors for

accurate experimental design

4. Evaluate experimental data by different data analysis methods on PC using MS Excel for

investigating complex problems

5. Analyze and interpret the results obtained from experiments

6. Design new laboratory experiments to study industrial problems which will benefit

society and environment by following strict ethical standards

List of Experiments (minimum four )

Experiment

no. Details of Experiment Lab

Hours

1 Heat of reaction and Hess’s law of heat summation

3

2 Measurement of Dew Point Temperature

3

3 Demonstration of vapor pressure

3

4 Freezing point depression

3

5 Boiling point elevation

3

6 Limiting reactant and excess reactant for chemical reaction

3

Assessment

Term Work (25 marks) :

Distribution of marks will be as follows:

Laboratory work: 20 marks

Attendance: 05

End Semester orals (25 marks) :

Orals will be on experiments performed in the laboratory

## Page 168

23

Course Code Course Name Credits

CHL30 4 Skilled based lab: Chemical Technology Lab 02

Course Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total

02 02 - 01 01 - 02

Theory Term

Work/Practical/Oral

Total Internal Assessment End

Sem

Exam Duration of End

Sem

Exam

TW

PR/OR

OR Test-I Test-II Average

- - - - - 25 - 25 50

1. Knowledge of Inorganic Chemistry .

2. Knowledge of Organic Chemistry .

3. Know ledge of Physical Ch emistry .

4. Knowledge of Physics and Mathematics.

1.To provide students an insight of different chemical processes and their

engineeringproblems.

2. To enable the students to understand the development of a process from its chemistry.

3. To equip students to draw and illustrate process flow diagrams.

4. To develop laboratory procedures for the preparation of industrially important chemicals

and products.

5. To enable students to be skilled in the practical aspects of synthesis of chemicals.

6. To present the outcomes of laboratory experiments in the form of reports.

Course Outcome s

On completion of the course the students will:

1. Describe various manufacturing processes used in the chemical process industries. Semester III

Prerequisites

Course Objectives

## Page 169

24

2. Explain industrial processing and overall performance of any chemical process including

the major engineering problems encountered in the process.

3. Draw and illustrate the process flow diagram for a given process.

4. Outline laboratory procedures for the preparation of industrially important chemicals and

products.

5. Plan and perform synthesis of important chemicals in the laboratory.

6. Demonstrate the ability to present scientific and technical information resulting from

laboratory experimentation and draw conclusions from the results of the experiments.

Detailed Syllabus (theory 02 h ours per week)

Module

No. Course Contents No. of

Hours

1 Introduction :

Concept and brief description of the Unit Operations and Unit

Processes used in Chemical Industries

Overview of Industrially Important Products in the Chemical

Process Industries:

Soaps and Detergents 02

2 Natural Product Industries and Biodiesel Processing:

Manufacture of ethanol by fermentation of molasses

Biodiesel production by base -catalysed transesterification process 02

3 Manufacture of Acids:

Sulphuric Acid (DCDA Process), Nitric Acid

Manufacture of Fertilizers:

Urea 03

4 Chloro -Alkali Industries:

Manufacture of Caustic Soda

Manufacture of Soda Ash (Solvay Process ) 03

5 Basic Building Blocks of Petrochemical Industry:

Introduction to Petroleum Refining

Catalytic Cracking by Fluidized Catalytic Cracking Unit (FCCU) 02

6 Synthesis of Important Heavy Organic Chemicals and

Intermediates:

Manufacture of Cumene from benzene and propylene

Manufacture of Phenol from cumene by peroxidation- hydrolysis

process

Synthesis of Polymers:

Manufacture of Polyethylene: LDPE and HDPE

Manufacture of Nylon 66 02

TOTAL 14

List of Experiments (minimum six)

Experiment no. Details of Experiment Lab Hours

1 Preparation of Soap 2

2 Preparation of Alum from Alumin um 2

3 Preparation of Aspirin 2

4 Preparation of Methyl Orange 2

## Page 170

25

5 Preparation of Thiokol R ubber 2

6 Preparation of Rubber Ball from Rubber Latex 2

7 Preparation of p -Bromo nitrobenzene from

Bromobenzene 2

Assessment

Term Work (25 marks) :

Distribution of marks will be as follows: Laboratory work: 20 marks

Attendance (of theory and practical) : 05 marks

End Semester Orals (25 marks) :

Orals on topics covered in theory and experiments performed in the laboratory

Recommended Books

1.Rao, G.N. and Sittig M., Dryden’s Outlines of Chemical Technology for 21

st Century,

East West Press, 3rd Edition, 1997.

2.Austin G.T., Shreve’s Chemical Process Industries, 5th Edition, McGraw Hill

International Edition, 1984.

3. Pandey, G.N., A Textbook of Chemical Technology, Vol. I and II, Vikas Publications,

1984.

4. B.K. Bhaskara Rao, Modern Petroleum Refining Processes, 6th Edition, Oxford and IBH

Publishing, 2020.

5.B.K. Bhaskara Rao, A Textbook of Petrochemicals, Khanna Publishers, 2004.

Reference Books

1.Kirk -Othmer’s Encyclopedia of Chemical Technology, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 5

th

Edition, 2007.

2.Ullmann’s Encyclopedia of Industrial Chemistry, Wiley -VCH, 7th Edition, 2011.

3.Alok Adholeya and Pradeepkumar Dadhich, Production and Technology of Biodiesel :

Seeding a Change, TERI Publication, New Delhi, 2008.

4. NIIR Board of Consultants and Engineers, The complete book on Jatropha (Biodiesel)

with Ashwagandha, Stevia, Brahmi and Jatamansi Herbs (Cultivation, Processing and Uses), Asia Pacific Business Press Inc.

## Page 171

26

Course Code Course Name Credits

CHM301 Mini Project 1A 1.5

Course Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total

- 03 - - 1.5 - 1.5

Theory Term

Work/Practical/Oral

Total Internal Assessment End

Sem

Exam Duration of End

Sem

Exam

TW

PR/OR

OR Test-I Test-II Average

- - - - - 25 - 25 50

Objectives

1. To acquaint with the process of identifying the needs and converting it into the

problem.

2. To familiarize the process of solving the problem in a group.

3. To acquaint with the process of applying basic engineering fundamentals to attempt

solutions to the problems.

4. To inculcate the process of self -learning and research.

Outcome: Learner will…

1. Identify problems based on societal /research needs.

2. Apply Knowledge and skill to solve societal problems in a group.

3. Develop interpersonal skills to work as membe r of a group or leader.

4. Draw the proper inferences from available results through theoretical/

experimental/simulations.

5. Analyse the impact of solutions in societal and environmental context for sustainable

evelopment.

6. Use standard norms of engineering practices

7. Excel in written and oral communication.

8. Demonstrate capabilities of self -learning in a group, which leads to life long learning.

9. Demonstrate project management principles during project work.

Guidelines for Mini Project

• Students shall form a group of 3 to 4 students, while forming a group shall not be

allowed less than three or more than four students, as it is a group activity. Semester III

## Page 172

27

• Students should do survey and identify needs, which shall be converted into problem

statement for mini project in consultation with faculty supervisor/head of

department/internal committee of faculties.

• Students hall submit implementation plan in the form of Gantt/PERT/CPM chart, which

will cover weekly activity of mini project.

• A log book to be prepared by each group, wherein group can record weekly work

progress, guide/supervisor can verify and record notes/comments.

• Faculty supervisor may give inputs to students during mini project activity; however,

focus shall be on self -learnin g.

• Students in a group shall understand problem effectively, propose multiple solution and

select best possible solution in consultation with guide/ supervisor.

• Students shall convert the best solution into working model using various components of their domain areas and demonstrate.

• The solution to be validated with proper justification and report to be compiled in standard format of University of Mumbai.

• With the focus on the self -learning, innovation, addressing societal problems and

entrepreneurship quality development within the students through the Mini Projects, it

is preferable that a single project of appropriate level and quality to be carried out in two semesters by all the groups of the students. i.e. Mini Project 1 in semester III and IV. Similarly, Mini Project 2 in semesters V and VI.

• However, based on the individual students or group capability, with the mentor’s

recommendations, if the proposed Mini Project adhering to the qualitative aspects

mentioned above gets completed in odd semester, then that group can be allowed to work on the extension of the Mini Project with suitable improvements/modifications or a completely new project idea in ev en semester. This policy can be adopted on case by

case basis.

Guidelines for Assessment of Mini Project:

Term Work

• The review/ progress monitoring committee shall be constituted by head of departments

of each institute. The progress of mini project to be evaluated on continuous basis,

minimum two reviews in each semester.

• In continuous assessment focus shall also be on each individual student, assessment

based on individual’s contribution in group activity, their understanding and response to questions.

• Distribution of Term work marks for both semesters shall be as below;

o Marks awarded by guide/supervisor based on log book : 10

o Marks awarded by review committee : 10

o Quality of Project report : 05

Review/progress monitoring committee may consider f ollowing points for assessment

based on either one year or half year project as mentioned in general guidelines.

One-year project:

• In first semester entire theoretical solution shall be ready, including components/system

selection and cost analysis. Two reviews will be conducted based on presentation given

by students group.

First shall be for finalisation of problem

Second shall be on finalisation of proposed solution of problem.

## Page 173

28

• In second semester expected work shall be procurement of component’s/syst ems,

building of working prototype, testing and validation of results based on work

completed in an earlier semester.

First review is based on readiness of building working prototype to be conducted.

Second review shall be based on poster presentation cum demonstration of working model in last month of the said semester.

Half -year project:

• In this case in one semester students’ group shall complete project in all aspects

including,

o Identification of need/problem

o Proposed final solution

o Procurement of components/systems

o Building prototype and testing

• Two reviews will be conducted for continuous assessment,

First shall be for finalisation of problem and proposed solution

Second shall be for implementation and testing of solution.

Assessment criteria of Mini Project.

Mini Project shall be assessed based on following criteria;

1. Quality of survey/ need identification

2. Clarity of Problem definition based on need.

3. Innovativeness in solutions

4. Feasibility of proposed problem solutions and selection of best s olution

5. Cost effectiveness

6. Societal impact

7. Innovativeness

8. Cost effectiveness and Societal impact

9. Full functioning of working model as per stated requirements

10. Effective use of skill sets

11. Effective use of standard engineering norms

12. Contribution of an individual’s as member or leader

13. Clarity in written and oral communication

• In one year, project , first semester evaluation may be based on first six criteria’s and

remaining may be used for second semester evaluation of performance of students in

mini pro ject.

• In case of half year project all criteria’s in generic may be considered for evaluation of

performance of students in mini project.

Guidelines for Assessment of Mini Project Practical/Oral Examination:

• Report should be prepared as per the guide lines issued by the University of Mumbai.

• Mini Project shall be assessed through a presentation and demonstration of working model by the student project group to a panel of Internal and External Examiners

preferably from industry or research organisations having experience of more than five years approved by head of Institution.

• Students shall be motivated to publish a paper based on the work in

Conferences/students competitions.

## Page 174

29

Mini Project shall be assessed based on following points;

1. Quality of problem and Clarity

2. Innovativeness in solutions

3. Cost effectiveness and Societal impact

4. Full functioning of working model as per stated requirements

5. Effective use of skill sets

6. Effective use of standard engineering norms

7. Contribution of an individual’s as member or leader

8. Clarity in written and oral communication

## Page 175

AC -23/02/2021

Item No. – 6.11-15

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI

Bachelor of Engineering

in

Electronics and Computer Science

Direct Second Year (Sem. III) Admitted Students for the

current Academic Year 2020 -21(Only)

(REV - 2019 ‘C’ Scheme) from Academic Year 2019 – 20

Under

FACULTY OF

SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY

(As per AICTE guidelines with effect from the academic year 2019 –2020)

## Page 176

Programme Structure for Bachelor of Engineering (B.E.) – Electronics and Computer Science (Rev. 2020)

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B.E. (ELECTRONICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE), REV 2020 2

Preamble

To meet the challenge of ensuring excellence in engineering education, the issue of quality needs to

be addressed, debated and taken forward in a systematic manner. Accreditation is the principal means

of quality assurance in higher education. The major emphasis of accreditation process is to measure

the outcomes of the program that is being accredited. In line with this, the Faculty of Science and

Technology (in particular Engineering), of University of Mumbai, has taken a lead in incorporating

the philosophy of outcome -based education in the process of curriculum development.

Faculty resolved that course objectives and course outcomes are to be cl early defined for each course,

so that all faculty members in affiliated institutes, understand the depth and approach of the course to

be taught, which will enhance learner’s learning process. Choice based Credit and grading system

enables a much -required shift in focus from teacher -centric to learner -centric education since the

workload estimated is based on the investment of time in learning and not in teaching. It also focuses

on continuous evaluation which will enhance the quality of education. Credit assignment for courses

is based on 15 weeks teaching learning process. However, content of courses is to be taught in 12 -13

weeks and the remaining 2 -3 weeks to be utilized for revision, guest lectures, coverage of content

beyond syllabus etc.

There was a concern that the earlier revised curriculum was more focused on providing information

and knowledge across various domains of the said program, which led to heavily loading students in

terms of direct contact hours. In this regard, faculty of science and technology resolved that to minimize the

burden of contact hours, total credits of the entire program will be of 170, wherein focus is not only on providing

knowledge but also on building skills, attitude and self -learning. There -fore in the present curri culum, skill -based

laboratories and mini projects are made mandatory across all disciplines of engineering in second and third year

of programs, which will definitely facilitate self -learning of students. The overall credits and approach of the

curriculum proposed in the present revision is in line with the AICTE model curriculum.

The present curriculum will be implemented for Second Year of Engineering from the academic year

2020 -21. Subsequently this will be carried forward for Third Year and Final Year E ngineering in the

academic years 2021 -22, 2022 -23, respectively.

Dr. S. K. Ukarande

Associate Dean

Faculty of Science and Technology

Member, Academic Council, RRC in Engineering

University of Mumbai

## Page 177

Programme Structure for Bachelor of Engineering (B.E.) – Electronics and Computer Science (Rev. 2020)

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B.E. (ELECTRONICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE), REV 2020 3

Incorporation and implementation of Online Contents from

NPTEL/ Swayam Platform

The curriculum revision is mainly focused on knowledge component, skill based activities and project

based activities. Self learning opportunities are provided to learners. In the revision process this time ,

in particu lar Revised syllabus of ‘C ‘scheme , wherever possible , additional resource links of

platforms such as NPTEL, Swayam are appropriately provided. In earlier revision s of the curriculum

in the year s 2012 and 2016 , in Revised scheme ‘A' and ‘B' respectively, e fforts were made to use

online contents as additional learning materials to enhance learning of students.

In the current revision based on the recommendation of AICTE model curriculum , overall credits are

reduced to 171, to provide opportunity of self -learning to learner. Learners are now getting sufficient

time for sel f-learning either through online courses or additional projects for enhancing their

knowledge and skill sets.

The Principals/ H OD’s/ Faculties of all the institute s are required to motivate and encourage learners

to use additional online resources available on platforms such as NPTEL/ Swayam. Learners can be

advised to take up online courses and on successful completion , they are required to submit

certification for the same. This will defini tely help learners to facilitate their enhanced learning based

on their interest.

Dr. S. K. Ukarande

Associate Dean

Faculty of Science and Technology

Member, Academic Council , RRC in Engineering

University of Mumbai

## Page 178

Programme Structure for Bachelor of Engineering (B.E.) – Electronics and Computer Science (Rev. 2020)

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B.E. (ELECTRONICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE), REV 2020 4

Program Structure for Second Year Electronics and Computer Science

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI

(With Effect from 2020 -2021)

Semester III

Course

Code Course Name Teaching Scheme

(Contact Hours) Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total

ECC 301 Engineering Maths III 3 - 1 3 - 1 4

ECC 302 Electronic Devices 3 - - 3 - - 3

ECC 303 Digital Electronics 3 - - 3 - - 3

ECC 304 Data Structures and

Algorithms 3 - - 3 - - 3

ECC 305 Database

Management Systems 3 - - 3 - - 3

ECL30 1 Electronic Devices

Lab - 2 - - 1 - 1

ECL30 2 Digital Electronics

Lab - 2 - - 1 - 1

ECL30 3 Data Structures and

Algorithms Lab - 2 - - 1 - 1

ECL30 4 Database

Management Systems

lab - 2 - - 1 - 1

ECL30 5 Skill -based Lab

course: OOPM (C++

and Java) - 4 - - 2 - 2

ECM301 Mini -project -1 A - 4$ - - 2 - 2

Total 15 16 1 15 08 1 24

$ indicates workload of learner (Not faculty), for mini -project

## Page 179

Programme Structure for Bachelor of Engineering (B.E.) – Electronics and Computer Science (Rev. 2020)

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B.E. (ELECTRONICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE), REV 2020 5

Course

Code

Course

Name Examination Scheme

Theory Term

Work Practical /

Oral Total

Internal Assessment End

Sem.

Exam Exam.

Duration

(in Hrs) Test1 Test2 Avg

.

ECC 301 Engineering

Maths III 20 20 20 80 03 25 - 125

ECC 302 Electronic

Devices 20 20 20 80 03 - - 100

ECC 303 Digital

Electronics 20 20 20 80 03 - - 100

ECC 304 Data

Structures

and

Algorithms 20 20 20 80 03 - - 100

ECC 305 Database

Management

Systems 20 20 20 80 03 - - 100

ECL 30 1 Electronic

Devices Lab - - - - - 25 25 50

ECL 30 2 Digital

Electronics

Lab - - - - - 25 25 50

ECL 30 3 Data

Structures

and

Algorithms

Lab - - -- - - 25 25 50

ECL 30 4 Database

Management

systems lab - - - - - 25 25 50

ECL 30 5 Skill -based

Lab course:

OOPM (C++

and Java) - - - - - 50 - 50

ECM

301 Mini Project -

1A 25 25 25

Total - - 100 400 - 200 125 825

## Page 180

Programme Structure for Bachelor of Engineering (B.E.) – Electronics and Computer Science (Rev. 2020)

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B.E. (ELECTRONICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE), REV 2020 6

Note:

1. Students group and load of faculty per week.

Mini Project 1 and 2:

Students can form groups with minimum 3 (Three) and not more than 4(Four) .

Faculty Load :1 hour per week per four groups

Major Project 1 and2:

Students can form groups with minimum 2 (Two) and not more than 4 (Four)

Faculty Load : In Semester VII– ½ hour per week per project group

In Semester VIII – 1 hour per week per project group

2. Out of 4 hours/week allotted for the mini -projects 1 -A and 1 -B, an expert lecture of at least one

hour per week from industry/institute or a field visit to nearby domain specific industry should

be arranged.

3. Mini -projects 2 -A and 2 -B should be based on DLOs .

## Page 181

Programme Structure for Bachelor of Engineering (B.E.) – Electronics and Computer Science (Rev. 2020)

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B.E. (ELECTRONICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE), REV 2020 7

Course

Code Course Name Teaching Scheme Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total

ECC 301 Engineering

Maths III 03 -- 01 03 -- 01 04

Course

Code Course

Name Examination Scheme

Theory Marks

Term

Work Practical Oral Total Internal assessment

End

Sem.

Exam Exam

duration

Hours Test

1 Test

2 Avg. of

Test 1

and

Test 2

ECC

301 Engineering

Maths III 20 20 20 80 03 25 -- -- 125

Pre-requisite:

Engineering Mathematics -I, Engineering Mathematics -II, Scalar and Vector Product: Scalar and vector product of

three and four vectors

Course Objectives:

The course is aimed

1. To learn the Laplace Transform, Inverse Laplace Transform of various functions and its applications.

2. To understand the concept of Fourier Series, its complex form and enhance the problem -solving skill s.

3. To understand the concept of complex variables, C -R equations, harmonic functions and its conjugate and

mapping in complex plane.

4. To understand the basics of Linear Algebra.

5. To use concepts of vector calculus to analyze and model engineering problems .

Course Outcomes:

After successful completion of the course students will be able to:

1. Understand the concept of Laplace transf orm and its application to solve the real integrals in engineering

problems.

2. Understand the concept of inverse Laplace transform of various functions and its applications in engineering

problems.

3. Expand the periodic function by using Fourier series for real life problems and complex engineering

problems.

4. Understand complex variable theory, application of harmonic conjugate to get orthogonal trajectories and

analytic function.

5. Use matrix algebra to solve the engineering problems.

6. Apply the concepts of vec tor calculus in real life problems.

## Page 182

Programme Structure for Bachelor of Engineering (B.E.) – Electronics and Computer Science (Rev. 2020)

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B.E. (ELECTRONICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE), REV 2020 8

Module

No. Unit

No. Contents Hrs.

1 Laplace Transform 06

1.1 Definition of Laplace transform, Condition of Existence of Laplace transform.

1.2 Laplace Transform (L) of Standard Functions like 𝑒𝑎𝑡, 𝑠𝑖𝑛(𝑎𝑡), 𝑐𝑜𝑠(𝑎𝑡), 𝑠𝑖𝑛ℎ(𝑎𝑡),

𝑐𝑜𝑠ℎ(𝑎𝑡) and 𝑡𝑛,𝑛≥0

1.3 Properties of Laplace Transform: Linearity, First Shifting theorem, Second Shifting

Theorem, change of scale Property, multiplication by t, Division by t, Laplace Transform

of derivatives and integrals (Properties without proof).

1.4 Evaluation of integrals by using Laplace Transformation.

Self-learning Topics: Heaviside’s Unit Step function, Laplace Transform of Periodic functions,

Dirac Delta Function.

2 Inverse Laplace Transform 06

2.1 Inverse Laplace Transform, Linearity property, use of standard formulae to find inverse

Laplace Transform, finding Inverse Laplace transform using derivatives.

2.2 Partial fractions method to find inverse Laplace transform.

2.3 Inverse Laplace transform using Convolution theorem (without proof).

Self-learning Topics: Applications to solve initial and boundary value problems involving

ordinary differential equations.

3 Fourier Series 06

3.1 Dirichlet’s conditions, Definition of Fourier series and Parseval’s Identity (without

proof).

3.2 Fourier series of periodic function with period 2𝜋 and 2l.

3.3 Fourier series of even and odd functions.

3.4 Half range Sine and Cosine Series.

Self-learning Topics: Complex form of Fourier Series, Orthogonal and Orthonormal set of

functions. Fourier Transform.

4 Complex Variables 06

4.1 Function f(z) of complex variable, limit, continuity and differentiability of f(z)Analytic

function, necessary and sufficient conditions for f(z) to be analytic (without proof).

4.2 Cauchy -Riemann equations in Cartesian coordinates (without proof).

## Page 183

Programme Structure for Bachelor of Engineering (B.E.) – Electronics and Computer Science (Rev. 2020)

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B.E. (ELECTRONICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE), REV 2020 9

4.3 Milne -Thomson method to determine analytic function f(z)when real part

(u) or Imaginary part (v) or its combination (u+v or u -v) is given.

4.4 Harmonic function, Harmonic conjugate and orthogonal trajectories

Self-learning Topics: Conformal mapping, linear, bilinear mapping, cross ratio, fixed points

and standard transformations

5 Linear Algebra: Matrix Theory 06

5.1 Characteristic equation, Eigen values and Eigen vectors, Example based on properties

of Eigen values and Eigen vectors. (Without Proof).

5.2 Cayley -Hamilton theorem (Without proof), Examples based on verification of

Cayley - Hamilton theorem and compute inverse of Matrix.

5.3 Similarity of matrices, Diagonalization of matrices. Functions of square matrix

Self-learning Topics: Application of Matrix Theory in machine learning and google page rank

algorithms, derogatory and non-derogatory matrices .

6 Vector Differentiation and Integral 06

6.1 Vector differentiation: Basics of Gradient, Divergence and Curl (Without Proof).

6.2 Properties of vector field: Solenoidal and irrotational (conservative) vector fields.

6.3 Vector integral: Line Integral, Green’s theorem in a plane (Without Proof),

Stokes’ theorem (Without Proof) only evaluation.

Self-learning Topics: Gauss’ divergence Theorem and applications of Vector calculus

Total 36

## Page 184

Programme Structure for Bachelor of Engineering (B.E.) – Electronics and Computer Science (Rev. 2020)

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B.E. (ELECTRONICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE), REV 2020 10

References:

1. H. K. Das, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, S. Chand Publications, 22nd edition, 2018.

2. B. V. Ramana, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Tata Mc -Graw Hill Publication.1st edition, 2006.

3. R. K. Jain and S. R. K. Iyengar, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Narosa Publication, 1st

edition, 2006.

4. Wylie and Barret, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Tata Mc -Graw Hill, 6 st edition, 2003.

5. Murray Spiegel, Schaum's Outline of Fourier Analysis with Applications to Boundary V alue

Problems (Schaum's Outline Series) .

6. Murray Spiegel, Schaum's Outline of Vector Analysis (Schaums' Outline Series), Mc -Graw Hill

Publication.

7. Seymour Lipschutz, Schaum's Outline of Beginning Linear Algebra (Schaums' Outline Series),

Mc-Graw Hill Publication.

8. Dr. B. S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publication, 43rd edition, 2010.

Term Work:

General Instructions:

1. Batch wise tu torials are to be conducted. The number of students per batch should be as per

University pattern for practicals.

2. Students must be encouraged to write at least 6 class tutorials on entire syllabus.

3. A group of 4 -6 students should be assigned a self -learning topic. Students should prepare a

presentation/problem solving of 10 -15 minutes. This should be considered as mini project in

Engineering mathematics. This project should be graded for 10 marks depe nding on the

performance of the students.

4. The distribution of Term Work marks will be as follows –

1. Attendance (Theory and Tutorial) 05 marks

2. Class Tutorials on entire syllabus 10 marks

3. Mini project 10 marks

Internal Assessment (IA):

Two tests must be conducted which should cover at least 80% of syllabus. The average marks of both

the test will be considered as final IA marks.

End Semester Examination:

1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each of 20 marks.

2. Total 4 questions ne ed to be solved.

3. Question No.1 will be compulsory and based on the entire syllabus wherein sub questions of 2 to 5

marks will be asked.

4. Remaining questions will be selected from all the modules.

## Page 185

Programme Structure for Bachelor of Engineering (B.E.) – Electronics and Computer Science (Rev. 2020)

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B.E. (ELECTRONICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE), REV 2020 11

Course

Code Course Name Teaching Scheme Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total

ECC 302 Electronic

Devices 03 -- -- 03 -- -- 03

Course

Code Course

Name Examination Scheme

Theory Marks

Term

Work Practical Oral Total Internal assessment

End

Sem.

Exam Exam

duration

Hours Test

1 Test

2 Avg. of

Test 1

and

Test 2

ECC

302 Electronic

Devices 20 20 20 80 03 -- -- -- 100

Course Objectives:

1. To deliver the knowledge of basic semiconductor devices.

2. To enhance comprehension capabilities of students through understanding of electronic devices.

3. To introduce and motivate students to the use of advanced nano -electronic devices

4. To analyse amplifiers using BJT and FET based devices.

Course Outcomes:

After successful completion of the course students will be able to:

1. Explain the working of semiconductor devices.

2. Interpret the characteristics of semiconductor devices.

3. Analyse Electronics c ircuits using BJT and FET (DC & AC analysis)

4. Compare various biasing circuits & configurations of BJT and MOSFETs.

5. Select best circuit for the given specifications/application.

6. Describe the working of advanced nano -electronic devices

## Page 186

Programme Structure for Bachelor of Engineering (B.E.) – Electronics and Computer Science (Rev. 2020)

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B.E. (ELECTRONICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE), REV 2020 12

Module

No. Unit

No. Contents Hrs.

1 P-N Junction Diode & Applications 06

1.1 Theoretical description of basic structure & construction, symbol, operation under zero

bias, forward bias & reverse bias, avalanche breakdown, V -I characteristics &

temperature effects (no mathematical analysis or numerical examples)

1.2 Application of P -N junction diode as clippers & clampers (different types of

configurations with input -output waveforms & transfer characteristics; theoretical

description & analysis of each circuit; numerical examples)

2 Special Semiconductor Devices 04

2.1 Zener diode as the voltage regulator (theoretical description only which includes

construction of circuit diagram, operation / working for varying DC input voltage &

varying load resistance, concept of line regulation & load regulation – no numerical

examp les)

2.2 Construction, structure, symbol, operating principle, working & V -I characteristics

of special semiconductor devices such as Varactor diode, Schottky diode, Photo

diode, Light emitting diode (LED) & Solar cells

3 Bipolar Junction Transistor (BJT) 03

3.1 BJT construction & structure, symbol, operation, voltages & currents, V -I

characteristics of common emitter (CE), common base (CB) & common collector (CC)

configuration, Early effect & concept of leakage current

4 Field Effect Devices (FET) 03

4.1 JFET: Construction, symbol, operation, V -I & transfer characteristics

MOSFET: Construction, operation, symbol, V -I & transfer characteristics of the D -

MOSFET & E -MOSFET (theoretical description only for JFET & MOSFET)

5 Rectifiers &Filters 04

5.1 Rectifiers: Working & mathematical analysis of full – wave centre tapped rectifier

& bridge type rectifier (mathematical analysis include expressions for the DC /

average & RMS output voltage, DC / average & RMS output current & ripple factor;

numerical examples included)

5.2 Filters: Capacitor (C), Inductor (L), Inductor – Capacitor (LC), C -L-C (π) with

circuit diagram, waveforms, working / operation & expression for ripple factor

(theoretical description only – no analysis or numerical examples to be included)

Total 20

## Page 187

Programme Structure for Bachelor of Engineering (B.E.) – Electronics and Computer Science (Rev. 2020)

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B.E. (ELECTRONICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE), REV 2020 13

Text Books:

1. Donald A. Neamen, “Electronic Circuit Analysis and Design”, TATA McGraw Hill,

2nd Edition

2. Adel S. Sedra, Kenneth C. Smith and Arun N Chandorkar, “Microelectronic Circuits

Theory and Applications”, International Version, OXFORD International Students

Edition, Fifth E dition.

3. James Morris & Krzysztof Iniewski, Nano -electronic Device Applications Handbook by CRC Press

Reference Books:

1. Boylest ead," Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory", Pearson Education

2. David A. Bell, “Electronic Devices and Circuits”, Oxford, Fifth Edition.

3. Muhammad H. Rashid, “Microelectronics Circuits Analysis and Design”, Cengage

4. S. Salivahanan, N. Suresh Kumar, “Electronic Devices and Circuits”, Tata McGraw

Hill.

5. Millman and Halkie s, “Integrated Electronics”, T ata McGraw Hill.

Internal Assessment (IA):

Two tests must be conducted which should cover at least 80% of syllabus. The average marks of both

the test will be considered as final IA marks .

End Semester Examination:

1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each of 20 marks.

2. Total 4 questions need to be solved.

3. Question No.1 will be compulsory and based on the entire syllabus wherein sub questions of 2

to 5 marks will be asked.

4. Remaining questions will be selected from all the modules.

## Page 188

Programme Structure for Bachelor of Engineering (B.E.) – Electronics and Computer Science (Rev. 2020)

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B.E. (ELECTRONICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE), REV 2020 14

Course

Code Course

Name Teaching Scheme Credits Assigned

Theory Practical

and oral Tutorial Theory Practical

and oral Tutorial Total

ECC 303 Digital

Electronics 03 -- -- 03 -- -- 03

Course

Code Course

Name Examination Scheme

Theory Marks

Term

Work Practical

and

Oral Total Internal assessment

End

Sem.

Exam Exam

duration

Hours Test 1 Test

2 Avg. of

Test 1

and

Test 2

ECC 303 Digital

Electronics 20 20 20 80 03 -- -- 100

Course Pre-requisite s:

Basic Electrical & Electronics Engineering

Course Objectives:

1. To understand various number system s & codes and to introduce students to various logic gates,

SOP, POS form and their minimization techniques.

2. To teach the working of combinational circuits, their applications and implementation of

combinational logic circuits using MSI chips.

3. To teach the elements of sequential logic design, analysis and design of sequential circuits.

4. To understand various counters and shift regi sters and its design using MSI chips.

5. To explain and describe various logic families and Programmable Logic Devices.

6. To train students in writing program s with Verilog hardware description languages.

Course Outcome s:

After successful completion of the course students will be able to

1. Perform code conversion and able to apply Boolean algebra for the implementation and minimis ation of logic

functions.

2. Analyse, design and implement Combinational logic circuits.

3. Analyse, design and implement Se quential logic circuits.

4. Design and implement various counter using flip flops and MSI chips.

5. Understand TTL & CMOS logic families, PLDs, CPLD and FPGA.

6. Understand basics of Verilog Hardware Description Language and its programming with combinational and

sequential logic circuits.

## Page 189

Programme Structure for Bachelor of Engineering (B.E.) – Electronics and Computer Science (Rev. 2020)

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B.E. (ELECTRONICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE), REV 2020 15

Module

No. Unit No Contents Hrs.

1

Fundamentals of Digital Design 02

1.1 Number Systems and Codes: Review of Number System, Weighted code, Parity Code:

Hamming Code

Combinational Circuits using basic gates as well as MSI devices 02

2 2.1 Arithmetic Circuits: Ripple carry adder, Carry Look ahead adder

2.2 MSI devices: IC 7483, IC 74151, IC 74138, IC 7485.

Sequential Logic Design 07

3 3.1 Sequential Logic Design: Mealy and Moore Machines, Clocked synchronous state

machine analysis, State reduction techniques (inspection, partition and implication chart

method) and state assignment, sequence detector, Clocked synchronous state machine

design.

3.2 Sequential logic design practices: MSI counters (7490, 7492, 7493,74163, 74169) and

applications, MSI Shift registers (74194) and their applications.

Logic Families and Programmable Logic Devices 04

4 4.1

CMOS Logic : CMOS inverter, CMOS NAND and CMOS NOR, Interfacing CMOS to

TTL and TTL to CMOS.

4.2 Programmable Logic Devices : Concepts of PAL and PLA. Simple logic implementation

using PAL and PLA , Introduction to CPLD and FPGA architectures, Numericals based on

PLA and PAL

Introduction to Verilog HDL 05

5 5.1 Basics : Introduction to Hardware Description Language and its core features, synthesis in

digital design, logic value system, data types, constants, parameters, wires and registers.

Verilog Constructs: Continuous & procedural assignment statements, logical, arithmetic,

relational, shift operator, always, if, case, loop statements, Gate level modelling, Module

instantiation statements.

5.2 Modelling Examples: Combinational logic eg. Arithmetic circuits, Multiplexer,

Demultiplexer, decoder, Sequential logic eg. flip flop, counters.

Total 20

## Page 190

Programme Structure for Bachelor of Engineering (B.E.) – Electronics and Computer Science (Rev. 2020)

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B.E. (ELECTRONICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE), REV 2020 16

Text Books:

1. R. P. Jain, Modern Digital Electronics, Tata McGraw Hill Education, Third Edition

2003.

2. Morris Mano, Digital Design, Pearson Education, Asia 2002.

3. J. Bhaskar, A Verilog HDL Primer, Third Edition, Star Galaxy Publishing,

2018.

Reference Books:

1. Digital Logic Applications and Design – John M. Yarbrough, Thomson

Publications, 2006

2. John F. Warkerly, Digital Design Principles and Pract ices, Pearson Education, Fourth Edition,

2008.

3. Stephen Brown and Zvonko Vranesic, Fundamentals of digital logic design with Verilog

design, McGraw Hill, 3rd Edition.

4. Digital Circuits and Logic Design – Samuel C. Lee, PHI

5. William I.Fle tcher, “An Engineering Approach to Digital Design”, Prentice Hall of India.

6. Parag K Lala, “Digital System design using PLD”, BS Publications, 2003.

7. Charles H. Roth Jr., “Fundamentals of Logic design”, Thomson Learning, 2004.

Internal Assessment Test:

Assessment consists of two class tests of 20 marks each. The first -class test (Internal

Assessment I) is to be conducted when approx. 40% syllabus is completed and the second class

test (Internal Assessment II) when additional 40% syllabus is completed. Du ration of each test

shall be one hour.

End Semester Theory Examination:

1. Question paper will comprise of total 06 questions, each carrying 20 marks.

2. Total 04 questions need to be solved.

3. Question No: 01 will be compulsory and based on the entire syllabus w herein 4 sub -questions

of 5 marks each will be asked.

4. Remaining questions will be randomly selected from all the modules.

5. Weightage of each module will be proportional to the number of respective lecture hours as

mentioned in the syllabus .

## Page 191

Programme Structure for Bachelor of Engineering (B.E.) – Electronics and Computer Science (Rev. 2020)

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B.E. (ELECTRONICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE), REV 2020 17

Course

Code Course Name

Teaching Scheme Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total

ECC 304 Data Structures

and Algorithms 03 -- -- 03 -- -- 03

Course

Code Course Name Examination Scheme

Theory Marks

Term

Work Practical and

Oral Total Internal assessment End

Sem.

Exam Exam

duratio n

Hours Test 1 Test 2 Avg. of

Test 1 and

Test 2

ECC

304 Data

Structures

and

Algorithms 20 20 20 80 03 -- --

-- 100

Course Prerequisite:

C Programming

Course Objectives:

1. To understand and demonstrate basic data structures (such as Arrays, linked list, stack, queue, binary

tree, graph).

2. To implement various operations on data structures .

3. To study different sorting and searching techniques .

4. To choose efficient data structures and apply them to solve real world problems .

Course Outcomes:

After successful completion of the course students will be able to

1. Implement various linear data structures.

2. Implement various non -linear data structures.

3. Select appr opriate sorting and searching techniques for a given problem and use it.

4. Develop solutions for real world problems by selecting appropriate data structure and algorithms.

5. Analyse the complexity of the given algorithms.

## Page 192

Programme Structure for Bachelor of Engineering (B.E.) – Electronics and Computer Science (Rev. 2020)

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B.E. (ELECTRONICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE), REV 2020 18

Module

No. Unit

No. Contents Hrs.

1 Introduction to Data Structures 02

Introduction to Data Structures, Types of Data Structures – Linear and Nonlinear,

Operations on Data Structures, Concept of array, Static arrays vs Dynamic Arrays,

structures.

2 Stack and Queues 04

Introduction, Basic Stack Operations, Representation of a Stack using Array,

Applications of Stack – Infix to Postfix Conversion and Postfix Evaluation.

Queue, Opera tions on Queue

3 Linked List 04

Introduction, Representation of Linked List, Linked List v/s Array, Types of Linked

List - Singly Linked List (SLL ), Operations on Singly Linked List: Insertion , Deletion,

Print SLL.

Implementation of Stack and Queue using Singly Linked List.

4 Trees 04

Introduction, Tree Terminologies, Binary Tree, Representation of Binary Trees,

Binary Tree Traversals, Binary Search Tree Operations on Binary Search Tree,

5 Graphs 03

Introduction, Graph Terminologies, Representation of graph (Adjacency matrix and

adjacency list), Graph Traversals – Depth First Search (DFS) and Breadth First Search

(BFS)

6 Introduction to Sorting and Searching 03

Introduction to Searching: Linear search, Binary search,

Sorting: Internal VS. External Sorting, Sorting Techniques: Bubble, Insertion,

selection, Quick Sort, Merge Sort

Total 20

Text Books:

1. Data Structures Using C, Aaron M Tenenbaum, Yedidyah Langsam, Moshe J Augenstein,

Pearson Education

2. Introduction to Data Structure and its Applications Jean -Paul Tremblay, P. G.Sorenson

3. Data Structures using C, Reema Thareja, Oxford

4. C and Data structures, Prof. P.S.Deshpande, Prof. O.G.Kakde, Dreamtech Press.

5. Data Structures: A Pseudocode Approach with C, Richard F. Gilberg & Behrouz A.

Forouzan, Second Edition, CENGAGE Learning

## Page 193

Programme Structure for Bachelor of Engineering (B.E.) – Electronics and Computer Science (Rev. 2020)

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B.E. (ELECTRONICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE), REV 2020 19

Reference Books:

1. Data Structure Using C, Balagurusamy.

2. Data Structures using C and C++, Rajesh K Shukla, Wiley - India

3. ALGORITHMS Design and Analysis, Bhasin, OXFORD.

4. Data Structures Using C, ISRD Group, Second Edition, Tata McGraw -Hill.

5. Computer Algorithms by Ellis Horowitz and Sartaj Sahni, Universities Press.

6. Data Structures, Adapted by: GAV PAI, Schaum’s Outlines.

Internal Assessment (IA):

Two tests mus t be conducted which should cover at least 80% of syllabus. The average marks of both the test s

will be considered as the final IA marks .

End Semester Examination:

1. Question paper will consist of 6 questions, each of 20 marks.

2. Total 4 questions need to be solved.

3. Question No.1 will be compulsory and based on the entire syllabus wherein sub questions of 2 to 5 marks will

be asked.

4. Remaining questions will be selected from all the modules.

## Page 194

Programme Structure for Bachelor of Engineering (B.E.) – Electronics and Computer Science (Rev. 2020)

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B.E. (ELECTRONICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE), REV 2020 20

Course

Code Course Name Teaching Scheme Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total

ECC

305 Database

Management

Systems 03 -- -- 03 -- -- 03

Course

Code Course Name Examination Scheme

Theory Marks

Term

Work Practical and

Oral Total Internal assessment

End

Sem.

Exam Exam

duratio

n

Hours Test 1 Test 2 Avg. of

Test 1

and

Test 2

ECC

305 Database

Management

Systems 20 20 20 80 03 -- --

100

Course Objectives:

1. Develop entity relationship data model and its mapping to relational model

2. Learn relational algebra and formulate SQL queries

3. Apply normalization techniques to normalize the database

4. Understand concept s of transaction, concurrency control and recovery techniques

Course Outcomes:

After successful completion of the course students will be able to:

1. Recognize the need of database management system

2. Design ER and EER diagram for real life applications

3. Constru ct relational model and write relational algebra queries.

4. Formulate SQL queries

5. Apply the concept of normalization to relational database design.

6. Describe the concept s of transaction, concurrency and recovery.

## Page 195

Programme Structure for Bachelor of Engineering (B.E.) – Electronics and Computer Science (Rev. 2020)

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B.E. (ELECTRONICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE), REV 2020 21

Module

No. Unit

No. Contents Hrs.

1 Introduction to Database Concepts 03

1.1 Introduction, Characteristics of databases

1.2 File systems v/s Database systems

1.3 Data abstraction and Data Independence

1.4 DBMS system architecture

1.5 Database Administrator

2 Entity –Relationship Data Model 03

2.1 The Entity -Relationship (ER) Model

2.2 Entity types: Weak and strong entity sets, Entity sets, Types of Attributes, Keys

2.3 Relationship constraints: Cardinality and Participation

3 Relational Model and Relational Algebra 03

3.1 Relational schema and concept of keys

3.2 Relational Algebra – operators, Relational Algebra Queries.

4 Structured Query Language (SQL) 05

4.1 Overview of SQL

4.2 Data Definition Commands

4.3 Integrity constraints: Key constraints, Domain Constraints, Referential integrity, Check

constraints

4.4 Data Manipulation commands, Data Control commands

4.5 Set and string operations, aggregate function - group by, having

5 Relational –Database Design 03

5.1 Concept of normalization

5.2 Function Dependencies

5.3 First Normal Form, 2NF, 3N F

6 Transactions Management and Concurrency and Recovery 03

6.1 Transaction Concept, Transaction states

## Page 196

Programme Structure for Bachelor of Engineering (B.E.) – Electronics and Computer Science (Rev. 2020)

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B.E. (ELECTRONICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE), REV 2020 22

Text Books:

1. Korth, Slberchatz,Sudarshan, Database System Concepts, 6th Edition, McGraw Hill

2. Elmasri and Navathe, Fundamentals of Database Systems, 5th Edition, Pearson education

3. Raghu Ramkrishnan and Johannes Gehrke, Database Management Systems, TMH

Reference Books:

1. Peter Rob and Carlos Coronel, Database Systems Design, Implementation and Management‖,

Thomson Learning, 5th Edition.

2. Dr. P.S. Deshpande, SQL and PL/SQL for Oracle 10g, Black Book, Dreamtech Press.

3. G. K. Gupta, Database Management Systems, McGraw Hill., 2012

6.2 ACID properties

6.3 Transaction Control Commands

6.4 Serializability: Conflict and View

Total 20

Internal Assessment (IA):

Two tests must be conducted which should cover at least 80% of syllabus. The average marks of both the test will

be considered as final IA marks

End Semester Examination:

1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each of 20 marks.

2. Total 4 questions need to be solved.

3. Question No.1 will be compulsory and based on the entire syllabus wherein sub questions of 2 to 5 marks

will be asked.

4. Remaining questions will be selected from all the modules .

## Page 197

Programme Structure for Bachelor of Engineering (B.E.) – Electronics and Computer Science (Rev. 2020)

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B.E. (ELECTRONICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE), REV 2020 23

Course

Code Course Name Teaching Scheme Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical

Total

ECL 301 Electronic Devices Lab -- 02 -- -- 01

01

Course

Code

Course

Name Examination

Scheme

Theory Marks

Term

Work

Practical &

Oral

Total Internal assessment End

Sem.

Exam Exam

duration

Hours Test

1 Test

2 Avg. of Test 1

and Test 2

ECL 30 1 Electronic

Devices

Lab -- -- -- -- -- 25 25 50

Laboratory Objectives:

1. To deliver a hands -on approach for studying electronic devices

2. To comprehend characteristics of electronic devices; thereby understanding their behaviour

3. To analyse & calculate inherent parameters of electronic devices through experimental approach

4. To introduce modern software simulation tools for modelling & simulati on of electronic devices

Laboratory Outcomes:

After successful completion of the laboratory students will be able to

1. Explain the working of semiconductor devices.

2. Interpret the characteristics of semiconductor devices.

3. Analyse electronics circuits using BJT and FET (DC & AC analysis)

4. Simulate basic circuits using electronic devices through software simulation

Term Work:

At least 6 experiments covering entire syllabus of ECC 302 (Electronic Devices) should be set to have well

predefined inference and conclusion. This must include 60% Hardware and 40% Simulation

experiments. The experiments should be student centric and attempt shoul d be made to make the

experiments meaningful and interesting. Experiment s must be graded from time to time. The grades should

be converted into marks as per the Credit and Grading System manual and should be added and averaged.

The grading and term work as sessment should be done based on this scheme. The final certification and

acceptance of term work ensures satisfactory performance of laboratory work and minimum passing marks

in term work. Practical and Oral exam will be based on the entire syllabus.

## Page 198

Programme Structure for Bachelor of Engineering (B.E.) – Electronics and Computer Science (Rev. 2020)

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B.E. (ELECTRONICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE), REV 2020 24

Suggested List of Experiments is given below. 70% of the experiments performed should be from

this list. For the rest 30%, the course instructor has the option to set innovative experiments, from

within the curriculum.

List of Hardware Experiments

Sr.

No. Experiment Name

1 To study passive (R, L, C) and active (BJT, MOSFET) components.

2 To study equipment (CRO, Function Generator, Power supply).

3 To perform characteristics of PN junction diode.

4 To perform Clippers and Clampers.

5 To perform Full wave/Bridge rectifier with LC/pi filter.

6 To perform Zener as a shunt voltage regulator.

7 To simulate VI characteristics of MEMRISTOR using nanohub.org

List of Simulation Experiments

Sr.

No. Experiment Name

1 SPICE simulation of and implementation for junction analysis

2 SPICE simulation of and implementation for BJT characteristics

3 SPICE simulation of and implementation for JFET characteristics

4 SPICE simulation of for MOSFET characteristics

5 SPICE simulation of Full wave/Bridge rectifier with LC/pi filter.

## Page 199

Programme Structure for Bachelor of Engineering (B.E.) – Electronics and Computer Science (Rev. 2020)

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B.E. (ELECTRONICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE), REV 2020 25

Course Code

Course Name Teaching Scheme Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Total

ECL 302 Digital Electronics Lab -- 02 -- -- 01

01

Course

Code Course

Name Examination Scheme

Theory Marks

Term

Work Practical &

Oral Total Internal assessment

End

Sem.

Exam Exam

duration

Hours Test 1 Test 2 Avg. of

Test 1

and

Test 2

ECL

302 Digital

Electronics

Lab - - - - - 25

25 50

Laboratory Objectives:

1. To learn the functionality of basic logic gates.

2. To construct combinational circuits and verify their functionalities.

3. To learn the functionality of flip flops and their conversion.

4. To design and implement synchronous and asynchronous counters, Shift registers using MSI

5. To simulate various combinational and sequential circuits and analyze the results using Verilog HDL.

Term Work:

At least 6 experiments covering the entire syllabus of ECC 303 (Digital Logic Circuits) should be set to

have well predefined inference and conclusion. The experiments should be student centric and attempt

should be made to make experiments meaningful and interesting. Simulation experiments are also

encouraged. Experi ment must be graded from time to time. The grades should be converted into marks as

per the Credit and Grading System manual and should be added and averaged. The grading and term work

assessment should be done based on this scheme. The final certification and acceptance of term work

ensures satisfactory performance of laboratory work and minimum passing marks in term work. Practical

and Oral exam will be based on the entire syllabus.

## Page 200

Programme Structure for Bachelor of Engineering (B.E.) – Electronics and Computer Science (Rev. 2020)

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B.E. (ELECTRONICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE), REV 2020 26

Suggested List of Experiments is given below. 70% of the experiments performed should be from

this list. For the rest 30%, the course instructor has the optio n to set innovative experiments , from

within the curriculum.

List of Hardware Experiments

Sr.

No. Experiment Title

1 To verify different logic gates and implement basic gates using universal gates

2 To implement Boolean function in SOP and POS form

3 To implement half adder, full adder, half Subtractor, full Subtractor

4 To implement BCD adder using binary adder IC 7483

5 To implement logic equations using Multiplexer IC 74151

6 To verify truth table of SR , JK, T and D flip flops

7 To perform Flip flop conversion JK to D, JK to T and D to T flip flop

8 To implement MOD N counter using IC 7490/7492/7493

9 To implement Synchronous counter using IC 74163/74169 OR To implement universal

shift register using IC 74194

List of Simulation/Software Experiments

Sr.

No. Experiment Title

1 To design and simulate Full adder/full subtractor using Verilog HDL

2 To design and simulate Multiplexer/Demultiplexer using Verilog HDL

3 To design and simulate decoder 74138 using Verilog HDL

4 To simulate basic flip flops using Verilog HDL

5 To design and simulate 4 bit counter / up -down counter using Verilog HDL

6 To design and simulate Shift register using Verilog HDL

Additional/ Suggested experiments (optional) - Implementation of any of above using FPGA/CPLD

## Page 201

Programme Structure for Bachelor of Engineering (B.E.) – Electronics and Computer Science (Rev. 2020)

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B.E. (ELECTRONICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE), REV 2020 27

Course

Code Course

Name Teaching Scheme Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical

Total

ECL 303 Data Structures

and Algorithms

Lab -- 02 -- -- 01

01

Course

Code

Course

Name Examination

Scheme

Theory Marks

Term

Work

Practical

& Oral

Total Internal assessment End

Sem.

Exam Exam

duration

Hours Test 1 Test 2

Avg. of

Test 1

and

Test 2

ECL 30 3 Data

Structures

and

Algorithms

Lab -- -- -- -- -- 25 25

50

Prerequisite:

C Programming Language

Laboratory Outcomes:

1. Students will be able to implement linear data structures & will be able to handle operations like insertion,

deletion, searching and traversing on them.

2. Students will be able to implement nonlinear data structures & will be able to handle operations like insertion,

deletion, searching and traversing on them.

3. Students will be able to choose appropriate data structure and apply it in various problem domains .

4. Students will be able to select appropriate searching techniques for given prob lems.

Term Work:

At least 6 experiments and 2 assignments covering entire syllabus of Data Structures and Algorithms

(ECC 304) should be set to have well predefined inference and conclusion. The experiments should be

student centric and attempt should be made to make experiments meaningful and interesting. Experiment

must be graded from time to time. The grades should be converted into marks as per the Credit and Grading

System manual and should be added and averaged. The grading and term work assessment should be done

based on this scheme. The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures satisfactory performance

of labo ratory work and minimum passing marks in term work. Practical and Oral exam will be based on

the entire syllabus.

Total 25 Marks = (Experiments -15 mark + Attendance -5 mark + Assignments -05 mark)

## Page 202

Programme Structure for Bachelor of Engineering (B.E.) – Electronics and Computer Science (Rev. 2020)

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B.E. (ELECTRONICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE), REV 2020 28

Suggested List of Experiments

(*) marked experiments are compulsory.

Sr.

No Experiment Name

1 *Implement Stack ADT using array

2 *Convert an Infix expression to Postfix expression using stack ADT

3 *Implement Linear Queue ADT using array

4 *Implement Singly Linked List ADT

5 *Implement Binary Search Tree ADT using Linked List

6 *Implement searching algorithms -Linear search, Binary search

7 *Implement sorting algorithms ( any 2) - bubble, selection, insertion, merge,quick

Useful Links:

1.www.leetcode.com

2. www.hackerrank.com

3. www.cs.usfca.edu/~galles/visualization/Algorith ms.html

4. www.codechef.com

## Page 203

Programme Structure for Bachelor of Engineering (B.E.) – Electronics and Computer Science (Rev. 2020)

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B.E. (ELECTRONICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE), REV 2020 29

Course

Code Course Name Teaching Scheme Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical

Total

ECL 30 4 Database

Management

Systems lab -- 02 -- -- 01 -- 01

Course

Code

Course

Name Examination Scheme

Theory Marks

Term

Work

Practical

and

Oral

Total Internal assessment End

Sem.

Exam Exam

duration

Hours Test 1

Test 2

Avg, of Test 1

and Test 2

ECL 30 4 Database

Management

Systems lab -- -- -- -- -- 25 25

50

Laboratory Outcomes:

At the end of the course the student should be able to

1. Design ER /EER diagram and convert to relational model for the real world application .

2. Apply DDL , DML , DCL and TCL commands .

3. Write simple and complex queries

4. Use PL/SQL Constructs.

5. Demonstrate the concept of concurrent transactions execution and frontend -backend connectivity

Term Work:

At least 6 experiments covering the entire syllabus of Database Management Systems (ECC 305) should

be set to have well predefined inference and conclusion. The experiments should be student centric and

attempt should be made to make the experiments meaningful and interesting. Experiment s must be graded

from time to time. The grades should be converted into marks as per the Credit and Grading System manual

and should be added and averaged. The grading and term work assessment should be done based on this

scheme. The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures satisfactory performance of laboratory

work and minimum passing marks in term work. Practical and Oral exam will be based on the entire

syllabus.

## Page 204

Programme Structure for Bachelor of Engineering (B.E.) – Electronics and Computer Science (Rev. 2020)

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B.E. (ELECTRONICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE), REV 2020 30

Suggested List of Experiments is given below. 70% of the experiments performed should be from

this list. For the rest 30%, the course instructor has the option to set innovative experiments, from

within the curriculum.

Sr. No. Experiment Name

1 Identify the case study and detail ed statement of problem. Design an Entity -Relationship (ER)

2 Create a database using Data Definition Language (DDL) and apply integrity constraints for the

specified System

3 Apply DML Commands for the specified system

4 Perform Simple queries, string manipulation operations and aggregate functions.

5 Implement various Join operations.

6 Perform Nested and Complex queries

7 Perform DCL and TCL commands

8 Demonstrate Database connectivity

## Page 205

Programme Structure for Bachelor of Engineering (B.E.) – Electronics and Computer Science (Rev. 2020)

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B.E. (ELECTRONICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE), REV 2020 31

Course

Code

Course Name Teaching Scheme

(Hrs.) Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total

ECL 305 Skill -based Lab

OOPM

-- 02* + 02 -- -- 02 -- 02

* Theory class to be conducted for full class

Course

Code Course

Name Examination Scheme

Theory Marks Term

Work Practical

And

Oral

Total Internal assessment End

Sem.

Exam Exam.

Duration

(in Hrs)

Test 1 Test 2 Avg. of

Test 1

and

Test 2

ECL

305 Skill -based

Lab OOPM

-- -- -- -- -- 50 -- 50

Course Pre-requisites:

• Fundamentals of C -Programming

• Control Structures

• Arrays and String

Course Objectives:

1. To understand Object Oriented Programming basics and its features.

2. To understand and apply Object Oriented Programming (OOP) principles

3. Able to implement Methods, Constructors, Arrays, Multithreading and Applet in java

4. Able to use a programming language to resolve problems.

Course Outcomes:

After successful completion of the course student will be able to

1. Use different control structures.

2. Understand fundamental features of an object -oriented language: object classes and interfaces,

exceptions and libraries of object collections.

3. Understand Java Programming.

4. To develop a program that efficiently implements the features and packaging concept of java in

laboratory.

5. To implement Exception Handling and Applets using Java.

## Page 206

Programme Structure for Bachelor of Engineering (B.E.) – Electronics and Computer Science (Rev. 2020)

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B.E. (ELECTRONICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE), REV 2020 32

Textbooks:

1. Bjarne Stroustrup, “The C++ Programming language”, Third edition, Pearson Education, 2000.

2. Deitel, “C++ How to Program”, 4th Edition, Pearson Education, 2005.

3. D. T. Editorial Services, “Java 8 Programming Black Book”, Dreamtech Press, Edition, 2015.

4. Yashwant Kanitkar, “Let Us Java”, BPB Publications, 4nd Edition, 2019.

Module

No

Unit

No.

Content s

Hrs.

1 Introduction to Java 06

1.1 Programming paradigms - Introduction to programming paradigms, Introduction to four main

Programming paradigms like procedural, object oriented, functional, and logic & rule based.

Difference between C++ and Java.

1.2 Java History, Java Features, Java Virtual Machine, Data Types and Size (Signed vs. Unsigned,

User Defined vs. Primitive Data Types, Explicit Pointer type), Programming Language JDK

Environment and Tools.

2 Inheritance, Polymorphism, Encapsulation using Java 12

2.1 Classes and Methods : class fundamentals, declaring objects, assigning object reference

variables, adding methods to a class, returning a value, constructors, this keyword, garbage

collection, finalize () method, overloading methods, argument passing, object as parameter,

returning objects, access control, static, final, nested and inner classes, command line

arguments, variable -length Arguments.

String: String Class and Methods in Java.

2.2 Inheritances: Member access and inheritance, super class references, Using super,

multilevel hierarchy, constructor call sequence, method overriding, dynamic method

dispatch, abstract classes, Object class.

Packages and Interfaces: defining a package, finding packages and CLASSPATH, access

protection, importing packages, interfaces (defining, implementation, nesting, applying),

variables in interfaces, extending interfaces, ins tance of operator.

3 Exception Handling and Applets in Java 06

3.1 Exception Handling: fundamental, exception types, uncaught exceptions, try, catch, throw,

throws, finally, multiple catch clauses, nested try statements, built -in exceptions, custom

exceptions (creating your own exception subclasses).

3.2 Applet: Applet Fundamental, Applet Architecture, Applet Life Cycle, Applet Skeleton,

Requesting Repainting, status window, HTML Applet tag, passing parameters to Applets,

Applet and Application Program.

Total 24

## Page 207

Programme Structure for Bachelor of Engineering (B.E.) – Electronics and Computer Science (Rev. 2020)

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B.E. (ELECTRONICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE), REV 2020 33

Reference Books:

1. Herbert Schidt, “The Complete Reference”, Tata McGraw -Hill Publishing Company Limited,

10th Edition, 2017.

2. Harvey M. Deitel, Paul J. Deitel, Java: How to Program, 8th Edition, PHI, 2009.

3. Grady Booch, James Rumbaugh, Ivar Jacobson, “The Unified Modeling Languageser Guide”,

Pearson Education.

4. Sachin Malhotra, Saurabh Chaudhary “Programming in Java”, Oxford University Press, 2010

Software Tools:

1. Raptor -Flowchart Simulation:http://raptor.martincar lisle.com/

2. Eclipse: https://eclipse.org/

3. Netbeans:https://netbeans.org/downloads/

4. CodeBlock:http://www.codeblocks.org/

5. J-Edit/J -Editor/Blue J

Online Repository:

1. Google Drive

2. GitHub

3. Code Guru

Suggested list of Experiments

Sr. No. JAVA Programs

1 Display addition of number

2 Accept marks from user, if Marks greater than 40, declare the student as “Pass” else “Fail””

3 Accept 3 numbers from user. Compare them and declare the largest number (Using if -else statement).

4 Display sum of first 10 even numbers using do -while loop.

5 Display Multiplication table of 15 using while loop.

6 Display basic calculator using Switch Statement.

7 Display the sum of elements of arrays.

8 Accept and display the string entered and execute at least 5 different string functions on it.

9 Read and display the numbers as command line Arguments and display the addition of them

10 Define a class, describe its constructor, overload the Constructors and instantiate its object.

11 Illustrate method of overloading

12 Demonstrate Parameterized Constructor

## Page 208

Programme Structure for Bachelor of Engineering (B.E.) – Electronics and Computer Science (Rev. 2020)

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B.E. (ELECTRONICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE), REV 2020 34

13 Implement Multiple Inheritance using interface

14 Create thread by implementing 'runnable' interface or creating 'Thread Class.

15 Demonstrate Hello World Applet Example

Term Work:

At least 8 experiments covering entire syllabus should be set to have well predefined inference and conclusion.

Teacher should refer the suggested experiments and can design additional experiment to maintain better

understanding and quality.

The experiments should be students centric and attempt should be made to make experiments meaningful ,

interesting and innovative. Term work assessment must be based on the overall performance of the student , with

experiment s graded from time to time.

The grades will be converted to marks as per “ Choice Based Credit and Grading System ” manual and should

be added and averaged. Based on above scheme gradin g and term work assessment should be done.

The practical and oral examination will be based on the entire syllabus. Students are encourage d to share their

experiment codes on online repository. Practical exam slip should cover all 16 experiments for examination.

## Page 209

Programme Structure for Bachelor of Engineering (B.E.) – Electronics and Computer Science (Rev. 2020)

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B.E. (ELECTRONICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE), REV 2020 35

Course code Course Name Credits

ECM 301 Mini Project 1 A 02

Course

Code Course

Name Examination Scheme

Theory Marks Term

Work Practical/

Oral Total

Internal Assessment End

Sem.

Exam Exam

duration

Hours

Test

1 Test

2 Avg. of

Test 1 and

Test 2

ECM

301 Mini

Project - 1A -- -- -- -- -- 25 25 50

Objectives

1. To acquaint with the process of identifying the needs and converting it into the problem.

2. To familiarize the process of solving the problem in a group.

3. To acquaint with the process of applying basic engineering fundamentals to attempt solutions to the problems.

4. To inculcate the process of self -learning and research.

Outcomes:

Learner will be able to…

1. Identify problems based on societal /research needs.

2. Apply Knowledge and skill to solve societal problems in a group.

3. Develop interpersonal skills to work as member of a group or leader.

4. Draw the proper inferences from availabl e results through theoretical/ experimental/simulations.

5. Analyse the impact of solutions in societal and environmental context for sustainable development.

6. Use standard norms of engineering practices

7. Excel in written and oral communication.

8. Demonstrate ca pabilities of self -learning in a group, which leads to life -long learning.

9. Demonstrate project management principles during project work.

Guidelines for Mini Project

• Students shall form a group of 3 to 4 students, while forming a group shall not be allowed less than three or

more than four students, as it is a group activity.

• Students should do survey and identify needs, which shall be converted into problem statement for mini

project in consultation with faculty supervisor/head of department/interna l committee of faculties.

• Students hall submit implementation plan in the form of Gantt/PERT/CPM chart, which will cover weekly

activity of mini project.

## Page 210

Programme Structure for Bachelor of Engineering (B.E.) – Electronics and Computer Science (Rev. 2020)

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B.E. (ELECTRONICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE), REV 2020 36

• A log book to be prepared by each group, wherein group can record weekly work progress, guide/supervis or

can verify and record notes/comments.

• Faculty supervisor may give inputs to students during mini project activity; however, focus shall be on self -

learning.

• Students in a group shall understand problem effectively, propose multiple solution and sele ct best possible

solution in consultation with guide/ supervisor.

• Students shall convert the best solution into working model using various components of their domain areas

and demonstrate.

• The solution to be validated with proper justification and report to be compiled in standard format of

University of Mumbai.

• With the focus on the self -learning, innovation, addressing societal problems and entrepreneurship quality

development within the students through the Mini Projects, it is preferable that a single project of appropriate

level and quality to be carried out in two semesters by all the groups of the students. i.e. Mini Project 1 in

semester III and IV. Similarly, Mini Project 2 in semesters V and VI.

• However, based on the individual students or group capability, with the mentor’s recommendations, if the

proposed Mini Project adhering to the qualitative aspects mentioned above gets completed in odd semester,

then that group can be allowed to work on the extension of the Mini Project with suitable

impro vements/modifications or a completely new project idea in even semester. This policy can be adopted

on case by case basis.

• Students must take up a project spanning Semester 3 and Semester 4. It is expected that in Semester 3,

Literature Survey and Problem formulation is completed and a concise report of the same is submitted.

In Semester 4, Implementation of the project followed by report is expected.

Guidelines for Assessment of Mini Project:

Term Work

• The review/ progress monitoring committee shall be constituted by head of departments of each

institute. The progress of mini project to be evaluated on continuous basis, minimum two reviews in

each semester.

• In continuous assessment focus shall also be on each individual student, assessment based on

indiv idual’s contribution in group activity, their understanding and response to questions.

• Distribution of Term work marks for both semesters shall be as below;

o Marks awarded by guide/supervisor based on log book : 10

o Marks awarded by review committee : 10

o Quality of Project report : 05

Review/progress monitoring committee may consider following points for assessment based on either

one year or half year project as mentioned in general guidelines.

One-year project:

• In first semester entire theoreti cal solution shall be ready, including components/system selection and

cost analysis. Two reviews will be conducted based on presentation given by students group.

▪ First shall be for finalisation of problem

▪ Second shall be on finalisation of proposed solu tion of problem.

• In second semester expected work shall be procurement of component’s/systems, building of working

prototype, testing and validation of results based on work completed in an earlier semester.

▪ First review is based on readiness of building working prototype to be conducted.

▪ Second review shall be based on poster presentation cum demonstration of working model in

last month of the said semester.

## Page 211

Programme Structure for Bachelor of Engineering (B.E.) – Electronics and Computer Science (Rev. 2020)

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI, B.E. (ELECTRONICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE), REV 2020 37

Half -year project:

• In this case in one semester students’ group shall complete project in all aspects including,

o Identification of need/problem

o Proposed final solution

o Procurement of components/systems

o Building prototype and testing

• Two reviews will be conducted for continuous assessment,

▪ First shall be for finalisation of problem and proposed solution

▪ Second shall be for implementation and testing of solution.

Assessment criteria of Mini Project.

Mini Project shall be assessed based on following criteria;

1. Quality of survey/ need identification

2. Clarity of Problem definition based on need.

3. Innovativeness in solutions

4. Feasibility of proposed problem solutions and selection of best solution

5. Cost effectiveness

6. Societal impact

7. Innovativeness

8. Cost effectiveness and Societal impact

9. Full functioning of working model as per stated requirem ents

10. Effective use of skill sets

11. Effective use of standard engineering norms

12. Contribution of an individual’s as member or leader

13. Clarity in written and oral communication

• In one year, project , first semester evaluation may be based on first six criteria’s and remaining may

be used for second semester evaluation of performance of students in mini project.

• In case of half year project all criteria’s in generic may be considered for evaluation of performance

of students in mini project.

Guidelin es for Assessment of Mini Project Practical/Oral Examination:

• Report should be prepared as per the guidelines issued by the University of Mumbai.

• Mini Project shall be assessed through a presentation and demonstration of working model by the student

project group to a panel of Internal and External Examiners preferably from industry or research organisations

having experience of more than five years approved by head of Institution.

• Students shall be motivated to publish a paper based on the wo rk in Conferences/students competitions.

Mini Project shall be assessed based on following points;

1. Quality of problem and Clarity

2. Innovativeness in solutions

3. Cost effectiveness and Societal impact

4. Full functioning of working model as per stated requirements

5. Effective use of skill sets

6. Effective use of standard engineering norms

7. Contribution of an individual’s as member or leader

8. Clarity in written and oral communication

## Page 212

AC -23/02/2021

Item No. – 6.11-2

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI

Bachelor of Engineering

in

Bio-medical Engineering

Direct Second Year (Sem. III) Admitted Students for the

current Academic Year 2020 -21(Only)

(REV - 2019 ‘C’ Scheme) from Academic Year 2019 – 20

Under

FACULTY OF

SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY

(As per AICTE guidelines with effect from the academic year 2019 –2020)

## Page 213

2

University of Mumbai, Biomedical Engineering, Rev 2020 -21 Program Structure for Second Year Engineering

Semester III & I V

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI

(With Effect from 2020 -2021 )

Semester I II

Course

Code Course Name Teaching Scheme

(Contact Hours) Credits Assigned

Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract . Tut. Total

BMC301 Engineering

Mathematics - III 3 -- 1 3 -- 1 4

BMC302 Human Anatomy and

Physiology for Engineers 3 -- 3 -- 3

BMC303 Medical Sensors 3 -- -- 3 -- -- 3

BMC304 Electronic Circuits

Analysis and Design 4 -- -- 4 -- -- 4

BMC305 Digital Electronics 3 -- -- 3 -- -- 3

BML3 01 Human Anatomy and

Physiology for Engineers

Lab -- 2 -- -- 1 -- 1

BML3 02 Medical Sensors Lab -- 2 -- -- 1 -- 1

BML3 03 Electronic Circuits

Analysis and Design Lab -- 2 -- -- 1 -- 1

BML304 Electronics Lab ( SBL) -- 4 -- -- 2 -- 2

BMM301 Mini Project – 1 A -- 4$ -- -- 2 -- 2

Total 16 14 1 16 07 1 24

Course

Code Course Name Examination Scheme

Theory

Term

Work Pract/

oral Total Internal

Assessment End

Sem.

Exam Exam.

Duration

(in Hrs) Test

1 Test

2 Avg.

BMC301 Engineering

Mathematics - III 20 20 20 80 3 25 -- 125

BMC3 02 Human Anatomy and

Physiology for Engineers 20 20 20 80 3 -- -- 100

BMC303 Medical Sensors 20 20 20 80 3 -- -- 100

BMC304 Electronic Circuits

Analysis and Design 20 20 20 80 3 -- -- 100

BMC305 Digital Electronics 20 20 20 80 3 -- -- 100

BML3 01 Human Anatomy and

Physiology for Engineers

Lab -- -- -- -- -- 25 -- 25

BML3 02 Medical Sensors Lab -- -- -- -- -- 25 25 50

BML3 03 Electronic Circuits

Analysis and Design Lab -- -- -- -- -- 25 25 50

BML304 Electronics Lab (SBL) -- -- -- -- -- 25 25 50

BMM301 Mini Project – 1 A -- -- -- -- -- 25 -- 25

Total -- -- 100 400 -- 150 75 725

$ indicates wor k load of Learner (Not Faculty), for Mini Project - 1 A.

Faculty Load :1 hour per week per 4 mini project groups.

## Page 214

3

University of Mumbai, Biomedical Engineering, Rev 2020 -21 Semester – III

Course

Code Teaching Scheme Credits Assigned

Course

Name (Contact Hours)

Theory Pract. Tut. Theory TW/Pract Tut. Total

BMC301 Engineering

Mathematics -III 03 - 01 03 - 01 04

Course

Code Course Name Examination Scheme

Theory

Term

Work Pract Oral Total

Internal Assessment

End

Sem

Exam

Test1

Test2

Avg of

Test 1

& 2

BMC301 Engineering

Mathematics -III 20 20 20 80 25 - - 125

Pre-requisite: Engineering Mathematics -I, Engineering Mathematics -II, Scalar and Vector Product:

Scalar and Vector product of three and four vectors.

Course Code Course Name Credits

BMC301 Engineering Mathematics - III 04

Course Objectives • To familiarize with the Laplace Transform, Inverse Laplace Transform

of various functions, and its applications.

• To acquaint with the concept of Fourier Series, its complex form and

enhance the problem solving skills

• To familiarize the concept of complex variables, C -R equations,

harmonic functions, its conjugate and mapping in complex plane.

• To understand the basics of Linear Algebra and its applications

• To use concepts of vector calculus to analyze and model engineering

problems.

Course Outcomes On successful completion of course learner will be able to :

• Apply the concept of Laplace transform to solve the real integrals in

engineering problems.

• Apply the concept of inverse Laplace transform of v arious functions in

engineering problems.

• Expand the periodic function by using Fourier series for real life

problems and complex engineering problems.

• Find orthogonal trajectories and analytic function by using basic

concepts of complex variables.

• Illustrate the use of matrix algebra to solve the engineering problems.

• Apply the concepts of vector calculus in real life problems.

## Page 215

4

University of Mumbai, Biomedical Engineering, Rev 2020 -21 Module Detailed Contents Hrs.

1. Module: Laplace Transform

1.1 Definition of Laplace transform, Condition of Existence of Laplace Transform.

1.2 Laplace Transform (L) of standard functions like 𝑒𝑎𝑡, 𝑠𝑖𝑛(𝑎𝑡), 𝑐𝑜𝑠(𝑎𝑡), 𝑠𝑖𝑛ℎ(𝑎𝑡),

𝑐𝑜𝑠ℎ(𝑎𝑡) and 𝑡𝑛,𝑛≥0.

1.3 Properties of Laplace Transform: Linearity, First Shifting Theorem, Second Shifting

Theorem, Change of Scale Property, Multiplication by t, Division by t, Laplace

Transform of derivatives and integrals (Properties without proof).

1.4 Evaluation of integrals by using Laplace Transformation.

Self-learning Topics: Heaviside’s Unit Step function, Laplace Transform of Periodic

functions, Dirac Delta Function. 07

2. Module: Inverse Laplace Transform

2.1 Inverse Laplace Transform, Linearity property, use of standard formulae to

find inverse Laplace Transform, finding Inverse Laplace Transform using

derivatives.

2.2 Partial fractions method to find inverse Laplace Transform.

2.3 Inverse L aplace Transform using Convolution theorem (without proof).

Self-learning Topics: Applications to solve initial and boundary value problems

involving ordinary differential equations. 06

3. Module: Fourier Series:

3.1 Dirichlet’s conditions, Definition of Fourier series and Parseval’s Identity

(without proof).

3.2 Fourier series of periodic function with period 2𝜋 and 2l.

3.3 Fourier series of even and odd functions.

3.4 Half range Sine and Cosine Series.

Self-learning Topics: Complex form of Fourier Series, Orthogonal and orthonormal set

of functions. Fourier Transform. 07

4. Module: Complex Variables:

4.1 Function f(z) of complex variable, limit, continuity and differentiability of

f(z)Analytic function, necessary and sufficient conditions for f(z) to be

analytic (without proof).

4.2 Cauchy -Riemann equations in cartesian coordinates (without proof).

4.3 Milne -Thomson method to determine analytic function f(z)when real part

(u) or Imaginary part (v) or its combination (u+v or u -v) is given.

4.4 Harmonic function, Harmonic conjugate and orthogonal trajectories.

Self-learning Topics: Conformal map ping, linear, bilinear mapping, cross ratio, fixed

points and standard transformations. 07

5. Module: Linear Algebra: Matrix Theory

5.1 Characteristic equation, Eigen values and Eigen vectors, Example based on

properties of Eigen values and Eigen vectors.(Without Proof).

5.2 Cayley -Hamilton theorem (Without proof), Examples based on verification of

Cayley - Hamilton theorem and compute inverse of Matrix.

5.3 Similarity of matrices, Diagonalization of matrices, Functions of square matrix.

Self-learning Topics: Application of Matrix Theory in machine learning and google page

rank algorithms, derogatory and non -derogatory matrices . 06

6. Module: Vector Differentiation and Integra l

6.1 Vector differentiation : Basics of Gradient, Divergence and Curl (Without 06

## Page 216

5

University of Mumbai, Biomedical Engineering, Rev 2020 -21 Proof).

6.2 Properties of vector field: Solenoidal and Irrotational (conservative) vector

fields.

6.3 Vector integral: Line Integral, Green’s theorem in a plane (Without Proof),

Stokes’ theorem (Without Proof) only evaluation.

Self-learning Topics: Gauss’ divergence Theorem and applications of Vector calculus.

Term Work:

General Instructions:

1. Students must be encouraged to write at least 6 class tutorials on entire syllabus.

2. A group of 4 -6 students should be assigned a self -learning topic. Students should prepare a

presentation/problem solving of 10 -15 minutes. This should be considered as mini project in

Engineering mathematics. This project should be graded for 10 marks depe nding on the performance

of the students.

The distribution of marks for term work shall be as follows:

Class Tutorials on entire syllabus : 10 Marks

Mini project : 10 Marks

Attendance (Theory and Tutorial) : 5 Marks

Assessment :

Internal Assessment Test:

Assessment consists of two class tests of 20 marks each. The first -class test (Internal Assessment I) is

to be conducted when approximately 40% syllabus is completed and second class test (Internal

Assessment II) when additional 35% syllabus is completed. Duration of each test shall be one hour.

End Semester Theory Examination:

1. Question paper will comprise of tot al 06 questions, each carrying 20 marks.

2. Total 04 questions need to be solved.

3. Question No: 01 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein 4 sub -questions of 5 marks

each will be asked.

4. Remaining questions will be randomly selected from all the modules.

5. Weightage of each module will be proportional to number of respective lecture hours as mentioned in

the syllabus.

References: -

1. Advanced engineering mathematics, H.K. Das, S.Chand, Publications

2. Higher Engineering Mathematics, B. V. Ramana, Tata Mc -Graw Hill Publication

3. Advanced Engineering Mathematics, R. K. Jain and S. R. K. Iyengar, Narosa publication

4. Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Wylie and Barret, Tata Mc -Graw Hill.

5. Theory and Problems of Fourier Analysis with applications to BVP, Murray Spiegel, Schaum’s

Outline Series

6. Vector Analysis Murry R. Spiegel, Schaum’s outline series, Mc -Graw Hill Publication

7. Beginning Linear Algebra, Seymour Lipschutz, Schaum’s outline series, Mc -Graw Hill Publication

8. Higher Engineering Mathematics, Dr. B. S. Grewal, Khanna Publication

## Page 217

6

University of Mumbai, Biomedical Engineering, Rev 2020 -21 Course

Code Course Name Teaching scheme Credit assigned

BMC302 Human Anatomy

and Physiology for

Engineers

(Abbreviated as

HAPE) Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total

03 -- -- 03 -- -- 03

Course

Code Course

Name Examination Scheme

Theory

Term

work Pract. Oral Pract.

/ Oral Total Internal Assessment End

sem Dura

tion

(hrs) Test 1 Test 2 Avg.

BMC302 Human

Anatomy

and

Physiology

for

Engineers

(Abbreviat

ed as

HAPE) 20 20 20 80 03 -- -- -- -- 100

Course Code Course Name Credits

BMC302 Human Anatomy and Physiology for Engineers 03

Course Objectives • To understand the anatomical structures of the human body and their

relationship to each other.

• To understand the different physiological processes taking place inside the

human body.

Course Outcomes Learners will be able to:

• Explain the organization of the human body, homeostasis and its maintenance,

structure and functions of a cell and basic tissues.

• Explain the components of blood and their functions.

• Explain the anatomical parts and physiological processes of the cardio vascular

system and respiratory system.

• Explain the anatomical parts and physiological processes of the alimentary

system and renal system.

• Explain the structure and functions of nervous system, eye and skin along with

the secretions and functions of all endocrine glands.

## Page 218

7

University of Mumbai, Biomedical Engineering, Rev 2020 -21 Module Contents Hours

1. Introduction to the Human Body: Levels of structural organization; Characteristics of

living human organism; Homeostasis and its maintenance.

Cells and Tissues : Structure and functions of a cell; Transport across the plasma membrane 04

2. Cardiovascular System : Anatomy of the heart; Heart valves, systemic and pulmonary

circulation; Conduction system of the heart; Cardiac action potential, electrocardiogram

(ECG); Cardiac cycle; Cardiac output; Blood pressure. 05

3. Blood: Blood cells and their functions and ABO Blood Grouping 02

4. Renal System: Anatomy of the renal system; Functions of kidney (urine formation, electrolyte

balance and pH balance); composition of urine; Micturition. 05

5. Nervous System: Structure and functions of the brain and spinal cord.. 03

6. Endocrine System: All Glands of the endocrine system, their secretions and functions. 03

Assessment:

Internal Assessment consists of two tests out of which; one should be compulsory class test (on minimum 02

Modules) and the other is either a class test or assignment on live problems or course project.

Books Recommended:

Text books:

1. Anatomy and Physiology in Health and Illness: Ross and Wilson. (ELBS Publication)

2. Essentials of Anatomy and Physiology: Elaine N Marieb. (Pearson Education)

Reference Books:

1. Physiology of Human Body: Guyton. (Prism Book)

2. Review of Medical Physiology: William Ganong. (Prentice Hall Int.)

3. Principles of Anatomy and Physiology: Tortora and Grabowski. (Harper collin Pub.)

4. Anatomy and Physiology: Elaine N Marieb. (Pearson Education)

NPTEL /Swayam Course:

Course : Animal Physiology by Prof. Mainak Das - IIT Kanpur

https://nptel.ac.in/courses/102/104/102104058/

https://swayam.gov.in/nd1_noc20_bt42/preview

Theory Examination:

1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 marks.

2. Total four questions need to be solved.

3. Q.1 will be compulsory, based on entire syllabus wherein sub -questions of 2 to 5 marks will be asked.

4. Remaining question will be randomly selected from all the modules.

## Page 219

8

University of Mumbai, Biomedical Engineering, Rev 2020 -21 Course

Code Course Name Teaching scheme Credit assigned

BMC303 Medical Sensors

(Abbreviated as

MS) Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total

03 -- -- 03 -- -- 03

Course Code Course Name Credits

BMC303 Medical Sensors 03

Course Objectives • To provide the knowledge of basic concepts such as generalized medical

instrumentation system, input transducer properties, and instrument characteristics.

• To provide a thorough understanding of principle and working of transducers and

sensors used for measuring displacement, motion, force, pressure, temperature, bio -

potentials, biochemical concentrations.

• To study the medical applications of the above transducers and sensors.

• To perform experiments based on some of the above transducers and sensors.

Course Outcomes The learner will be able to :

• Explain different components of a generalized medical instrumentation system,

input transducer properties, and instrument characteristics.

• Apply the knowledge of principles of various types of transducers and sensors

including motion, displacement, force, pressure sensors to different medical

applications.

• Apply the knowledge of principl es of various types of temperature sensors to

different medical applications.

• Apply the knowledge of the various biopotential electrodes for measuring different

types of biopotentials.

• Apply the principles of various chemical sensors for measuring concentration of

biochemical analytes.

• Explain the principles of various biosensors and their medical applications.

Course

Code Course

Name Examination Scheme

Theory

Term

work Pract. Oral Pract.

/ Oral Total Internal Assessment End

sem Dur-

ation

(hrs) Test

1 Test

2 Avg.

BMC303

Medical

Sensors

(Abbreviat

ed as MS) 20 20 20 80 03 -- -- -- -- 100

## Page 220

9

University of Mumbai, Biomedical Engineering, Rev 2020 -21 Module Contents Hours

1. Introduction : Generalized medical instrumentation system; Static characteristics:

Accuracy, precision, resolution, reproducibility, sensitivity, drift, hysteresis,

linearity, input impedance and output impedance; Dynamic characteristics: Transfer

functions, first order and second order systems 03

2. Displacement, Motion and Force Sensors and the ir Medical Applications:

Displacement measurement: Strain gauges, bridge circuits, inductive sensor –

L.V.D.T., capacitive sensors; Acceleration and force measurement: Piezoelectric

sensor, load cell 05

3. Temperature Sensors and their Medical Applications : Temperature measurement:

Thermistor, thermocouple, resistive temperature detector; IC -based temperature

measurement; Radiation sensors: Quantum sensors 04

4. Biopotential electrodes : Half -cell potential, polarization, polarizable and non -

polarizable electrodes, calomel electrode; Electrode circuit model, electrode -skin

interface and motion artefacts; Body surface electrodes 03

5. Chemical Sensors and their Medical Applications : Blo od gas and acid - base

physiology; pH, Pco 2 , Po 2 electrodes; ISFETs; Transcutaneous arterial O 2 and CO 2

tension monitoring 04

6. Introduction : Generalized medical instrumentation system; Static characteristics:

Accuracy, precision, resolution, reproducibility, sensitivity, drift, hysteresis,

linearity, input impedance and output impedance; Dynamic characteristics: Transfer

functions, first order and second order systems 03

Books Recommended:

Text Books:

1. Medical Instrumentation -Application and Design, John G. Webster, Wiley India Private Limited.

2. Instrument Transducers: An Introduction to Their Performance and Design, Hermann K. P. Neubert,

Oxford University Press.

3. Biomedical Sensors: Fundamentals and Applications, Harry N. Norton, Noyes Publications.

4. Biomedical Transducers and Instruments, Tatsuo Togawa, Toshiyo Tamura and P. Ake Öberg, CRC

Press.

5. Electronics in Medicine and Biomedical Instrumentation by Nandini K. Jog, Prentice -Hall of India Pvt.

Limited.

6. Biosensors: Fundamentals and Applications, Bansi Dhar Malhotra and Chandra Mouli Pandey, Smithers

Rapra Technology.

Reference Books:

1. Principles of Applied Biomedical Instrumentation, L.A. Geddes and L.E. Baker, Wiley India Pvt Ltd.

2. Biomedical Instrumentation and Measurements, Leslie Cromwell, Erich A. Pfeiffer and Fred J. Wiebell,

Prentice -Hall of India Pvt. Ltd.

3. Principles of Biomedica l Instrumentation and Measurement, Richard Aston, Merril Publishing

Company.

4. Measurement Systems, Application and Design, Ernest O. Doeblin, McGraw Hill Higher Education .

5. Handbook of Modern Sensors – Physics, Design and Application, Jacob Fraden, Springer Publishing

Company .

6. Transducers for Biomedical Measurements: Principles and Applications, Richard S. C. Cobbold, John

Wiley & Sons.

## Page 221

10

University of Mumbai, Biomedical Engineering, Rev 2020 -21 NPTEL /Swayam Course:

Course : Industrial Instrumentation by Prof. Alok Barua - IIT Kharagpur

https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108/105/108105064/

Assessment:

Internal Assessment consists of two tests out of which, one should be compulsory class test (on minimum 02

Modules) and the other is either a class test or assignment on live problems or course project.

Theory Examination:

1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 marks.

2. Total four questions need to be solved.

3. Q.1 will be compulsory, based on the entire syllabus wherein sub questions of 2 to 5 marks will be

asked.

4. Remaining question will be randomly selected from all the modules.

## Page 222

11

University of Mumbai, Biomedical Engineering, Rev 2020 -21 Course

Code Course Name Teaching scheme Credit assigned

BMC304

Electronic circuit

analysis and

design

(Abbreviated as

ECAD) Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total

04 -- -- 04 -- -- 04

Course

Code Course

Name Examination Scheme

Theory

Term

work Pract. Oral Pract.

/ Oral Total Internal Assessment End

sem Dura

tion

(hrs) Test 1 Test 2 Avg.

BMC304 Electronic

Circuit

Analysis

and Design

(ECAD) 20 20 20 80 03 -- -- -- -- 100

Course Code Course Name Credits

BMC304 Electronic Circuit Analysis and Design 04

Course Objectives • To understand transfer characteristics of semiconductor devices and to analyse

basic application circuits.

• To make learners aware about the mathematical models of BJT and its use in

analysing the circuits.

• To make the learners aware abou t different types of coupling and the concept of

multistage amplifiers.

• Learners will be able to design power amplifier.

• To learn types and applications of MOSFET.

Course Outcomes Learner will be able to:

• Explain the transfer characteristics in analysing the electronic circuits which use

diode, BJT etc.

• Explain equivalent circuits of BJT and apply them to analyse and design BJT

based amplifier circuits

• Apply the knowledge of mathematical model to analyse multistage amplifiers.

• Design and analyse power amplifiers.

• Apply the concept of transfer characteristics, D.C. load line, A.C. load line to

analyse MOSFET amplifiers.

## Page 223

12

University of Mumbai, Biomedical Engineering, Rev 2020 -21 Module Contents Hours

1. Basics of Diodes : Construction, Working, Characteristics, Current Equation &

Equivalent circuits of P -N Junction Diode as well as Zener Diode, Applications of

Diode: Clipper & Clamper 04

2. Basics & DC analysis of BJT: Construction, Working and Characteristics of 3

different configurations of BJT.( Circuits, formulas and applications)

Quiescent point, DC load line, BJT Biasing need and types. Voltage Divider biasing

configuration (include stability factor), BJT as a swi tch. 05

3. BJT as an Amplifier : A.C. Equivalent Model: r e model( for analysis) h -parameter

model (Exact and Approximate) and Hybrid -π model(Only concept and relationship)

A.C. Analysis (Using re model): A.C. load line, A.C. Effects of R S & R L. Low frequency

and High frequency analysis of Single stage amplifiers 05

4. Multistage Amplifier:

Concept of cascading, Types of coupling, cascade configuration, cascode amplifier,

Darlington amplifie r 03

5. Power Amplifiers :

Classes of Power amplifiers, Class -A Power Amplifiers analysis (Direct coupled and

Transformer coupled), Class -B Power Amplifiers analysis Crossover distortion,

Class -AB Push Pull and Complementary Symmetry Power amplifier, Class -C Power

Amplifier, Heat Si nks 04

6. MOSFET:

Comparison of BJT & FET, Classification, Characteristics, Biasing of MOSFET,

MOSFET as an amplifier, MOSFET as a switch . 05

Assessment:

Internal Assessment consists of two tests out of which; one should be compulsory class test (on minimum 02

Modules) and the other is either a class test or assignment on live problems or course project.

Books Recommended:

Textbooks:

1. Electronics C ircuit . Anal ysis & Design, 2nd ed., Donald A. Neamen, McGraw Hill, 2001

2. Electr onics Devices & Circuits Theory, by by Robert L. Boylestad and Louis Nashelsky, Pearson Education.

3. Semiconductor Data Manual, BPB Publications.

Reference Books:

1. Electronic Principles, by Albert Paul Malvin o 6th edition , McGraw Hill

2. Electronic Devices and Circuits, by Jacob Milliman McGraw Hill .

3. Electronic Design , by Martin Roden, Gordon L.Carpenter, William Wieseman, Fourth ed ition,

Shroff Publishers & Distributors Pvt. Ltd. .

4. Electronic Circuits Discrete and Integrated, by Donald Schilling & Charles Belove, Third edition,

McGraw Hill.

NPTEL /Swayam Course:

Course : Analog Electronic Circuits by Prof. Pradip Mandal - IIT Kharagpur

https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108/105/108105158/

Theory Examination:

1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 marks.

2. Total four questions need to be solved.

3. Q.1 will be compulsory, based on entire syllabus wherein sub questions of 2 to 5 marks will be asked.

4. Remaining question will be randomly selected from all the modules.

## Page 224

13

University of Mumbai, Biomedical Engineering, Rev 2020 -21

Course

Code Course Name Teaching scheme Credit assigned

BMC305

Digital

Electronics

(Abbreviated as

DE) Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total

03 -- -- 03 -- -- 03

Course Code Course Name Credits

BMC305 Digital Electronics 03

Course Objectives • To make learner aware of basics of Digital circuits, logic design, various Logic

Families and Flip -flops.

• Learner should be able to design various counters, registers and know their

applications.

• Learner should be able to design sequential circuits as a state machine.

Course Outcomes Learner will be able to:

• Describe various number systems, logic gates and logic families.

• Apply Boolean algebra, K -maps for Logic reduction and implementations in SOP

and POS form

• Develop combinational circuits such as code converter circuits, parity generato r

checker circuits and magnitude comparator circuits. Also, circuits using

multiplexers, de -multiplexers, and decoders.

• Design synchronous sequential circuits and asynchronous counters using flip flops

• Design various registers using flip flops .

Course

Code Course

Name Examination Scheme

Theory

Term

work Pract Oral Pract.

/ Oral Total Internal Assessment End

sem Dura

tion

(hrs) Test 1 Test 2 Avg

BMC305

Digital

Electronics

(DE) 20 20 20 80 03 -- -- -- -- 100

## Page 225

14

University of Mumbai, Biomedical Engineering, Rev 2020 -21

Module Contents Hours

1. Fundamentals of Digital Design:

Introduction: Number system: Binary, Octal, Hexadecimal and other. Conversion

from One system to another.

Logic Gates and Families: AND, OR, NOT, XOR, XNOR, operation NAND, NOR

used of the universal gate for performing different operations. 04

2. Combinational Logic Design:

Logic Reduction Techniques : K-MAPS and their use in specifying Boolean

Expressions, Minterm, Maxterm, SOP and POS Implementation. 03

3. MSI Combinational Circuits:

Binary Arithmetic Circuits : Laws of Boolean algebra , Binary Addition, Binary

Subtraction (ones and twos complement).

Elementary Designs: Parity Generator and Parity Checker (3 bit), (Half & Full)

Adders, (Half & Full) Subtractors, Magnitude Comparators. 04

4. Use of Multiplexers in Logic Design: Multiplexer, De- Multiplexers. 03

5. Fundamentals of Sequential Logic Circuits:

Flip-Flops: Flip-Flops, SR, T, D, JK. (Truth table and excitation table) 03

6. Counters: Modulus of a counter, Designing of synchronous and asynchronous counter

using flip flop.

Registers: Serial input serial output, serial input parallel output, Left Right shift

register, Bidirectional shift register, Universal shift register. 05

Assessment:

Internal Assessment consists of two tests out of which; one should be compulsory class test (on minimum 02

Modules) and the other is either a class test or assignment on live problems or course project.

Books Recommended:

Text Books:

1. Modern Digital Electronics, by R.P.Jain Tata McGraw Hill, 1984

2. Digital Design,by M Morris Mono Prentice Hall International -1984.

3. Digital Principal and Applications , by Malvino& Leach, Tata McGraw Hill, 1991.

4. Digital Electronics , by Malvino, Tata McGraw Hill, 1997.

5. Digital Logic: Applications and Design, by John Yarbourugh Cengage Learning

6. Fundamentals of Digital Circuits, by A. Anand Kumar, Prentice -Hall of India Pvt.Ltd;

7. Digital Design: Principles & Practices , by John F. Wakerly , Prentice Hall

Reference Books:

1. Digital Electronics, by James Bignell & Robert Donovan, Delmar, Thomas Learning,

2. Logic Circuits, by Jog N.K, 2nd edition, Nandu Publisher & Printer Pvt .Ltd. 1998.

3. Introduction to Logic Design , by Alan b. Marcovitz McGraw Hill Internation al 2002.

NPTEL /Swayam Course:

Course : 1. Digital Circuits by Prof. Santanu Chattopadhyay - IIT Kharagpur

https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108/105/108105113/

https://swayam.gov.in/nd1_noc20_ee70/preview

## Page 226

15

University of Mumbai, Biomedical Engineering, Rev 2020 -21 Course : 2. Switching Circuits and Logic Design by Prof. Indranil Sengupta - IIT Kharagpur

https://nptel.ac.in/noc/courses/noc20/SEM2/noc20 -cs67/

https://swayam.gov.in/nd1_noc20_cs67/preview

Theory Examination :

1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 marks.

2. Total four questions need to be solved.

3. Q.1 will be compulsory, based on entire syllabus wherein sub questions of 2 to 5 marks will be asked.

4. Remaining question will be randomly selected from all the modules

## Page 227

16

University of Mumbai, Biomedical Engineering, Rev 2020 -21 Course

Code Course Name Teaching Scheme Credit Assigned

BML301 Human Anatomy

and Physiology for

Engineers

(HAPE) Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total

-- 02 -- -- 01 -- 01

Course

Code Course Name Examination Scheme

Theory Term

work Pract. Oral Pract.

/ Oral Total Internal Assessment End

sem Test 1 Test 2 Avg.

BML301 Human

Anatomy and

Physiology for

Engineers

(HAPE) -- -- -- -- 25 -- -- -- 25

Course Code Course Name Credits

BML301 Human Anatomy and Physiology for Engineers 01

Course Objective • To understand the anatomical structures of the human body and their relationship

to each other.

• To gain the knowledge of measurement of various physiological parameters of

the human body.

Course Outcome The learner will be able to :

• Demonstrate measurement of blood pressure using occlusive cuff method.

• Apply blood cell counting principles for measuring blood composition.

• Demonstrate the measurement of electrical activity of heart and the related

parameters.

• Demonstrate the measurement of various lung volumes and capacities.

• Appropriately utilize laboratory equipment, such as microscopes, general lab

ware, and virtual simulations.

• Locate and identify anatomical structures.

Syllabus: Same as that of BMC302, Human Anatomy and Physiology for Engineers.

## Page 228

17

University of Mumbai, Biomedical Engineering, Rev 2020 -21 List of Laboratory Experiments: (Any Seven)

1. To measure blood pressure using sphygmomanometer.

2. To find the total red blood cell count using pre -prepared slides.

3. To find the total white blood cell count using pre -prepared slides.

4. To study the conduction system of the heart.

5. To study the twelve lead electrode scheme and operation of the ECG Machine.

6. To record ECG and measure its various parameters (amplitude, intervals/segment).

7. To record lung volumes and capacities using a spirometer.

8. Visit to the anatomy department of a hospital to view specimens (cardiovascular & respiratory

systems).

9. Visit to the anatomy department of a hospital to view specimen (alimentary & renal systems).

10. Visit to the anatomy department of a hospital to view specimen (nervous system).

11. Present a case study on a given disease/abnormality that requires medical instruments for

diagnosis/treatment.

12. Present case a study on a given disease/abnormality that requires medical instruments for

diagnosis/treatment.

Any other experiment/visit to the hospital/case study based on sy llabus which will help learner to

understand a topic/concept.

Assessment:

Term Work:

Term work shall consist of minimum 7 experiments.

The distribution of marks for term work shall be as follows:

Laboratory work (Experiments) : 10 Marks

Laboratory work (Journal) : 10 Marks

Attendance : 05 Marks

The final certification and acceptance of term work e nsures the satisfactory performance of laboratory work

and minimum passing in the term work.

Books Recommended:

Text books:

1. Anatomy and Physiology in Health and Illness: Ross and Wilson. (ELBS Pub.)

2. Essentials of Anatomy and Physiology: Elaine N Marieb. (Pearson Education)

Reference Books:

1. Physiology of Human Body: Guyton. (Prism Book )

2. Review of Medical Physiology: William Ganong. (Prentice Hall Int.)

3. Principles of Anatomy and Physiology: Tortora and Grabowski. (Harper Collin Pub.)

4. Anatomy and Physiology: Elaine N Marieb. (Pearson Education)

NPTEL /Swayam Course:

Course : Animal Physiology by Prof. Mainak Das - IIT Kanpur

https://nptel.ac.in/courses/102/104/102104058/

https://swayam.gov.in/nd1_noc20_bt42/preview

## Page 229

18

University of Mumbai, Biomedical Engineering, Rev 2020 -21 Course

Code Course Name Teaching Scheme Credits Assigned

BML302 Medical

Sensors

(Abbreviated

as MS) Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total

--

02

--

--

01

--

01

Course

Code

Course Name Examination Scheme

Theory

Internal Assessment End

Sem Term

work Pract. Oral Pract.

/ Oral Total

Test

1 Test

2 Avg.

BML302 Medical

Sensors

(Abbreviated

as MS)

--

--

--

--

25

--

25

--

50

Course Code Course Name Credits

BML302 Medical Sensors 01

Course Objectives • To analyse the transient response of a first -order system.

• To measure displacement using various displacement sensors.

• To measure pressure using a pressure sensor.

• To measure force using a force sensor.

• To measure temperature using various temperature sensors.

• To measure pH of a solution using a pH electrode.

Course Outcomes The learner will be able to:

• Analyse step response of a first -order system.

• Demonstrate the measurement of displacement using various displacement

sensors.

• Demonstrate the measurement of force and pressure using a force sensor and a

pressure sensor respectively.

• Demonstrate the measurement of temperature using various temperature

sensors.

• Distinguish various biopotential electrodes.

• Demonstrate the measurement of pH of a solution using a pH electrode.

Syllabus: Same as that of BMC303 Medical Sensors.

## Page 230

19

University of Mumbai, Biomedical Engineering, Rev 2020 -21 List of Laboratory Experiments: (Any seven)

1. To study the transient response of a first -order system.

2. To study the resistance versus temperature characteristics of a thermistor.

3. To study the thermistor linearization technique.

4. To study the characteristics of a light dependent resister.

5. To study the principle and working of a thermocouple.

6. To study principle and working of L.V.D.T.

7. To study principle and working of a capacitive sensor.

8. To study principle and working of a strain gage sensor.

9. To study principle and working of a p ressure sensor.

10. To study the principle and working of a force sensor.

11. To study the various biopotential electrodes.

12. To study the pH electrode.

Any other experiment/student presentation based on the syllabus which will help the learner to understand

a topi c/concept.

Books Recommended:

Text Books:

1. Medical Instrumentation -Application and Design, John G. Webster, Wiley India Private Limited.

2. Instrument Transducers: An Introduction to Their Performance and Design, Hermann K. P. Neubert,

Oxford University Press.

3. Biomedical Sensors: Fundamentals and Applications, Harry N. Norton, Noyes Publications.

4. Biomedical Transducers and Instruments, Tatsuo Togawa, Toshiyo Tamura and P. Ake Öberg, CRC

Press.

5. Electronics in Medic ine and Biomedical Instrumentation by Nandini K. Jog, Prentice -Hall of India Pvt.

Limited.

6. Biosensors: Fundamentals and Applications, Bansi Dhar Malhotra and Chandra Mouli Pandey, Smithers

Rapra Technology.

Reference Books:

1. Principles of Applied Biomedical Instrumentation, L.A. Geddes and L.E. Baker, Wiley India Pvt Ltd.

2. Biomedical Instrumentation and Measurements, Leslie Cromwell, Erich A. Pfeiffer and Fred J. Wiebell,

Prentice -Hall of India Pvt. Ltd.

3. Principles of Biomedica l Instrumentation and Measurement, Richard Aston, Merril Publishing

Company.

4. Measurement Systems, Application and Design, Ernest O. Doeblin, McGraw Hill Higher Education .

5. Handbook of Modern Sensors – Physics, Design and Application, Jacob Fraden, Springer Publishing

Company .

6. Transducers for Biomedical Measurements: Principles and Applications, Richard S. C. Cobbold, John

Wiley & Sons.

NPTEL /Swayam Course:

Course : Industrial Instrumentation by Prof. Alok Barua - IIT Kharagpur

https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108/105/108105064/

## Page 231

20

University of Mumbai, Biomedical Engineering, Rev 2020 -21

Assessment :

Term Work:

Term work shall consist of minimum 7 experiments.

The distribution of marks for term work shall be as follows:

Laboratory work (Experiments) : 10 Marks

Laboratory work (Journal) : 10 Marks

Attendance : 5 Marks

The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures the satisfactory performance of laboratory work

and minimum passing in the term work.

Oral examination will be based on suggested practical list and entire syllabus.

## Page 232

21

University of Mumbai, Biomedical Engineering, Rev 2020 -21 Course

Code Course Name Teaching scheme Credit assigned

BML303 Electronic Circuit

Analysis and

Design Lab

(ECAD Lab) Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total

-- 02 -- -- 01 -- 01

Course

Code Course Name Examination Scheme

Theory Term

work Pract. Oral Pract.

/ Oral Total Internal Assessment End

sem Test 1 Test 2 Avg.

BML303 Electronic

Circuit Analysis

and Design Lab

(ECAD Lab) -- -- -- -- 25 -- -- 25 50

Course Code Course Name Credits

BML303 Electronic Circuit Analysis and Design Lab 01

Course Objective • To practically verify characteristics of different electronic components like

diodes, BJT, MOSFET etc

• To practically verify outputs of few applications of diodes, BJT, MOSFET.

• To design and implement small signal amplifier.

Course Outcome Learner will be able to:

• Explain the transfer characteristics of basic semiconductor devices.

• Design and verify the outputs of various electronic circuits such as clipper,

clampers etc using bread boards and various lab equipments.

• Design amplifier circuits and plot its frequency response.

Syllabus: Same as that of BMC304 Electronic Circuit Analysis and Design.

List of Laboratory Experiments: (Any Eight)

1. To verify semiconductor diode and Zener diode characteristics.

2. To implement various clipper circuits and verify output.

3. To implement various clamper circuits and verify output.

4. To study line regulation and load regulation of voltage regulator using Zener diode.

5. To verify input and output characteristics of BJT.

6. To implement a switch using BJT.

7. To implementation different biasing circuit of BJT

8. To design and implement CE a mplifier.

9. To study frequency response of CE amplifier.

10. To verify input and output characteristics of MOSFET.

11. To implementation different biasing circuit of MOSFET

12. To Study frequency response of an MOSFET amplifier.

Any other experiment based on syllabus c an be included in the term work which will help learner to

understand topic/concept.

## Page 233

22

University of Mumbai, Biomedical Engineering, Rev 2020 -21 Assessment:

Term Work:

Term work shall consist of minimum 8 experiments.

The distribution of marks for term work shall be as follows:

Laboratory work (Experiments) : 10 Marks

Laboratory work (Journal) : 10 Marks

Attendance : 5 Marks

The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures the satisfactory performance of laboratory work

and minimum passing in the term work.

Books Recommended:

Textbooks:

1. Electronics C ircuit . Anal ysis & Design, 2nd ed., Donald A. Neamen, McGraw Hill, 2001

2. Electr onics Devices & Circuits Theory, by by Robert L. Boylestad and Louis Nashelsky, Pearson Education.

3. Semiconductor Data Manual, BPB Publications.

Reference Books:

1. Electronic Principles, by Albert Paul Malvin o 6th edition , McGraw Hill

2. Electronic Devices and Circuits, by Jacob Milliman McGraw Hill .

3. Electronic Design , by Martin Roden, Gordon L.Carpenter, William Wieseman , Fourth ed ition,

Shroff Publishers & Distributors Pvt. Ltd. .

4. Electronic Circuits Discrete and Integrated, by Donald Schilling & Charles Belove, Third edition,

McGraw Hill.

NPTEL /Swayam Course:

Course : Analog Electronic Circuits by Prof. Pradip Mandal - IIT Kharagpur

https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108/105/108105158/

Practical exam consists of performance of any one practical from the conducted experiments within

the semester and oral based on entire syllabus.

## Page 234

23

University of Mumbai, Biomedical Engineering, Rev 2020 -21 Course

Code Course Name Teaching scheme Credit assigned

BML304 Electronics Lab

(Skill Based Lab) Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total

-- 04 -- -- 02 -- 02

Course

Code Course Name Examination Scheme

Theory Term

work Pract. Oral Pract.

/ Oral Total Internal Assessment End

sem Test 1 Test 2 Avg.

BML304 Electronics Lab

(Skill Based Lab) -- -- -- -- 25 -- -- 25 50

Course Code Course Name Credits

BML304 Electronics Lab (Skill Based Lab) 02

Course Objective • To design and implement voltage regulator circuits.

• To design and implement digital circuits.

• To learn skills of soldering.

• To learn simulation of circuits using one of the simulation software.

Course Outcome Learner will be able to:

• Design and implement analog and digital electronic circuits on bread board and

verify the outputs.

• Learn one of the tools for simulating different circuits.

• Know the limitations of ideal environment of simulations and also importance of

simulation in desig ning the circuits.

• Learn soldering skills for implementing the circuits on PCB.

List of experiments from Analog electronics:

Skill 1 -Soldering the components on PCB (Any 4)

1. Implement diode as full -wave rectifier using centre tap transformer.

2. Implement diode as full -wave rectifier using bridge circuit.

3. Use of Filter components with rectifier circuit.

4. Implement voltage regulators using IC 79XXand/or IC 78XX

5. Implement voltage regulators using IC 317/IC 723

6. Implement of logic gates us ing diodes.

Skill 2 -Simulations using simulation software like Multisim, Pspice etc (Any 4)

1. Simulate CASCODE amplifier.

2. Simulate Darlington amplifier.

3. Simulate power Amplifier

4. Simulate DIAC for transfer characteristics.

5. Simulate TRIAC for transfer characteristics.

6. Simulate UJT for transfer characteristics.

List of experiments from Digital Electronics (Perform using Breadboard or Logisim S/W etc):

(Any 8)

1. A step in space vehicle checkout depends on FOUR sensors S1, S2, S3 and S4. Every circuit is w orking

properly if sensor S1 and at least two of the other three sensors are at logic 1. Implement the system using

NAND gates only, the output is connected to a red LED which must glow if the circuit is not working properly

and the output is connected to a green LED which must glow if the circuit is working properly.

2. To design binary to gray code converter and gray to binary converter.

## Page 235

24

University of Mumbai, Biomedical Engineering, Rev 2020 -21 3. To design parity generator and parity checker circuits.

4. To design adder and subtractor circuits.

5. To design various circu its using multiplexers.

6. To design various circuits using de -multiplexer.

7. To design Asynchronous counter.

8. To design decade counter

9. To design Synchronous counter.

10. To implement shift register and ring counter using MSI shift register.

11. To implement Moore/ Meal y machine.

12. A given finite state machine has an input W and output Z. During four consecutive clock pulses a sequence

of four values of W signal is applied. Design a machine that produces Z = 1 when it detects either of sequence

W: 0010 or W: 1110 otherwis e Z=0. After the fourth clock pulse the machine has to be again in the reset

state ready for next sequence.

Any other experiment based on syllabus can be included in the term work which will help learner to understand

topic/concept.

Assessment:

Term Work:

Term work shall consist of minimum 8 experiments from Analog electronics and 8 experiments from digital

electronics.

The distribution of marks for term work shall be as follows:

Laboratory work (Lab work and journal):10 Marks

Soldering skills :05 Marks

Simulation skills :05 marks

Attendance :05 Marks

The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures the satisfactory performance of laboratory work

and minimum passing in the term work.

Books Recommended:

Text Books:

1. Op-Amps and linear integrated circuits – Ramakant Gayakwad , Prentice Hall

2. Electronics Devices & Circuits, by Boylestad Robert L., Louis Nashelsky, Pearson Education.

3. Modern Digital Electronics, by R.P.Jain, Tata McGraw Hill, 1984

4. Digital Design, M Morris Mono, Prentice Hall International -1984.

Reference Books:

1. Electronic Principles, by Albert Paul Malvino, 6/e, McGraw Hill

2. Semiconductor Data Manual, BPB Publications.

3. Electronic design, by Martin Roden, Gordon L. C arpenter, William Wieseman Fourth ed ition,

Shroff Publishers &Distributors Pvt. Ltd.

4. Digital Design, by M Morris Mono Prentice Hall International 1984

Practical exam consists of performance of any one practical from digital electronics experiments

conducted within the semester and oral based on digital electronics syllabus.

## Page 236

25

University of Mumbai, Biomedical Engineering, Rev 2020 -21 Course code Course Name Credits

BMM301 Mini Project - 1 A 02

Course Code Course Name Credits

BMM301 Mini Project – 1 A 02

Course Objective • To acquaint with the process of identifying the needs and converting it into the

problem .

• To familiarize the process of solving the problem in a group .

• To acquaint with the process of applying basic engineering fundamental s to

attempt solutions to the problems.

• To inculcate the process of self -learning and research.

Course Outcome Learner will be able to:

• Identify problems based on societal /research needs.

• Apply Knowledge and skill to solve societal problems in a group.

• Develop interpersonal skills to work as member of a group or leader.

• Draw the proper inferences from available results through theoretical /

experimental/simulations .

• Analyse the impact of solutions in societal and environmental context for

sustainable de velopment.

• Use standard norms of engineering practices

• Excel in written and oral communication.

• Demonstrate capabilities of self -learning in a group, which leads to life long

learning.

• Demonstrate project management principles during project work.

Guidelines for Mini Project

• Students shall form a group of 3 to 4 students, while forming a group shall not be allowed less than

three or more than four students, as it is a group activity.

• Students should do survey and identify needs, which shall be conv erted into problem statement for

mini project in consultation with faculty supervisor/head of department/internal committee of

faculties.

• Students hall submit implementation plan in the form of Gantt/PERT/CPM chart, which will cover

weekly activity of mini project.

• A log book to be prepared by each group, wherein group can record weekly work progress,

guide/supervisor can verify and record notes/comments.

• Faculty supervisor may give inputs to students during mini project activity; however, focus shall be

on self -learning.

• Students in a group shall understand problem effectively, propose multiple solution and select best

possible solution in consultation with guide/ supervisor.

• Students sh all convert the best solution into working model using various c omponents of their

domain areas and demonstrate.

## Page 237

26

University of Mumbai, Biomedical Engineering, Rev 2020 -21 • The solution to be validated with proper justification and report to be compiled in standard format

of University of Mumbai .

• With the focus on the self -learning, innovation, addressing societal problems an d entrepreneurship

quality development within the students through the Mini Projects, it is preferable that a single

project of appropriate level and quality to be carried out in two semesters by all the groups of the

students. i.e. Mini Project 1 in semes ter III and IV. Similarly, Mini Project 2 in semesters V and VI.

• However, based on the individual students or group capability, with the mentor’s recommendations,

if the proposed Mini Project adhering to the qualitative aspects mentioned above gets comple ted in

odd semester, then that group can be allowed to work on the extension of the Mini Project with

suitable improvements/modifications or a completely new project idea in even semester. This policy

can be adopted on case by case basis.

Guidelines for As sessment of Mini Project :

Term Work

• The review/ progress monitoring committee shall be constituted by head of departments of

each institute. The progress of mini project to be evaluated on continuous basis, minimum two

reviews in each semester.

• In continuous assessment focus shall also be on each individual student, assessment based on

individual’s contribution in group activity, their understanding and response to questions.

• Distribution of Term work marks for both semesters shall be as below;

o Mark s awarded by guide/supervisor based on log book : 10

o Marks awarded by review committee : 10

o Quality of Project report : 05

Review/progress monitoring committee may consider following points for

assessment based on either one year or half year pro ject as mentioned in general

guidelines.

One-year project:

• In first semester entire theoretical solution shall be ready, including components/system

selection and cost analysis. Two reviews will be conducted based on presentation given by

students group.

▪ First shall be for finalisation of problem

▪ Second shall be on finalisation of proposed solution of problem.

• In second semester expected work shall be procurement of component’s/systems, building of

working prototype, testing and validation of results bas ed on work completed in an earlier

semester.

▪ First review is based on readiness of building working prototype to be conducted.

▪ Second review shall be based on poster presentation cum demonstration of working

model in last month of the said semester.

Half -year project:

• In this case in one semester students’ group shall complete project in all aspects including,

o Identification of need/problem

o Proposed final solution

o Procurement of components/systems

## Page 238

27

University of Mumbai, Biomedical Engineering, Rev 2020 -21 o Building prototype and testing

• Two reviews will be con ducted for continuous assessment,

▪ First shall be for finalisation of problem and proposed solution

▪ Second shall be for implementation and testing of solution.

Assessment criteria of Mini Project.

Mini Project shall be assessed based on following criteria;

1. Quality of survey/ need identification

2. Clarity of Problem definition based on need.

3. Innovativeness in solutions

4. Feasibility of proposed problem solutions and selection of best solution

5. Cost effectiveness

6. Societal impact

7. Innovativeness

8. Cost effectiveness and Societal impact

9. Full functioning of working model as per stated requirements

10. Effective use of skill sets

11. Effective use of standard engineering norms

12. Contribution of an individual’s as member or leader

13. Clarity in written and oral communication

• In one year, project , first semester evaluation may be based on first six criteria’s and remaining

may be used for second semester evaluation of performance of students in mini project .

• In cas e of half year project all criteria’s in generic may be considered for evaluation of performance

of students in mini project.

Guidelines for Assessment of Mini Project Practical/Oral Examination:

• Report should be prepared as per the guidelines issued by the University of Mumbai.

• Mini Project sh all be assessed through a presentation and demonstration of working model by the

student project group to a panel of Internal and External Examiners prefera bly from industry or

research organizations having experience of more than five years approved by head of Institution.

• Students shall be motivated to publish a paper based on the work in Conferences/students

competitions.

Mini Project shall be assessed based on following points;

1. Quality of problem and Clarity

2. Innovativeness in solutions

3. Cost effectiveness and Societal impact

4. Full functioning of working model as per stated requirements

5. Effective use of skill sets

6. Effective use of standard engine ering norms

7. Contribution of an individual’s as member or leader

8. Clarity in written and oral communicate

## Page 239

AC -23/02/2021

Item No. – 6.11-3

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI

Bachelor of Engineering

in

Production Engineering

Direct Second Year (Sem. III) Admitted Students for the

current Academic Year 2020 -21(Only)

(REV - 2019 ‘C’ Scheme) from Academic Year 2019 – 20

Under

FACULTY OF

SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY

As per AICTE guidelines with effect from the academic year 2019 –2020)

## Page 240

Page 2 of 28

Program Structure for Second Year Engineering

Semester III & IV

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI

(With Effect from 2020 -2021)

Semester III

Course

Code Course Name Teaching Scheme

(Contact Hours) Credits Assigned

Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total

PEC301 Engineering Mathematics -

III 3 -- 1 3 -- 1 4

PEC302 Applied Thermodynamics

and Fluid Mechanics 3 -- 3 -- 3

PEC303 Mechanics of Materials 3 -- -- 3 -- -- 3

PEC304 Manufacturing Processes 3 -- -- 3 -- -- 3

PEC305 Engineering Materials and

Metallurgy 3 -- -- 3 -- -- 3

PEL301 Computer Aided Machine

Drawing Lab. -- 2*+ 2 -- -- 2 -- 2

PEL302 Python Programming Lab. -- 2 -- -- 1 -- 1

PEL303 Material testing Lab. -- 2 -- -- 1 -- 1

PEL304 Skill based Lab. Course -I -- 4 -- -- 2 -- 2

PEM301 Mini Project – 1 A -- 4$ -- -- 2 -- 2

Total 15 16 1 15 08 1 24

Course

Code Course Name Examination Scheme

Theory Term

Work Pract/

oral Total

Internal Assessment End

Sem.

Exam Exam.

Duration

(in Hrs)

Test1 Test2 Avg.

PEC301 Engineering Mathematics -

III 20 20 20 80 3 25 -- 125

PEC302 Applied Thermodynamics

and Fluid Mechanics 20 20 20 80 3 -- -- 100

PEC303 Mechanics of Materials 20 20 20 80 3 -- -- 100

PEC304 Manufacturing Processes 20 20 20 80 3 -- -- 100

PEC305 Engineering Materials and

Metallurgy 20 20 20 80 3 -- -- 100

PEL301 Computer Aided Machine

Drawing Lab. -- -- -- -- -- 50 25 75

PEL302 Python Programming Lab. -- -- -- -- -- 25 -- 25

PEL303 Material testing Lab. -- -- -- -- -- 25 -- 25

PEL304 Skill based Lab. Course -I -- -- -- -- -- 50 -- 50

PEM301 Mini Project – 1 A -- -- -- -- -- 25 25 50

Total -- -- 100 400 -- 200 50 750

* Theory of entire class to be conducted.

$ indicates work load of Learner (Not Faculty) for Mini Project.

Mini Project 1A:

Faculty Load: 1 hour per week per four groups .

## Page 241

Page 3 of 28

Course Code Course Name Credits

PEC301 Engineering Mathematics - III 03+01=04

Contact Hours Credit Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total

03 - 01 03 - 01 04

Theory Term work / Practical / Oral

Total Internal Assessment End

semester Duration of

End semester

Exam TW PR OR Test I Test II Average

20 20 20 80 03 hrs. 25 - - 125

Course Objectives:

1. To familiarize with the Laplace Transform, Inverse Laplace Transform of various functions, its applications.

2. To acquaint with the concept of Fourier series , its complex form and enhance the problem solving skills.

3. To familiarize with the concept of complex variables, C -R equations with applications.

4. To study the application of the knowledge of matrices and numerical methods in complex engineering

problems.

Course Outcomes: Learner will be able to :

1. Apply the concept of Laplace transform to solve the real integrals in engineering problems.

2. Apply the concept of inverse Laplace transform of various functions in engineering problems.

3. Expand the periodic function by using Fourier series for real life problems and complex engineering

problems.

4. Find orthogonal trajectories and analytic function by using basic concepts of complex variable theory.

5. Apply Matrix algebr a to solve the engineering problems.

6. Solve Partial differential equations by applying numerical solution and analytical methods for one

dimensional heat and wave equations.

Detailed Syllabus: (Module wise)

Module

No. Description Duration

1 Module: Laplace Transform

1.1 Definition of Laplace transform, Condition of Existence of Laplace transform,

1.2 Laplace Transform (L) of Standard Functions like 𝑒𝑎𝑡, 𝑠𝑖𝑛(𝑎𝑡), 𝑐𝑜𝑠(𝑎𝑡),

𝑠𝑖𝑛ℎ(𝑎𝑡), 𝑐𝑜𝑠ℎ(𝑎𝑡) and 𝑡𝑛 ,𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒 𝑛≥0.

1.3 Properties of Laplace Transform: Linearity, First Shifting theorem, Second

Shifting Theorem, change of scale Property, multiplication by t, Division by t,

Laplace Transform of derivatives and integrals (Properties without proof).

1.4 Evaluation of integrals by using Laplace Transformation.

Self-learning topics: Heaviside’s Unit Step function, Laplace Transform. of Periodic

functions, Dirac Delta Function. 06

## Page 242

Page 4 of 28

2 Module: Inverse Laplace Transform

2.1 Inverse Laplace Transform, Linearity property, use of standard formulae to

find inverse Laplace Transform, finding Inverse Laplace transform using

derivative

2.2 Partial fractions method & first shift property to find inverse Laplace transform.

2.3 Inverse Laplace transform using Convolution theor em (without proof)

Self-learning Topics: Applications to solve initial and boundary value problems

involving ordinary differential equations. 06

3 Module: Fourier Series:

3.1 Dirichlet’s conditions, Definition of Fourier series and Parseval’s Identity

(without proof)

3.2 Fourier series of periodic function with period 2π and 2l,

3.3 Fourier series of even and odd functions

3.4 Half range Sine and Cosine Series.

Self-learning Topics: Complex form of Fourier Series, orthogonal and orthon ormal set

of functions, Fourier Transform. 07

4 Module: Complex Variables:

4.1 Function f(z) of complex variable, limit, continuity and differentiability of f(z),

Analytic function, necessary and sufficient conditions for f(z) to be analytic (without

proof),

4.2 Cauchy -Riemann equations in cartesian coordinates (without proof)

4.3 Milne -Thomson method to determine analytic function f(z) when real part (u) or

Imaginary part (v) or its combination (u+v or u -v) is given.

4.4 Harmonic function, Harmonic co njugate and orthogonal trajectories

Self-learning Topics: Conformal mapping, linear, bilinear mapping, cross ratio, fixed

points and standard transformations 07

5 Module: Matrices:

5.1 Characteristic equation, Eigen values and Eigen vectors, Properties of Eigen

values and Eigen vectors. ( No theorems/ proof )

5.2 Cayley -Hamilton theorem (without proof): Application to find the inverse

of the given square matrix and t o determine the given higher degree

polynomial matrix.

5.3 Functions of square matrix

5.4 Similarity of matrices, Diagonalization of matrices

Self-learning Topics: Verification of Cayley Hamilton theorem, Minimal polynomial

and Derogatory matrix & Quadratic Forms (Congruent transformation & Orthogonal

Reduction) 07

6 Module: Numerical methods for PDE

6.1 Introduction of Partial Differential equations, method of separati on of variables,

Vibrations of string, Analytical method for one dimensional heat and wave

equations. (only problems)

6.2 Crank Nicholson method 06

## Page 243

Page 5 of 28

6.3 Bender Schmidt method

Self-learning Topics: Analytical methods of solving two and three dimensional

problems.

Term Work:

General Instructions:

1. Batch wise tutorials are to be conducted. The number of students per batch should be as per University

pattern for practical’s .

2. Students must be encouraged to write at least 6 class tutorials on entire syllabus.

3. A group of 4 -6 students should be assigned a self -learning topic. Students should prepare a

presentation/problem solving of 10 -15 minutes. This should be considered as mini project in Engineering

Mathematics. This pr oject should be graded for 10 marks depending on the performance of the students.

The distribution of Term Work marks will be as follows –

1. Attendance (Theory and Tutorial) 05 marks

2. Class Tutorials on entire syllabus 10 marks

3. Mini project 10 marks

Assessment:

Internal Assessment for 20 marks:

Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests

1. First test based on approximately 40% of curriculum contents and second test based on remaining contents

(approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in Test I) .

2. Total duration allotted for writing each of the paper is 1 hr.

3. Average of the marks scored in both the two tests will be considered for final grading.

End Semester Examination:

Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be propor tional to the number of respective

lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum.

1. Question paper will comprise of total six questions , each carrying 20 marks .

2. Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum .

3. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 then part (b)

will be from any module other than module 3) .

4. Only Four questions need to be solved .

References:

1. Engineering Mathematics, Dr. B. S. Grewal, Khanna Publication .

2. Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Erwin Kreyszig, Wiley Eastern Limited,

3. Advanced Engineering Mathematics, R. K. Jain and S.R.K. Iyengar, Narosa publication

4. Advanced Engineering Mathematics, H.K. Das, S. Chand Publication

5. Higher Engineering Mathematics B.V. Ramana, McGraw Hill Education

6. Complex Variables and Applications, Brown and Churchill, McGraw -Hill education,

7. Text book of Matrices, Shanti Narayan and P K Mittal, S. Chand Publication

8. Laplace transforms, Murray R. Spiegel, Schaum’s Outline Series .

********************

## Page 244

Page 6 of 28

Course Code Course Name Credits

PEC302 Applied Thermodynamics and Fluid Mechanics 03

Contact Hours Credit Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total

03 - - 03 - - 03

Theory Term work / Practical / Oral

Total Internal Assessment End

semester Duration of

End semester

Exam TW PR OR Test I Test II Average

20 20 20 80 03 hrs. - - - 100

Objectives:

1. To acquaint with basic concepts, various processes and cycles of Thermodynamics and its

applications.

2. To familiarize with the understanding about basic laws of thermodynamics and its applications.

3. To impart the fundamental knowledge of fluid, its properties and behavior under various conditions

of internal and external flows.

4. To prepare the students to learn about energy losses during fluid flow through pipes.

Outcomes: learner will be able to:

1. Understand the concept of thermodynamics and laws of thermodynamics.

2. Apply the first law of thermodynamics for various systems.

3. Apply the second law of thermodynamics for various systems.

4. Understand various properties of fluid.

5. Analyze the various types of flow fields analytically and by using flow visualization.

6. Apply fluid mechanics principle s to understand the dynamic s of flow and various losses during flow through

pipe.

## Page 245

Page 7 of 28

Detailed Syllabus: (Module wise)

Module

No. Description Duration

01 First law of Thermodynamics: Statement, First law applied to cyclic and non -

cyclic process, Application to non -flow processes viz. Constant volume,

constant pressure, constant temperature, adiabatic and polytrophic processes. 03

02 First law applied to o pen systems: Flow work, Steady flow energy equation

(SFEE), SFEE applied to nozzle, turbine, compressor, boiler, condenser etc. 03

03 Second law of Thermodynamics: Thermal reservoir, heat engine, thermal

efficiency, reversed heat engine, coefficient of performance, Kelvin -Planck,

Clausius statements, and their equivalence , Entropy. 03

04 Fluid Kinematics: Eulerian and Lagrangian description of fluid motion, Types

of fluid flow, Types of flow lines, continuity equation in Cartesian coordinates,

Velocity potential and stream function .

03

05 Fluid dynamics: Euler’s equation of motion along a stream line , Bernoulli’s

equation, Application of Bernoulli’s equation to Venturi meter, Orifice meter

and Pitot tube (No derivation on rate of flow is required) . 03

06 Dynamics of Viscous Flow: Flow of viscous fluid in circular Pipes - Hagen

Poiseuille flow. Flow Through Pipes: Major and Minor losses in pipes, Pipes in

series, Pipes in parallel and Equivalent pipe.

Introduction of CFD : Applications of CFD, Conservation equations,

Classification of partial differential equations and physical behavior,

Approximate solution of PDE, Finite difference and Finite Volume Method. 05

Assessment:

Internal Assessment for 20 marks:

Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests

1. First test based on approximately 40% of curriculum contents and second test based on remaining contents

(approximately 40% , but excluding contents covered in Test I) .

2. Total duration allotted for writing each of the paper is 1 hr.

3. Average of the marks scored in both the two tests will be considered for final grading.

End Semester Examination:

Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to the number of respective

lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum.

1. Question paper will comprise of total six questions , each carrying 20 marks .

2. Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum .

3. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 then part (b)

will be from any module other than module 3) .

4. Only Four que stions need to be solved .

## Page 246

Page 8 of 28

Books Recommended:

Text books:

1. Fluid Mechanics & Hydraulic Machines, 9th Edition by R. K. Bansal, Laxmi Publications.

2. Introduction to Fluid Mechanics, 4th Edition by R. W. Fox, and A. T. McDonald, John Wiley and Sons.

3. Thermal Engineering, R. K. Rajput, Laxmi Publication s.

4. Thermal Engineering, Ballaney, Khanna Publication s.

5. A Course in Thermal Engineering, Domkundwar, Kothoraman and Khaju.

Reference Books:

1. Fluid Mechanics, 3rd Edition by Frank M. White, McGraw -Hill.

2. Fluid Machines and Fluid Power Engg., 7th Edition by D.S Kumar, S. K. Kataria publications .

3. Thermal Engineering, Mahesh Rathore, Tata McGraw Hill .

4. Engineering Thermodynamics by C.P. Arora, Tata McGraw Hill Publications .

5. Engineering Thermo dynamics through Examples by Y V C Rao, Universities Press (India) Pvt. Lt.10.

Internal Combustion Engine, S.L. Beohar .

**************** ***

## Page 247

Page 9 of 28

Course Code Course Name Credits

PEC303 Mechanics of Materials 03

Contact Hours Credit Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total

03 - - 03 - - 03

Theory Term work / Practical / Oral

Total Internal Assessment End

semester Duration of

End semester

Exam TW PR OR Test I Test II Average

20 20 20 80 03 hrs. - - - 100

Objectives:

1. To impart the concept of various types of forces, their modes of action and resulting stresses

and strains on various materials under various operating conditions.

2 To impart the knowledge of Bending Moment, Shear force and Moment of Inertia as applied

on various structures.

Outcomes: Learner will be able to :

1. Illustrate stress -strain behavior of various materials under load.

2. Demonstrate the basic concepts related to material properties and stress strain behavior of

material.

3. Illustrate the basic concept of Bending moment and Shear force.

4. Illustrate basic concepts of bending, shear, torsion and buckling.

5. Illustrate basic concepts of deflection.

6. Develop skills for analysis of stresses under various loading conditions.

Detailed Syllabus: (Module wise)

Module

No Description Duration

01 Direct stress and direct strain: Concept of diffe rent types of stresses; Stress−S train curves

for ductile and brittle material; factor of safety; deformation of uniform/tapering rectangular

and circular and circular cross−section bars; deformation of members made of composite

materials; shear stress and shear strain, Poisson's ratio, volumetric strain, bulk modulus;

relationship between Young’s modulus, bulk modulus and modulus of elasticity;

temperature stresses in simple and compound bars.

04

02 Theory of Bending: Flexure formula for straight beams; principal axes of inertia; moments

of inertia about principal axes; transfer theorem. Simple problems involving application of

flexure formula, section modulus and moment of resistance of a section

03

## Page 248

Page 10 of 28

03 Shear Stress in Beams : Distribution of shear stress across plane sections used commonly

for structural purposes; shear connectors.

03

04 Deflection of Beams: Deflection of cantilever, simply supported and overhanging beams

using Macaulay’s method for different types of loadings. 03

05 Theory of Torsion: Torsion of circular shafts -solid and hollow, stresses in shafts

transmitting power, shafts in series and parallel. 03

06 Principal Stresses: General equations for transformation of stress; principal planes and

principal stresses, determination using Mohr’s circle maximum shear stress, principal

stresses in beams , principal stresses in shafts subjected to torsion, bending and axial thrust;

concept of equivalent torsion and bending moments.

04

Assessment:

Internal Assessment for 20 marks:

Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests

1 First test based on approximately 40% of curriculum contents and second test based on remaining contents

(approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in Test I) .

2 Total duration allotted for writing each of the paper is 1 hr.

3 Average of the marks scored in both the two tests will be considered for final grading.

End Semester Examination:

Weight age of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to the number of respective

lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum.

1. Question paper will comprise of total six questions , each carrying 20 marks .

2. Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum .

3. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 , then part

(b) will be from any module other than module 3) .

4. Only Four questions need to be solved .

Reference books

1. Bansal, R. K., A Text Book of Strength of Materials , Lakshmi Publications Pvt. Limited, New Delhi.

2. Ferdinand P. Beer, and Rusell Johnston, E., Mechanics of Materials , SI Metric Edition, McGraw Hill.

3. S Ramamrutham, Strength of Materials , Dhanpat Rai Publication s.

4. Beer and Johnston, Mechanics of Materials , McGraw Hill Publication s.

5. James M. Gere, Mechanics of Materials Fifth Edition , Brooks/Cole, USA , 2001 .

6. William A Nash, Theory and problems of strength of materials , Schaum’s outline Serie s, McGraw

Hill International Edition.

7. Shigley, J. E., Applied Mechanics of Materials , International Student Edition, McGraw Hill

Koyakusha Limited.

8. Singer, Strength of Materials , Longman Publishers.

************ ******

## Page 249

Page 11 of 28

Course Code Course Name Credits

PEC304 Manufacturing Processes 03

Contact Hours Credit Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total

03 - - 03 - - 03

Theory Term work / Practical /

Oral

Total Internal Assessment End

semester Duration of

End semester

Exam TW PR OR Test I Test II Average

20 20 20 80 03 hrs. - - - 100

Objectives:

1. To impart the knowledge of machine tools and basic machining processes , like turning, drilling,

milling and broaching .

2. To impart the fundamentals of various metal cutting practices, fundamentals of machine tools

and processes.

3. To familiarize with unconventional machining processes and techniques .

4. To understand the importance of CNC machining in metal cutting.

Outcomes: Learner will be able to:

1. Describe types of machine tools, their classification, specifications and constructional features.

2. Illustrate machine tools ’ capabilities, limitations of machining operations to generate cylindrical ,

circular and planar components .

3. Describe features and applications of screw thread processes and gear manufacturing processes .

4. Demonstrate finishing processes , like grinding, reaming, honing, lapping and burnishing.

5. To understand and analyze machining operations on CNC machines and the related

program ming details .

6. Illustrate the fundamentals of various non -conventional machining processes, its capabilities and

their application areas.

Detailed Syllabus: (Module wise)

Module No. Description Duration

01 Introduction to Manufacturing Processes

Definition, need and classification of manufacturing process , based on chip -less

and chip-removal processes. Various generating & forming processes .

Lathe, Drilling, Boring and Broaching Machine s: Lathe machine components,

lathe accessories, Drilling machine , Boring machine , cutting -off machine ,

Broaching machine , Milling machine , shaping machine, Planning and Slotting

machine .

02

02 Milling Machine: Milling machine components and their difference, Milling

accessories, milling machines types, types of Milling cutters. 02

## Page 250

Page 12 of 28

Reciprocating Machine: Shaping machines: types of shapers, working of shaping

machine, quick return mechanisms, shaper operations, Planning machines: types of

planning machines. Slotting machines: types of slotting machines.

03 Thread Cutting, Gear cutting and Finishing processes

Thread rolling, Thread chasing, Gear hobbling , Gear shaping and Gear shaving.

Grinding machines types , Grinding wheel specification. Trueing, Dressing and

balancing of grinding wheel. Finishing processes like Reaming, Honing, Lapping,

Buffing and Polishing.

02

04 CNC Basics and Hardware

DNC, Motion controller, Interpolation, Adaptive control system, Spindle drive,

Axis drive, Actuation and feedback devices, ATC, Tool presetter, Touch probe

system. CNC Turning and Milling tools 04

05 CNC Programming

Turning and Machining centre programming , Canned cycle, Looping, Jumping and

Subprogram. 06

06 Unconventional machining processes: Classification of the Non -traditional

machining process. Basic principles, machines, advantage, disadvantages, and

applications of Electrical discharge machining (EDM), Electron beam machining

(EBM), Plasma arc machining (PAM), Laser beam machining(LBM),

Electrochemical machining (ECM), Chemical machining (CHM),Ultrasonic

machining (USM), Abrasive jet machining (AJM), Water jet machining (WJM),

Abras ive water jet machining (AWJM).

Ultrasonic machining (USM), Abrasive jet machining (AJM), Water jet

machining (WJM), Abrasive water jet machining (AWJM).

04

Assessment:

Internal Assessment for 20 marks:

Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests

1 First test based on approximately 40% of curriculum contents and second test based on

remaining contents (approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in Test I) .

2 Total duration allotted for writing each of the paper is 1 hr.

3 Average of the marks scored in both the two tests will be considered for final grading.

End Semester Examination:

Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of

respective lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum.

1. Question paper will comprise of total six questions , each carrying 20 marks .

2. Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum .

3. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example , if Q.2 has part (a) from module 3

then part (b) will be from any module other than module 3) .

4. Only Four questions need to be solved .

Reference Books:

1. Elements of Workshop Technology : Machine Tools (Volume -2) by S. K. Hajra Choudhary,

A. K. Hajra Choudhary, Nirjhar Roy, Media promoters (2010).

2. A Course in Workshop Technology Vol.II (Machine Tools) by B. S. Raghuwanshi, Dhanpat Rai

& Co. (2001).

3. Workshop Technology Part 1, 2 and 3. By W. A. J. Chapman, Taylor & Francis (1972) .

4. Production Technology –HMT, Tata McGraw -Hill (1980).

5. Manufacturing, Engineering and Technology , 4th Edition by Serope Kalpakjian, Steven R.

Schmid, Pearson (2005).

## Page 251

Page 13 of 28

6. A Text Book Of Production Technology Vol. II by O. P. Khanna, Dhanpat Rai Publication s

(2000).

7. CAD CAM, Principle and Applications, P. N. Rao, Tata McGraw Hill, 3rd edition, 2012.

8. Fundamentals of Modern Manufacturing -Materials, Processes and Systems, 3rdEdition by Mikell

P. Groover, Wiley India (2002).

9. Manufacturing Processes for Engineering Materials , 4th Edition by Serope Kalpakjian, Steven

R. Schmid, Pearson (2007).

**************

## Page 252

Page 14 of 28

Course Code Course Name Credits

PEC305 Engineering Materials & Metallurgy 03

Contact Hours Credit Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total

03 - - 03 - - 03

Theory Term work / Practical /

Oral

Total Internal Assessment End

semester Duration of

End semester

Exam TW PR OR Test I Test II Average

20 20 20 80 03 hrs. - - - 100

Objectives:

1. To acquaint the importance of metallurgy through solidification, defects, deformation, alloying

and phase diagrams.

2. To impart the knowledge of fracture and heat treatment of materials.

3. To acquaint with different new age materials like semiconductors, nano materials, smart materials ,

magnetic materials and biomaterials.

Outcomes: Learner will be able to:

1. Understand the process of solidification of metals along with various types of crystal

imperfections and deformation mechanism.

2. Understand the difference between various modes of material failure.

3. Analyze various alloy phase diagrams including iron -carbide diagram with effects of alloying.

4. Select proper heat treatment process for steel in order to attain desirable properties.

5. Understand the properties and application of nano materials, biomaterials and composites.

6. Understand the properties and application of smart materials, semiconductors and magnetic

material.

Detailed Syllabus: (Module wise)

Module

No. Description Duration

01 Introduction to Metallurgy : Need for Metallurgy, Processing -

Structure -Properties -Performance interrelationships.

Deformation : Strain hardening and its significance. Recovery,

recrystallization and grain growth, Factors affecting recrystallization. 02

02 Alloy phase diagrams: Different types of alloy diagrams and their

analysis. Tie bar and Lever rules and their application. Dispersion

hardening/age hardening. 04

## Page 253

Page 15 of 28

The Iron -Iron Carbide Phase Diagram: Importance of Iron as

engineering material, Allotropic forms of Iron. I ron-Iron carbide diagram

and its analysis. Classification of Plain carbon steels and Cast irons.

03 Effect of Alloying Elements in Steels : Effect of alloying elements on

ferrite, carbide, austenite. Effect of alloying elements on phase

transformation, hardening and tempering.

Tool steels & Stainless steels: Important compositions and applications.

Non Ferrous Metals and their Alloys : Aluminum, Copper, Tin, and

Zinc – Their alloys, properties and applications. 04

04 Principles of Heat treatment: Techno logy of heat treatment.

Classification of heat treatment process. TTT Diagram. CCT Diagram

and Superimposition of cooling curves on diagram.

Heat treatment Process *: Annealing: principle, process, properties and

application: Full Annealing, Spheroidizing, Process annealing, Stress

relieve annealing. Normalizing: principle, process and its applications.

Hardening: Hardening media, Hardenability. Tempering, Austempering,

Martempering, Maraging and Ausforming process.

Surface hardening: Surface Hardening met hods. Their significance and

applications.

Carburizing, Nitriding. Induction hardening and Flame hardening

processes.

Heat treatment defects *: Defect during heat treatment process

(Causes and remedies). 02

05 Biomaterials : Classes of materials used in medicine. Basic concepts:

Tissue and cell interaction with biomaterials. Application of

biomaterials: Cardiovascular medical devices, Orthopaedic, Dental

applications.

Composites : Basic concepts of composites, advantages over metallic

materials, various types of composites and their applications,

Manufacturing Processes for Thermoset Composites – Hand Lay Up,

Spray Up, Filament Winding, Pultrusion, Resin Transfer Molding,

Structural Reaction Injection Molding, Compression Mold ing. 04

06 Smart materials : Shape memory alloys (SMA): Characteristics,

properties of NiTi alloy, application, advantages and disadvantages of

SMA. Super conductors: Type I and Type II superconductors,

applications.

Magnetic Material : Introduction. Classification of magnetic materials.

Ferromagnetism. Magnetic domain. Magnetisation. Magnetic

anisotropy. Magnetostriction. Paramagnetism. Diamagnetism.

Hysteresis. Hard and soft magnetic . 04

Assessment:

Internal Assessment for 20 mark s:

Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests

1 First test based on approximately 40% of curriculam contents and second test based on

remaining contents (approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in Test I) .

2 Total duration allotted for writing each of the paper is 1 hr.

## Page 254

Page 16 of 28

3 Average of the marks scored in both the two tests will be considered for final grading.

End Semester Examination:

Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of

respective lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum.

1. Question paper will comprise of total six questions , each carrying 20 marks .

2. Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum .

3. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example , if Q.2 has part (a) from module 3

then part (b) will be from any module other than module 3) .

4. Only Four questions need to be solved .

Reference Books:

1. Materials Science and Engineering - A first course, V. Raghvan , ‘Prentice Hall of India, New

Delhi (2001).

2. Introdu ction to Physical Metallurgy, 2nd Edition, S. H. Avner, Tata McGraw Hill (1997).

3. Material Science and Engineering: An Introduction , William D Callister, Adapted by R.

Balasubramaniam, Wiley India (P) ltd (2010).

4. Mechanical Metallurgy, 3rd edition, G. E. Dieter, McGraw Hill International, New Delhi (1988).

5. Introduction to Engineering Materials, B. K. Agrawal, McGraw Hill P ublishing Co. ltd. (1988).

6. Physical Metallurgy: Principles and Practices, V. Raghvan, PHI Publications.

7. Composite Manufacturing - Materials, Product and Process Engineering, Sanjay K Muzumdar,

CRC Press (2002).

8. Material Science and Metallurgy for Engineers, V. D. Kodgire, Evercast Publishing House.

9. A textbook of Material Science and Metallurgy by O P Khanna, Dhanpat Rai Publications .

10. Biomaterials Science: An Introduction to Materials in Medicine, edited by B.D. R atner, A.S.

Hoffman, F.J. Schoen, and J.E. Lemons, 2nd Edition, Elsevier Academic Press (2004).

11. Introduction to Materials Science for Engineer, James F Shackelford, S 's', 6th edition, Macmillan

Publishing Company, New York (2004).

**************** ****

## Page 255

Page 17 of 28

Course Code Course Name Credits

PEL301 Computer Aided Machine Drawing Lab. 02

Contact Hours Credit Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total

- 2* + 2 - - 02 - 02

Theory Term work / Practical /

Oral

Total Internal Assessment End

semester Duration of

End semester

Exam TW PR OR Test I Test II Average

- - - - - 50 25 - 75

Objectives:

1. To pr epare the students for insight of visualizing an obje ct and converting it in to a production

drawing.

2. To impart the know ledge of conventional representation of v arious mechanical details.

3. To pr epare the students to be conversant with 2D and 3D drafting, using a CAD Software.

Outcomes: Learner will be able to :

1. Prepare drawings, depicting in terpenetration of si mple sol ids and auxiliary views of

machine p arts.

2. R ead and in terpret detailed drawings from assembly drawi ngs.

3. Prepare assemb ly drawin gs from d etailed d rawings of m achine sub assemblies.

4. Prepare production drawings.

5. D evelop 3D models of machine p arts using v arious CAD softw ares.

6. Conv ert 3D models to 2D d rawings using various CAD softw ares.

Detailed Syllabus: (Module wise)

Module

No. Description

01 Machine Ele ments: Preparation of 2D drawings of stan dard ma chine elements (nuts, bol ts, keys, cotter,

screws, sp ring etc.).

Conventio nal representation of assemb ly of thr eaded parts in external and sectional views, Types of

threads; th read designation, Con ventional representation of ma chine components and mat erials,

Designation of stand ard components.

## Page 256

Page 18 of 28

02 Detailed and asse mbly drawings:

Introd uction to the unit assemb ly drawin g, steps invo lved in pr eparing assemb ly drawing from d etails

and vi ce-versa, Sequence in as sembly.

Preparation of d etails and assemb ly drawings of: Clapper block, Single tool post, squ are tool post,

Lathe T ailstock.

10 03 Preparation of detailed and asse mbly drawings of B earings:

Simple, sol id, Bushed bearing. I.S. conventional representation of b all &roll er bearing. Pedestal b earing

& footstep bearing.

08

04 Preparation of detailed and asse mbly drawings of pulleys & Pipe Joi nts.

Classifi cation of Pulleys, pipe jo ints

Pulleys: Flat belt, V-belt, rope b elt, Fast and loose pul leys.

Pipe jo ints: Flanged joints, Socket and spigot joint, Gland and stuffi ng box expansion jo int.

Limits, Fits &Tole rances

Representation of Dimensional Tolerances on drawings - Methods of showing limit dimensions,

Deviations, Allowances, Types of Fits and Tolerances. Hole basis and Shaft basis systems. Representation

of Geometrical Tolerances on drawings.

05 Preparation of detailed and asse mbly drawings of Valv es & I. C. E ngine parts:

Types of Valves, introduction to I.C. E ngine

Preparation of d etailed and assemb ly drawings of Stop v alve, Non r eturn Valve, I. C. Engine parts: Piston,

Connecting rod, Crosshead, Crank shaft and Spark plu g.

06 Preparation of detailed and asse mbly drawings of Jigs a nd Fixtures:

Introd uction to Jigs and fixtures.

Jigs and Fixtures :

Reverse E ngineering of a p hysical model: dis assembl ing of any Physical model h aving not less than five

parts, sk etch the m inimum views required for each compo nent, me asure all the required dimensions of

each compone nt, convert the sketches into 3D mod el and create an assembly drawing with actual

dimensions .

Term work:

A. Questions f rom theo ry part of each modu le should be solved as home wo rking A-3size sketch

book, as follows: -

1. Min imum3 qu estions f rom module 1.

2. Min imum2 qu estions f rom module 2.

3. Min imum1 qu estion/module from module 3 to 6.

B. Printouts/p lotsofthepr oblemssolvedinpra cticalclassfromthep racticalpartofeach modu le, as

follows: -

1. 3 two dimension al detailed drawings:- Preparation of 3D models of parts from given

2D assemb ly drawin g. Converting the 3D parts in to 2-D detailed d rawings.

2. 3 two dimension al Assembly drawings:- Preparation of 3D models of parts, from

given 2D detailed drawings. Assembling the 3D parts and Conv erting 3D Assembly

into 2D drawing.

Problems from practical parts of each modu le should be solved usi ng stan dard CAD packages

## Page 257

Page 19 of 28

Like IDEAS, PRO-E, CA TIA, So lid Works or Inventor etc.

The dis tribution of ma rks for T erm work sh all be as follows:

Hom ework: sket ch book ……. 20 ma rks

Printouts/ Plots ……. 20 marks

Attendance (th eory and practical) …… 10 marks

Practical/Oral examination:

1. Practical examination du ration is of thr ee hours, b ased on Part-B of the T erm wo rk and should

contain two s essions as follows:

Session-I: Preparation of 3D models of parts, assembl ing p arts and preparing prod uction

drawin gs of these p arts and assemb ly with appropriate to lerancing from given 2D d etailed

drawings.

Session-II: Preparation of m inimum five d etailed 3D part drawings from given 2D assemb ly

drawings.

Oral examinat ion should also be condu cted to check the knowledge of conventional and

CAD dra wing.

2. Qu estions provid ed for practical examination should contain m inimum five and not more than

ten parts.

3. The dis tribution of ma rks for pra ctical examination sh all be as follows:

Session-I …… 25 ma rks

Session-II …… 15 marks

Oral …… 10 marks

4. Ev aluation of p ractical examination to be done , based on the p rintouts submitted by students .

5. Students ’ work along w ith evaluation r eport to be p reserved till the n ext examination.

Reference Books:

1. Machine Drawing by N.D. Bhatt and V. M. Panchal, Charotar Publishing House, Gujarat.

2. Machine Drawing by P. S. Gill, S. K. Kataria & Sons.

3. A t extbook of Machine Drawin g, Laxminarayan & M. L. M athur (Jain brothers, Delhi).

4. Machine Drawing, Kamat & R ao.

5. Machine Drawing, M.B. Shah.

6. A text book of Machine Draw ing, R. B .Gupta ( Satyaprakashan, Tech. Publication).

7. Machine Drawing, K. I. Narayana, P. Kannaiah and K. Venkata Reddy.

8. Machine Drawing, Sidheswar, Kannaiah and Sastry, Tata McGraw Hill Education, New Delhi .

9. Autodesk Inventor 2020 for Designers , Sham Tickoo, CAD CIM Series.

10. Text book of Machine Drawing by K. C. John, PHI, New Delhi.

*********************

## Page 258

Page 20 of 28

Course Code Course Name Credits

PEL302 Python Programming Lab. 01

Contact Hours Credit Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total

- 02 - - 01 - 01

Theory Term work / Practical /

Oral

Total Internal Assessment End

semester Duration of

End semester

Exam TW PR OR Test I Test II Average

- - - - - 25 - - 25

Objective:

The course will help the students to get familiar with:

1. Basics of Python programming .

2. Decision Making and Functions in Python .

3. Object Oriented Programming , using Python .

4. Files Handling in Python .

5. GUI Programming and Databases operations in Python .

6. Network Programming in Python .

Outcomes: Learner will be able to:

1. Describe the Numbers, Math functions, Strings, List, Tuples and Dictionaries in Python .

2. Express different Decision Making statements and Functions .

3. Interpret Object oriented programming in Python .

4. Understand and summarize different File handling operations .

5. Explain how to design GUI Applications in Python and evaluate different database operations .

6. Design and develop Client Server network applications using Python .

Detailed Syllabus: (Module wise)

Module

No Description

01 Write python programs to understand Expressions, Variables, Quotes, Basic Math

operations, Strings: Basic String Operations & String Methods, List, Tuples,

Dictionaries , Arrays .

(Minimum Three Programs based on math operations, Strings and List/Tuples/

Dictionaries) .

02 Write python programs to understand different decision making statements and

Functions.

(Minimum Three Programs based on Decision making, Looping Statements and

Functions) .

03 Write python programs to understand different Object oriented features in Python

(Minimum four programs based on a) Classes & objects, b) Constructors, c)

Inheritance & Polymorphism and d) Exception handling ).

04 Write python programs to understand differ ent File handling operations .

## Page 259

Page 21 of 28

05 Write python programs to understand GUI designing and database operations .

(Minimum Three programs based on GUI designing using Tkinter, Mysql database

creation & Database connectivity with DML operations using python .

06 Write python programs to understand TCP and UDP Sockets in Python

(Minimum One programs based on TCP or UDP Sockets) .

Assessment:

Term Work:

Distribution of Term work Marks

Laboratory work ……….2 0 Marks

Atten dance ………..05 Marks

Reference Books:

1. Wesley J Chun,” Core Python Applications Programming”, Third Edition, Pearson Publication.

2. E. Balguruswamy ,” Introduction to Computing and Problem Solving using Python”, McGraw Hill

Publication .

3. Learn to Master Python, from Star EDU solutions, by Script Demics .

4. James Payne ,”Beginning Python: Using Python 2.6 and Python 3.1”,Wrox Publication .

5. Dr. R. Nageswara Rao,”Core Python Programming ”, Dreamtech Press, Wiley Publication.

6. Magnus Lie Hetland ,”Beginning Python From Novice to Professional”, Second Edition”, Apress

Publication.

**************

## Page 260

Page 22 of 28

Course Code Course Name Credits

PEL 303 Materials Testing Lab. 01

Contact Hours Credit Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total

- 02 - - 01 - 01

Theory Term work / Practical /

Oral

Total Internal Assessment End

semester Duration of

End semester

Exam TW PR OR Test I Test II Average

- - - - - 25 - - 25

Objectives:

1. To familiarize with the use of stress and strain measuring instruments.

2. To familiarize with the process of metallographic sample preparation.

3. To familiarize with various Non -Destructive Testing methods.

4. To familiarize with various heat treatment processes.

5. To familiarize with hardness testi ng methods.

Outcomes: Learner will be able to :

1. Conduct tensile and torsion tests on mild steel specimens.

2. Determine the Young’s modulus using deflection test on different structural specimens.

3. Prepare sample for metallographic observations.

4. Conduct impact testing, hardness and hardenability testing of given specimen.

5. Conduct NDT test on materials.

6. Perform the heat treatment processes with its relevance in the manufacturing industry.

Sr. no. Experiments

01 Tensile test on mild steel rod.

02 Torsion test on mild steel rod.

03 Deflection test on steel/wood / aluminium specimen.

04 Charpy and Izod impact test on steel specimen.

05 Double shear test on steel rod.

06 Compression test on brick/concrete blocks/wood.

07 Tension and compression test on helical springs.

08 Brinell, Rockwell or Vickers hardness test.

09 Sample preparation for metallographic observations.

10 Experiments based on any two heat treatment methods.

11 Jominy end quench test.

12 Experiments based on any two NDT tests.

## Page 261

Page 23 of 28

Term Work

Term work shall consist of any four experiments covering the experiments mentioned from Sr. no 1 to 7.

In all, total 7 experiments are to be performed. A detailed report, based on an Industrial visit to a

manufacturing firm, covering the syllabus discussed in the subject of Metallurgy & New Age Materials ,

needs to be submitted along with the write -up on above experiments.

Experiments (1 - 7) : 10 marks

Experiments (8 -12) and report on Industrial visit : 10 marks

Attendance : 05 marks

The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures the satisfactory performance of laboratory

work as well as the in dustrial visit and minimum passing in the term work.

************** **

## Page 262

Page 24 of 28

Course Course Name Credits

PEL304 Skill based Lab. Course -I

Machine Shop Practice Lab. 02

Contact Hours Credit Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total

- 04 - - 02 - 02

Theory Term work / Practical /

Oral

Total Internal Assessment End

semester Duration of

End semester

Exam TW PR OR Test I Test II Average

- - - - - 50 - - 50

Objectives:

1. To prepare the students gain expertise with various lathe operations like turning, taper turning,

thread cutting etc.

2. To familiarize with the practice of machining of flat surfaces on shaping and milling machines.

Outcomes : Learner will be able to:

1. Follow safe machine practices while working.

2. Select the right tool, setup of the machine/ job for machining.

3. Perform operations like cylindrical turning, thread cutting etc. on lathe machine.

4. Perform operations for flat surfaces like Keyway cutting, T -slot cutting etc. on shaper/miller

5. Understand capabilities of CNC.

List of Experiments :

Sr.no Experiments/Job

01 One job on Power hacksaw/Band saw and Drilling machine.

02 One job on plain turning, taper turning , screw cutting and other operation performed on

lathe machine.

03 One job on shaping / milling machine to make horizontal and inclined surfaces.

04 One job on any unconventional machining process.

05 Demo on CNC Turning and CNC Milling

Term Work

Term work shall consist of exercises as per the above List. A detailed report , based on an Industrial visit

to a manufacturing firm, covering various machining practices as mentioned in the subject of

## Page 263

Page 25 of 28

Manufacturing Processes , also needs to be submitted. The report should contain various machining

practices , followed as applic able in the industry visited.

The distribution of marks for term work shall be as follows:

Laboratory work (4 Experiments) :40 Marks.

Industrial visit report on Machining practices : 05 Marks.

Attendance (P ractical) : 05 Marks.

******************

## Page 264

Page 26 of 28

Course Course Name Credits

PEM301 Mini Project - 1A 02

Contact Hours Credit Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total

- 04 - - 02 - 02

Theory Term work / Practical /

Oral

Total Internal Assessment End

semester Duration of

End semester

Exam TW PR OR Test I Test II Average

- - - - - 25 - 25 50

Objectives

1. To acquaint with the process of identifying the needs and converting it into the problem.

2. To familiarize the process of solving the problem in a group.

3. To acquaint with the process of applying basic engineering fundamentals to attempt solutions to the

problems.

4. To inculcate the process of self -learning and research.

Outcome: Learner will be a ble to:

1. Identify problems based on societal /research needs.

2. Apply Knowledge and skill to solve societal problems in a group.

3. Develop interpersonal skills to work as member of a group or leader.

4. Draw the proper inferences from available results through theoretical/ experimental/simulations.

5. Analyze the impact of solutions in societal and environmental context for sustainable development.

6. Use standard norms of engineering practices

7. Excel in written and oral communication.

8. Demonstrate capabilities of self -learning in a group, which leads to life long learning.

9. Demonstrate project management principles during project work.

Guidelines for Mini Project

Students shall form a group of 3 to 4 students, while forming a group sh all not be allowed less than

three or more than four students, as it is a group activity.

Students should do survey and identify needs, which shall be converted into problem statement for

mini project in consultation with faculty supervisor/head of departm ent/internal committee of

faculties.

Students shall submit implementation plan in the form of Gantt/PERT/CPM chart, which will cover

weekly activity of mini project.

A log book to be prepared by each group, wherein group can record weekly work progress,

guide/supervisor can verify and record notes/comments.

Faculty supervisor may give inputs to students during mini project activity; however, focus shall be

on self -learning.

Students in a group shall understand problem effectively, propose multiple sol ution and select best

possible solution in consultation with guide/ supervisor.

## Page 265

Page 27 of 28

Students shall convert the best solution into working model using various components of their

domain areas and demonstrate.

The solution to be validated with proper justifica tion and report to be compiled in standard format

of University of Mumbai.

With the focus on the self -learning, innovation, addressing societal problems and entrepreneurship

quality development within the students through the Mini Projects, it is preferab le that a single

project of appropriate level and quality to be carried out in two semesters by all the groups of the

students. i.e. Mini Project 1 in semester III and IV. Similarly, Mini Project 2 in semesters V and VI.

However, based on the individual s tudents or group capability, with the mentor’s recommendations,

if the proposed Mini Project adhering to the qualitative aspects mentioned above gets completed in

odd semester, then that group can be allowed to work on the extension of the Mini Project wit h

suitable improvements/modifications or a completely new project idea in even semester. This policy

can be adopted on case by case basis.

Guidelines for Assessment of Mini Project:

Term Work

The review/ progress monitoring committee shall be constituted b y head of departments of

each institute. The progress of mini project to be evaluated on continuous basis, minimum

two reviews in each semester.

In continuous assessment focus shall also be on each individual student, assessment based on

individual’s contr ibution in group activity, their understanding and response to questions.

Distribution of Term work marks for both semesters shall be as below;

o Marks awarded by guide/supervisor based on log book : 10

o Marks awarded by review committee : 10

o Quality of Project report : 05

Review/progress monitoring committee may consider following points for assessment

based on either one year or half year project as mentioned in general guidelines.

One-year project:

In first semester entire theoretical solution shall be ready, including components/system

selection and cost analysis. Two reviews will be conducted based on presentation given by

students group.

First shall be for finalisation of problem

Second shall be on finalisation of proposed solution of prob lem.

In second semester expected work shall be procurement of component’s/systems, building of

working prototype, testing and validation of results based on work completed in an earlier

semester.

First review is based on readiness of building working proto type to be conducted.

Second review shall be based on poster presentation cum demonstration of working

model in last month of the said semester.

Half -year project:

In this case in one semester students’ group shall complete project in all aspects includin g,

o Identification of need/problem

o Proposed final solution

o Procurement of components/systems

o Building prototype and testing

Two reviews will be conducted for continuous assessment,

First shall be for finalisation of problem and proposed solution .

Second shall be for implementation and testing of solution.

## Page 266

Page 28 of 28

Assessment criteria of Mini Project.

Mini Project shall be assessed based on following criteria;

1. Quality of survey/ need identification

2. Clarity of Problem definition based on need.

3. Innovative ness in solutions

4. Feasibility of proposed problem solutions and selection of best solution

5. Cost effectiveness

6. Societal impact

7. Innovativeness

8. Cost effectiveness and Societal impact

9. Full functioning of working model as per stated requirements

10. Effective use of skill sets

11. Effective use of standard engineering norms

12. Contribution of an individual’s as member or leader

13. Clarity in written and oral communication

In one year, project , first semester evaluation may be based on first six criteria’s and

remaining may be used for second semester evaluation of performance of students in mini

project.

In case of half year project all criteria’s in generic may be considered for evaluation of

performance of students in mini project.

Guidelines for Assessment of Mini Project Practical/Oral Examination:

Report should be prepared as per the guidelines issued by the University of Mumbai.

Mini Project shall be assessed through a presentation and demonstration of working model by the

student project group to a panel of I nternal and External Examiners preferably from industry or

research organizations having experience of more than five years approved by head of Institution.

Students shall be motivated to publish a paper based on the work in Conferences/students

competitio ns.

Mini Project shall be assessed based on following points;

1. Quality of problem and Clarity

2. Innovativeness in solutions

3. Cost effectiveness and Societal impact

4. Full functioning of working model as per stated requirements

5. Effective use of skill sets

6. Effective use of standard engineering norms

7. Contribution of an individual’s as member or leader

8. Clarity in written and oral communication

*****************

## Page 267

AC -23/02/2021

Item No. – 6.11-4

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI

Bachelor of Engineering

in

Computer Engineering

Direct Second Year (Sem. III) Admitted Students for the

current Academic Year 2020 -21(Only)

(REV - 2019 ‘C’ Scheme) from Academic Year 2019 – 20

Under

FACULTY OF

SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY

(As per AICTE guidelines with effect from the academic year 2019 –2020)

## Page 268

Program Structure for Second Year Computer Engineering

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI (With Effect from 2020 -2021 ) Semester III

Course

Code Course Name Teaching Scheme

(Contact Hours) Credits Assigned

Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total

CSC301 Engineering

Mathematics -III 3 -- 1* 3 -- 1 4

CSC302 Discrete Structures and

Graph Theory 3 -- 3 -- 3

CSC303 Data Structure 3 -- -- 3 -- -- 3

CSC304 Digital Logic &

Computer Architecture 3 -- -- 3 -- -- 3

CSC305 Computer Graphics 3 -- -- 3 -- -- 3

CSL301 Data Structure Lab -- 2 -- -- 1 -- 1

CSL302 Digital Logic &

Computer Architecture

Lab -- 2 -- -- 1 -- 1

CSL303 Computer Graphics

Lab -- 2 -- -- 1 -- 1

CSL304 Skill base Lab course:

Object Oriented

Programming with Java -- 2+2* -- -- 2 -- 2

CSM301 Mini Project – 1 A 4$ 2 2

Total 15 14 1 15 07 1 23

Course

Code Course Name Examination Scheme

Theory Term

Work Pract

& oral Total

Internal

Assessment End

Sem.

Exam Exam.

Duration

(in Hrs)

Test

1 Test

2 Avg

CSC301 Engineering

Mathematics -III 20 20 20 80 3 25 -- 125

CSC302 Discrete Structures and

Graph Theory 20 20 20 80 3 -- -- 100

CSC303 Data Structure 20 20 20 80 3 -- -- 100

CSC304 Digital Logic &

Computer Architecture 20 20 20 80 3 -- -- 100

CSC305 Computer Graphics 20 20 20 80 3 -- -- 100

CSL301 Data Structure Lab -- -- -- -- -- 25 25 50

CSL302 Digit al Logic &

Computer Archit Lab -- -- -- -- -- 25 -- 25

CSL303 Computer Graphics Lab -- -- -- -- -- 25 25 50

CSL304 Skill base Lab course:

Object Oriented

Programming with Java -- -- -- -- -- 50 25 75

CSM301 Mini Project – 1 A 25 25 50

Total -- -- 100 400 -- 175 100 775

*Should be conducted batch wise and $ indicates workload of Learner (Not Faculty), Students

can form groups with minimum 2 (Two) and not more than 4 (Four), Faculty Load: 1 hour per

week per four groups

## Page 269

Course Code Course Name Credits

CSC301 Engineering Mathematics -III 4

Pre-requisite: Engineering Mathematics -I, Engineering Mathematics -II

Course Objectives: The course aims:

1 To learn the Laplace Transform, Inverse Laplace Transform of various functions, its

applications.

2 To understand the concept of Fourier Series, its complex form and enhance the problem -

solving skills.

3 To understand the concept of complex variables, C -R equations with applications.

4 To understand the basic techniques of statistics like correlation, regression, and curve

fitting for data analysis, Machine learning, and AI.

5 To understand some advanced topics of probability, random variables with their

distributions and expectations.

Course Outcomes: On successful completion, of course, learner/student will be able to:

1 Understand the concept of Laplace transform and its application to solve the real integrals

in engineering problems.

2 Understand the concept of inverse Laplace transform of various functions and its

applications in engineering problems.

3 Expand the periodic function by using the Fourier series for real -life problems and

complex engineering problems.

4 Understand complex variable theory, application of harmonic conjugate to get orthogonal

trajectories and analytic functions.

5 Apply the concept of Correlation and Regression to the engineering problems in data

science, machine learning, and AI.

6 Understand the concepts of probability and expectation for getting the spread of the data

and distribution of probabilities.

Module Detailed Contents Hours

1 Laplace Transform 7

1.1 Definition of Laplace transform, Condition of Existence of Laplace

transform.

1.2 Laplace Transform (L) of standard functions like

𝑒𝑎𝑡,𝑠𝑖𝑛(𝑎𝑡),𝑐𝑜𝑠(𝑎𝑡),𝑠𝑖𝑛ℎ(𝑎𝑡),𝑐𝑜𝑠ℎ(𝑎𝑡)and𝑡𝑛,𝑛≥0.

1.3 Properties of Laplace Transform: Linearity, First Shifting Theorem,

Second Shifting Theorem, Change of Scale, Multiplication by t,

Division by t, Laplace Transform of derivatives and integrals

(Properties without proof).

1.4 Evaluation of real improper integrals by using Laplace

Transformation.

1.5 Self-learning Topics: Laplace Transform: Periodic functions,

Heaviside’s Unit Step function , Dirac Delta Function, Special

functions (Error and Bessel)

## Page 270

2 Inverse Laplace Transform 7

2.1 Definition of Inverse Laplace Transform, Linearity property, Inverse

Laplace Transform of standard functions, Inverse Laplace transform

using derivatives.

2.2 Partial fractions method to find Inverse Laplace transform.

2.3 Inverse Laplace transform using Convolution theorem (without

proof)

2.4 Self-learning Topics: Applications to solve initial and boundary

value problems involving ordinary differential equations.

3 Fourier Series: 7

3.1 Dirichlet’s conditions, Definition of Fourier series and Parseval’s

Identity (without proof).

3.2 Fourier series of periodic function with period 2π and 2l.

3.3 Fourier series of even and odd functions.

3.4 Half range Sine and Cosine Series.

3.5 Self-learning Topics: Orthogonal and orthonormal set of functions,

Complex form of Fourier Series, Fourier Transforms.

4 Complex Variables: 7

4.1 Function f(z)of complex variable, Limit, Continuity and

Differentiability of f(z), Analytic function: Necessary and sufficient

conditions for f(z) to be analytic (without proof).

4.2 Cauchy -Riemann equations in Cartesian coordinates (without

proof).

4.3 Milne -Thomson method: Determine analytic function f(z)when real

part (u), imaginary part (v) or its combination (u+v / u -v) is given.

4.4 Harmonic function, Harmonic conjugate and Orthogonal

trajectories.

4.5 Self-learning Topics: Conformal mapping, Linear and Bilinear

mappings, cross ratio, fixed points and standard transformations.

5 Statistical Techniques 6

5.1 Karl Pearson’s coefficient of correlation (r)

5.2 Spearman’s Rank correlation coefficient (R) (with repeated and non -

repeated ranks)

5.3 Lines of regression

5.4 Fitting of first - and second -degree curves.

5.5 Self-learning Topics: Covariance, fitting of exponential curve.

6 Probability 6

6.1 Definition and basics of probability, conditional probability.

6.2 Total Probability theorem and Bayes’ theorem.

6.3 Discrete and continuous random variable with probability

distribution and probability density function.

6.4 Expectation, Variance, Moment generating function, Raw and

central moments up to 4th order.

6.5 Self-learning Topics: Skewness and Kurtosis of distribution (data).

References:

1 Higher Engineering Mathematics, Dr. B. S. Grewal, Khanna Publication.

2 Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Erwin Kreyszig, Wiley Eastern Limited.

## Page 271

3 Advanced Engineering Mathematics, R. K. Jain and S. R. K. Iyengar, Narosa Publication.

4 Complex Variables and Applications, Brown and Churchill, McGraw -Hill Education.

5 Probability, Statistics and Random Processes, T. Veerarajan, McGraw -Hill Education.

6 Theory and Problems of Fourier Analysis with applications to BVP, Murray Spiegel,

Schaum’s Outline Series.

Term Work:

General Instructions:

1 Batch wise tutorialshave to be conducted. The number of students per batch will be as per

University pattern for practical.

2 Students must be encouraged to write at least 6 class tutorials on the entire syllabus.

3 A group of 4 -6 students should be assigned a self -learning topic. Students should prepare a

presentation/problem solving of 10 -15 minutes. This will be considered as a mini project in

Engineering Mathematics. This project will be graded out of 10 marks dep ending on the

performance of the students.

The distribution of Term Work marks will be as follows:

1 Attendance (Theory and Tutorial) 05 marks

2 Class Tutorials on entire syllabus 10 marks

3 Mini project 10 marks

Assessment :

Internal Assessment Test:

The assessment consists of two class tests of 20 marks each. The 1stclass test (Internal

Assessment I) has to be conducted when approximately 40% of the syllabus is completed. The

2nd class test has to be conducted(Internal Assessment II) when an additional 35% syllabus is

completed. The duration of each test will be for one hour.

End Semester Theory Examination:

1 The question paper will comprise a total of 6 questions, each carrying 20 marks.

2 Out of the 6 questions, 4 questions have to be attempted.

3 Question 1, based on the entire syllabus, will have 4sub -questions of 5 marks each and is

compulsory.

4 Question 2 to Question 6 will have 3 sub -questions, each of 6, 6, and 8 marks, respective ly.

5 Each sub -question in (4) will be from different modules of the syllabus.

6 Weightage of each module will be proportional to the number of lecture hours, as

mentioned in the syllabus.

## Page 272

Course Code Course Name Credits

CSC302 Discrete Structures and Graph Theory 3

Pre-requisite: Basic Mathematics

Course Objectives: The course aims:

1 Cultivate clear thinking and creative problem solving .

2 Thoroughly train in the construction and understanding of mathematical proofs . Exercise

common mathematical arguments and proof strategies.

3 To apply graph theory in solving practical problems.

4 Thoroughly prepare for the mathematical aspects of other Computer Engineering courses

Course Outcomes: On successful completion, of course, learner/student will be able to:

1 Understand the notion of mathematical thinking, mathematical proofs and to apply them

in problem solving.

2 Ability to reason logically.

3 Ability to understand relations, functions, Diagraph and Lattice.

4 Ability to understand and apply concepts of graph theory in solving real world problems.

5 Understand use of groups and codes in Encoding -Decoding

6 Analyze a complex computing problem and apply principles of discrete mathematics to

identify solutions

Module Detailed Contents Hours

1 Logic 6

Propositional Logic, Predicate Logic, Laws of Logic, Quantifiers,

Normal Forms, Inference Theory of Predicate Calculus, Mathematical

Induction.

2 Relations and Functions 6

2.1 Basic concepts of Set Theory

2.2 Relations: Definition, Types of Relations, Representation of Relations,

Closures of Relations, Warshall’s algorithm, Equivalence relations and

Equivalence Classes

2.3 Function s: Definition, Types of functions, Composition of functions,

Identity and Inverse function

3 Posets and Lattice 5

Partial Order Relations, Poset, Hasse Diagram, Chain and Anti chains,

Lattice, Types of Lattice, Sub lattice

4 Counting 6

4.1 Basic Counting Principle -Sum Rule, Product Rule, Inclusion -Exclusion

Principle, Pigeonhole Principle

4.2 Recurrence relations, Solving recurrence relations

5 Algebraic Structures 8

5.1 Algebraic structures with one binary operation: Semi group, Monoid,

Groups, Subgroups, Abelian Group, Cyclic group, Isomorphism

5.2 Algebraic structures with two binary operations: Ring

5.3 Coding Theory : Coding, binary information and error detection,

decoding and error correction

## Page 273

6 Graph Theory 8

Types of graphs, Graph Representation, Sub graphs, Operations on

Graphs, Walk, Path, Circuit, Connected Graphs, Disconnected Graph,

Components, Homomorphism and Isomorphism of Graphs, Euler and

Hamiltonian Graphs, Planar Graph, Cut Set, Cut Vertex, Applications.

Textbooks:

1 Bernad Kolman, Robert Busby, Sharon Cutler Ross, Nadeem -ur-Rehman, “Discrete

Mathematical Structures”, Pearson Education.

2 C. L. Liu “Elements of Discrete Mathematics”, second edition 1985, McGraw -Hill Book

Company. Reprinted 2000.

3 K. H. Rosen, “Discrete Mathematics and applications”, fifth edition 2003, TataMcGraw

Hill Publishing Company

References:

1 Y N Singh, “Discrete Mathematical Structures”, Wiley -India.

2 J. L. Mott, A. Kandel, T. P. Baker, “Discrete Mathematics for Computer Scientists and

Mathematicians”, second edition 1986, Prentice Hall of India.

3 J. P. Trembley, R. Manohar “Discrete Mathematical Structures with Applications to

Computer Science”, Tata McGraw-Hill

4 Seymour Lipschutz, Marc Lars Lipson, “Discrete Mathematics” Schaum‟s Outline,

McGraw -Hill Education.

5 Narsing Deo, “Graph Theory with applications to engineering and computer science”, PHI

Publications.

6 P. K. Bisht, H.S. Dhami, “Discrete Mathematics”, Oxford press.

Assessment :

Internal Assessment Test:

The assessment consists of two class tests of 20 marks each. The 1stclass test (Internal

Assessment I) has to be conducted when approximately 40% ofthe syllabus is completed. The

2nd class test has to be conducted(Internal Assess ment II) when an additional 40% syllabus is

completed. The duration of each test will be for one hour.

End Semester Theory Examination:

1 The question paper will comprise a total of 6 questions, each carrying 20 marks.

2 Out of the 6 questions, 4 questions have to be attempted.

3 Question 1, based on the entire syllabus, will have 4sub -questions of 5 marks each and is

compulsory.

4 Question 2 to Question 6 will have 3 sub -questions, each of 6, 6, and 8 marks, respective ly.

5 Each sub -question in (4) will be from different modules of the syllabus.

6 Weightage of each module will be proportional to the number of lecture hours, as

mentioned in the syllabus.

Useful Links

1 https://www.edx.org/learn/discrete -mathematics

2 https://www.coursera.org/specializations/discrete -mathematics

3 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106/106/106106094/

4 https://swayam.gov.in/nd1_noc19_cs67/preview

## Page 274

Course Code Course Name Credit

CSC303 Data Structure 03

Pre-requisite: C Programming

Course Objectives: The course aims:

1 To understand the need and significance of Data structures as a computer Professional.

2 To teach concept and implementation of linear and Nonlinear data structures.

3 To analyze various data structures and select the appropriate one to solve a specific

real-world problem.

4 To introduce various techniques for representation of the data in the real world.

5 To teach various searching techniques.

Course Outcomes:

1 Students will be able to implement Linear and Non -Linear data structures.

2 Students will be able to handle various operations like searching, insertion, deletion and

traversals on various data structures.

3 Students will be able to explain various data structures, related terminologies and its

types.

4 Students will be able to choose appropriate data structure and apply it to solve

problems in various domains.

5 Students will be able to analyze and Implement appropriate searching techniques for a

given problem.

6 Students will be able to demonstrate the ability to analyze, design, apply and use data

structures to solve engineering problems and evaluate their solutions.

Module Detailed Content Hours

1 Introduction to Data Structures 1

1.1 Introduction to Data Structures, Concept of ADT

2 Stack and Queues 4

2.1 Introduction, ADT of Stack,

Applications of Stack -Well form -ness of Parenthesis

2.2 Introduction of Double Ended Queue, Applications of Queue.

3 Linked List 5

3.1 Introduction of Linked List v/s Array, Types of Linked List, Circular Linked

List, Doubly Linked List, Operations on Doubly Linked List, Stack and

Queue using Singly Linked List, Singly Linked List Application -Polynomial

Representation and Addition.

4 Trees 5

4.1 Introduction, Tree Operations on Binary Search Tree, Applications of Binary

Tree, Huffman Encoding, Search Trees -AVL, rotations in AVL Tree,

operations on AVL Tree, Introduction of B Tree, B+ Tree.

5 Graphs 3

## Page 275

5.1 Introduction of Graph Terminologies , Graph Traversals -Depth First Search

(DFS) and Breadth First Search (BFS), Graph Application -Topological

Sorting.

6 Searching Techniques 2

6.1 Hashing -Concept, Hash Functions, Collision resolution Techniques

Textbooks:

1 Aaron M Tenenbaum, Yedidyah Langsam, Moshe J Augenstein, “Data Structures Using

C”, Pearson Publication.

2 Reema Thareja, “Data Structures using C”, Oxford Press.

3 Richard F. Gilberg and Behrouz A. Forouzan, “Data Structures: A Pseudocode Approach

with C”, 2ndEdition, CENGAGE Learning.

4 Jean Paul Tremblay, P. G. Sorenson, “Introduction to Data Structure and Its Applications”,

McGraw -Hill Higher Education

5 Data Structures Using C, ISRD Group, 2ndEdition, Tata McGraw -Hill.

References:

1 Prof. P. S. Deshpande, Prof. O. G. Kakde, “C and Data Structures”, DreamTech press.

2 E. Balagurusamy, “Data Structure Using C”, Tata McGraw -Hill Education India.

3 Rajesh K Shukla, “Data Structures using C and C++”, Wiley -India

4 GAV PAI, “Data Structures”, Schaum’s Outlines.

5 Robert Kruse, C. L. Tondo, Bruce Leung, “Data Structures and Program Design in C”,

Pearson Edition

Assessment :

Internal Assessment:

Assessment consists of two class tests of 20 marks each. The first class test is to beconducted

when approx. 40% syllabus is completed and second class test when additional40% syllabus is

completed. Duration of each test shall be one hour.

End Semester Theory Examination:

1 Question paper will consist of 6 questions, each carrying 20 marks.

2 The students need to solve a total of 4 questions.

3 Question No.1 will be compulsory and based on the entire syllabus.

4 Remaining question (Q.2 to Q.6) will be selected from all the modules.

Useful Links

1 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106/102/106102064/

2 https://www.coursera.org/specializations/data -structures -algorithms

3 https://www.edx.org/course/data -structures -fundamentals

4 https://swayam.gov.in/nd1_noc19_cs67/preview

## Page 276

Course Code Course Name Credit

CSC304 Digital Logic & Computer Organization and Architecture 3

Pre-requisite: Knowledge on number systems

Course Objective:

1 To have the rough understanding of the basic structure and operation of basic digital

circuits and digital computer.

2 To discuss in detail arithmetic operations in digital system.

3 To discuss generation of control signals and different ways of communication with I/O

devices.

4 To study the hierarchical memory and principles of advanced computing.

Course Outcome:

1 To learn different number systems and basic structure of computer system.

2 To demonstrate the arithmetic algorithms.

3 To understand the basic concepts of digital components and processor organization.

4 To understand the generation of control signals of computer.

5 To demonstrate the memory organization.

6 To describe the concepts of parallel processing and different Buses.

Module Detailed Content Hours

1 Computer Fundamentals 2

1.1 Overview of computer organization and architecture.

1.2 Basic Organization of Computer and Block Level functional Units, Von -

Neumann Model.

2 Data Representation and Arithmetic algorithms 4

2.2 Booths Multiplication Algorithm, Restoring and Non-restoring Division

Algorithm.

2.3 IEEE -754 Floating point Representation.

3 Processor Organization and Architecture 3

3.1 Introduction to Flip Flop

3.3 Register Organization, Instruction Formats, Addressing modes, Instruction

Cycle, Interpretation and sequencing.

4 Control Unit Design 5

4.1 Hardwired Control Unit: State Table Method, Delay Element Methods.

4.2 Microprogrammed Control Unit: Micro Instruction -Format, Sequencing

and execution, Micro operations, Examples of microprograms.

5 Memory Organization 5

5.1 Introduction and characteristics of memory

5.2 Cache Memory: Concept, locality of reference, Design problems based on

mapping techniques, Cache coherence and write policies.

Interleaved and Associative Memory.

6 Principles of Advanced Processor and Buses 6

6.1 Basic Pipelined Data path and control, data dependencies, data hazards,

branch hazards, delayed branch, and branch prediction, Performance

measures -CPI, Speedup, Efficiency, throughput, Amdhal’s law.

6.2 Flynn’s Classification, Introduction to multicore architecture.

6.3 Introduction to buses: ISA, PCI, USB. Bus Contention and Arbitration.

## Page 277

Textbooks:

1 R. P. Jain, “Modern Digital Electronic”, McGraw -Hill Publication, 4thEdition.

2 William Stalling, “Computer Organization and Architecture: Designing and Performance”,

Pearson Publication 10TH Edition.

3 John P Hayes, “Computer Architecture and Organization”, McGraw -Hill Publication, 3RD

Edition.

4 Dr. M. Usha and T. S. Shrikanth, “Computer system Architecture and Organization”,

Wiley publication.

References:

1 Andrew S. Tanenbaum, “Structured Computer Organization”, Pearson Publication.

2 B. Govindarajalu, “Computer Architecture and Organization”, McGraw -Hill Publication.

3 Malvino, “Digital computer Electronics”, McGraw -Hill Publication, 3rdEdition.

4 Smruti Ranjan Sarangi, “Computer Organization and Architecture”, McGraw -Hill

Publication.

Assessment :

Internal Assessment:

Assessment consists of two class tests of 20 marks each. The first class test is to be conducted

when approx. 40% syllabus is completed and second class test when additional 40% syllabus

is completed. Duration of each test shall be one hour.

End Semester Theory Examination:

1 Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 marks.

2 The students need to solve total 4 questions.

3 Question No.1 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus.

4 Remaining question (Q.2 to Q.6) will be selected from all the modules.

Useful Links

1 https://www.classcentral.com/course/swayam -computer -organization -and-architecture -a-

pedagogical -aspect -9824

2 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106/103/106103068/

3 https://www.coursera.org/learn/comparch

4 https://www.edx.org/learn/computer -architecture

## Page 278

Course Code Course Name Credits

CSC305 Computer Graphics 3

Prerequisite: Knowledge of C Programming and Basic Mathematics .

Course Objectives

1 To equip students with the fundamental knowledge and basic technical competence in the

field of Computer Graphics.

2 To emphasize on implementation aspect of Computer Graphics Algorithms.

3 To prepare the student for advance areas and professional avenues in the field of Computer

Graphics

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the students should be able to

1 Describe the basic concepts of Computer Graphics.

2 Demonstrate various algorithms for basic graphics primitives.

3 Apply 2 -D geometric transformations on graphical objects.

4 Use various Clipping algorithms on graphical objects

5 Explore 3 -D geometric transformations, curve representation techniques and projections

methods.

6 Explain visible surface detection techniques and Animation.

Module Detailed Content Hours

1 Introduction and Overview of Graphics System: 01

1.1 Definition and Representative uses of computer graphics.

2 Output Primitives: 05

2.1 Scan conversions of point, line, midpoint algorithm for ellipse

drawing (Mathematical derivation for above algorithms is expected)

2.2 Aliasing, Antialiasing techniques like Pre and post filtering, super

sampling, and pixel phasing).

2.3

3 Two Dimensional Geometric Transformations 3

3.1 Basic transformations: Translation, Scaling, Rotation

3.2 Matrix representation and Homogeneous Coordinates

4 Two -Dimensional Viewing and Clipping 3

4.1 Viewing transformation pipeline and Window to Viewport

coordinate transformation

4.2 Clipping operations: Point clipping, Line

5 Three Dimensional Geometric Transformations, Curves and

Fractal Generation 3

5.1 3D Transformations: Translation, Rotation, Scaling and Reflection

6 Visible Surface Detection and Animation 5

6.1 Visible Surface Detection: Classification of Visible Surface

Detection algorithm, Back Surface detection method, Depth Buffer

method, Area Subdivision method

6.2 Animation: Introduction to Animation, Traditional Animation

Techniques, Principles of Animation, Key framing: Character and

Facial Animation, Deformation, Motion capture

## Page 279

Textbooks:

1 Hearn &Baker, “Computer Graphics C version”, 2nd Edition, Pearson Publication

2 James D. Foley, Andries van Dam, Steven K Feiner, John F. Hughes, “Computer Graphics

Principles and Practice in C”, 2ndEdition, Pearson Publication

3 Samit Bhattacharya, “Computer Graphics”, Oxford Publication

References:

1 D. Rogers, “Procedural Elements for Computer Graphics”, Tata McGraw -Hill

Publications.

2 Zhigang Xiang, Roy Plastock, “Computer Graphics”, Schaum‟s Outlines McGraw -Hill

Education

3 Rajesh K. Maurya, “Computer Graphics”, Wiley India Publication.

4 F.S.Hill, “Computer Graphics using OpenGL”, Third edition, Pearson Publications.

Assessment :

Internal Assessment:

Assessment consists of two class tests of 20 marks each. The first class test is to be conducted

when approx. 40% syllabus is completed and second class test when additional 40% syllabus is

completed. Duration of each test shall be one hour.

End Semester Theory Examination:

1 Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 marks.

2 The students need to solve total 4 questions.

3 Question No.1 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus.

4 Remaining question (Q.2 to Q.6) will be selected from all the modules

Useful Links

1 https://www.classcentral.com/course/interactivegraphics -2067

2 https://swayam.gov.in/nd2_ntr20_ed15/preview

3 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106/106/106106090/

4 https://www.edx.org/course/computer -graphics -2

## Page 280

Lab Code Lab Name Credit

CSL301 Data Structures Lab 1

Prerequisite: C Programming Language.

Lab Objectives:

1 To implement basic data structures such as arrays, linked lists, stacks and queues

2 Solve problem involving graphs, and trees

3 To develop application using data structure algorithms

4 Compute the complexity of various algorithms.

Lab Outcomes:

1 Students will be able to implement linear data structures & be able to handle operations

like insertion, deletion, searching and traversing on them.

2 Students will be able to implement nonlinear data structures & be able to handle operations

like insertion, deletion, searching and traversing on them

3 Students will be able to choose appropriate data structure and apply it in various problems

4 Students will be able to select appropriate searching techniques for given problems.

Suggested Experiments: Students are required to complete at least 6 -7 experiments.

Sr. No. Name of the Experiment

1 Implement Stack ADT using array.

2 Convert an Infix expression to Postfix expression using stack ADT.

3 Evaluate Postfix Expression using Stack ADT.

4 Applications of Stack ADT.

5 Implement Priority Queue ADT using array.

6 Implement Doubly Linked List ADT.

7 Implement Stack / Linear Queue ADT using Linked List.

8 Implement Graph Traversal techniques:) Depth First Search b) Breadth First Search

9 Applications of Binary Search Technique.

Useful Links:

1 www.leetcode.com

2 www.hackerrank.com

3 www.cs.usfca.edu/~galles/visualization/Algorithms.html

4 www.codechef.com

Term Work:

1 Term work should consist of 6-7 experiments.

2 Journal must include at least 1 assignment .

3 The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures that satisfactory performance

of laboratory work and minimum passing marks in term work.

4 Total 25 Marks (Experiments: 15 -marks, Attendance Theory& Practical: 05 -marks,

Assignments: 05 -marks)

Oral & Practical exam

Based on the entire syllabus of CSL301and CSC303

## Page 281

Lab Code Lab Name Credit

CSL302 Digital Logic & Computer Organization and Architecture Lab 1

Prerequisite: C Programming Language.

Lab Objectives:

1 To implement operations of the arithmetic unit using algorithms.

2 Design and simulate different digital circuits.

3 To design memory subsystem including cache memory.

4 To demonstrate CPU and ALU design.

Lab Outcomes:

1 To understand the basics of digital components

2 Design the basic building blocks of a computer: ALU, registers, CPU and memory

3 To recognize the importance of digital systems in computer architecture

4 To implement various algorithms for arithmetic operations.

Suggested Experiments: Students are required to complete at least 6 -7 experiments.

Sr. No. Name of the Experiment

1 To verify the truth table of various logic gates using ICs.

2 To implement Booth’s algorithm.

3 To implement restoring division algorithm.

4 To implement non restoring division algorithm.

5 To implement ALU design.

6 To implement CPU design.

7 To implement memory design.

8 To implement cache memory design.

Note:

1 Any Four experiments from Exp. No. 1 to Exp. No. 7 using hardware.

2 Any Six experiments from Exp. No. 8 to Exp. No. 16 using Virtual Lab, expect Exp. No

10,11 and 12.

3 Exp. No. 10 to Exp. No. 12 using Programming language.

Digital Material:

1 Manual to use Virtual Lab simulator for Computer Organization and Architecture

developed by the Department of CSE, IIT Kharagpur.

2 Link http://cse10 -iitkgp.virtual -labs.ac.in/

Term Work:

1 Term work should consist of 6-7 experiments.

2 Journal must include at least 1 assignments on content of theory and practical of “Digital

Logic &Computer Organization and Architecture”

3 The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures that satisfactory performance

of laboratory work and minimum passing marks in term work.

4 Total 25 Marks (Experiments: 15 -marks, Attend ance Theory& Practical: 05 -marks,

Assignments: 05 -marks)

## Page 282

Course Code Lab Name Credits

CSL303 Computer Graphics Lab 1

Prerequisite: C Programming Language.

Lab Objectives:

1 Understand the need of developing graphics application

2 Learn algorithmic development of graphics primitives like: line, circle, polygon etc.

3 Learn the representation and transformation of graphical images and pictures

Lab Outcomes: At the end of the course, the students should be able to

1 Implement various output and filled area primitive algorithms

2 Apply transformation, projection and clipping algorithms on graphical objects.

3 Perform curve and fractal generation methods.

4 Develop a Graphical application/Animation based on learned concept

Suggested Experiments: Students are required to complete at least 6 -7 experiments.

Sr. No. Name of the Experiment

1 Implement Line Drawing algorithm

2 Implement midpoint Ellipse algorithm.

3 Implement Area Filling Algorithm:

4 Implement Scan line Polygon Filling algorithm.

5 Implement Curve: Bezier for n control points, B Spline (Uniform)(at least one)

6 Implement 2D Transformations:.

7 Program to perform 3D transformation.

8 Program to perform projection of a 3D object on Projection Plane: Parallel and

Perspective.

9 Program to perform Animation (such as Rising Sun, Moving Vehicle, Smileys,

Screen saver etc.)

Term Work:

1 Term work should consist of 6-7 experiments.

2 Journal must include at least 1 assignments

3 Mini Project to perform using C /C++/Java/OpenGL/Blender/ any other tool (2/3 students

per group).Possible Ideas: Animation using multiple objects, Game development, Graphics

editor: Like Paint brush, Text editor etc.

4 The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures that satisfactory performance

of laboratory work and minimum passing marks in term work.

5 Total 25 Marks (Experiments: 10 -marks, Attendance Theory& Practical: 05 -marks,

Assignments: 05 -marks, Mini Project: 5 -marks)

Oral & Practical exam

Based on the above contents and entire syllabus of CSC305 Computer Graphics

## Page 283

Lab Code Lab Name Credits

CSL304 Skill based Lab Course: Object Oriented Programming with Java 2

Prerequisite: Structured Programming Approach

Lab Objectives:

1 To learn the basic concepts of object -oriented programming

2 To study JAVA programming language

3 To study various concepts of JAVA programming like multithreading, exception Handling,

packages, etc.

4 To explain components of GUI based programming.

Lab Outcomes: At the end of the course, the students should be able to

1 To apply fundamental programming constructs.

2 To illustrate the concept of packages, classes and objects.

3 To elaborate the concept of strings, arrays and vectors.

4 To implement the concept of inheritance and interfaces.

5 To implement the concept of exception handling and multithreading.

6 To develop GUI based application.

Module Detailed Content Hours

1 Introduction to Object Oriented Programming 1

1.1 OOP concepts: Objects, class, Encapsulation, Abstraction,

Inheritance, Polymorphism, message passing.

2 Class, Object, Packages and Input/output 1

2.1 Overview of Class, object, data members, member functions

Overview Method overloading

3 Array, String and Vector 2

3.1 Array, Strings, Vectors

4 Inheritance 2

4.1 Types of inheritance, Method overriding,

5 Exception handling and Multithreading 3

5.1 Overview of Exception handling methods

6 GUI programming in JAVA 3

6.1 Applet and applet life cycle, creating applets,

AWT: working with windows, using AWT controls for GUI design

Swing class in JAVA

Introduction to JDBC,

Textbooks:

1 Herbert Schildt, ‘JAVA: The Complete Reference’, Ninth Edition, Oracle Press.

2 E. Balagurusamy, ‘Programming with Java’, McGraw Hill Education.

References:

1 Ivor Horton, “Beginning JAVA‟, Wiley India.

2 DietalandDietal , “Java: How to Program‟, 8th Edition,PHI .

3 “JAVA Programming‟, Black Book, Dreamtech Press.

4 “Learn to Master Java programming‟, Staredu solutions

## Page 284

Digital material:

1 www.nptelvideos.in

2 www.w3schools.com

3 www.tutorialspoint.com

4 https://starcertification.org/Certifications/Certificate/securejava

Suggested Experiments: Students are required to complete at least 6 -7 experiments.

Sr. No. Name of the Experiment

1 Programs on class and objects

2 Program on Packages

3 Program on 2D array, strings functions

4 Program on String Buffer and Vectors

5 Program on Multiple Inheritance

6 Program on abstract class and abstract methods.

7 Program using super and final keyword

8 Program on Exception handling

9 Program on Graphics class

10 Program on applet class

11 Program to create GUI application

*Mini Project based on the content of the syllabus(Group of 2 -3 students)

Term Work:

1 Term work should consist of 6-7 experiments.

2 Journal must include at least 1 assignments

3 Mini Project based on the content of the syllabus(Group of 2 -3 students)

4 The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures that satisfactory performance

of laboratory work and minimum passing marks in term work.

5 Total 50 -Marks (Experiments: 15 -marks, Attendance: 05 -marks, Assignments: 05 -marks,

Mini Project: 20 -marks, MCQ as a part of lab assignments: 5 -marks)

Oral & Practical exam

Based on the entire syllabus of CSL 304: Skill based Lab Course: Object Oriented

Programming with Java

## Page 285

Course code Course Name Credits

CSM301 Mini Project A 02

Objectives

1 To acquaint with the process of identifying the needs and converting it into the problem.

2 To familiarize the process of solving the problem in a group.

3 To acquaint with the process of applying basic engineering fundamentals to attempt

solutions to the problems.

4 To inculcate the process of self -learning and research.

Outcome: Learner will be able to…

1 Identify problems based on societal /research needs.

2 Apply Knowledge and skill to solve societal problems in a group.

3 Develop interpersonal skills to work as member of a group or leader.

4 Draw the proper inferences from available results through theoretical/

experimental/simulations.

5 Analyze the impact of solutions in societal and environmental context for sustainab le

development.

6 Use standard norms of engineering practices

7 Excel in written and oral communication.

8 Demonstrate capabilities of self -learning in a group, which leads to lifelong learning.

9 Demonstrate project management principles during project work.

Guidelines for Mini Project

1 Students shall form a group of 3 to 4 students, while forming a group shall not be allowed

less than three or more than four students, as it is a group activity.

2 Students should do survey and identify needs, which shall be converted into problem

statement for mini project in consultation with faculty super visor/head of

department/internal committee of faculties.

3 Students shall submit implementation plan in the form of Gantt/PERT/CPM chart, which

will cover weekly activity of mini project.

4 A logbook to be prepared by each group, wherein group can record weekly work

progress, guide/supervisor can verify and record notes/comments.

5 Faculty supervisor may give inputs to students during mini project activity; however,

focus shall be on self -learning.

6 Students in a group shall understand problem effectively, propose multiple solution and

select best possible solution in consultation with guide/ supervisor.

7 Students shall convert the best solution into working model using various com ponents of

their domain areas and demonstrate.

8 The solution to be validated with proper justification and report to be compiled in

standard format of University of Mumbai.

9 With the focus on the self -learning, innovation, addressing societal problems and

entrepreneurship quality development within the students through the Mini Projects, it is

preferable that a single project of appropriate level and quality to be carried out in two

semesters by all the groups of the students. i.e. Mini Project 1 in semester III and IV.

Similarly, Mini Project 2 in semesters V and VI.

## Page 286

10 However, based on the individual students or group capability, with the mentor’s

recommendations, if the p roposed Mini Project adhering to the qualitative aspects

mentioned above gets completed in odd semester, then that group can be allowed to work

on the extension of the Mini Project with suitable improvements/modifications or a

completely new project idea i n even semester. This policy can be adopted on case by case

basis.

Term Work

The review/ progress monitoring committee shall be constituted by head of departments of each

institute. The progress of mini project to be evaluated on continuous basis, minimum two

reviews in each semester.

In continuous assessment focus shall also be on each individual student, assessment based on

individual’s contribution in group activity, their understanding and response to questions.

Distribution of Term work mark s for both semesters shall be as below:

Marks

1 Marks awarded by guide/supervisor based on logbook 10

2 Marks awarded by review committee 10

3 Quality of Project report 05

Review / progress monitoring committee may consider following points for

assessment based on either one year or half year project as mentioned in

general guidelines

One-year project:

1 In first semester entire theoretical solution shall be ready, including components/system

selection and cost analysis. Two reviews will be conducted based on presentation given by

students group.

• First shall be for finalisation of problem

• Second shall be on finalisation of proposed solution of problem.

2 In second semester expected work shall be procurement of component’s/systems, building

of working prototype, testing and validation of results based on work completed in an

earlier semester.

• First review is based on readiness of building working prototype to be conducted.

• Second review shall be ba sed on poster presentation cum demonstration of working

model in last month of the said semester.

Half -year project:

1 In this case in one semester students’ group shall complete project in all aspects including,

• Identification of need/problem

• Proposed final solution

• Procurement of components/systems

• Building prototype and testing

2 Two reviews will be conducted for continuous assessment,

• First shall be for finalisation of problem and proposed solution

• Second shall be for implementation and testing of solution.

Assessment criteria of Mini Project.

Mini Project shall be assessed based on following criteria;

1 Quality of survey/ need identification

2 Clarity of Problem definition based on need.

## Page 287

3 Innovativeness in solutions

4 Feasibility of proposed problem solutions and selection of best solution

5 Cost effectiveness

6 Societal impact

7 Innovativeness

8 Cost effectiveness and Societal impact

9 Full functioning of working model as per stated requirements

10 Effective use of skill sets

11 Effective use of standard engineering norms

12 Contribution of an individual’s as member or leader

13 Clarity in written and oral communication

In one year, project , first semester evaluation may be based on first six criteria’s and

remaining may be used for second semester evaluation of performance of students in mini

project.

In case of half year project all criteria’s in generic may be considered for evaluation of

performance of students in mini project.

Guidelines for Assessment of Mini Project Practical/Oral Examination:

1 Report should be prepared as per the guidelines issued by the University of Mumbai.

2 Mini Project shall be assessed through a presentation and demonstration of working model

by the student project group to a panel of Internal and External Examiners pref erably from

industry or research organisations having experience of more than five years approved by

head of Institution.

3 Students shall be motivated to publish a paper based on the work in Conferences/students

competitions.

Mini Project shall be assessed based on following points;

1 Quality of problem and Clarity

2 Innovativeness in solutions

3 Cost effectiveness and Societal impact

4 Full functioning of working model as per stated requirements

5 Effective use of skill sets

6 Effective use of standard engineering norms

7 Contribution of an individual’s as member or leader

8 Clarity in written and oral communication

## Page 288

AC -23/02/2021

Item No. – 6.11-5

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI

Bachelor of Engineering

in

Mechanical Engineering

Direct Second Year (Sem. III) Admitted Students for the

current Academic Year 2020 -21(Only)

(REV - 2019 ‘C’ Scheme) from Academic Year 2019 – 20

Under

FACULTY OF

SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY

(As per AICTE guidelines with effect from the academic year 2019 –2020)

## Page 289

Program Structure for Second Year Engineering

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI

(With Effect from 2020 -2021 )

Semester III

Course Code Course Name Teaching Scheme

(Contact Hours) Credits Assigned

Theory Pract

. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total

MEC301 Engineering

Mathematics -III 3 -- 1 3 -- 1 4

MEC302 Strength of Materials 3 -- 3 -- 3

MEC303 Production Processes 4 -- -- 4 -- -- 4

MEC304 Materials and

Metallurgy 3 -- -- 3 -- -- 3

MEC305 Thermodynamics 3 -- -- 3 -- -- 3

MEL301 Materials Testing -- 2 -- -- 1 -- 1

MEL302 Machine Shop

Practice -- 4 -- -- 2 -- 2

MESBL301 CAD –Modeling -- 4 -- -- 2 -- 2

MEPBL301 Mini Project – 1A -- 4$ -- -- 2 -- 2

Total 16 14 1 16 07 1 24

Course Code Course Name Examination Scheme

Theory

Term

Work Pract/

Oral Total Internal

Assessment End

Sem.

Exam Exam.

Duratio

n

(in Hrs) Test1 Test2 Avg

.

MEC301 Engineering

Mathematics -III 20 20 20 80 3 25 -- 125

MEC302 Strength of Materials 20 20 20 80 3 -- -- 100

MEC303 Production Processes 20 20 20 80 3 -- -- 100

MEC304 Materials and

Metallurgy 20 20 20 80 3 -- -- 100

MEC305 Thermodynamics 20 20 20 80 3 -- -- 100

MEL301 Materials Testing -- -- -- -- -- 25 25 50

MEL302 Machine Shop

Practice -- -- -- -- -- 50 -- 50

MESBL301 CAD – Modeling -- -- -- -- -- 25 25 50

MEPBL301 Mini Project – 1A -- -- -- -- -- 25 25 50

Total -- -- 100 400 -- 150 75 725

$ indicates work load of Learner (Not Faculty), for Mini Project

SBL – Skill Based Laboratory

PBL – Project Based Learning

## Page 290

Course Code Course Name Credits

MEC301 Engineering Mathematics -III 4

Pre-requisite: Engineering Mathematics -I, Engineering Mathematics -II,

Objectives: The course is aimed

1. To familiarize with the Laplace Transform, Inverse Laplace Transform of various functions, its applications.

2. To acquaint with the concept of Fourier Series, its complex form and enhance the problem solving skills

3. To familiarize with the concept of complex variables, C -R equations with applications.

4. To study the application of the knowledge of matrices and numerical methods in complex engineering

problems.

Outcomes: On successful completion of course learner/student will be able to:

1. Apply the concep t of Laplace transform to solve the real integrals in engineering problems.

2. Apply the concept of inverse Laplace transform of various functions in engineering problems.

3. Expand the periodic function by using Fourier series for real life problems and comple x engineering problems.

4. Find orthogonal trajectories and analytic function by using basic concepts of complex variable theory.

5. Apply Matrix algebra to solve the engineering problems.

6. Solve Partial differential equations by applying numerical solution and analytical methods for one dimensional

heat and wave equations

Module Detailed Contents Hrs.

01 Module: Laplace Transform

1.1 Definition of Laplace transform, Condition of Existence of Laplace transform,

1.2 Laplace Transform (L) of Standard Functions like 𝑒𝑎𝑡, 𝑠𝑖𝑛(𝑎𝑡), 𝑐𝑜𝑠(𝑎𝑡),

𝑠𝑖𝑛ℎ(𝑎𝑡), 𝑐𝑜𝑠ℎ(𝑎𝑡) and 𝑡𝑛 ,𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒 𝑛≥0.

1.3 Properties of Laplace Transform: Linearity, First Shifting theorem, Second

Shifting Theorem, chang e of scale Property, multiplication by t, Division by t,

Laplace Transform of derivatives and integrals (Properties without proof).

1.4 Evaluation of integrals by using Laplace Transformation.

Self-learning topics: Heaviside’s Unit Step function, Laplace Tra nsform. of

Periodic functions, Dirac Delta Function. 07

02 Module: Inverse Laplace Transform

2.1 Inverse Laplace Transform, Linearity property, use of standard formulae to

find inverse Laplace Transform, finding Inverse Laplace transform using

derivative

2.2 Partial fractions method & first shift property to find inverse Laplace

transform.

2.3 Inverse Laplace transform using Convolution theorem (without proof)

Self-learning Topics: Applications to solve initial and boundary value problems

involving ordinary differential equations. 06

03 Module: Fourier Series:

3.1 Dirichlet’s conditions, Definition of Fourier series and Parseval’s Identity

(without proof)

3.2 Fourier series of periodic function with period 2π and 2l,

3.3 Fourier series of even and odd functions

3.4 Half range Sine and Cosine Series.

Self-learning Topics: Complex form of Fourier Series, orthogonal and

orthono rmal set of functions, Fourier Transform. 07

04 Module: Complex Variables:

4.1 Function f(z) of complex variable, limit, continuity and differentiability of f(z),

Analytic function, necessary and sufficient conditions for f(z) to be analytic (without 07

## Page 291

proof),

4.2 Cauchy -Riemann equations in cartesian coordinates (without proof)

4.3 Milne -Thomson method to determine analytic function f(z) when real part (u) or

Imaginary part (v) or its combination (u+v or u -v) is given.

4.4 Harmonic function, Harmonic co njugate and orthogonal trajectories

Self-learning Topics: Conformal mapping, linear, bilinear mapping, cross ratio, fixed

points and standard transformations

05 Module: Matrices:

5.1 Characteristic equation, Eigen values and Eigen vectors, Properties of Eigen

values and Eigen vectors. ( No theorems/ proof )

5.2 Cayley -Hamilton theorem (without proof): Application to find the inverse

of the given square matrix and t o determine the given higher degree

polynomial matrix.

5.3 Functions of square matrix

5.4 Similarity of matrices, Diagonalization of matrices

Self-learning Topics: Verification of Cayley Hamilton theorem, Minimal

polynomial and Derogatory matrix & Quadratic Forms (Congruent transformation

& Orthogonal Reduction) 06

06 Module: Numerical methods for PDE

6.1 Introduction of Partial Differential equations, method of separation of

variables, Vibrations of string, Analytical method for one dimensional heat and

wave equations. (only problems)

6.2 Crank Nicholson method

6.3 Bender Schmidt method

Self-learning Topics: Analytical methods of solving two and three dimensional

probl ems. 06

Term Work:

General Instructions:

1. Students must be encouraged to write at least 6 class tutorials on entire syllabus.

2. A group of 4 -6 students should be assigned a self -learning topic. Students should prepare a

presentation/problem solving of 10 -15 minutes. This should be considered as mini project in

Engineering Mathematics. This project should be graded for 10 marks depe nding on the

performance of the students.

The distribution of Term Work marks will be as follows –

1. Attendance (Theory and Tutorial) 05 marks

2. Class Tutorials on entire syllabus 10 marks

3. Mini project 10 marks

Assessment :

Internal Assessment Test:

Assessment consists of two class tests of 20 marks each. The first class test (Internal Assessment I) is to

be conducted when approx. 40% syllabus is completed and second class test (Internal Assessment II)

when additional 35% syllabus is completed. Duration of each test shall be one hour.

End Semester Theory Examination:

1. Question paper will comprise of total 06 questions, each carrying 20 marks.

2. Total 04 questions need to be solved.

3. Question No: 01 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein 4 sub -questions of 5

marks each will be asked.

4. Remaining questions will be randomly selected from all the modules.

## Page 292

5. Weightage of each module will be proportional to number of respective lecture hours as mentioned in

the syllabus.

References:

1. Engineering Mathematics, Dr. B. S. Grewal, Khanna Publication

2. Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Erwin Kreyszig, Wiley Eastern Limited,

3. Advanced Engineering Mathematics, R. K. Jain and S.R.K. Iyengar, Narosa pub lication

4. Advanced Engineering Mathematics, H.K. Das, S. Chand Publication

5. Higher Engineering Mathematics B.V. Ramana, McGraw Hill Education

6. Complex Variables and Applications, Brown and Churchill, McGraw -Hill education,

7. Text book of Matrices, Shanti Narayan and P K Mittal, S. Chand Publication

8. Laplace transforms, Murray R. Spiegel, Schaum’s Outline Series

Links for online NPTEL/SWAYAM courses:

1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/111/104/111104085/

2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/111/106/111106139/

*****************

## Page 293

Course Code Course Name Credits

MEC30 2 Strength of Materials 03

Objectives:

1. To understand the nature of stresses developed in simple geometries such as bars, cantilevers,

beams, shafts, cylinders and spheres subjected to various types of simple loads.

2. To calculate the elastic deformation occurring in various simple geometries for different types of

Loading.

3. To study distribution of various stresses in the mechanical elements under different types of loads.

Outcomes: Learner will be able to…

1. Demonstrate fundamental knowledge about various types of loading and stresses induced.

2. Draw the SFD and BMD for different types of loads and support conditions.

3. Analyse the bending and shear stresses induced in beam.

4. Analyse the deflection in beams and stresses in shaft.

5. Analyse the stresses and deflection in beams and Estimate the strain energy in mechanical elements.

6. Analyse buckling phenomenon in columns.

Module

Detailed Contents Hrs

1. Uni axial, biaxial and tri axial stresses. Principal stresses and Principal planes -

Mohr’s circle. 3

2. Shear Force and Bending Moment in Beams:

Concept & Examples of SFD & BMD for uniformly varying loads, couple and

their combinations. 5

3. Deflection of B eams:

Deflection of a beam: Double integration method, Maxwell’s reciprocal

theorems for computation of slopes and deflection in beams for point and

distributed loads. 6

4. Thin Cylindrical and Spherical Shells:

Stresses and deformation in Thin Cylindrical and Spherical Shells subjected to

internal pressure

Strain Energy: Strain energy stored in the member due to gradual, sudden and

impact loads, Strain energy due to bending and torsion. 4

5. Columns:

Buckling lo ad, Types of end conditions for column, Euler’s column theory

and its limitations and Rankine formula. 2

Assessment:

Internal Assessment for 20 marks:

Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests

First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remaining contents

(approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in Test I)

End Semester Examination:

Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of respective lecture

hours mentioned in the curric ulum.

## Page 294

1. Question paper will comprise of total six questions , each carrying 20 marks

2. Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum

3. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 then

part (b) will be from any module other than module 3)

4. Only Four questions need to be solved .

References:

1. Strength of Materials by Ryder, Macmillan

2. Mechanics of Materials by James M. Gere and Barry J. Goodno, Cengage Learning, 6thEd, 2009

3. Mechanics of Materials by Gere and Timoshenko, CBS 2nd Edition

4. Elements of Strength of Materials by Timoshenko and Youngs, Affiliated East -West Press

5. Mechanics of Materials byBeer, Jhonston, DEwolf and Mazurek, TMHPvt Ltd., New Delhi

6. Mechanics of Structures by S.B.Ju nnarkar, Charotar Publication

7. Mechanics of Materials by S.S.Ratan, Tata McGraw Hill Pvt. Ltd

8. Introduction to Solid Mechanics by Shames, PHI

9. Strength of Materials by S. Ramamrutham, Dhanpat Rai Pvt. Ltd

10. Strength of Materials by W.Nash, Schaum’s Outline Series, McGraw Hill Publication, Special Indian

Edition

11. Strength of Materials by R. Subramanian, Oxford University Press, Third Edition 2016

Links for online NPTEL/SWAYAM courses:

1. http://www.nptelvideos.in/2012/11/strength -of-materials -prof.html

2. https://swayam.gov.in/nd1_noc20_ce34

## Page 295

Course Code Course Name Credits

MEC303 Production Processes 04

Objectives:

1. To familiarize with the various production processes used on shop floors

2. To study appropriate production processes for a specific application.

3. To introduce to the learner various machine tools used for manufacturing

4. To familiarize with principl e and working of non -traditional manufacturing

5. To introduce to them the Intelligent manufacturing in the context of Industry 4.0

Outcomes : Learner will be able to ….

1. Demonstrate an understanding of casting process

2. Illustrate principles of forming processes.

3. Demonstrate applications of various types of welding processes.

4. Differentiate chip forming processes such as turning, milling, drilling, etc.

5. Illustrate the concept of producing polymer components and ceramic components.

6. Illustrate principles and working of non -traditional manufacturing

7. Understand the manufacturing technologies enabling Industry 4.0

Module Details Hrs.

1 Introduction to Production Processes and Metal Casting:

Classification of Production Processes and applications areas

Machine moulding, Types of riser, types of gates, solidification

Special casting processes : CO2 and shell moulding, Investment casting, Die

casting, Vacuum casting, Inspection 4

2 Joining Processes:

Classification of various joining processes; Applica bility, advantages and limitations

of Adhesive bonding, Mechanical Fastening; Welding and allied processes, Hybrid

joining processes. Classification and Working of various welding methods:

Chemical, Radiant, Solid State, Welding Joints, Welding Positions a nd their

remedies. 5

3 Forming processes:

Introduction and classification of metalworking processes, hot and cold working

processes. Defects in rolled and forged components,

Classification and analysis of wire and tube drawing processes.

Sheet metal working processes: Classification of Sheet metal operations 3

4 Machine Tools and Machining Processes:

Grinding Machines and selection of grinding wheel (Dressing and Truing),

Broaching machines, Lapping/Honing machines (Super Finishing Operations) and

planning Machines.

Gear Manufacturing Gear milling, standard cutters and limitations,

Tool Engineering Taylor’s tool life equation 3

5 Polymer Processing: Polymer Moulding Techniques for thermoplastic and

thermosetting plastics. Applications of Plastics in engineering field.

Powder Metallurgy: Introduction to PM, Powder making processes, Steps in PM.

Compaction and Sintering processes. Secondary and finishing operations in PM

Intelligent manufacturing in the context of Industry 4.0,

Cyber -physical systems (CPS) 5

## Page 296

Internet of Things (IoT) enable d manufacturing

Cloud Manufacturing

Assessment:

Internal Assessment for 20 marks: Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests First test based on

approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remaining contents (approximately 40% but

excluding contents covered in Test I) . Duration of each test shall be one hour.

End Semester Examin ation: Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to

number of respective lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum.

1. Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks

2. Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum

3. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 then part

(b) will be from any module other than module 3)

4. Only Four questions need to be solved.

References:

1. Welding technology by O P Khanna

2. Foundry technology by O P Khanna

3. Elements of workshop technology. Vol. 1 & II by S K HajraChoudhury

4. Manufacturing Science by Ghosh and Malik

5. Rapid Manufacturing –An Industrial revolution for the digital age by N.Hopkinson, R.J.M.Hauge, P

M, Dickens, Wiley

6. Rapid Manufacturing by Pham D T and Dimov, Springer Verlag

7. Production Technology by WAJ Chapman Vol I, II, III

8. Production Technology by P C Sharma.

9. Production Technology by Raghuvanshi.

10. Industry 4.0: The Industrial Internet of Things by Alasdair Gilchrist, 2016, Apress.

11. Cyber -Physical Systems: From Theory to Practice by Danda B. Rawat, Joel Rodrigues, Ivan

Stojmenovic, 2015, C.R.C. Press.

12. Optimization of Manufacturing Systems using Internet of Things by Yingfeng Zhang, Fei Tao, 2017,

Academic Press (AP), Elsevier.

Links for online NPTEL/SWAYAM courses:

1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/107/112107219/

2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/107/112107215/

3. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/107/112107084/

4. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/107/112107144/

5. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/107/112107078/

6. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/ 112/107/112107239/

7. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/104/112104195/

8. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/107/112107219/

9. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/107/112107144/

10. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/107/112107213/

11. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/107/112107090/

12. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/113/106/113106087/

13. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/103/112103263/

14. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/107/112107239/

15. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/ 112/106/112106153/

16. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/107/112107250/

17. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/107/112107144/

18. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/107/112107239/

19. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/107/112107219/

## Page 297

Course Code Course Name Credits

MEC30 4 Materials and Metallurgy 03

Objectives:

1. To familiarize the structure -property correlation in materials

2. To acquaint with the processing dependency on the performance of the various materials

3. To study the role of alloying in the development of steels.

4. To familiarize with the advances in materials development

Outcomes: Learner w ill be able to ….

1. Identify the various classes of materials and comprehend their properties

2. Apply phase diagram concepts to engineering applications

3. Apply particular heat treatment for required property development

4. Identify the probable mode of failure in materials and suggest measures to prevent them

5. Choose or develop new materials for better performance

6. Decide an appropriate method to evaluate different c omponents in service

Module Contents Hrs.

1 Introduction to engineering materials – significance of structure property

correlations in all classes of engineering materials

Concepts of crystals - Crystalline and Non -crystalline, Crystal systems,

Crystallographic planes and directions,

Crystal Defects: Crystal Imperfections -definition, classification and

significance of imperfections -point defects, line defects, Surface defects and

volume defects.

Importance of dislocations in deformation and its mechanisms. Critical

Resolved shear stress, Slip systems and deformability of FCC, BCC and HCP

lattice systems.

Cold Working and Recrystallization annealing: Definition, effects and

mechanism of cold wor k, Need for Recrystallization Annealing, the stages of

recrystallization annealing and factors affecting it 5

2 Mechanism of Crystallization - Nucleation -Homogeneous and

Heterogeneous Nucleation and Growth. Solidification of metals and -alloys –

Cooling curves

Classification of Alloys based on phases and phase diagram -Binary alloy

phase diagram – Isomorphous, Eutectics type I and II, Peritectic

Microstructural changes of hypo and hyper -eutectoid steel - TTT and CCT

diagram -Hardenability and its tests, Graphitization in cast irons. 3

3 Heat treatment: Overview – Objectives – Thorough treatments:

austempering and martempering – microstructure changes

Surface hardening processes: Carbonitriding, induction and flame

hardening, Laser and Electron beam hardening – principles and case depths

Alloy steels - Maraging steels and Ausformed steels 3

4 Strengthening mechanisms in materials

Fracture of metals – Ductile Fracture, Brittle Fracture, Ductile to Brittle

Transition Temperature (DBTT), Griffith’s criteria and Orowan’s

modification

Fatigue – Endurance limit of ferrous and non -ferrous metals -Fatigue test, S -

N curves, factors affecting fatigue, structural changes accompanying fatigue; 4

## Page 298

Creep – mechanism of creep – stages of creep and creep test, creep resistant

materials

5 Basic concepts of composites, Processing of composites, advantages over

metallic materials, various types of composites

Introduction, Concepts, synthesis of nanomaterials, examples, and Nano

composites,

Classification of Smart materials, Shape Memory All oys 2

6 Processing - of ceramics and composites through Injection Moulding

Non-destructive Testing of Materials -ultrasonic testing, radiographic

methods, magnetic particle testing 3

Assessment:

Internal Assessment for 20 marks: Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests First test based on

approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remaining contents (approximately 40% but

excluding contents covered in Test I) . Duration of each test shall be one hour.

End Semester Examin ation: Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to

number of respective lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum.

1. Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks

2. Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum

3. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 then part

(b) will be from any module other than module 3)

4. Only Four questions need to be solved.

Textbooks:

1. Callister’s Materials Science and Engineering, 2nd edition by R.Balasubramanium

Wiley India Pvt. Ltd

References:

1. Introduction to Materials Science for Engineers; 8th Edition by James F. Shackelford Pearson

2. Introduction to Physical Metallurgy ,2nd edition by Sidney Avner, TataMcGrawHill

3. Mechanical Metallurgy, 3rd edition by GH Dieter,TataMcGraw Hill

4. Fundamentals of Materials Science and Engineering: An Integrated Approach, 5th Edition by William

D. Callister, Jr., David G. Rethwisch, Wiley & Sons.

5. Materials Science and Engineering,5th edition by V.Raghavan, Prentice Hall India

Links for online NPTEL/SWAYAM courses:

1. https://nptel.ac.in/noc/courses/noc20/SEM1/noc20 -mm09/

2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/113/102/113102080/

3. https://nptel.ac.in/noc/courses/noc20/SEM1/noc20 -mm09/

4. https://nptel.ac.in/content/syllabus_pdf/113104074.pdf

5. https://nptel.ac.in/content/storage2/courses /112108150/pdf/PPTs/MTS_09_m.pdf

6. https://nptel.ac.in/content/storage2/courses/112108150/pdf/PPTs/MTS_08_m.pdf

7. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/104/112104229/

8. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/118/104/118104008/

9. https://nptel.ac.in/content/storage2/courses/112104173/Mod_1_smart_mat_lec_6.pdf https://nptel.a c.i

n/courses/112/104/112104229/

10. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/118/104/118104008/

11. https://nptel.ac.in/content/storage2/courses/112104173/Mod_1_smart_mat_lec_6.pdf

## Page 299

Course Code Course Name Credits

MEC30 5 Thermodynamics 03

Objectives:

1. To familiarize the concepts of Energy in general and Heat and Work inparticular

2. To study the fundamentals of quantification and grade ofenergy

3. To study the effect of energy transfer on properties of substances in the form of charts anddiagrams

4. To familiarize the application of the concepts of thermodynamics in vapour power, gas power cycles,

compr essible fluid flow

Outcomes: Learners will be able to….

1. Demonstrate application of the laws of thermodynamics to a wide range ofsystems.

2. Compute heat and work interactions in thermodynamicsystems

3. Demonstrate the interrelations between thermodynamic functio ns to solve practicalproblems.

4. Compute thermodynamicinteractions using the steam table and Mollier chart

5. Compute efficiencies of heat engines, power cycles .

6. Apply the fundamentals of compressible fluid flow to the relevant systems

Module Detailed contents Hrs.

1 Basic Concepts:

Thermodynamics system and types, Macroscopic and Microscopic approach,

Thermodynamic properties of the system, state, path, process and cycle, Point and

Path functions, Quasi -static process & Equilibrium,

Perpetual Motion Machine of the First Kind, Application of first law to non -flow

systems (Ideal gas processes with numerical) and flow systems, throttling device.

Significance of –VdP work, Relation between flow and non -flow work

3

2 Second Law of Thermodynamics:

Perpetual Motion Machine of the second kind, Carnot cycle, Carnot theorem.

Entropy:

Entropy is property of a system, Temperature -Entropy diagram, Increase of entropy

principle, T ds relations, Entropy change During a process. 3

3 Availability:

High grade and low -grade energy, Available and Unavailable energy, Dead State,

Useful work, Irreversibility, Availability of closed system& steady flow process,

Helmholtz & Gibbs function

Thermodynamic Relations:

Maxwell relations, Clausis -Clapeyron Equa tion, Mayer relation, Joule -Thomson coefficient

(Only Theory) 3

4 Properties of Pure Substance:

Vapour Power cycle:

Principal components of a simple steam power plant, Carnot cycle and its limitations as a

vapour cycle, Rankine cycle with different turbine inlet conditions, Mean temperature of

heat addition, Reheat Rankine Cycle, Revision on steam table and Mollier chart. 4

5 Gas Power cycles:

Comparison of Otto and Diesel cycle for same compression ratio, Brayton Cycle.

Sterling Cycle, Ericsson Cycle, Lenoir cycle, and Atkinson cycle (Only theory). 3

6 Compressible Fluid flow:

Propagation of sound waves through compressible fluids, Sonic velocity and Mach number;

Stagnation properties, Application of continuity, momentum and energy equations for

steady -state conditions; Steady flow through the nozzle, Isentropic flow through duc ts of 4

## Page 300

varying cross -sectional area, Effect of varying back pressure on nozzle performance, Critical

pressure ratio

Assessment:

Internal Assessment for 20 marks: Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests First test based on

approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remaining contents (approximately 40% but

excluding contents covered in Test I) . Duration of each test shall be one hour.

End Semester Examin ation: Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to

number of respective lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum.

1. Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks

2. Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum

3. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 then part

(b) will be from any module other than module 3)

4. Only Four questions need to be solved.

References:

1. Thermodynamics: An Engineering Approach by Yunus A. Cengel and Michael A. Boles, 9thedition,

TMH

2. Basic Engineering Thermodynamics by Rayner Joel, 5thedition, Longman Publishers

3. Engineering Thermodynamics by P Chattopadhyay, 2ndedition, Oxford University Pr essIndia

4. Thermodynamics by P K Nag, 6thEdition,TMH

5. Thermodynamics by Onkar Singh, 4th Edition New AgeInternational

6. Thermodynamics by C P Arora, 1stEdition TMH

7. Thermal Engineering By Ajoy Kumar, G. N. Sah, 2nd Edition, Narosa Publishing house

8. Engineering Thermodynamics Through Examples by Y V C Rao, Universities Press (India) Pvt Ltd

9. Fundamentals of Thermodynamics by Moran &Shapiro, Eighth Edition, Wiley

10. Fundamentals of Classical Thermodynamics by Van Wylen G.H. & Sonntag R.E., 9th Edition

JohnWiley& Sons

11. Thermodynamics by W.C. Reynolds, McGraw -Hill &Co

12. Thermodynamics by J P Holman, 4th Edition McGraw -Hill & Co

Links for online NPTEL/SWAYAM courses:

1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/105/112105266/

2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/103/112103275/

3. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/105/ 112105220/

4. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/101/104/101104063/

## Page 301

Course Code Course Name Credits

MEL301 Materials Testing 01

Objectives:

1. To familiarize with the use of metallurgical microscope for study of metals

2. To study the microstructures of ferrous (steel and cast iron) metals

3. To acquaint with the material testing by performing experiment related to Hardness , Fatigue,

Tension, Torsion, Impact and Flexural Test

Outcomes: Learner will be able to…

1. Prepare metallic samples for studying its microstructure following the appropriate procedure .

2. Identify effects of heat treatment on microstructure of medium carbon steel and hardenability of steel

using Jominy end Quench test

3. Perform Fatigue Test and draw S -N curve

4. Perform Tension test to Analyze the stress - strain behaviour of materials

5. Measure torsional strength, hardness and impact resistanceof the material

6. Perform flexural test with central and three point loading conditions

a)List of Experiments: Total four experiments are required to be performed.

Experiment

Number Detailed Contents Laboratory

Sessions

(Hrs.)

1 Comparison of Microstructures and hardness before and

after Annealing, Normalizing and Hardening in medium

carbon steel 2

2 Study of tempering characteristics of hardened steel 2

3 Determination of hardenability of steel using Jominy end

Quench Test (U sing different hardness testers to measure

the Hardness) 2

4 Fatigue test – to determine number of cycles to failure of

a given material at a given stress 2

b) Assignments : At least one problem on each of the following topics:

1. Simple stress strain

2. SFD and BMD

3. Stresses in beams

4. Torsion and deflection.

5. Thin cylinder and strain energy

6. Buckling of Columns

Note: Preferably, the assignments shall be based on live problems. Project Based Learning may be

incorporated by judiciously reducing number of assignments.

## Page 302

Assessment:

Term Work: Including Part a and b both

Distribution of marks for Term Work shall be as follows:

Part a: 1 0 marks.

Part b: 10 Marks

Attendance: 05 marks.

End Semester Practical/Oral Examination:

Pair of Internal and External Examiner should conduct practical examination followed by Oral

## Page 303

Course Code Course Name Credits

MEL302 Machine Shop Practice 02

Objectives:

1. To familiarize with basic machiningprocesses.

2. To familiarize various machining operations and machineprotocols

Outcomes: Learner will be able to…

1. Know the specifications, controls and safety measures related to machines and machining

operations.

2. Use the machines for making various engineering jobs.

3. Perform various machining operations

4. Perform Tool Grinding

5. Perform welding operations

Module Details Hrs

1 One composite job consisting minimum four parts employing operations

performed of various machine tools. 40

2 Tool Grinding – To know basic tool Nomenclature 04

3 One Job on Welding – Application of Metal Arc Welding 04

Assessment :

Term Work:

1. Composite job mentionedabove and the Welding Job

2. Complete Work -Shop Book giving details of drawing of the job and timesheet

The distribution of marks for Term work shall be as follows:

1. Job Work with completeworkshopbook ……. 40 marks

2. Attendance ……. 10marks

## Page 304

Course Code Course Name Credits

MESBL 301 Skill Based Lab: CAD – Modeling 02

Prerequisites: Engineering Drawing

Objectives:

1. To impart the 3D modeling skills for development of 3D models of basic engineering components .

2. To introduce Product data exchange among CAD systems.

3. To familiarize with production drawings with important features like GD &T, surface finish, heat

treatments etc.

Outcomes: Learner will be able to …

1. Illustrate basic understanding of types of CAD model creation.

2. Visualize and prepare 2D modeling of a given object using modeling software.

3. Build solid model of a given object using 3D modeling software.

4. Visualize and develop the surface model of a given object using modeling software.

5. Generate assembly models of given objects using assembly tools of a modeling software

6. Perform product data exchange among CAD systems.

Sr. No. Exercises Hrs.

1 CAD Introduction

CAD models Creation, Types and uses of models from different

perspectives. Parametric modeling.

10

2 2D Modeling

Geometric modeling of an Engineering component, demonstrating skills in

sketching commands of creation (line, arc, circle etc.) modification (Trim,

move, rotate etc.) and viewing using (Pan, Zoom, Rotate etc.)

3 Solid Modeling

3D Geometric modeling of an Engineering component, demonstrating

modeling skills using commands like Extrude, Revolve, Sweep, Blend, Loft

etc.

4 Surface Modeling

Extrude, Sweep, Trim etc and Mesh of curves, free form surfaces etc.

Feature manipulation using Copy, Edit, Pattern, Suppress, History

operations etc.

5 Assembly

Constraints, Exploded views, interference check. Drafting (Layouts,

Standard & Sectional Views, Detailing & Plotting).

6 Data Exchange

CAD data exchange formats Like IGES, PDES, PARASOLID, DXF and

STL along with their comparison and applicability.

## Page 305

Assessment:

Term work

Using the above knowledge and skills acquired through six modules students should complete Minimum six

assignments/Experiments from the given sets of assignments (Two from each set) using standard CAD

modeler like PTC Creo/CATIA/ Solid work/UG /any other s uitable software.

Set 1: Beginner Level:

3D modeling of basic Engineering components likes Nuts, Bolts, Keys, cotter, Screws, Springs etc.

Set 2: Intermediate Level:

3D modeling of basic Machine components like Clapper block, Single tool post, Lathe and Mi lling tail

stock,Shaper tool head slide, jigs and fixtures Cotter, Knuckle joint, Couplings: simple, muff, flanged

Protected flange coupling, Oldham’s coupling, Universal coupling,element of engine system and

Miscellaneous parts.

Set 3: Advance Level:

1) Generation of any Assembly model (minimum five child parts) along with Production drawing for any of

the system by creating 3D modeling with assembly constraints, Interference check, Exploded view, GD&T,

Bill of material.

2) Reverse Engineering of a physica l model: disassembling of any physical model having not less than five

parts, measure the required dimensions of each component, sketch the minimum views required for each

component, convert these sketches into 3 -D model and create an assembly drawing with actual dimensions

The distribution of marks for Term work shall be as follows:

1. Printouts/Plots : 20 marks

2. Attendance : 05 marks

End Semester Practical/Oral examination:

To be conducted by pair of Internal and External Examiner

1. Practical examination duration is two hours, based on Advance level of the Term work.

Oral examination should also be conducted to check the knowledge of CAD Modeling Tools.

2. The distribution of marks for practical examination shall be as follows:

a. Practical Exam ….15 marks

b. Oral Exam ...…….10 marks

3. Evaluation of practical examination to be done based on the printout of students work

4. Students work along with evaluation report to be preserved till the next examination

References:

1. Machine Drawing by N.D. Bhatt.

2. A textbook of Machine Drawing by Laxminarayan and M.L.Mathur, Jain brothers Delhi

3. Machine Drawing by Kamat and Rao

4. Machine Drawing by M.B.Shah

5. A text book of Machine Drawing by R.B.Gupta, Satyaprakashan, Tech. Publication

6. Machine Drawing by K.I. Narayana, P. Kannaiah, K.Venkat a Reddy

7. Machine Drawing by Sidheshwar and Kanheya

8. Autodesk Inventor 2011 for Engineers and Designers by ShamTickoo and SurinderRaina, Dreamtech

Press

## Page 306

NOTE –

1: For Detailed Course Schemes, Course Objectives, Internal & External Assessment

process, End Semester Examination, Recommended & reference Books please refer MU

syllabus of Second year (C -Scheme / R -19) Mechanical Engineering.

2: Theory and Practical Examination will be strictly based on above compressed syllabus .

## Page 307

AC -23/02/2021

Item No. – 6.11-6

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI

Bachelor of Engineering

in

Automobile Engineering

Direct Second Year (Sem. III) Admitted Students for the

current Academic Year 2020 -21(Only)

(REV - 2019 ‘C’ Scheme) from Academic Year 2019 – 20

Under

FACULTY OF

SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY

(As per AICTE guidelines with effect from the academic year 2019 –2020)

## Page 308

Program Structure for Second Year Engineering

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI

(With Effect from 2020 -2021 )

Semester III

Course

Code Course Name Teaching Scheme

(Contact Hours) Credits Assigned

Theory Pract

. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total

AEC301 Engineering

Mathematics -III# 3 -- 1 3 -- 1 4

AEC302 Strength of Materials# 3 -- 3 -- 3

AEC303 Production Processes# 4 -- -- 4 -- -- 4

AEC304 Materials and

Metallurgy# 3 -- -- 3 -- -- 3

AEC305 Thermodynamics# 3 -- -- 3 -- -- 3

AEL301 Materials Testing# -- 2 -- -- 1 -- 1

AEL302 Machine Shop Practice # -- 4 -- -- 2 -- 2

AESBL301 CAD –Modeling# -- 4 -- -- 2 -- 2

AEPBL301 Mini Project – 1A -- 4$ -- -- 2 -- 2

Total 16 14 1 16 07 1 24

Course

Code Course Name Examination Scheme

Theory Term

Wor

k Pract

/oral Total

Internal

Assessment End

Sem.

Exam Exam.

Duratio

n

(in Hrs)

Test

1 Test2 Avg

.

AEC301 Engineering Mathematics -

III# 20 20 20 80 3 25 -- 125

AEC302 Strength of Materials# 20 20 20 80 3 -- -- 100

AEC303 Production Processes# 20 20 20 80 3 -- -- 100

AEC304 Materials and Metallurgy# 20 20 20 80 3 -- -- 100

AEC305 Thermodynamics# 20 20 20 80 3 -- -- 100

AEL301 Materials Testing# -- -- -- -- -- 25 25 50

AEL302 Machine Shop Practice # -- -- -- -- -- 50 50

AESBL301 CAD –Modeling# -- -- -- -- -- 25 25 50

AEPBL301 Mini Project – 1A -- -- -- -- -- 25 25 50

Total -- -- 100 400 -- 150 75 725

$ indicates work load of Learner (Not Faculty), for Mini Project

# indicates common with Mechanical Engineering

SBL – Skill Based Laboratory, PBL – Project Based Learning

## Page 309

Course Code Course Name Credits

MEC301 Engineering Mathematics -III 4

Pre-requisite: Engineering Mathematics -I, Engineering Mathematics -II,

Objectives: The course is aimed

1. To familiarize with the Laplace Transform, Inverse Laplace Transform of various functions, its applications.

2. To acquaint with the concept of Fourier Series, its complex form and enhance the problem solving skills

3. To familiarize with the concept of complex variables, C -R equations with applications.

4. To study the application of the knowledge of matrices and numerical methods in complex engineering

problems.

Outcomes: On successful completion of course learne r/student will be able to:

1. Apply the concept of Laplace transform to solve the real integrals in engineering problems.

2. Apply the concept of inverse Laplace transform of various functions in engineering problems.

3. Expand the periodic function by using Fouri er series for real life problems and complex engineering problems.

4. Find orthogonal trajectories and analytic function by using basic concepts of complex variable theory.

5. Apply Matrix algebra to solve the engineering problems.

6. Solve Partial differential equations by applying numerical solution and analytical methods for one dimensional

heat and wave equations

Module Detailed Contents Hrs.

01 Module: Laplace Transform

1.1 Definition of Laplace transform, Condition of Existence of Laplace transform,

1.2 Laplace Transform (L) of Standard Functions like 𝑒𝑎𝑡, 𝑠𝑖𝑛(𝑎𝑡), 𝑐𝑜𝑠(𝑎𝑡),

𝑠𝑖𝑛ℎ(𝑎𝑡), 𝑐𝑜𝑠ℎ(𝑎𝑡) and 𝑡𝑛 ,𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒 𝑛≥0.

1.3 Properties of Laplace Transform: Linearity, First Shifting theorem, Second

Shifting Theorem, chang e of scale Property, multiplication by t, Division by t,

Laplace Transform of derivatives and integrals (Properties without proof).

1.4 Evaluation of integrals by using Laplace Transformation.

Self-learning topics: Heaviside’s Unit Step function, Laplace Tra nsform. of

Periodic functions, Dirac Delta Function. 07

02 Module: Inverse Laplace Transform

2.1 Inverse Laplace Transform, Linearity property, use of standard formulae to

find inverse Laplace Transform, finding Inverse Laplace transform using

derivative

2.2 Partial fractions method & first shift property to find inverse Laplace

transform.

2.3 Inverse Laplace transform using Convolution theorem (without proof)

Self-learning Topics: Applications to solve initial and boundary value problems

involving ordinary differential equations. 06

03 Module: Fourier Series:

3.1 Dirichlet’s conditions, Definition of Fourier series and Parseval’s Identity

(without proof)

3.2 Fourier series of periodic function with period 2π and 2l,

3.3 Fourier series of even and odd functions

3.4 Half range Sine and Cosine Series.

Self-learning Topics: Complex form of Fourier Series, orthogonal and

orthono rmal set of functions, Fourier Transform. 07

04 Module: Complex Variables:

4.1 Function f(z) of complex variable, limit, continuity and differentiability of f(z),

Analytic function, necessary and sufficient conditions for f(z) to be analytic (without 07

## Page 310

proof),

4.2 Cauchy -Riemann equations in cartesian coordinates (without proof)

4.3 Milne -Thomson method to determine analytic function f(z) when real part (u) or

Imaginary part (v) or its combination (u+v or u -v) is given.

4.4 Harmonic function, Harmonic co njugate and orthogonal trajectories

Self-learning Topics: Conformal mapping, linear, bilinear mapping, cross ratio, fixed

points and standard transformations

05 Module: Matrices:

5.1 Characteristic equation, Eigen values and Eigen vectors, Properties of Eigen

values and Eigen vectors. ( No theorems/ proof )

5.2 Cayley -Hamilton theorem (without proof): Application to find the inverse

of the given square matrix and t o determine the given higher degree

polynomial matrix.

5.3 Functions of square matrix

5.4 Similarity of matrices, Diagonalization of matrices

Self-learning Topics: Verification of Cayley Hamilton theorem, Minimal

polynomial and Derogatory matrix & Quadratic Forms (Congruent transformation

& Orthogonal Reduction) 06

06 Module: Numerical methods for PDE

6.1 Introduction of Partial Differential equations, method of separation of

variables, Vibrations of string, Analytical method for one dimensional heat and

wave equations. (only problems)

6.2 Crank Nicholson method

6.3 Bender Schmidt method

Self-learning Topics: Analytical methods of solving two and three dimensional

probl ems. 06

Term Work:

General Instructions:

1. Students must be encouraged to write at least 6 class tutorials on entire syllabus.

2. A group of 4 -6 students should be assigned a self -learning topic. Students should prepare a

presentation/problem solving of 10 -15 minutes. This should be considered as mini project in

Engineering Mathematics. This project should be graded for 10 marks depe nding on the

performance of the students.

The distribution of Term Work marks will be as follows –

1. Attendance (Theory and Tutorial) 05 marks

2. Class Tutorials on entire syllabus 10 marks

3. Mini project 10 marks

Assessment :

Internal Assessment Test:

Assessment consists of two class tests of 20 marks each. The first class test (Internal Assessment I) is to

be conducted when approx. 40% syllabus is completed and second class test (Internal Assessment II)

when additional 35% syllabus is completed. Duration of each test shall be one hour.

End Semester Theory Examination:

1. Question paper will comprise of total 06 questions, each carrying 20 marks.

2. Total 04 questions need to be solved.

3. Question No: 01 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein 4 sub -questions of 5

marks each will be asked.

4. Remaining questions will be randomly selected from all the modules.

## Page 311

5. Weightage of each module will be proportional to number of respective lecture hours as mentioned in

the syllabus.

References:

1. Engineering Mathematics, Dr. B. S. Grewal, Khanna Publication

2. Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Erwin Kreyszig, Wiley Eastern Limited,

3. Advanced Engineering Mathematics, R. K. Jain and S.R.K. Iyengar, Narosa pub lication

4. Advanced Engineering Mathematics, H.K. Das, S. Chand Publication

5. Higher Engineering Mathematics B.V. Ramana, McGraw Hill Education

6. Complex Variables and Applications, Brown and Churchill, McGraw -Hill education,

7. Text book of Matrices, Shanti Narayan and P K Mittal, S. Chand Publication

8. Laplace transforms, Murray R. Spiegel, Schaum’s Outline Series

Links for online NPTEL/SWAYAM courses:

1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/111/104/111104085/

2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/111/106/111106139/

*****************

## Page 312

Course Code Course Name Credits

MEC30 2 Strength of Materials 03

Objectives:

1. To understand the nature of stresses developed in simple geometries such as bars, cantilevers,

beams, shafts, cylinders and spheres subjected to various types of simple loads.

2. To calculate the elastic deformation occurring in various simple geometries for different types of

Loading.

3. To study distribution of various stresses in the mechanical elements under different types of loads.

Outcomes: Learner will be able to…

1. Demonstrate fundamental knowledge about various types of loading and stresses induced.

2. Draw the SFD and BMD for different types of loads and support conditions.

3. Analyse the bending and shear stresses induced in beam.

4. Analyse the deflection i n beams and stresses in shaft.

5. Analyse the stresses and deflection in beams and Estimate the strain energy in mechanical elements.

6. Analyse buckling phenomenon in columns.

Module

Detailed Contents Hrs

1. Uni axial, biaxial and tri axial stresses. Principal stresses and Principal planes -

Mohr’s circle. 3

2. Shear Force and Bending Moment in Beams:

Concept & Examples of SFD & BMD for uniformly varying loads, couple and

their combinations. 5

3. Deflection of Beams:

Deflection of a beam: Double integration method, Maxwell’s reciprocal

theorems for computation of slopes and deflection in beams for point and

distributed loads. 6

4. Thin Cylindrical and Spherical Shells:

Stresses and deformation in Thin Cylindrical and Spherical Shells subjected to

internal pressure

Strain Energy: Strain energy stored in the member due to gradual, sudden and

impact loads, Strain energy due to bending and torsion. 4

5. Columns:

Buckling lo ad, Types of end conditions for column, Euler’s column theory

and its limitations and Rankine formula. 2

Assessment:

Internal Assessment for 20 marks:

Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests

First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remaining contents

(approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in Test I)

End Semester Examination:

Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of respective lecture

hours mentioned in the curric ulum.

## Page 313

1. Question paper will comprise of total six questions , each carrying 20 marks

2. Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum

3. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 then

part (b) will be from any module other than module 3)

4. Only Four questions need to be solved .

References:

1. Strength of Materials by Ryder, Macmillan

2. Mechanics of Materials by James M. Gere and Barry J. Goodno, Cengage Learning, 6thEd, 2009

3. Mechanics of Materials by Gere and Timoshenko, CBS 2nd Edition

4. Elements of Strength of Materials by Timoshenko and Youngs, Affiliated East -West Press

5. Mechanics of Materials byBeer, Jhonston, DEwolf and Mazurek, TMHPvt Ltd., New Delhi

6. Mechanics of Structures by S.B.Ju nnarkar, Charotar Publication

7. Mechanics of Materials by S.S.Ratan, Tata McGraw Hill Pvt. Ltd

8. Introduction to Solid Mechanics by Shames, PHI

9. Strength of Materials by S. Ramamrutham, Dhanpat Rai Pvt. Ltd

10. Strength of Materials by W.Nash, Schaum’s Outline Series, McGraw Hill Publication, Special Indian

Edition

11. Strength of Materials by R. Subramanian, Oxford University Press, Third Edition 2016

Links for online NPTEL/SWAYAM courses:

1. http://www.nptelvideos.in/2012/11/strength -of-materials -prof.html

2. https://swayam.gov.in/nd1_noc20_ce34

## Page 314

Course Code Course Name Credits

MEC303 Production Processes 04

Objectives:

1. To familiarize with the various production processes used on shop floors

2. To study appropriate production processes for a specific application.

3. To introduce to the learner various machine tools used for manufacturing

4. To familiarize with principle and working of non -traditional manufacturing

5. To introduce to them the Intelligent manufacturing in the context of Industry 4.0

Outcomes : Learner will be able to ….

1. Demonstrate an understand ing of casting process

2. Illustrate principles of forming processes.

3. Demonstrate applications of various types of welding processes.

4. Differentiate chip forming processes such as turning, milling, drilling, etc.

5. Illustrate the concept of producing polymer com ponents and ceramic components.

6. Illustrate principles and working of non -traditional manufacturing

7. Understand the manufacturing technologies enabling Industry 4.0

Module Details Hrs.

1 Introduction to Production Processes and Metal Casting:

Classification of Production Processes and applications areas

Machine moulding, Types of riser, types of gates, solidification

Special casting processes : CO2 and shell moulding, Investment casting, Die

casting, Vacuum casting, Inspection 4

2 Joining P rocesses:

Classification of various joining processes; Applicability, advantages and limitations

of Adhesive bonding, Mechanical Fastening; Welding and allied processes, Hybrid

joining processes. Classification and Working of various welding methods:

Chem ical, Radiant, Solid State, Welding Joints, Welding Positions and their

remedies. 5

3 Forming processes:

Introduction and classification of metalworking processes, hot and cold working

processes. Defects in rolled and forged components,

Classification and analysis of wire and tube drawing processes.

Sheet metal working processes: Classification of Sheet metal operations 3

4 Machine Tools and Machining Processes:

Grinding Machines and selection of grinding wheel (Dressing and Truing),

Broaching machines, Lapping/Honing machines (Super Finishing Operations) and

planning Machines.

Gear Manufacturing Gear milling, standard cutters and limitations,

Tool Engineering Taylor’s tool life equation 3

5 Polymer Processing: Polymer Moulding Techniques for thermoplastic and

thermosetting plastics. Applications of Plastics in engineering field.

Powder Metallurgy: Introduction to PM, Powder making processes, Steps in PM.

Compaction and Sintering processes. Secondary and finishing operations in PM

Intelligent manufacturing in the context of Industry 4.0,

Cyber -physical systems (CPS) 5

## Page 315

Internet of Things (IoT) enable d manufacturing

Cloud Manufacturing

Assessment:

Internal Assessment for 20 marks: Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests First test based on

approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remaining contents (approximately 40% but

excluding contents covered in Test I) . Duration of each test shall be one hour.

End Semester Examin ation: Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to

number of respective lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum.

1. Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks

2. Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum

3. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 then part

(b) will be from any module other than module 3)

4. Only Four questions need to be solved.

References:

1. Welding technology by O P Khanna

2. Foundry technology by O P Khanna

3. Elements of workshop technology. Vol. 1 & II by S K HajraChoudhury

4. Manufacturing Science by Ghosh and Malik

5. Rapid Manufacturing –An Industrial revolution for the digital age by N.Hopkinson, R.J.M.Hauge, P

M, Dickens, Wiley

6. Rapid Manufacturing by Pham D T and Dimov, Springer Verlag

7. Production Technology by WAJ Chapman Vol I, II, III

8. Production Technology by P C Sharma.

9. Production Technology by Raghuvanshi.

10. Industry 4.0: The Industrial Internet of Things by Alasdair Gilchrist, 2016, Apress.

11. Cyber -Physical Systems: From Theory to Practice by Danda B. Rawat, Joel Rodrigues, Ivan

Stojmenovic, 2015, C.R.C. Press.

12. Optimization of Manufacturing Systems using Internet of Things by Yingfeng Zhang, Fei Tao, 2017,

Academic Press (AP), Elsevier.

Links for online NPTEL/SWAYAM courses:

1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/107/112107219/

2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/107/112107215/

3. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/107/112107084/

4. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/107/112107144/

5. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/107/112107078/

6. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/107/112107239/

7. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/104/112104195/

8. https://nptel.ac.in/c ourses/112/107/112107219/

9. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/107/112107144/

10. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/107/112107213/

11. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/107/112107090/

12. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/113/106/113106087/

13. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/103/112103263/

14. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/107/112107239/

15. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/106/112106153/

16. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/107/112107250/

17. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/107/112107144/

18. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/107/112107239/

19. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/107/112107219/

## Page 316

Course Code Course Name Credits

MEC30 4 Materials and Metallurgy 03

Objectives:

1. To familiarize the structure -property correlation in materials

2. To acquaint with the processing dependency on the performance of the various materials

3. To study the role of alloying in the development of steels.

4. To familiarize with the advances in materials development

Outcomes: Learner w ill be able to ….

1. Identify the various classes of materials and comprehend their properties

2. Apply phase diagram concepts to engineering applications

3. Apply particular heat treatment for required property development

4. Identify the probable mode of failure in materials and suggest measures to prevent them

5. Choose or develop new materials for better performance

6. Decide an appropriate method to evaluate different components in service

Module Contents Hrs.

1 Introduction to engineering materials – significance of structure property

correlations in all classes of engineering materials

Concepts of crystals - Crystalline and Non -crystalline, Crystal systems,

Crystallographic planes and directions,

Crystal Defect s: Crystal Imperfections -definition, classification and

significance of imperfections -point defects, line defects, Surface defects and

volume defects.

Importance of dislocations in deformation and its mechanisms. Critical

Resolved shear stress, Slip syst ems and deformability of FCC, BCC and HCP

lattice systems.

Cold Working and Recrystallization annealing: Definition, effects and

mechanism of cold work, Need for Recrystallization Annealing, the stages of

recrystallization annealing and factors affecting it 5

2 Mechanism of Crystallization - Nucleation -Homogeneous and

Heterogeneous Nucleation and Growth. Solidification of metals and -alloys –

Cooling curves

Classification of Alloys based on phases and phase diagram -Binary alloy

phase diagram – Isomorphous, Eutectics type I and II, Peritectic

Microstructural changes of hypo and hyper -eutectoid steel - TTT and CCT

diagram -Hardenability and its tests, Graphitization in cast irons. 3

3 Heat treatment: Overview – Objectives – Thorough treatments:

austempering and martempering – microstructure changes

Surface hardening processes: Carbonitriding, induction and flame

hardening, Laser and Electron beam hardening – principles and case depths

Alloy steels - Maraging steels and Ausformed steels 3

4 Strengthening mechanisms in materials

Fracture of metals – Ductile Fracture, Brittle Fracture, Ductile to Brittle

Transition Temperature (DBTT), Griffith’s criteria and Orowan’s

modification

Fatigue – Endurance limit of ferrous and non -ferrous metals -Fatigue test, S -

N curves, factors affecting fatigue, structural changes accompanying fatigue; 4

## Page 317

Creep – mechanism of creep – stages of creep and creep test, creep resistant

materials

5 Basic concepts of composites, Processing of composites, advantages over

metallic materials, various types of composites

Introduction, Concepts, synthesis of nanomaterials, examples, and Nano

composites,

Classification of Smart materials, Shape Memory All oys 2

6 Processing - of ceramics and composites through Injection Moulding

Non-destructive Testing of Materials -ultrasonic testing, radiographic

methods, magnetic particle testing 3

Assessment:

Internal Assessment for 20 marks: Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests First test based on

approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remaining contents (approximately 40% but

excluding contents covered in Test I) . Duration of each test shall be one hour.

End Semester Examin ation: Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to

number of respective lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum.

1. Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks

2. Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum

3. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 then part

(b) will be from any module other than module 3)

4. Only Four questions need to be solved.

Textbooks:

1. Callister’s Materials Science and Engineering, 2nd edition by R.Balasubramanium

Wiley India Pvt. Ltd

References:

1. Introduction to Materials Science for Engineers; 8th Edition by James F. Shackelford Pearson

2. Introduction to Physical Metallurgy ,2nd edition by Sidney Avner, TataMcGrawHill

3. Mechanical Metallurgy, 3rd edition by GH Dieter,TataMcGraw Hill

4. Fundamentals of Materials Science and Engineering: An Integrated Approach, 5th Edition by William

D. Callister, Jr., David G. Rethwisch, Wiley & Sons.

5. Materials Science and Engineering,5th edition by V.Raghavan, Prentice Hall India

Links for online NPTEL/SWAYAM courses:

1. https://nptel.ac.in/noc/courses/noc20/SEM1/noc20 -mm09/

2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/113/102/113102080/

3. https://nptel.ac.in/noc/courses/noc20/SEM1/noc20 -mm09/

4. https://nptel.ac.in/content/syllabus_pdf/113104074.pdf

5. https://nptel.ac.in/content/storage2/courses /112108150/pdf/PPTs/MTS_09_m.pdf

6. https://nptel.ac.in/content/storage2/courses/112108150/pdf/PPTs/MTS_08_m.pdf

7. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/104/112104229/

8. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/118/104/118104008/

9. https://nptel.ac.in/content/storage2/courses/112104173/Mod_1_smart_mat_lec_6.pdf https://nptel.a c.i

n/courses/112/104/112104229/

10. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/118/104/118104008/

11. https://nptel.ac.in/content/storage2/courses/112104173/Mod_1_smart_mat_lec_6.pdf

## Page 318

Course Code Course Name Credits

MEC30 5 Thermodynamics 03

Objectives:

1. To familiarize the concepts of Energy in general and Heat and Work inparticular

2. To study the fundamentals of quantification and grade ofenergy

3. To study the effect of energy transfer on properties of substances in the form of charts anddiagrams

4. To familiarize the application of the concepts of thermodynamics in vapour power, gas power cycles,

compr essible fluid flow

Outcomes: Learners will be able to….

1. Demonstrate application of the laws of thermodynamics to a wide range ofsystems.

2. Compute heat and work interactions in thermodynamicsystems

3. Demonstrate the interrelations between thermodynamic functio ns to solve practicalproblems.

4. Compute thermodynamicinteractions using the steam table and Mollier chart

5. Compute efficiencies of heat engines, power cycles .

6. Apply the fundamentals of compressible fluid flow to the relevant systems

Module Detailed contents Hrs.

1 Basic Concepts:

Thermodynamics system and types, Macroscopic and Microscopic approach,

Thermodynamic properties of the system, state, path, process and cycle, Point and

Path functions, Quasi -static process & Equilibrium,

Perpetual Motion Machine of the First Kind, Application of first law to non -flow

systems (Ideal gas processes with numerical) and flow systems, throttling device.

Significance of –VdP work, Relation between flow and non -flow work

3

2 Second Law of Thermodynamics:

Perpetual Motion Machine of the second kind, Carnot cycle, Carnot theorem.

Entropy:

Entropy is property of a system, Temperature -Entropy diagram, Increase of entropy

principle, T ds relations, Entropy change During a process. 3

3 Availability:

High grade and low -grade energy, Available and Unavailable energy, Dead State,

Useful work, Irreversibility, Availability of closed system& steady flow process,

Helmholtz & Gibbs function

Thermodynamic Relations:

Maxwell relations, Clausis -Clapeyron Equa tion, Mayer relation, Joule -Thomson coefficient

(Only Theory) 3

4 Properties of Pure Substance:

Vapour Power cycle:

Principal components of a simple steam power plant, Carnot cycle and its limitations as a

vapour cycle, Rankine cycle with different turbine inlet conditions, Mean temperature of

heat addition, Reheat Rankine Cycle, Revision on steam table and Mollier chart. 4

5 Gas Power cycles:

Comparison of Otto and Diesel cycle for same compression ratio, Brayton Cycle.

Sterling Cycle, Ericsson Cycle, Lenoir cycle, and Atkinson cycle (Only theory). 3

6 Compressible Fluid flow:

Propagation of sound waves through compressible fluids, Sonic velocity and Mach number;

Stagnation properties, Application of continuity, momentum and energy equations for

steady -state conditions; Steady flow through the nozzle, Isentropic flow through duc ts of 4

## Page 319

varying cross -sectional area, Effect of varying back pressure on nozzle performance, Critical

pressure ratio

Assessment:

Internal Assessment for 20 marks: Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests First test based on

approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remaining contents (approximately 40% but

excluding contents covered in Test I) . Duration of each test shall be one hour.

End Semester Examin ation: Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to

number of respective lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum.

1. Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks

2. Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum

3. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 then part

(b) will be from any module other than module 3)

4. Only Four questions need to be solved.

References:

1. Thermodynamics: An Engineering Approach by Yunus A. Cengel and Michael A. Boles, 9thedition,

TMH

2. Basic Engineering Thermodynamics by Rayner Joel, 5thedition, Longman Publishers

3. Engineering Thermodynamics by P Chattopadhyay, 2ndedition, Oxford University Pr essIndia

4. Thermodynamics by P K Nag, 6thEdition,TMH

5. Thermodynamics by Onkar Singh, 4th Edition New AgeInternational

6. Thermodynamics by C P Arora, 1stEdition TMH

7. Thermal Engineering By Ajoy Kumar, G. N. Sah, 2nd Edition, Narosa Publishing house

8. Engineering Thermodynamics Through Examples by Y V C Rao, Universities Press (India) Pvt Ltd

9. Fundamentals of Thermodynamics by Moran &Shapiro, Eighth Edition, Wiley

10. Fundamentals of Classical Thermodynamics by Van Wylen G.H. & Sonntag R.E., 9th Edition

JohnWiley& Sons

11. Thermodynamics by W.C. Reynolds, McGraw -Hill &Co

12. Thermodynamics by J P Holman, 4th Edition McGraw -Hill & Co

Links for online NPTEL/SWAYAM courses:

1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/105/112105266/

2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/103/112103275/

3. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/105/ 112105220/

4. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/101/104/101104063/

## Page 320

Course Code Course Name Credits

MEL301 Materials Testing 01

Objectives:

1. To familiarize with the use of metallurgical microscope for study of metals

2. To study the microstructures of ferrous (steel and cast iron) metals

3. To acquaint with the material testing by performing experiment related to Hardness , Fatigue,

Tension, Torsion, Impact and Flexural Test

Outcomes: Learner will be able to…

1. Prepare metallic samples for studying its microstructure following the appropriate procedure .

2. Identify effects of heat treatment on microstructure of medium carbon steel and hardenability of steel

using Jominy end Quench test

3. Perform Fatigue Test and draw S -N curve

4. Perform Tension test to Analyze the stress - strain behaviour of materials

5. Measure torsional strength, hardness and impact resistanceof the material

6. Perform flexural test with central and three point loading conditions

a)List of Experiments: Total four experiments are required to be performed.

Experiment

Number Detailed Contents Laboratory

Sessions

(Hrs.)

1 Comparison of Microstructures and hardness before and

after Annealing, Normalizing and Hardening in medium

carbon steel 2

2 Study of tempering characteristics of hardened steel 2

3 Determination of hardenability of steel using Jominy end

Quench Test (U sing different hardness testers to measure

the Hardness) 2

4 Fatigue test – to determine number of cycles to failure of

a given material at a given stress 2

b) Assignments : At least one problem on each of the following topics:

1. Simple stress strain

2. SFD and BMD

3. Stresses in beams

4. Torsion and deflection.

5. Thin cylinder and strain energy

6. Buckling of Columns

Note: Preferably, the assignments shall be based on live problems. Project Based Learning may be

incorporated by judiciously reducing number of assignments.

## Page 321

Assessment:

Term Work: Including Part a and b both

Distribution of marks for Term Work shall be as follows:

Part a: 1 0 marks.

Part b: 10 Marks

Attendance: 05 marks.

End Semester Practical/Oral Examination:

Pair of Internal and External Examiner should conduct practical examination followed by Oral

## Page 322

Course Code Course Name Credits

MEL302 Machine Shop Practice 02

Objectives:

1. To familiarize with basic machiningprocesses.

2. To familiarize various machining operations and machineprotocols

Outcomes: Learner will be able to…

1. Know the specifications, controls and safety measures related to machines and machining

operations.

2. Use the machines for making various engineering jobs.

3. Perform various machining operations

4. Perform Tool Grinding

5. Perform welding operations

Module Details Hrs

1 One composite job consisting minimum four parts employing operations

performed of various machine tools. 40

2 Tool Grinding – To know basic tool Nomenclature 04

3 One Job on Welding – Application of Metal Arc Welding 04

Assessment :

Term Work:

1. Composite job mentionedabove and the Welding Job

2. Complete Work -Shop Book giving details of drawing of the job and timesheet

The distribution of marks for Term work shall be as follows:

1. Job Work with completeworkshopbook ……. 40 marks

2. Attendance ……. 10marks

## Page 323

Course Code Course Name Credits

MESBL 301 Skill Based Lab: CAD – Modeling 02

Prerequisites: Engineering Drawing

Objectives:

1. To impart the 3D modeling skills for development of 3D models of basic engineering components .

2. To introduce Product data exchange among CAD systems.

3. To familiarize with production drawings with important features like GD &T, surface finish, heat

treatments etc.

Outcomes: Learner will be able to …

1. Illustrate basic understanding of types of CAD model creation.

2. Visualize and prepare 2D modeling of a given object using modeling software.

3. Build solid model of a given object using 3D modeling software.

4. Visualize and develop the surface model of a given object using modeling software.

5. Generate assembly models of given objects using assembly tools of a modeling software

6. Perform product data exchange among CAD systems.

Sr. No. Exercises Hrs.

1 CAD Introduction

CAD models Creation, Types and uses of models from different

perspectives. Parametric modeling.

10

2 2D Modeling

Geometric modeling of an Engineering component, demonstrating skills in

sketching commands of creation (line, arc, circle etc.) modification (Trim,

move, rotate etc.) and viewing using (Pan, Zoom, Rotate etc.)

3 Solid Modeling

3D Geometric modeling of an Engineering component, demonstrating

modeling skills using commands like Extrude, Revolve, Sweep, Blend, Loft

etc.

4 Surface Modeling

Extrude, Sweep, Trim etc and Mesh of curves, free form surfaces etc.

Feature manipulation using Copy, Edit, Pattern, Suppress, History

operations etc.

5 Assembly

Constraints, Exploded views, interference check. Drafting (Layouts,

Standard & Sectional Views, Detailing & Plotting).

6 Data Exchange

CAD data exchange formats Like IGES, PDES, PARASOLID, DXF and

STL along with their comparison and applicability.

## Page 324

Assessment:

Term work

Using the above knowledge and skills acquired through six modules students should complete Minimum six

assignments/Experiments from the given sets of assignments (Two from each set) using standard CAD

modeler like PTC Creo/CATIA/ Solid work/UG /any other s uitable software.

Set 1: Beginner Level:

3D modeling of basic Engineering components likes Nuts, Bolts, Keys, cotter, Screws, Springs etc.

Set 2: Intermediate Level:

3D modeling of basic Machine components like Clapper block, Single tool post, Lathe and Mi lling tail

stock,Shaper tool head slide, jigs and fixtures Cotter, Knuckle joint, Couplings: simple, muff, flanged

Protected flange coupling, Oldham’s coupling, Universal coupling,element of engine system and

Miscellaneous parts.

Set 3: Advance Level:

1) Generation of any Assembly model (minimum five child parts) along with Production drawing for any of

the system by creating 3D modeling with assembly constraints, Interference check, Exploded view, GD&T,

Bill of material.

2) Reverse Engineering of a physica l model: disassembling of any physical model having not less than five

parts, measure the required dimensions of each component, sketch the minimum views required for each

component, convert these sketches into 3 -D model and create an assembly drawing with actual dimensions

The distribution of marks for Term work shall be as follows:

1. Printouts/Plots : 20 marks

2. Attendance : 05 marks

End Semester Practical/Oral examination:

To be conducted by pair of Internal and External Examiner

1. Practical examination duration is two hours, based on Advance level of the Term work.

Oral examination should also be conducted to check the knowledge of CAD Modeling Tools.

2. The distribution of marks for practical examination shall be as follows:

a. Practical Exam ….15 marks

b. Oral Exam ...…….10 marks

3. Evaluation of practical examination to be done based on the printout of students work

4. Students work along with evaluation report to be preserved till the next examination

References:

1. Machine Drawing by N.D. Bhatt.

2. A textbook of Machine Drawing by Laxminarayan and M.L.Mathur, Jain brothers Delhi

3. Machine Drawing by Kamat and Rao

4. Machine Drawing by M.B.Shah

5. A text book of Machine Drawing by R.B.Gupta, Satyaprakashan, Tech. Publication

6. Machine Drawing by K.I. Narayana, P. Kannaiah, K.Venkat a Reddy

7. Machine Drawing by Sidheshwar and Kanheya

8. Autodesk Inventor 2011 for Engineers and Designers by ShamTickoo and SurinderRaina, Dreamtech

Press

## Page 325

NOTE –

1: For Detailed Course Schemes, Course Objectives, Internal & External Assessment

process, End Semester Examination, Recommended & reference Books please refer MU

syllabus of Second year (C -Scheme / R -19) Automobile Engineering.

2: Theory and Practical Examination will be strictly based on above compressed syllabus .

## Page 326

AC -23/02/2021

Item No. – 6.11-7

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI

Bachelor of Engineering

in

Printing and Packaging Technology

Direct Second Year (Sem. III) Admitted Students for the

current Academic Year 2020 -21(Only)

(REV - 2019 ‘C’ Scheme) from Academic Year 2019 – 20

Under

FACULTY OF

SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY

(As per AICTE guidelines with effect from the academic year 2019 –2020)

## Page 327

## Page 328

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI

Bachelor of Engineering in Printing and Packaging Technology Direct Second Year Admitted Students for the Academic Year 2020-21 (Only) (As per AICTE guidelines with effect from the academic year 2019–2020) (REV- 2019 ‘C’ Scheme) from Academic Year 2019 – 20 Under FACULTY OF SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY

## Page 329

Program Structure for Second Year Engineering Semester III & IV UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI (With Effect from 2020-2021) Semester III Course Code Course Name Teaching Scheme (Contact Hours) Credits Assigned Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total PPC301 Engineering Mathematics – III 3 -- 1 3 -- 1 4 PPC302 Packaging Introduction and Concepts 3 -- 3 -- 3 PPC303 Introduction to Printing Technology 3 -- -- 3 -- -- 3 PPC304 Paper based Packaging Materials 3 -- -- 3 -- -- 3 PPC305 Glass, Metal and Textile based Packaging Materials 3 -- -- 3 -- -- 3 PPL301 Principles of Graphic Arts and Design I -- 3 -- -- 1.5 -- 1.5 PPL302 Screen Printing Laboratory -- 4 -- -- 2 -- 2 PPSBL301 Packaging Material Testing - I -- 3 -- -- 1.5 -- 1.5 PPPBL301 Mini Project – 1 A -- 4$ -- -- 2 -- 2 Total 15 14 1 15 07 1 23 Course Code Course Name Examination Scheme Theory Term Work Pract/oral Total Internal Assessment End Sem. Exam Exam. Duration (in Hrs) Test1 Test2 Avg. PPC301 Engineering Mathematics – III 20 20 20 80 3 25 -- 125 PPC302 Packaging Introduction and Concepts 20 20 20 80 3 -- -- 100 PPC303 Introduction to Printing Technology 20 20 20 80 3 -- -- 100 PPC304 Paper based Packaging Materials 20 20 20 80 3 -- -- 100 PPC305 Glass, Metal and Textile based Packaging Materials 20 20 20 80 3 -- -- 100 PPL301 Principles of Graphic Arts and Design I -- -- -- -- -- 25 25 50 PPL302 Screen Printing Laboratory -- -- -- -- -- 50 -- 50 PPSBL301 Packaging Material Testing - I -- -- -- -- -- 25 25 50 PPPBL301 Mini Project – 1 A -- -- -- -- -- 25 25 50 Total -- -- 100 400 -- 150 75 725 $ indicates work-load of Learner (Not Faculty), for Mini Project PBL – Project Based Learning SBL – Skill Based Laboratory

## Page 330

Course Code Course / Subject Name Credits PPC 301 Engineering Mathematics - III 3 + 1 Pre-requisite: 1) Engineering Mathematics-I 2) Engineering Mathematics-II Objectives: 1. Study the concept of Laplace Transform and its applications in engineering 2. Understand the fundamental aspects of vector calculus and matrices 3. Study the concept of and complex variables Outcomes: Upon successful completion of this course, the learner will be able to….. 1. Obtain Laplace Transform using standard results and shifting theorem. 2. Obtain Inverse Laplace Transform using Convolution theorem 3. Determine eigenvalues and eigenvectors of a matrix and using them to diagonalize a matrix 4. Determine the diagonal form of a matrix 5. Apply the concept of Vector calculus to evaluate line integrals, surface integrals using Green’s theorem 6. Determine whether a given function is analytic and find its derivative. Module Details. Hrs. 1 Laplace Transform: Laplace Transform of standard functions, Properties (Linearity, Change of scale) First shifting theorem (without proof), Laplace Transform of derivatives, L [ # (%)% ] , L [t n f (t)] , L [∫𝑓 (𝑢)𝑑𝑢%+] Self-Learning Topics Heaviside Unit Step Function, Second shifting theorem 08 2 Inverse Laplace Transform: Inverse Laplace Transform by using partial fraction method, Convolution theorem Self-Learning Topics Application of Laplace Transform to solve ordinary differential equations 06 3 Matrices: Eigen values and Eigen vectors, properties (without proof), Caley Hamilton Theorem (only statement) and its applications. Diagonalization of a matrix. Self-Learning Topics Verification of Caley Hamilton Theorem. 08 4 Vector Calculus: Irrotational and Solenoidal vectors. Line integrals – definition and problems. Green’s theorem (without proof) in a plane. Self-Learning Topics Scalar and Vector Point function, Vector differential operator. Gradient, Divergence and Curl. Verification of Green’s theorem 08 5 Complex Variable: Functions of complex variable, Analytic functions, necessary and sufficient condition for a function to be analytic (without proof),Harmonic functions Self-Learning Topics Cauchy Riemann Equation in Polar form, Orthogonal trajectories 06 Assessment:

## Page 331

Term Work: General Instructions: 1) Batch wise tutorials are to be conducted. The number of students per batch should be as per University pattern for practical. 2) Students must be encouraged to write at least 6 class tutorials on entire syllabus. A group of 4-6 students should be assigned a self-learning topic. Students should prepare a presentation/problem solving of 10-15 minutes. This should be considered as mini project in Engineering mathematics. This project should be graded for 10 marks depending on the performance of the students The distribution of Term Work marks will be as follows – 1. Attendance (Theory and Tutorial) 05 marks 2. Class Tutorials on entire syllabus 10 marks 3. Mini project 10 marks Internal Assessment for 20 marks: Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remaining contents (approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in Test I). Duration of each test shall be one hour. End Semester Examination: Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of respective lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum. 1. Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks 2. Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum 3. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 then part (b) will be from any module other than module 3) 4. Only Four questions need to be solved. References: 1. Higher Engineering Mathematics, Dr. B. S. Grewal, Khanna Publication 2. Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Erwin Kreyszig, Wiley Eastern Limited, 3. Advanced Engineering Mathematics, R. K. Jain and S. R. K. Iyengar, Narosa publication, 4. Vector Analysis, Murray R. Spiegel, Schaum Series 4. Complex Variables and Applications, Brown and Churchill, McGraw Hill education

## Page 332

Course Code Course / Subject Name Credits PPC302 Packaging Introduction and Concepts 3 Objectives: 1. Study the basic concepts of packaging technology. 2. Understand marketing as an integral tool to packaging. 3. Recognize the importance of product-package interaction and its quality aspects in packaging. 4. Study the overall perspective of the packaging industry. Outcomes: Upon successful completion of this course, the learner will be able to….. 1. Effectively observe and compare the different package forms. 2. Describe the importance of compatibility studies and their associated parameters. 3. Analyze the various hazards and environmental issues related to Packaging. 4. Analyze the aesthetics of a package and the differentiating factors. 5. Elaborate the importance of quality in packaging. 6. Explain significance of packaging in terms of today’s market. Module Details. Hrs. 1 Packaging Introduction: Packaging – History, Need and Evolution; Packaging Functions – Contain, Preserve, Protect, Inform, Identify, Sell; Packaging Hazards, Packaging Classifications. Importance of Packaging in Supply Chain 4 2 Packaging as a Marketing Tool: Market Considerations – Importance of Demography and Psychography, Retail Market (POP), Equity and Brand Name; Package Embellishment – Graphic Design Elements; Shelf Appeal Studies - Recall Questioning, Focus Group, Eye-Tracking, S-scope studies. 4 3 Product-Package Compatibility Studies: Product Characteristics: Physical (nature, shape, size, texture, Centre of gravity, etc.), Chemical, Biological and Effect of moisture, oxygen and other gases; Package Characteristics: Material, Physical, Chemical, Biological, Permeability. Live Problems / Case Studies. 6 4 Introduction to Quality: Quality Control and Quality Assurance - Significance in packaging; Role of specifications in defect free packaging; Significance of Testing; Introduction to Standards, Conditioning, Sampling; Read & understand the standards & their revisions and Examples; Certification for product safety and quality 4 5 Packaging Perspectives: Packaging Costs – Various elements of costing; Packaging – Environmental considerations and waste management; Introduction to Packaging Laws and Regulations; Packaging Scenario – World and India – Comparison, Scope and Growth in India. 3

## Page 333

Theory Examinations: a) End Semester Examination: Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of respective lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum. 1. Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks 2. Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum 3. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 then part (b) will be from any module other than module 3) 4. Only Four questions need to be solved. b) Internal Assessment for 20 marks: Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remaining contents (approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in Test I). Duration of each test shall be one hour. References: a. Soroka W., “Fundamentals of Packaging Technology”, 3rd Ed, IoPP, 2002. b. Paine F. A., “The Packaging User’s Handbook”, 1st Ed, Blackie Academic & Professional, 1991. c. Byett J. et al., “Packaging Technology”, 2nd Ed, The Institute of Packaging (SA), 2001. d. Selke, S. E. M., Culter, J. D. and Hernandez, R. J., “Plastics Packaging: Properties, processing, Applications and Regulation”, Carl Hanser Verlag, USA, 2004. e. Joseph F. H, Robert J. K, Hallie F, “Handbook of Package Engineering”, Third Edition, Technomic Publishing, 1998. f. Yam K. L., “The Wiley Encyclopedia of Packaging Technology”, Third Edition, Wiley, 2009.

## Page 334

Course Code Course / Subject Name Credits PPC303 Introduction to Printing Technology 3 Objectives: 1. Introducing concepts of printing technology along with its evolution and necessity in today’s society. 2. Understand the basic principles of various Printing processes. 3. Study basic image reproduction process, contribution of various elements in designing and typesetting. 4. Study of various materials used in printing processes. Outcomes: Upon successful completion of this course, the learner will be able to 1. Distinguish various printing principles like planography, intaglio and relief. 2. Compare the process of image generation based on typography, reprography and layout making. 3. Analyze the various Press configurations of Offset, Gravure, Flexography and Letterpress. 4. Classify Inks and Substrates used in various Printing technologies. 5. Recognize various materials used in printing operations and distinguish Print finishing operations. 6. Choose an appropriate Printing process for any given Printing job. Module Details. Hrs. 1 Introduction Printing – History, Need and Evolution. Definition of Printing- Various forms of communication- Conventional Printing & Digital Printing processes 02 2 Pre-Press Typography, Typesetting Original and its types Films Types of films, generation of positive and negative films, line and half tone film generation, latent image formation and development. Exposure – definition, types, effect of over and under exposure on films. Need of color separation, Additive and subtractive color theories. Layout and imposition- need and significance of imposition technique. DTP Introduction to DTP. Proofing technique: press proofers- offset, flexography, and gravure. Digital proofers. 06 3 Press Letter press printing technology- Flat bed, Platen press, Rotary Press and its applications. Offset- Sheet fed and Web fed machines- Inline, Stack, CIC and Perfecting mechanism and its applications. Gravure and Flexography- Inline, Stack and CIC Configurations and its applications in Package Printing. Screen printing. Hybrid press and its application in Packaging Industry. Introduction to Security features in Printing 06 4 Post Press Cutting, slitting, trimming. Binding, gathering, collating, insetting. Binding style-saddle stitching, section binding, perfect binding. Finishing- Die-cutting, Foil stamping, Embossing, Coating, Varnishing and Lamination 03

## Page 335

5 Ink and Substrate Classification of ink- paste, liquid. Basic ingredients of inks pigment resin, vehicle, additive etc. Printing inks-Rheological properties of inks,Drying methods- Chemical drying, Physical drying. Substrates used in Package printing-Standard paper sizes-British and ISO. Basic properties of Paper, Paperboard, Plastic and Foils and their importance in Package Printing 04 Theory Examinations: a) End Semester Examination: Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of respective lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum. 1. Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks 2. Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum 3. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 then part (b) will be from any module other than module 3) 4. Only Four questions need to be solved. b) Internal Assessment for 20 marks: Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remaining contents (approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in Test I). Duration of each test shall be one hour. References: 1. Handbook of Print Media, Helmet Kipphan, Springer Publications 2. Handbook of Print and Production – Michael Barnard, John Peacock. 3. Printing Materials Science and Technology Vol. 24, J. Anthony Bristow 4. The Complete technology book on Printing Inks, Asia Pacific Business Press 5. Typesetting – Composition – Geoff, Barlow 6. Handbook of Typography – Kailas Tahle 7. Printing Technology 5th edition, Michael Adams 8. The Print and Production manual, PIRA

## Page 336

Course Code Course / Subject Name Credits PPC 304 Paper based Packaging Materials 3 Objectives: 1. Gain the basic knowledge of pulping and paper making process. 2. Study the different types of paper-based packages and their manufacturing process. 3. Understand the designing process and estimation of material requirements for major forms of paper-based packaging 4. Study the major testing standards and properties of paper-based packaging materials as per standards Outcomes: Upon successful completion of this course, the learner will be able to….. 1. Explain the raw materials involved in pulping and paper making process. 2. Explain the operations involved in pulping and paper making process 3. Identify the manufacturing process for different types of paper-based Packages. 4. Design and estimate material requirements for major forms of paper-based packaging. 5. Test and analyze the major properties of paper-based packaging materials. 6. Describe the manufacturing process for different types of paper-based Packages. Module Details. Hrs. 1 Raw Materials and Preparation: Fibrous raw materials, Wood structure and morphology, Non-wood fibers and recycled paper, Non fibrous Additives, Sizing Agents, Binders, Fillers and Additives, Wood harvesting, logging, sorting, Debarking, Chipping, Screening and Storage. Pulping: Types- & Processing of pulp for paper making. 03 2 Paper Making: Preparation of pulp – Repulping/dispersion, Beating and Refining, Bleaching, Recycled paper – Deinking, Washing and Flotation Fourdrinier Paper Machine- Dry and Wet end operations- Surface treatments- Sizing, Coating and Super calendaring. Board making: Multiply Board, Cylinder Forming machine, Vat types - Pressure and suction forming. Pressing, drying and finishing. 05 3 Paper properties: Optical properties – Colour, brightness, smoothness, gloss, opacity and rub resistance, Strength properties–thickness, grammage, tensile, tear, bursting strength, stiffness, Grain direction, Wire and Felt sides 02 4 Types of papers: Printing grades-uncoated papers, coated papers, Newsprint, office paper-Packaging paper grades, properties and applications - Tissue, Parchment, greaseproof, glassine, wet strength paper, stretchable paper, coated paper- Boards used in packaging- Solid bleached/unbleached, folding box board, white lined chip board. 05

## Page 337

Paper based packaging: Paper bags and Sacks–Manufacturing and Applications- Types of bags- Multiwall Paper bags – Composite containers Manufacturing and Applications Fiber drums- Regenerated Cellulosic films. 5 Cartons and Boxes: Folding Cartons – Styles and Applications- Designing and manufacturing Set up – Creasing and Cutting operations - Box applications. Corrugated Fiber Board(CFB) - Types of flutes and their characteristics - Manufacturing process of CFB- Properties and Significance of starch glue and Making of CFB box- Styles of boxes- Calculation on weight of box of various styles. Solid Fiber board box manufacturing, materials, and applications- Moulded pulp board – moulding process, applications 06 Theory Examinations: a) End Semester Examination: Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of respective lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum. 1. Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks 2. Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum 3. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 then part (b) will be from any module other than module 3) 4. Only Four questions need to be solved. b) Internal Assessment for 20 marks: Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remaining contents (approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in Test I). Duration of each test shall be one hour. References: 1. Hand book of Paper and Board, Herbert Holik, Wiley-VCH, 2006. 2. Paper and paperboard Packaging Technology, Mark J. Kirwan, Blackwell Publishing, 2005. 3. Handbook of Pulp Vol.1, Herbert Sixta, Wiley-VCH, 2005. 4. Handbook for pulp and paper technologists, G.A. Smook, Angus Wilde Publications, 2001.

## Page 338

Course Code Course / Subject Name Credits PPC 305 Glass, Metal and Textile based Packaging Materials 3 Objectives: 1. Understand the use and application of primary packaging materials i.e. glass and metal. 2. Study the types of textile materials and their application 3. Learn the basics package forms and the technology to manufacture them for the above listed materials. Outcomes: Upon successful completion of this course, the learner will be able to….. 1. Describe and interpret the various manufacturing process for glass bottles, metal cans and tubes and textile-based bags. 2. Explain various design aspects for various types of package forms made up of glass. 3. Explain various design aspects for various types of package forms made up of metal. 4. Summarize the aerosol technology and its wide application in packaging. 5. Discuss various quality control and testing procedures for these package forms. 6. Describe the basics of fabric and textile technology to produce bags of various materials like jute, hemp etc. Module Details. Hrs. 1 Glass in Packaging Introduction and History of Glass Materials - Composition - Chemical Structure - Glass properties - Glass Industry - Market Overview - Glass Manufacturing Process Types of Glass - Types of glass containers - Advantages and Disadvantages - Applications 04 2 Glass Design and Testing Glass bottle design - Specifications and Quality Control - Defects Standards for Testing: Glass - Alkalinity, verticality test, Annealing defects, dimensions and capacity along with its significance, melting point of glass, thermal shock, chemical resistance, constituents testing etc. 03 3 Metals in Packaging - I Important Metals in Packaging and their properties - Market and Industry Overview Aluminium based: Conversion processes for Sheets - Aluminium Foil, properties and their applications Steel based: Stainless and Galvanized Steel - Coated steels like Tinplate, Tin-free Steel, Polymer coated - Manufacturing Process and Description Metal Cans: History of Metal Cans – Three-piece and Two-piece Cans - Types Cans - Welded and Seamless Cans - Can Dimensioning - Specifications and Quality Control – Defects 05

4 Metals in Packaging - II Collapsible Tubes - Manufacturing process - Design of Metal Collapsible Tubes - Advantages and Disadvantages of Metal Collapsible tubes 06

## Page 339

Aerosol Containers - Classification of Aerosols - Design Features - Components - Filling Process - Advantages and Disadvantages of Aerosols - Applications Overview of metal corrosion and anticorrosion techniques Standards for testing: Metal - Coating thickness, Scotch Tape test for tin lacquers, lacquer curing test for metals, rust resistance, salt drop test for corrosion etc. 5 Textile based Packaging Materials for textile-based packaging - Raw materials like Jute, Hemp etc. - Terminologies - Sack Manufacturing Process - Jute Bag classification like Hessians, Tarpaulins and Twilled - Significance - Applications - Comparison with Plastic Bags Textile - Weight of Hessian, Properties Woven and Nonwoven plastics bags 03 Theory Examinations: a) End Semester Examination: Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of respective lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum. 1. Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks 2. Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum 3. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 then part (b) will be from any module other than module 3) 4. Only Four questions need to be solved. b) Internal Assessment for 20 marks: Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remaining contents (approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in Test I). Duration of each test shall be one hour. References: 1. K. L. Yam,The Wiley Encyclopedia of Packaging Technology, 3rd ed., Wiley, 2009 2. W. Soroka, Fundametals of Packaging Technology, 4th ed., IoPP, 2009 3. J. F. Hanlon, Handbook of Package Engineering, 3rd ed., CRC Press, 1998 4. F. A. Paine, The Packaging User’s Handbook, Springer, 1990

## Page 340

Course Code Course / Subject Name Credits PPL301 Principles of Graphic Arts and Design-I 1.5 Objectives: 1. Study the basics of how to create a design. 2. Understand the fundamental principles of graphic design and their types. 3. Study the concept of colour and their effects on design. 4. Understand the method to create visual image and layout. 5. Learn and understand the various software used for designing. Outcomes: Upon successful completion of this course, the learner will be able to 1. Create a design based on specific requirement. 2. Analyze the usage of particular colour and text in Package design. 3. Generate various design layouts with proper visual impacts. 4. Create a design for folding carton with appropriate software. 5. Edit an image and use it in a Package design. 6. Generate Logos for a given concept or product. Term Work: (Comprises both a & b) a) List of Experiments: Sr. No. Details 1 To create thumbnails and rough sketches for logos, visiting cards as well as stationery design using Corel DRAW 2 To prepare a brochure using Corel DRAW 3 To create a label design for any given product using Corel DRAW 4 To create a design layout for folding carton of given dimensions using Corel DRAW 5 To create step and repeat (ups) using Corel DRAW 6 To create a social media ad newspaper ad using Corel DRAW 7 To cut-out an image using Adobe Photoshop 8 To apply various effects on the image using Adobe Photoshop 9 To used curves on image using Adobe Photoshop b) Mini-Project: A group of 4-6 students should be given a design assignment. This should be considered as mini project in PGAD-I. This project should be graded for 10 marks depending on the performance of the students The distribution of Term Work marks will be as follows – 1. Attendance 05 marks 2. Laboratory Work 10 marks 3. Mini project 10 marks End Semester Practical/Oral Examination (for 25 marks): Under single head of examination, including Practical (15 marks assessment) followed by oral (10 marks assessment) to be conducted by internal and external examiners.

## Page 341

Course Code Course Name Credits PPL302 Screen Printing Laboratory 2 Objectives: 1. Introduce the concept of screen-printing techniques. 2. Understand the screen-printing technology for four color printing. 3. Gain knowledge about different applications of screen printing. Outcomes: Upon successful completion of this course, the learner will be able to…. 1. Prepare screen printing image carrier by direct, indirect photographic methods. 2. Demonstrate the use of different photographic films for mesh preparation according to image. 3. Produce different printed samples for various substrates like fabric, glass, acrylic, wood by selecting suitable inks and coatings for that material. 4. Produce and analyze a halftone dot image generated for four color printing and registration of color. 5. Analyze the common faults in Screen Printing Process Term Work: (Comprises both a & b) a) List of Experiments: Sr. No. Details 1 Screen preparation and printing by direct method. 2 Screen preparation and printing by indirect method. 3 Screen preparation and printing by direct indirect method. 4 Printing two colour image on paper and textile. 5 To Planning, Designingand Production of 16 page brochure using screen printing. 6 Screen Printing on textile/PVC/Glass – T-Shirt. b) Mini Project: A group of 4-6 students should be assigned a mini project on Screen Printing. This project should be graded for 10 marks depending on the performance of the students The distribution of Term Work marks will be as follows – 1. Attendance 05 marks 2. Laboratory Work 10 marks 3. Mini project 10 marks

## Page 342

Course Code Course Name Credits PPSBL301 Skill Based Lab: Packaging Material Testing - I 1.5 Objectives: 1. To understand various standards w.r.t testing of paper, paper board and plastic films. 2. To understand the difference in physical properties of paper and plastics used in packaging. Outcomes: Upon successful completion of this course, the learner will be able to…. 1. Check grammage and thickness of paper, paper board and plastic films. 2. Find out water absorption capacity of paper / board. 3. Perform strength tests related to Stiffness, Burst, Puncture and Tear. 4. Evaluate the strength characteristics of paper and plastic films. 5. Analyse the plies in a CFB and identify its flute type. 6. Evaluate the strength of a CFB. Term Work: (Comprises both a & b) a) List of Experiments : Sr. No. Details 1 To find Tearing Strength of paper. 2 To find Stiffness of board. 3 To Identify flute types and dimensions of CFB. 4 To find individual grammage of CFB plies. 5 To find Box Compression strength of a CFB 6 To find RCT of paper and ECT of CFB 7 To perform tensile strength on paper and plastic films. 8 To perform Dart Impact Test on Plastic Films. 9 To find the specular gloss of plastics / paper / paperboard. b) Mini Project: A group of 4-6 students should be assigned a mini project on various aspects of Packaging Material Testing. This project should be graded for 10 marks depending on the performance of the students The distribution of Term Work marks will be as follows – 1. Attendance 05 marks 2. Laboratory Work 10 marks 3. Mini project 10 marks End Semester Practical/Oral Examination (for 25 marks): Under single head of examination, including Practical (15 marks assessment) followed by oral (10 marks assessment) to be conducted by internal and external examiners.

## Page 343

Course Code Course Name Credits PPPBL301 Mini Project 1A 2 Objectives 1. To acquaint with the process of identifying the needs and converting it into the problem. 2. To familiarize the process of solving the problem in a group. 3. To acquaint with the process of applying basic engineering fundamentals to attempt solutions to the problems. 4. To inculcate the process of self-learning and research. Outcome: Learner will be able to… 1. Identify problems based on societal /research needs. 2. Apply Knowledge and skill to solve societal problems in a group. 3. Develop interpersonal skills to work as member of a group or leader. 4. Draw the proper inferences from available results through theoretical/ experimental/simulations. 5. Analyse the impact of solutions in societal and environmental context for sustainable development. 6. Use standard norms of engineering practices 7. Excel in written and oral communication. 8. Demonstrate capabilities of self-learning in a group, which leads to lifelong learning. 9. Demonstrate project management principles during project work. Guidelines for Mini Project • Students shall form a group of 3 to 4 students, while forming a group shall not be allowed less than three or more than four students, as it is a group activity. • Students should do survey and identify needs, which shall be converted into problem statement for mini project in consultation with faculty supervisor/head of department/internal committee of faculties. • Students shall submit implementation plan in the form of Gantt/PERT/CPM chart, which will cover weekly activity of mini project. • A logbook to be prepared by each group, wherein group can record weekly work progress, guide/supervisor can verify and record notes/comments. • Faculty supervisor may give inputs to students during mini project activity; however, focus shall be on self-learning. • Students in a group shall understand problem effectively, propose multiple solution and select best possible solution in consultation with guide/ supervisor. • Students shall convert the best solution into working model using various components of their domain areas and demonstrate. • The solution to be validated with proper justification and report to be compiled in standard format of University of Mumbai. • With the focus on the self-learning, innovation, addressing societal problems and entrepreneurship quality development within the students through the Mini Projects, it is preferable that a single project of appropriate level and quality to be carried out in two semesters by all the groups of the students. i.e. Mini Project 1 in semester III and IV. Similarly, Mini Project 2 in semesters V and VI. • However, based on the individual students or group capability, with the mentor’s recommendations, if the proposed Mini Project adhering to the qualitative aspects mentioned above gets completed in odd semester, then that group can be allowed to work on the extension of the Mini Project with suitable improvements/modifications or a completely new project idea in even semester. This policy can be adopted on case by case basis. Guidelines for Assessment of Mini Project:

## Page 344

Term Work • The review/ progress monitoring committee shall be constituted by head of departments of each institute. The progress of mini project to be evaluated on continuous basis, minimum two reviews in each semester. • In continuous assessment focus shall also be on each individual student, assessment based on individual’s contribution in group activity, their understanding and response to questions. • Distribution of Term work marks for both semesters shall be as below: o Marks awarded by guide/supervisor based on logbook : 10 o Marks awarded by review committee : 10 o Quality of Project report : 05 Review/progress monitoring committee may consider following points for assessment based on either one year or half year project as mentioned in general guidelines. One-year project: • In first semester entire theoretical solution shall be ready, including components/system selection and cost analysis. Two reviews will be conducted based on presentation given by students group. § First shall be for finalisation of problem § Second shall be on finalisation of proposed solution of problem. • In second semester expected work shall be procurement of component’s/systems, building of working prototype, testing and validation of results based on work completed in an earlier semester. § First review is based on readiness of building working prototype to be conducted. § Second review shall be based on poster presentation cum demonstration of working model in last month of the said semester. Half-year project: • In this case in one semester students’ group shall complete project in all aspects including, o Identification of need/problem o Proposed final solution o Procurement of components/systems o Building prototype and testing • Two reviews will be conducted for continuous assessment, § First shall be for finalisation of problem and proposed solution § Second shall be for implementation and testing of solution. Assessment criteria of Mini Project: Mini Project shall be assessed based on following criteria: 1. Quality of survey/ need identification 2. Clarity of Problem definition based on need. 3. Innovativeness in solutions 4. Feasibility of proposed problem solutions and selection of best solution 5. Cost effectiveness 6. Societal impact 7. Innovativeness 8. Cost effectiveness and Societal impact 9. Full functioning of working model as per stated requirements 10. Effective use of skill sets 11. Effective use of standard engineering norms 12. Contribution of an individual’s as member or leader 13. Clarity in written and oral communication

## Page 345

• In one year, project, first semester evaluation may be based on first six criteria’s and remaining may be used for second semester evaluation of performance of students in mini project. • In case of half year project all criteria’s in generic may be considered for evaluation of performance of students in mini project. Guidelines for Assessment of Mini Project Practical/Oral Examination: • Report should be prepared as per the guidelines issued by the University of Mumbai. • Mini Project shall be assessed through a presentation and demonstration of working model by the student project group to a panel of Internal and External Examiners preferably from industry or research organisations having experience of more than five years approved by head of Institution. • Students shall be motivated to publish a paper based on the work in Conferences/students competitions. Mini Project shall be assessed based on following points: 1. Quality of problem and Clarity 2. Innovativeness in solutions 3. Cost effectiveness and Societal impact 4. Full functioning of working model as per stated requirements 5. Effective use of skill sets 6. Effective use of standard engineering norms 7. Contribution of an individual’s as member or leader 8. Clarity in written and oral communication

## Page 346

AC -23/02/2021

Item No. – 6.11-8

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI

Bachelor of Engineering

in

Mechatronics Engineering

Direct Second Year (Sem. III) Admitted Students for the

current Academic Year 2020 -21(Only)

(REV - 2019 ‘C’ Scheme) from Academic Year 2019 – 20

Under

FACULTY OF

SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY

(As per AICTE guidelines with effect from the academic year 2019 –2020)

## Page 347

University of Mumbai B. E. (Mechatronics Engineering), Rev 2019 2 Program Structure for Second Year

Engineering Semester III & IV

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI

(With Effect from 2020 -

2021 ) Semester III

Course

Code

Course Name Teaching Scheme

(Contact Hours) Credits Assigned

Theory Pract

. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total

MTC301 Engineering

Mathematics -III 3 -- 1 3 -- 1 4

MTC302 Data Structures and

Algorithms 3 -- 3 -- 3

MTC303 Engineering Materials

and Metallurgy 3 -- -- 3 -- -- 3

MTC304 Basic Electronics and

Digital Circuit Design 3 -- -- 3 -- -- 3

MTC305 Electrical Circuits and

Machines

3

--

--

3

--

--

3

MTL301 Data Structures and

Algorithms Laboratory -- 2 -- -- 1 -- 1

MTL302 Applied Electronics

Laboratory -I -- 2 -- -- 1 -- 1

MTL303 Electrical and

Electronics Workshop -- 2 -- -- 1 -- 1

MTSBL301 CAD – Modeling

Laboratory# -- 4 -- -- 2 -- 2

MTPBL301 Mini Project – 1A -- 4$ -- -- 2 -- 2

Total 15 14 1 15 07 1 23

Course

Code

Course Name Examination

Scheme

Theory Term

Wor

k Pract

/Oral

Total

Internal

Assessment End

Sem.

Exam Exam.

Duratio

n

(in Hrs)

Test1 Test2 Avg

.

MTC301 Engineering

Mathematics -III 20 20 20 80 3 25 -- 125

MTC302 Data Structures and

Algorithms 20 20 20 80 3 -- -- 100

MTC303 Engineering Materials

and Metallurgy 20 20 20 80 3 -- -- 100

MTC304 Basic Electronics and

Digital Circuit Design 20 20 20 80 3 -- -- 100

MTC305 Electrical Circuits and 20 20 20 80 3 -- -- 100

## Page 348

University of Mumbai B. E. (Mechatronics Engineering), Rev 2019 3 Machines

MTL301 Data Structures and

Algorithms Laboratory -- -- -- -- -- 25 25 50

MTL302 Applied Electronics

Laboratory -I -- -- -- -- -- 25 25 50

MTL303 Electrical and

Electronics Workshop -- -- -- -- -- 25 25 50

MTSBL301 CAD – Modeling

Laboratory# -- -- -- -- -- 25 25 50

MTPBL301 Mini Project – 1A -- -- -- -- -- 25 25 50

Total -- -- 100 400 -- 150 125 775

$ indicates work load of Learner (Not Faculty), for Mini

Project #Course common with Mechanical Engineering,

SBL – Skill Based

Laboratory PBL –

Project Based Learning

## Page 349

University of Mumbai B. E. (Mechatronics Engineering), Rev 2019 4 Course Code Course Name Credits

MTC301 Engineering Mathematics -III 04

Pre-requisite: Engineering Mathematics -I, Engineering Mathematics -II,

Objectives: The course is aimed

1. To familiarize with the Laplace Transform, Inverse Laplace Transform of various functions,

itsapplications.

2. To acquaint with the concept of Fourier Series, its complex form and enhance the problem

solvingskills

3. To familiarize with the concept of complex variables, C -R equations withapplications.

4. To study the application of the knowledge of matrices and numerical methods in

complexengineering problems.

Outcomes: On successful completion of course learner/student will be able to:

1. Apply the concept of Laplace transform to solve the real integrals in engineeringproblems.

2. Apply the concept of inverse Laplace transform of various functions in engineeringproblems.

3. Expand the periodic function by using Fourier series for real life problems and complex

engineering problems.

4. Find orthogonal trajectories and analytic function by using basic concepts of complex

variabletheory.

5. Apply Mat rix algebra to solve the engineeringproblems.

6. Solve Partial differential equations by applying numerical solution and analytical methods for

one dimensional heat and waveequations

Module Detailed Contents Hrs.

01 Module: Laplace Transform

1.1 Definition of Laplace transform, Condition of Existence of Laplace transform,

1.2 Laplace Transform (L) of Standard Functions like 𝑒𝑎𝑡, 𝑠𝑖𝑛(𝑎𝑡), 𝑐𝑜𝑠(𝑎𝑡), 𝑠𝑖𝑛ℎ(𝑎𝑡),

𝑐𝑜𝑠ℎ(𝑎𝑡) and 𝑡𝑛 ,𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒 𝑛≥0.

1.3 Properties of Laplace Transform: Linearity, First Shifting theorem, Second Shifting

Theorem, change of scale Property, multiplication by t, Division by t, Laplace

Transform of derivatives and integrals (Properties without proof).

1.4 Evaluation of integra ls by using Laplace Transformation. ]

Self-learning topics: Heaviside‟s Unit Step function, Laplace Transform. of

Periodic functions, Dirac Delta Function.

07

02 Module: Inverse Laplace Transform

2.1 Inverse Laplace Transform, Linearity property, use of standard formulaeto

find inverse Laplace Transform, finding Inverse Laplace transform using

derivative

2.2 Partial fractions method & first shift property to find inverseLaplace

transform.

2.3 Inverse Laplace transform using Convolution theorem (withoutproof)

Self-learning Topics: Applications to solve initial and boundary value problems

involving ordinary differential equations. 06

## Page 350

University of Mumbai B. E. (Mechatronics Engineering), Rev 2019 5

03 Module: Fourier Series:

3.1 Dirichlet‟s conditions, Definition of Fourier series and Parseval‟sIdentity

(withoutproof)

3.2 Fourier series of periodic function with period 2π and2l,

3.3 Fourier series of even and oddfunctions

3.4 Half range Sine and Cosine Series.

Self-learning Topics: Complex form of Fourier Series, orthogonal and

orthonormal set of functions, Fourier Transform. 07

04 Module: Complex Variables:

4.1 Function f(z) of complex variable, limit, continuity and differentiability of f(z), 07

Analytic function, necessary and sufficient conditions for f(z) to be analytic

(without proof),

4.2 Cauchy -Riemann equations in cartesian coordinates (withoutproof)

4.3 Milne -Thomson method to determine analytic function f(z) when real part (u)or

Imaginary part (v) or its combination (u+v or u -v) isgiven.

4.4 Harmonic function, Harmonic conjugate and orthogonaltrajectories

Self-learning Topics: Conformal mapping, linear, bilinear mapping, cross ratio,

fixed points and standard transformations

05 Module: Matrices:

5.1 Characteristic equation, Eigen values and Eigen vectors, Properties ofEigen

values and Eigen vectors. ( No theorems/proof )

5.2 Cayley -Hamilton theorem (without proof): Application to find the inverse

of the given square matrix and to determine the given higher degree

polynomialmatrix.

5.3 Functions of square matrix

5.4 Similarity of matrices, Diagonalization ofmatrices

Self-learning Topic s: Verification of Cayley Hamilton theorem, Minimal

polynomial and Derogatory matrix & Quadratic Forms (Congruent transformation

& Orthogonal Reduction) 06

06 Module: Numerical methods for PDE

6.1 Introduction of Partial Differential equations, method of separation of

variables, Vibrations of string, Analytical method for one dimensional heatand

wave equations. (onlyproblems)

6.2 Crank Nicholsonmethod

6.3 Bender Schmidtmethod

Self-learning Topics: Analytical methods of solving two and three dimensional

problems. 06

Term Work:

General Instructions:

1. Students must be encouraged to write at least 6 class tutorials on entiresyllabus.

2. A group of 4 -6 students should be assigned a self -learning topic. Students should prepare a

presentation/problem solving of 10 -15 minutes. This should be considered as mini project in

Engineering Mathematics. This project should be graded for 10 marks depending on the

performance of thestudents.

The distribution of Term Work marks will be as follows –

1. Attendance (Theory and Tutorial) 05 marks

2. Class Tutorials on entire syllabus 10 marks

3. Mini project 10 marks

## Page 351

University of Mumbai B. E. (Mechatronics Engineering), Rev 2019 6 Assessment :

Internal Assessment Test:

Assessment consists of two class tests of 20 marks each. The first class test (Internal Assessment I)

is to be conducted when approx. 40% syllabus is completed and second class test (Internal

Assessment II) when additional 35% syllabus is completed. Duration of each test shall be one hour.

End Semester Theory Examination:

1. Question paper will comprise of total 06 questions, each c arrying 20marks.

2. Total 04 questions need to besolved.

3. Question No: 01 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein 4 sub -questions

of 5 marks each will be asked.

4. Remaining questions will be randomly selected from all themodules.

5. Weightage of eac h module will be proportional to number of respective lecture hours as

mentioned inthe syllabus.

References:

1. Engineering Mathematics, Dr. B. S. Grewal, KhannaPublication

2. Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Erwin Kreyszig, Wiley EasternLimited,

3. Advanced Engineering Mathematics, R. K. Jain and S.R.K. Iyengar, Narosapublication

4. Advanced Engineering Mathematics, H.K. Das, S. ChandPublication

5. Higher Engineering Mathematics B.V. Ramana, McGraw HillEducation

6. Complex Variables and Applications, Brown and Churchi ll, McGraw -Hilleducation,

7. Text book of Matrices, Shanti Narayan and P K Mittal, S. ChandPublication

8. Laplace transforms, Murray R. Spiegel, Schaum‟s OutlineSeries

Links for online NPTEL/SWAYAM courses:

1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/111/104/111104085/

2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/111/106/111106139/

## Page 352

University of Mumbai B. E. (Mechatronics Engineering), Rev 2019 7 Course Code Course Name Credits

MTC302 Data Structures and Algorithms 03

Prerequisite: FEC205 C programming

Objectives:

1. To design and implement various data structures and theiroperations.

2. To introduce the concept of algorithm and itsanalysis.

3. To learn various algorithm designingstrategies.

4. To introduce the appropriate search method on a givenproblem

5. To develop application using suitable data structure andalgorithms.

Outcomes: Learner will be able to…

1. Implement various operatio ns using linear datastructures.

2. Apply concepts of Trees and Graphs to a givenproblem.

3. Analyse time and space complexity of analgorithm.

4. Apply divide and conquer strategy to solveproblems.

5. Apply the concept of Greedy and Dynamic Programming approach to solv eproblems.

6. Apply the concept of backtracking, branch and bound strategy to solveproblems.

Module Detailed Contents Hrs.

01 Introduction : Introduction to Data Structures,

Types of Data Structures : Linear and non -linear data structures

Stack: Introduction to Stack, Stack as ADT, Operations on stack, ]

Queues Introduction to Queue, Queue as ADT, Operations on Queue,

03

02 Linked List: Introduction to Linked List, Types of Linked List: Singly Linked list,

Circular linked list, Operations on linked list, 02

03 Trees : Introduction to Trees, Types of Trees: Binary tree, Operations on binary

tree, Traversal of binary trees, Binary search tree,

Graph: Graph Terminologies, Graph Representation,

Graph traversal techniques: Depth first search (DFS) and Breadth First

search(BFS)

05

04 Analysis of Algorithms: Introduction to Algorithm, Analysis of algorithm and it‟s

characteristics, Time and Space complexity, Asymptotic notations.

Divide and Conquer: Introduction, Binary search,

Merge sort, Quick sort

03

05 Greedy Method Approach :

General

Method,

Knapsack

problem,

Minimum cost spanning tree - Kruskal‟s algorithm and Prim‟s algorithm

Dynamic Programming Approach :

General Method

Travelling salesman

problem

04

## Page 353

University of Mumbai B. E. (Mechatronics Engineering), Rev 2019 8 06 Uninformed

SearchTechniques: DFS,

BFS, Uniform cost search,

Informed

SearchMethods:

Best First Search, A*, IDA*, 05

Assessment :

Internal Assessment for 20 marks: Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests First test based on

approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remaining contents (approximately 40% but

excluding contents covered in Test I). Duration of each test shall be onehour.

End Semester Theory Examination:

1. Question paper will comprise of total 06 questions, each carrying20marks.

2. Total 04 questions need to besolved.

3. Question No: 01 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus

wherein sub - questions of 2 to 5 marks will beasked.

4. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature.( e.g. Suppose Q.2 has

part (a)from module3 then part (b) will b e from any module other

than module3)

5. In question paper weightage of each module will be proportional

to numberof respective lecture hrs as mentioned in thesyllabus.

Text Books:

1. Data structures using C by Tenenbaum, Langsam, Augenstein, Pearson.

2. Data Structures using C, Reema Thareja,Oxford.

3. C and Data structures, Prof.P.S.Deshpande, Prof.O.G.Kakde, DreamtechPress.

4. Introduction to Data Structure and its Applications Jean -Paul Tremblay, P. G.Sorenson

5. Stauart Russell and Peter Norvig, “Artificial Intelligence: A Modern approach”, 3rd Edition

PrenticeHall, New Jersey, 1995.2)

References:

1. Data Structures Using C & C++, Rajesh K. Shukla, Wiley -India.

2. Computer Algorithms by Ellis Horowitz and Sartaj Sahni, UniversitiesPress.

3. Data Structures and Algori thm Analysis in C,MarkA.Weiss ,Pearson

4. ALGORITHMS Design and Analysis, Bhasin, OXFORD. Elaine Rich and Kelvin

Knight, “Artificial Intelligence”, 3 rd Edition Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi,1991.

Links for online NPTEL/SWAYAM courses:

1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106/102/106102064/

2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106/106/106106127/

3. https://swayam.gov.in/nd1_noc20_cs71

4. https://swayam.gov.in/nd1_noc20_cs93

## Page 354

University of Mumbai B. E. (Mechatronics Engineering), Rev 2019 9 Course Code Course Name Credits

MTC303 Engineering Materials and Metallurgy 03

Prerequisite : FEC103 Engineering Chemistry -I, FEC203 Engineering Chemistry -II

Objectives

1. To prepare the students understand basic engineering materials, their properties & selection

andapplications.

2. To familiarize the students with various types and causes of failure of

components indifferent engineeringapplications.

3. To acquaint the students with the new concepts of Nano Science andTechnology.

4. To prepare the students acquire basic understanding of advanced materials, their functions and

properties for technologicalapplica tions.

Outcomes: Learner will be able to...

1. Distinguish different types of materials and composites used inmanufacturing.

2. Select a material for specificapplications

3. Read and interpret Iron -Iron Carbide phase diagram, TTT diagram and CCT diagram.

4. Demonstrat e a deeper understanding of materials in engineeringapplications.

Module Detailed

Contents Hrs.

01 1.1 Introduction: Classification of materials, functional classification and classification

based onstructure. (0.5 hrs)

1.2 Solidification of Metals: Formation of solids from liquids of pure metals and alloys.

Single crystal and polycrystallinestructure. (0.5 hrs)

1.3 CrystalImperfection: Definition,classification,Pointdefects:theirformationandeffects.

Dislocations: Edge and screw dislocations, their significance. Surf ace defects: Grain

boundary, sub -angle grain boundary, stacking fault, and their significance. (2 hrs) 03

02 2.1 Ferrous Metals and Alloys: Classification of Alloys based on phases and phase

diagram - Binary alloy phase diagram – Isomorphous, Eutectics type I and II, Peritectic.

The Iron -Iron Carbide Phase Diagram. Classification of Plain Carbon Steels and Cast

Irons. Effect of alloying elements in steels. TTT diagram & CCT diagram. Annealing,

normalizing, tempering, hardening and surface hardeningprocesses. (5 hrs)

2.2 Nonferrous Metals and Alloys: Basics only. Important nonferrous materials like

aluminium, copper, nickel, tin, zinc and their alloys, properties andapplications. (1 hr)

2.3 Powder Metallurgy: Powder manufacturing methods; Powder MetallurgyProcess.

Applications such as oil impregnated Bearings and Cemented Carbides. Limitations of

Powder Metallurgy. (1 hr) 07

03 3.1 Ceramics: Definition, comparative study of structure and properties of Engineering

Ceramics with reference to metallic materials. Toughening mechanisms in ceramics.

Engineering application ofCeramics. (1 hrs)

3.2 Polymers: Classification of polymers. Thermoplastics, effect of temperature on

thermoplastics, mechanical properties of thermoplastics. Thermosetting polymers and

elastomers.

(1 hrs)

3.3 Composites : Definition; Classification; Particle -reinforced composites and fibre -

reinforced composites. Rule of mixtures; Sandwich structures. Classification of

composites on basis of matrix materials. (1 hrs )

03

## Page 355

University of Mumbai B. E. (Mechatronics Engineering), Rev 2019 10

04 4.1 Fracture: Definition and types of facture. Brittle fracture and Ductile fracture.

Ductility transition.

4.2 Fatigue Failure: Definition of fatigue and significance of cyclic stress. Mechanism of

fatigue. Fatigue testing. Test data presentation. S.N. Curve and its interpretation.

Influence of important factors on fatigue.

Creep: Definition and significance of creep. Effect of temperature

and creep on mechanical behavior of materials. Creep testing. 03

05 5 .1 Electronic Materials: Band structure of solids. Conductivity of metals and alloys.

Semiconductors and superconducting materials. Insulators and dielectric properties.

Electrostriction, piezoelectricity andferroelectricity.

5 .2 Photonic Materials: Refraction, reflection, absorption and

transmission.Luminesce nce,

Photoconducti vity, Lasers, optical fibres in

communications.

5 .3 Magnetic Materials: classification of magnetic materials.

Diamagnetic,paramagnetic,

ferromagnetic, ferromagnetic and super paramagnetic materials. Metallic and ceramic

magnetic materials. Ap plications of magneticmaterials. 04

06 6.1 Nano -structured Materials: Definition and Introduction to nanotechnology. Unique

features of nano -structured materials. Typicalapplications. (1 hr)

6.2 Modern Engineering Materials : Smart materials, Shape memory alloys, Chromic

materials (Thermo, Photo and Electro), Rheological fluids, Metallicglasses. (1 hr) 02

Assessment :

Internal Assessment for 20 marks: Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests First test based on

approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remaining contents (approximately 40% but

excluding contents covered in Test I). Duration of each test shall be onehour.

End Semester Theory Examination:

1. Question paper will comprise of total 06 questions, eachcarrying20marks.

2. Total 04 questions need tobe solved.

3. Question No: 01 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein sub -

questions of 2 to 5 marks willbeasked.

4. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature.( e.g. Suppose Q.2 has part (a)

frommodule3 then part (b) will be from any module other thanmodule3)

5. In question paper weightage of each module will be proportional to number

ofrespective lecture hrs as mentioned inthesyllabus.

Text Books:

1. Callister‟s Materials Science and Engineering, 2nd edition by R. Balasubramanium, Wiley India Pvt.

Ltd

References:

1. The Science and Engineering of Materials (6 th Edition), byDonald R. Askeland, Pradeep P. Fulay,

Wendelin

J. Wright, Cengage Learning, Inc., Stanford, USA., (2010)

2. Materials Science and Engineering: An Introduction (8th Edition), by William D. Callister,

Jr.Adapted by R. Balasubramaniam. Wiley India (P) Ltd., (2010).

3. Introduction to Physical Metallurgy (2nd Edition), by S H Avner, Tata McGraw Hill(1997).

4. A Text Book of Nanoscience and Nanotechnology, by Pradeep. T, Tata McGraw Hill, New

Delh i,(2012).

5. Material Science, by S.L. Kakani, New Age International,(2006).

6. Electronic Properties of Materials (4th Edition), by Rolf.E. Hummel, Springer, NewYork,(2011).

## Page 356

University of Mumbai B. E. (Mechatronics Engineering), Rev 2019 11 7. Photonic Crystals: Theory, Applications, and Fabrication, by Dennis W Prather, John Wiley &Sons,

Hoboken, (2009).

Links for online NPTEL/SWAYAM courses:

1. https://nptel.ac.in/noc/courses/noc20/SEM1/n

oc20 -mm09/

2.https://nptel.ac.in/courses/113/102/113102080/

3. https://nptel.ac.in/noc/courses/noc20/SEM1/noc20 -mm09/

4. https://nptel.ac.in/content/syllabus_pdf/113104074.pdf

5. https://nptel.ac.in/content/storage2/courses/112108150/pdf/PPTs/MTS_09_m.pdf

6. https://nptel.ac.in/content/storage2/courses/112108150/pdf/PPTs/MT

S_08_m.pdf 7.https://nptel.ac.in/co urses/112/104/112104229/

8. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/118/104/118104008/

9.https://nptel.ac. in/content/storage2/courses/112104173/Mod_1_smart_mat_lec_6.pdf https://nptel.ac

.in/cours es/11 2/104/112104229/

10. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/118/104/118104008/

11. https://nptel.ac.in/conten t/storage2/courses/112104173/Mod_1_smart_mat_lec_6.pdf

## Page 357

University of Mumbai B. E. (Mechatronics Engineering), Rev 2019 12 Course Code Course Name Credits

MTC304 Basic Electronics and Digital Circuit Design 03

Prerequisite: FEC105 Basic Electrical Engineering, FEC102 Engineering Physics -I, FEC202 Engineering

Physics -II

Objectives

1. To understand working and performance of electronicdevices

2. To understand applications of electronicdevices.

3. To teach fundamental principles of digital circuitdesign.

4. To impart the testing knowledge of digitalcircuits.

Outcomes: Learner will be able to…

1. Illustrate working of Transistors & itsapplications.

2. Describe several JFET applications including switch &lifiers.

3. Describe the number system and operations of logicalgates

4. Design combinational digital logiccircuits

5. Design Sequential digital logiccircuits

6. Describe the testing technologies in digitalelectronics.

Modul

e Detailed

Contents Hrs.

01 2.1 Junction Field Effect Transistor JFET: C onstruction, pinch off voltage,

transfer characteristic,trans -conductance.

Application: JFET as switch, JFET as amplifier

2.2 Metal -Oxide Effect Transistor (MOSFET): Working of MOSFET,

Application: MOSFET asswitch 04

02 Fundamentals of Digital Design

3.1 Number System - Review of Number System, Binary Code, Binary Coded

Decimal, Hexadecimal Code, Gray Code and theirconversions,

3.2 Logic Gates : Basic gates, Universal gates, Sum of products and products of

sum, minimization with Karnaugh Map (upto four variables) andrealization.

3.3 CombinationalCircuitsusingbasicgatesaswellasMSIdevices :Halfadder,Full

adder, Half Subtractor, Full Subtractor, multiplexer, demultiplexer, decoder,

Comparator (Multiplexer and demultiplexer gate level upto 4:1).

08

03 Elements of Sequential Logic Design :

4.1 Sequential Logic : Latches and Flip -Flops, Conversion of flip flops (timing

considerations and metastability are notexpected)

4.2 Counters :Asynchronous,SynchronousCounters,UpDownCounters,ModCounters,

Ring Counters, Shift registers, Universal Shift Register. 0

8

## Page 358

University of Mumbai B. E. (Mechatronics Engineering), Rev 2019 13 04 Testability: Fault Models, Stuck at faults, ATPG, Design for Testability, Boundary

Scan Logic, JTAG and Built in self test. 02

Self-

study

Topic VHDL : Data types, Structural Modeling using VHDL, attributes, data flow,

behavioral, VHDL implementation of basic combinational and sequential Circuits.

--

Assessment :

Internal Assessment for 20 marks: Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests First test based on

approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remaining contents (approximately 40% but

excluding contents covered in Test I). Duration of each test shall be onehour.

End Semester Theory Examination:

1. Question paper will comprise of total 06 questions, each carrying20marks.

2. Total 04 questions need to besolved.

3. Question No: 01 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein sub -

questions of 2 to 5 marks will beasked.

4. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature.( e.g. Suppose Q.2 has part (a) from module3 then

part (b)will be from any module other than module3)

5. In question paper weightage of each module will be proportional to number of respective

lecture hrsas mentioned in thesyllabus.

Text Books:

1. R. P. Jain, Modern Digital Electronics, Tata McGraw Hill Education, Third Edition2003

2. Applied Electronics by R. S. Sedha, S. Chand Limited,2008

3. Prin. Of Electronic Devices & Circuit by B.L. Theraja and R. S.Sedha

References:

1. Donald A. Neamen, Electronic Circuit Analysis and Design, TATA McGraw Hill, 2nd Edition,

NewDelhi

2. William I. Fletcher, „An Engineering Approach to Digital Design‟,PHI.

3. B. Holdsworth and R. C. Wo ods, „Digital Logic Design‟, Newnes, 4 thEdition

4. Morris Mano, Digital Design, Pearson Education, Asia 2002.

5. John F. Wakerley, Digital Design Principles And Practices, third Edition Updated,

PearsonEducation, Singapore,2002

6. Anil K. Maini, Digital Electronics, Principles, Devices and Applications,Wiley

7. Stephen Brown and ZvonkoVranesic, Fundamentals of digital logic design with VHDL,

McGraw Hill,2nd Edition

8. Electronic Principles 8th Edition By Albert Malvino and DavidBates

Links for online NPTEL/SWA YAM courses:

1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117/106/117106086/

2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117/106/117106114/

3. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117/103/117103063/

4. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117/103/117103064/

5. https://swayam.gov.in/nd1_noc20_ee32

6. https://swayam.gov.in/nd1_noc19_ee51

7. https://swayam.gov.in/nd1_noc20_ee45

## Page 359

University of Mumbai B. E. (Mechatronics Engineering), Rev 2019 14 Course Code Course Name Credits

MTC305 Electrical Circuits and Machines 03

Prerequisite: FEC105 Basic Electrical Engineering, FEC102 Engineering Physics -I

FEC202 Engineering Physics -II

Objectives

1. Network Synthesis of DC and ACcircuits.

2. Understand characteristics of R -L-C networks in time and Frequencydomain.

3. Understand constructional features and characteristics of ElectricalMachines

Outcomes: Learner will be able to…

1. Analyse and Synthesis of network theorems for DC and ACcircuits

2. Find two port circuitsparameters

3. Analyse and Synthesis R -L-C circuits in time and Frequencydomain

4. Illustrate working and performance characteristics of DCMotors

5. Illustrate working and performance characteristics of three phase InductionMotor

6. Implement systems using low power motors specially designedmotors

Module Detailed

Contents Hrs.

01 Analysis of DC and AC Circuits

1.1 Analysis of DC Circuits: Analysis of DC circuits with dependent sources

using generalized loop, node matrixanalysis

(Simple numerical problems)

1.2 Application of Network Theorems to DC Circuits: Superposition,Thevenin,

Norton, Maximum Power Transfer theorem

(Simple numerical problems) 05

02 Two Port Networks

Introduction to 2 port networks

02

03 Time and Frequency Response Analysis

3.1 Transient and steady state response to step, ramp and impulsesignals

04

04 DC Motors

4.1 Construction, principle of working, classification, EMF equation, Torque

equation, characteristics of DCMotors

4.2 Speed Control: basic principle and working of differentmethods 03

05 Three Phase Induction Motor

5.1 Construction, working principle of squirrel cage inductionmotor

5.2 Torque speed characteristics,power

5.3 Speed controlmethods

04

## Page 360

University of Mumbai B. E. (Mechatronics Engineering), Rev 2019 15 Single phase Induction Motors:

5.4 Construction,working,

5.5 Startingmethods,

5.6 Torque -speed characteristics andapplications

06 Special Types of Motors

Construction, working Principle, Types and applications of

6.1 BLDCMotor

6.2 ReluctanceMotor

6.3 UniversalMotor

6.4 StepperMotor

6.5 Servo Motor

04

Self-

study

Topic Introduction, Basic principle, Construction, E.M.F Equation, Losses in a

transformer, Applications of Pulse, Isolation, center tapped transformer

--

Assessment :

Internal Assessment for 20 marks: Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests First test based on

approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remaining contents (approximately 40% but

excluding contents covered in Test I). Duration of each test shall be onehour.

End Semester Theory Examination:

1. Question paper will comprise of total 06 questions, each car rying20marks.

2. Total 04 questions need to besolved.

3. Question No: 01 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein sub - questions of 2 to

5 markswill beasked.

4. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature.( e.g. Suppose Q.2 has

part (a)from module3 then part (b) will be from any module other

than module3)

5. In question paper weightage of each module will be proportional to number of respective

lecture hrsas mentioned inthesyllabus.

Text Books:

1. Bimbhra P. S., Electric Machinery, KhannaPublisher,

2. Bimbhr a P. S., Generalized Machine Theory, KhannaPublisher,

3. E. G. Janardanan, Special Electrical Machines, PHI

4. WHHayt,SMDurbin,JEKemmerly,„EngineeringCircuitAnalysis‟,7thEditionTata McGraw -

Hill Education.

5.M. E. Van Valkenburg, „Network Analysis‟, 3rd Edition, P HI Learning.

6. D. Roy Choudhury, „Networks and Systems‟, 2nd Edition, New AgeInternational.

References Books:

1. M. G. Say and E. O. Taylor, Direct current machines, Pitmanpublication

2. Ashfaq Husain, Electric Machines, Dhanpat Rai and co.publications

3. M. V. Deshpande, Electric Machines,PHI

4. NBalabanianandT.A.Bickart,LinearNetworkTheory:Analysis,Properties,Designand Synthe

sis‟, Matrix Publishers,Inc.

5. C. L.Wadhwa, Network Analysis and synthesis‟, New Ageinternational.

6. B. Somanathan Nair, “Network Analysis and Syn thesis”, ElsevierPublications

## Page 361

University of Mumbai B. E. (Mechatronics Engineering), Rev 2019 16 Links for online NPTEL/SWAYAM courses:

1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108/102/108102042/

2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108/104/108104139/

3. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108/102/108102146/

4. https:/ /nptel.ac.in/courses/108/105/108105053/

5. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108/105/108105159/

6. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108/1 05/108105017/

7. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108/108/108108076/

8. https://swayam.gov.in/nd1_noc19_ee69

9. https://swayam.gov.in/nd1_noc19_ee35

## Page 362

University of Mumbai B. E. (Mechatronics Engineering), Rev 2019 17 Course Code Course Name Credits

MTL301 Data Structures and Algorithms Laboratory 01

Objectives:

1. To design and implement various data structures and theiroperations.

2. To Apply the appropriate search method on a givenproblem

3. To develop application using suitable data structure andalgorithms.

Outcomes: Students will be able to…

1. Implement various operations using linear datastructures.

2. Apply concepts of Trees and Graphs to a givenproblem.

3. Analyze time and space complexity of analgorithm.

4. Apply divide and conquer strategy to solveproblems.

5. Apply the concept of Greedy and Dynamic Programming approach to solveproblems.

6. Apply the concept of backtracking, bran ch and bound strategy to solveproblems.

Suggested List of laboratory experiments (Minimum Eight):

Experiments to be conducted using C language. Also minimum one experiment from each course

outcome shall be covered.

Sr. No. Experiment List

1 Implementation of any o ne application of stack / Queue

2 Implementation of operations on Linked Lists

5 Implementation of Binary search/ merge sort/quick sort

6 Implementation of operations on Binary Tree/Binary Search Tree

7 Implementation G reedy method algorithms Prim‟s

8 Implementation of Dynamic programming approach algorithms Traveling sales

persons problem

10 Implementation of any game based on uninformed/informed search algorithms

BFS/DFS/A*algorithm

Like Maze problems, 4 connect etc

Term Work:

Term work consists of performing minimum 06 practical mentioned as above. Final

certification and acceptance of the term work ensures satisfactory performance of

laboratory work.

The distribution of marks for term work shall be as follows:

● Laboratorywork (Experiment /journal) : 20 marks.

● Attendance (Theoryand Practical) : 05Marks

End Semester Examination:

Pair of Internal and External Examiner should conduct Practical and Oral. Practical exam (15 marks)

will be on any one of the experiments from the list and oral exam (10 marks) will be based on the entire

syllabus of the laboratory.

Links for online NPTEL/SWAYAM courses:

1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106/105/106105085/

ii.

## Page 363

University of Mumbai B. E. (Mechatronics Engineering), Rev 2019 18 Course Code Course Name Credits

MTL302 Applied Electronics Laboratory -I 01

Objectives

1. To understand performance and characteristics of transistors and Digital Electronicscomponents

2. To study electrical networksynthesis

3. To study characterization of different ElectricalMachines

Outcomes: Learner will be able to…

1. Implement switching circuits using BJT, MOSFET,JFET

2. Implement different LOGICcircuits

3. Analyse operational characteristics of different ElectricalMachines

4. Simulation of ElectricalNetworks.

Suggested List of laboratory experiments (Minimum 10):

A.List of experiment based onMTC304

1 To find and draw the input output characteristics of BJT in common emitter

configuration or BJT as switch.

2 Implementation of BJT/FET as an amplifier

3 To find transfer characteristics of JFET.

4 To find transfer characteristics of MOSFET.

5 Implementation of the truth table of various logic gates.

6 Implementation of NOR Gate & NAND Gate as universal gates.

7 Implementation of full adder circuit using gates.

8 Verification of state tables of RS, JK, T and D flip -flops using NAND & nor gates.

9 Design and implementation of counters using flip -flops using simulation software like

QUCS

B.List of experiment based onMTC305

1 Study of different network theorems for DC and AC circuits

2 To find two port network parameters for electrical network

3 Time domain response of R -L-C series circuit: under, over and critically damped. This

can be studied by writing a simple programme using any software tool. Plot time

domain response and study effect of change in values of R -L-C

4 Write a simple programme for the transfer function of any R -L-C circuit. Plot

frequency domain response and study effect of change in values of R -L-C

5 Speed control of DC shunt and series motor

6 Plot torque speed characteristics of DC shunt motor

7 Speed control of three phase/ single phase Induction Motor

8 Characterization of Stepper motor/ Servo Motor/ Reluctance motor.

Term Work:

Term work consists of performing minimum 10 (5 from Part A& 5 from Part B) practical mentioned

as above. Final certification and acceptance of the term work ensures satisfactory performance of

laboratory work.

The distribution of marks for term work shall be as follows:

● Laboratory work Part A (Exper iment/journal) : 10marks.

● Laboratory work PartA(Experiment/journal) : 10 marks

● Attendance (Theoryand Practical) : 05Marks

●

End Semester Examination:

Pair of Internal and External Examiner should conduct Practical and Oral. Practical exam (15 marks)

will be on any one of the experiments from the list and oral exam (10 marks) will be based on the entire

syllabus of the laboratory.

## Page 364

University of Mumbai B. E. (Mechatronics Engineering), Rev 2019 19 Links for online NPTEL/SWAYAM courses:

1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108/102/108102042/

2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108/102/108102146/

3. https://swayam.gov.in/nd1_noc19_ee51

4. https://swayam.gov.in/nd1_noc20_ee45

## Page 365

University of Mumbai B. E. (Mechatronics Engineering), Rev 2019 20 Course Code Course Name Credits

MTL303 Electrical and Electronics Workshop 01

Objectives

1. To introduce the basic laboratory instruments and household electrical & electronicequipments

2. To design PCB and develop smallcircuits

3. To understand working of different network simulationsoftwares

Outcomes: Learner will be able to…

1. Understand working of different labequipment

2. Demonstrate skills in handling electricalcomponents

3. Repair and do maintenance of households appliances.

4. Demonstrate PCB design and solderingskills

5. Understand working of different parts ofComputer

6. Simulate Electrical networks using softwaretechniques.

PART A

List of laboratory Work:

Exp No. Name of the Experiment and content

1 Study of construction and operation of different lab equipment :

Introduction to different equipment in the lab (multi -meter, CRO, DSO, power supplies,

function generators); Resistors, presets, potentiometers, inductors (iron core and ferrite

core), capacitors of different ratings.

2 Introduction to Household electrical wiring

Wiring materials, selection of wire, different switching and protection devices (MCBs/

Fuses/Relays), Cables and cable management Estimation and costing of residential wiring

(Simple numerical on wiring of single room), connection of energy meter and distribution board,

wiring standards (IS -732, section 4)

3 Repair of house hold appliances and machines:

Testing, fault fin ding, Dismantling, assembling and testing after repairs of house hold appliances

like fan and regulator, heater, geyser, mixer, washing machine, microwave oven etc

4 Hardware implementation of Electronics circuits:

Soldering techniques and equipments, PCB Layout (artwork) design using software and

Fabrication itching process. Testing and debugging process of assembled circuits. Making small

Switching circuits using electronic components.

5 Study of Computer hardware.

Functional block diagram, unmounting computer CPU, study internal structure of Computer

parts.

6 Introduction to simulating Softwares

Study different simulating softwares like Qucs, Scilab, Matlab. Simulation of small networks

using it.

7 Study of ICT(In circuit Test) and FCT (Function Test) Fixture in electronic

massproduction. Test Systems architecture, Automated testing, Types of contact, Bead

probe technology , Types of probes, Tip styles, Fixture components, Actuation and hold

downmech anisms

Any other experiment based on syllabus which will help students to understand topic/concept.

## Page 366

University of Mumbai B. E. (Mechatronics Engineering), Rev 2019 21 Books Recommended:

1. J. B. Gupta “Electrical Installation Estimating & costing” S. K. Kataria& Sons,2009

2. K.B. Raina, S.K. Bhattacharya “Electrical Design Estimating and Costing”, New Age Inter.2018

3. Alagappan N. & Ekambaram S. Electrical Estimating & costing Tata McGraw hillLtd.

4. S.L. Uppal and G.C. Garg “Electrical Wiring Estimating and Costing” Khanna Publishers1987

5. Surjit Singh “Electri c Estimating and Costing” Dhanpat Rai & Co. (P) Limited(2016)

6. K B. Bhatia “Study of Electrical Appliances and Devices” KhannaPublishers

7. John T. Bateson “In Circuit Testing” Springer2012

Links for online NPTEL/SWAYAM courses:

1.https://nptel.ac.in/courses/122/106/122106025/

2.https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108/101/108101091/

3.https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108/108/108108076/

4. https://swayam.gov.in/nd2_aic20_sp59/

PART B

Industrial Visit

One compulsory visit to any Electrical Machines or Electroni cs Equipments Manufacturing Industry

Term Work: It comprises both part A and B

Term work consists of performing minimum 06 practical as mentioned above. Final certification and

acceptance of the term work ensures satisfactory performance of laboratory wor k.

The distribution of marks for term work shall be as follows:

● Laboratorywork (Experiment/journal) : 15 marks.

● Industrial VisitReport : 05 marks.

● Attendance : 05Marks

End Semester Examination:

Pair of Internal and External Examiner should conduct Oral on the entire syllabus of the laboratory.

## Page 367

University of Mumbai B. E. (Mechatronics Engineering), Rev 2019 22 Course Code Course Name Credits

MTSBL301 Skill Based Lab: CAD – Modeling 02

Prerequisites: Engineering Drawing

Objectives:

1. To impart the 3D modeling skills for development of 3D models of basic engineeringcomponents.

2. To introduce Product data exchange among CADsystems.

3. To familiarize with production drawings with important features like GD &T, surface finish,

heat treatments etc.

Outcomes: Learner will be able to…

1. Illustrate basic understan ding of types of CAD modelcreation.

2. Visualize and prepare 2D modeling of a given object using modelingsoftware.

3. Build solid model of a given object using 3D modelingsoftware.

4. Visualize and develop the surface model of a given object using modelingsoftware.

5. Generate assembly models of given objects using assembly tools of a modelingsoftware

6. Perform product data exchange among CADsystems.

Sr. No. Exercises Hrs.

1 CAD Introduction

CAD models Creation, Types and uses of models from different perspectives.

Parametric modeling.

10 2 2D Modeling

Geometric modeling of an Engineering component, demonstrating skills in

sketching commands of creation (line, arc, circle etc.) modification (Trim,

move, rotate etc.) and viewing using (Pan, Zoom, Rotate etc.)

3 Solid Modeling

3D Geometric modeling of an Engineering component, demonstrating modeling

skills using commands like Extrude, Revolve, Sweep, Blend, Loft etc.

4 Surface Modeling

Extrude, Sweep, Trim etc and Mesh of curves, free form surfaces etc. Feature

manipulation using Copy, Edit, Pattern, Suppress, History operations etc.

5 Assembly

Constraints, Exploded views, interference check. Drafting (Layouts, Standard &

Sectional Views, Detailing & Plotting).

6 Data Exchange

CAD data exchange formats Like IGES, PDES, PARASOLID, DXF and STL

along with their comparison and applicability.

Assessment:

Term work

Using the above knowledge and skills acquired through six modules students should complete

Minimum six assignments/Experiments from the given sets of assignments (Two from each set) using

standard CAD modeler like PTC Creo/CATIA/ Solid work/UG /any other s uitablesoftware.

## Page 368

University of Mumbai B. E. (Mechatronics Engineering), Rev 2019 23 Set 1: Beginner Level:

3D modeling of basic Engineering components likes Nuts, Bolts, Keys, cotter, Screws, Springs etc.

Set 2: Intermediate Level:

3D modeling of basic Machine components like Clapper block, Single tool post, Lathe and Milling tail

stock,Shaper tool head slide, jigs and fixtures Cotter, Knuckle joint, Couplings: simple, muff, flanged

Protected flange coupling, Oldham‟s coupling, Universal coupling,element of engine system and

Miscellaneous parts.

Set 3: Advance Level:

1) Generation of any Assembly model (minimum five child parts) along with Production drawing for

any of the system by creating 3D modeling with assembly constraints, Interference check, Exploded

view, GD&T, Bill of material.

2) Reverse Enginee ring of a physical model: disassembling of any physical model having not less than

five parts, measure the required dimensions of each component, sketch the minimum views required for

each component, convert these sketches into 3 -D model and create an asse mbly drawing with

actualdimensions

The distribution of marks for Term work shall be as follows:

1. Printouts/Plots : 20marks

2. Attendance : 05marks

End Semester Practical/Oral examination:

To be conducted by pair of Internal and External Examiner

1. Practical exa mination duration is two hours, based on Advance level of the Termwork.

Oral examination should also be conducted to check the knowledge of CAD Modeling Tools.

2. The distribution of marks for practical examination shall be asfollows:

a. Practical Exam ….15marks

b. OralExam ............. 10 marks

3. Evaluation of practical examination to be done based on the printout of studentswork

4. Students work along with evaluation report to be preserved till the nextexamination

References:

1. Machine Drawing by N.D.Bhatt.

2. A textbook of Machine Drawing byLaxminarayan and M.L.Mathur, Jain brothersDelhi

3. Machine Drawing by Kamat andRao

4. Machine Drawing byM.B.Shah

5. A text book of Machine Drawing by R.B. Gupta, Satyaprakashan, Tech.Publication

6. Machine Drawing by K.I. Narayana, P. Kannaiah, K.VenkataRedd y

7. Machine Drawing by Sidheshwar andKanheya

8. Autodesk Inventor 2011 for Engineers and Designers by Sham Tickoo and Surinder Raina,

DreamtechPress

Links for online NPTEL/SWAYAM courses:

1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/102/112102102/

2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/104/112104031/

3. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/ 112/102/112102101/

## Page 369

University of Mumbai B. E. (Mechatronics Engineering), Rev 2019 24 Course code Course Name Credits

MTPBL301 Mini Project -1A 02

Objectives:

1. To acquaint with the process of identifying the needs and converting it into theproblem.

2. To familiarize the process of solving the problem in agroup.

3. To acquaint with the process of applying basic engineering fundamentals to attempt solutions to

the problems.

4. To inculcate the process of self -learning andresearch.

Outcome: Learner will be able to…

1. Identify problems based on societal /researchneeds.

2. Apply Knowledge and skill to solve societal problems in agroup.

3. Develop interpersonal skills to work as member of a group orleader.

4. Draw the proper inferences from available results through theoretical/experimental/simulations.

5. Analyse the impact of solutions in societal and environmental context for sustainabledevelopment.

6. Use standard norms of engineeringpractices

7. Excel in written and oralcommunication.

8. Demonstrate capabilities of self -learning in a group, which leads to lifelonglearning.

9. Demonstrate project management principles during projectwork.

Guidelines for Mini Project

Students shall form a group of 3 to 4 students, while forming a group shall not be allowed less

than three or more than four students, as it is a group activity.

Students should do survey and identify needs, which shall be converted into problem statement

for mini project in consultation with faculty supervisor/head of department/internal committee

offaculties.

Students shall submit implementation plan in the form of Gantt/PERT/CPM chart, which will

cover weekly activity of miniproject.

A log book to be prepared by each group, wherein group can record weekly work progress,

guide/supervisor can verify and recordnotes/comments.

Faculty supervisor may give inputs during m ini project activity; however, focus shall be onself -

learning.

Students in a group shall understand problem effectively, propose multiple solution and select

best possible solution in consultation with guide/supervisor.

Students shall convert the best solu tion into working model using various components of their

domain areas anddemonstrate.

The solution to be validated with proper justification and report to be compiled in standard

format of University ofMumbai.

With the focus on the self -learning, innovati on, addressing societal problems and

entrepreneurship quality development within the students through the Mini Projects, it is

preferable that a single project of appropriate level and quality to be carried out in two semesters

by all the groups of the stu dents. i.e. Mini Project 1 in semester III and IV. Similarly, Mini

Project 2 in semesters V andVI.

However, based on the individual students or group capability, with the mentor‟s

recommendations, if the proposed Mini Project adhering to the qualitative as pects mentioned

above gets completed in odd semester, then that group can be allowed to work on the extension

of the Mini Project with suitable improvements/modifications or a completely new project idea

in even semester. This policy can be adopted on case by casebasis.

## Page 370

University of Mumbai B. E. (Mechatronics Engineering), Rev 2019 25 Guidelines for Assessment of Mini Project:

Term Work

The review/ progress monitoring committee shall be constituted by head of

departments of each institute. The progress of mini project to be evaluated on

continuous basis, minimum two reviews in eachsemester.

In continuous assessment focus shall also be on each individual student, assessment

based on individual‟s contribution in group activity, their understanding and

response toquestions.

Distribution of Term work ma rks for both semesters shall be asbelow;

o Marks awarded by guide/supervisor based onlog book 10

o Marks awarded byreviewcommittee 10

o Quality ofProjectreport 05

Review/progress monitoring committee may consider following points for assessment

based on either one year or half year project as mentioned in general guidelines.

One-year project:

In first semester entire theoretical solution shall be ready, including

components/system selection and cost analysis. Two reviews will be conducted based

on presentation g iven by studentsgroup.

First shall be for finalisation ofproblem

Second shall be on finalisation of proposed solution ofproblem.

In second semester expected work shall be procurement of component‟s/systems,

building of working prototype, testing and valida tion of results based on work

completed in an earlier semester.

First review is based on readiness of building working prototype to

beconducted.

Second review shall be based on poster presentation cum demonstration of

working model in last month of the saidsemester.

Half -year project:

In this case in one semester students‟ group shall complete project in all

aspectsincluding,

o Identification ofneed/problem

o Proposed finalsolution

o Procurement ofcomponents/systems

o Building prototype andtesting

• Two reviews will be conducted for continuousassessment,

o First shall be for finalisation of problem and proposedsolution

o Second shall be for implementation and testing ofsolution.

## Page 371

University of Mumbai B. E. (Mechatronics Engineering), Rev 2019 26 Assessment criteria of Mini Project

Mini Project shall be assessed based on followingcriteria;

1. Quality of survey/ needidentification

2. Clarity of Problem definition based onneed.

3. Innovativeness insolutions

4. Feasibility of proposed problem solutions and selection of bestsolution

5. Costeffectiveness

6. Societalimpact

7. Innovativeness

8. Cost effectiveness and societalimpact

9. Full functioning of working model as per

statedrequirements 10.Effective use of skillsets

11.Effective use of standard engineering

norms 12.Contribution of an individual‟s

as member or leader 13.Clarity in written

and oral communication

• In one year project , first semester evaluation may be based on first six criteria‟s and

remaining may be used for second semester evaluation of performance of students in

miniproject.

• In case of half year project all crite ria‟s in generic may be considered for evaluation of

performance of students in miniproject.

Guidelines for Assessment of Mini Project Practical/Oral Examination:

• Report should be prepared as per the guidelines issued by the University ofMumbai.

• Mini Project shall be assessed through a presentation and demonstration of working

model by the student project group to a panel of Internal and External Examiners

preferably from industry or research organisations having experience of more than

five years appr oved by head ofInstitution.

• Students shall be motivated to publish a paper based on the work

inConferences/students competitions.

Mini Project shall be assessed based on following points;

1. Quality of problem andClarity

2. Innovativeness insolutions

3. Cost effect iveness and societalimpact

4. Full functioning of working model as per statedrequirements

5. Effective use of skillsets

6. Effective use of standard engineeringnorms

7. Contribution of an individual‟s as member orleader

8. Clarity in written and oralcommunication

## Page 372

University of Mumbai B. E. (Mechatronics Engineering), Rev 2019 27

NOTE –

1: For Detailed Course Schemes, Course Objectives, Internal & External Assessment process,

End Semester Examination, Recommended & reference Books please refer MU syllabus of Second

year (C -Scheme / R -19) Mechatronics Engineering.

2: Theory and Practical Examination will be strictly based on above compressed syllabus.

## Page 373

AC -23/02/2021

Item No. – 6.11-9

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI

Bachelor of Engineering

in

Information Technology

Direct Second Year (Sem. III) Admitted Students for the

current Academic Year 2020 -21(Only)

(REV - 2019 ‘C’ Scheme) from Academic Year 2019 – 20

Under

FACULTY OF

SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY

(As per AICTE guidelines with effect from the academic year 2019 –2020)

## Page 374

Program Structure for Second Year

Engineering Semester III

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI

(With Effect from 2020 -2021)

Semester III

Course

Code

Course Name Teaching Scheme

(Contact Hours)

Credits Assigned

Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total

ITC301 Engineering Mathematics -III 3 -- 1 3 -- 1 4

ITC302 Data Structure and Analysis 3 -- 3 -- 3

ITC303 Database Management System 3 -- -- 3 -- -- 3

ITC304 Principle of Communication 3 -- -- 3 -- -- 3

ITC305 Paradigms and Computer

Programming Fundamentals 3 -- -- 3 -- -- 3

ITL301 Data Structure Lab -- 2 -- -- 1 -- 1

ITL302 SQL Lab -- 2 -- -- 1 -- 1

ITL303 Computer programming

Paradigms Lab -- 2 -- -- 1 -- 1

ITL304 Java Lab (SBL) -- 4 -- -- 2 -- 2

ITM301 Mini Project – 1 A for Front end

/backend Application using JAVA -- 4$ -- -- 2 -- 2

Total 15 14 1 15 07 1 23

Course

Code

Course Name Examination Scheme

Theory Term

Work Pract/

oral Total

Internal Assessment End

Sem.

Exam Exam.

Duration

(in Hrs)

Test

1 Test2 Avg.

ITC301 Engineering Mathematics -III 20 20 20 80 3 25 -- 125

ITC302 Data Structure and Analysis 20 20 20 80 3 -- -- 100

ITC303 Database Management System 20 20 20 80 3 -- -- 100

ITC304 Principle of Communication 20 20 20 80 3 -- -- 100

ITC305 Paradigms and Computer

Programming Fundamentals 20 20 20 80 3 -- -- 100

ITL301 Data Structure Lab -- -- -- -- -- 25 25 50

ITL302 SQL Lab -- -- -- -- -- 25 25 50

ITL303 Computer programming

Paradigms Lab -- -- -- -- -- 25 25 50

ITL304 Java Lab (SBL) -- -- -- -- -- 25 25 50

ITM301 Mini Project – 1 A for Front end

/backend Application using JAVA -- -- -- -- -- 25 25 50

Total -- -- 100 400 -- 150 125 775

$ indicates work load of Learner (Not Faculty), for Mini -Project . Students can form groups with minimum

2 (Two) and not more than 4 (Four) Faculty Load : 1 hour per week per four groups .

## Page 375

Course Teaching Scheme

Credits Assigned

Course Name (Contact Hours)

Code

Theory

Prac t.

Tut.

Theory

TW/Pract

Tut.

Total

ITC301 Engineering

Mathematics -III 03 - 01 03 - 01 04

Course

Code Course Name Examination

Scheme

Theory

Term

Work Pract Oral Total

Internal Assessment

End

Sem

Exam

Test1

Test2

Avg of

Test 1

& 2

ITC301 Engineering

Mathematics -III 20 20 20 80 25 - - 125

Pre-requisite: Engineering Mathematics -I, Engineering Mathematics -II

Course Objectives:

Sr. No. Course Objectives

The course aims:

1 To familiarize with the Laplace Transform, Inverse Laplace Transform of various

functions, and its applications.

2 To acquaint with the concept of Fourier series, its complex form and enhance the

problem solving skills.

3 To familiarize the concept of complex variables, C -R equations with applications.

4 The fundamental knowledge of Trees, Graphs etc.

5 To study the basic techniques of statistics like correlation, regression and curve fitting

for data analysis, Machine learning and AI.

6 To understand some advanced topics of probability, random variables with their

distributions and expectations.

Course Outcomes:

Sr.

No. Course Outcomes Cognitive levels

of attainment as

per Bloom’s

Taxonomy

On successful completion, of course, learner/student will be able to:

1 Apply the concept of Laplace transform to solve the real integrals in

engineering problems. L1, L2

2 Apply the concept of inverse Laplace transform of various functions in

engineering problems. L1, L2

## Page 376

3 Expand the per iodic function by using Fourier series for real life problems and

complex engineering problems. L1, L2, L3

4 Find orthogonal trajectories and analytic function by using basic concepts of

complex variable theory. L1, L2, L3

5 Apply the concept of Correlation and Regression to the engineering

problems in data science, machine learning and AI. L2, L3

6 Illustrate understanding of the concepts of probability and expectation for

getting the spread of the data and distribution of probabilities . L1, L2

Module Detailed Contents Hours CO

Mapping

01 Module: Laplace Transform

1.1 Definition of Laplace transform, Condition of Existence of Laplace

transform,

1.2 Laplace Transform (L) of Standard Functions like 𝑒𝑎𝑡, 𝑠𝑖𝑛(𝑎𝑡),

𝑐𝑜𝑠(𝑎𝑡), 𝑠𝑖𝑛ℎ(𝑎𝑡), 𝑐𝑜𝑠ℎ(𝑎𝑡) and 𝑡𝑛,𝑛≥0.

1.3 Properties of Laplace Transform: Linearity, First Shifting Theorem,

Second Shifting Theorem, change of scale Property, multiplication by t,

Division by t, Laplace Transform of derivatives and integrals (Properties

without proof ).

1.4 Evaluation of real integrals by using Laplace Transformation.

Self-learning Topics: Heaviside’s Unit Step function, Laplace Transform.

of Periodic functions, Dirac Delta Function. 7 CO1

02 Module: Inverse Laplace Transform

2.1 Inverse Laplace Transform, Linearity property, use of standard

formulae to find inverse Laplace Transform, finding Inverse Laplace

transform using derivatives,

2.2 Partial fractions method to find inverse Laplace transform.

2.3 Inverse Laplace transform using Convolutio n theorem (without proof)

Self-learning Topics: Applications to solve initial and boundary value

problems involving ordinary differential equations 6 CO1,

CO2

03 Module: Fourier Series:

3.1 Dirichlet’s conditions, Definition of Fourier series and Parseval’s

Identity(without proof)

3.2 Fourier series of periodic function with period 2and 2l,

Fourier series of even and odd functions

3.4 Half range Sine and Cosine Series.

Self-learning Topics: Complex form of Fourier Series, orthogonal and

orthonormal set of functions, Fourier Transform. 7 CO3

## Page 377

04 Module: Complex Variables:

4.1 Function f(z)of complex variable, limit, continuity and differentiability

of f(z)Analytic function, necessary and sufficient conditions for f(z) to be

analytic (without proof),

4.2 Cauchy -Riemann equations in cartesian coordinates (without proof)

4.3 Milne -Thomson method to determine analytic function f(z)when real

part (u) o r Imaginary part (v) or its combination (u+v or u -v) is given.

4.4 Harmonic function, Harmonic conjugate and orthogonal trajectories

Self-learning Topics: Conformal mapping, linear, bilinear mapping, cross

ratio, fixed points and standard transformations 7 CO4

05 Module: Statistical Techniques

5.1 Karl Pearson’s Coefficient of correlation (r)

5.2 Spearman’s Rank correlation coefficient (R) (with repeated and non -

repeated ranks)

5.3 Lines of regression

5.4 Fitting of first and second degree curves.

Self-learning Topics: Covariance, fitting of exponential curve. 6 CO5

06 Module: Probability

6.1 Definition and basics of probability, conditional probability,

6.2 Total Probability Theorem and Baye’s theorem

6.3 Discrete and continuous random variable with probability distribution

and probability density function.

6.4 Expectation of random variables with mean, variance and standard

deviation, moment generating function up to four moments.

Self-learning Topics: Skewness and Kurtosis of distribution (data) 6 CO6

References:

1. Higher Engineering Mathematics, Dr. B. S. Grewal, Khanna Publication

2. Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Erwin Kreyszig, Wiley Eastern Limited .

3. Advanced Engineering Mathematics, R. K. Jain and S. R. K. Iyengar, Narosa publication,

4. Complex Variables and Applications, Brown and Churchill, McGraw -Hill education.

5. Probability, Statistics and Random Processes , T. Veerarajan, McGraw -Hill education.

6. Theo ry and Problems of Fourier Analysis with applications to BVP, Murray Spiegel,

Schaum’s Outline Series.

Online References:

Sr. No. Website Name

1. https://www.nptel.ac.in

## Page 378

Term Work:

General Instructions:

1. Students must be encouraged to write at least 6 class tutorials on entire syllabus.

2. A group of 4 -6 students should be assigned a self -learning topic. Students should prepare a

presentation/problem solving of 10 -15 minutes. This should be considered as mini project in

Engineering Mathematics. This project should be graded for 10 marks depe nding on the performance

of the students.

The distribution of Term Work marks will be as follows –

1. Attendance (Theory and Tutorial) 05 marks

2. Class Tutorials on entire syllabus 10 marks

3. Mini project 10 marks

Assessment :

Internal Assessment Test:

Assessment consists of two class tests of 20 marks each. The first class test (Internal Assessment I) is to be

conducted when approx. 40% syllabus is completed and second class test (Internal Assessment II) when

additional 35% syllabus is completed. Duration of each test shall be one hour.

End Semester Theory Examination:

1. Question paper will comprise of total 06 questions, each carrying 20 marks.

2. Total 04 questions need to be solved.

3. Question No: 01 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein 4 sub -questions

of 5 marks each will be asked.

4. Remaining questions will be randomly selected from all the modules.

5. Weightage of each module will be proportional to number of respective lecture hours as

mentioned in the syllabus.

## Page 379

Course Code

Course

Name Teaching Scheme

(Contact Hours) Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical

/Oral Tutorial Total

ITC302 Data

Structure

and

Analysis 03 -- -- 03 -- -- 03

Course

Code

Course

Name Examination Scheme

Theory Marks

Term Work Pract . /Oral Total Internal assessment End

Sem.

Exam Test1 Test 2 Avg.

ITC302 Data

Structure and

Analysis 20 20 20 80 -- -- 100

Course Objectives:

Sr. No. Course Objectives

The course aims :

1 The fundamental knowledge of data structures.

2 The programming knowledge which can be applied to sophisticated data structures.

3 The fundamental knowledge of stack s queue, linked list etc.

4 The fundamental knowledge of Trees, Graphs etc.

5 The fundamental knowledge of different sorting, searching, hashing and recursion

techniques

6 The real time applications for stack s, queue, linke d list, trees, graphs etc.

Course Outcomes:

Sr.

No. Course Outcomes Cognitive levels

of attainment as

per Bloom’s

Taxonomy

On successful completion, of course, learner/student will be able to:

1 Classify and Apply the concepts of stacks, queues and linked list in real life

problem solving. L1, L2, L3

2 Classify , apply and analyze the concepts trees in real life problem solving. L2, L3 ,L4

3 Illustrate and justify the concepts of graphs in real life problem solving. L3, L5

4 List and examine the concepts of sorting, searching techniques in real life

problem solving. L2, L3, L4

5 Use and identify the concepts of recursion, hashing in real life problem

solving. L3, L4

6 Examine and justify different methods of stacks, queues, linked list, trees

and graphs to various applications. L3, L4, L5

## Page 380

Prerequisite: C Programming

DETAILED SYLLABUS:

Sr.

No. Module Detailed Content Hours CO

Mapping

I Introduction

to Stacks,

Queues and

Linked Lists Concept of Linked Lists. Singly linked lists, doubly linked

lists and circular linked lists.

Insertion, deletion, update and copying operations with Singly

linked lists, doubly linked lists and circular linked lists.

Reversing a singly linked list.

Self-learning Topics: Double Ended Queue, Priority Queue.

04 CO1

II Trees Non recursive Preorder, in -order and post -order traversal.

Creation of binary trees from the traversal of binary trees.

Binary search tree: Traversal, searching, insertion and deletion

in binary search tree.

Threaded Binary Tree: Finding in -order succe ssor and

predecessor of a node in threaded tree. Insertion and deletion

in threaded binary tree.

AVL Tree: Searching and traversing in AVL trees. Tree

Rotations: Right Rotation, Left Rotation. Insertion and

Deletion in an AVL Tree.

B-tree: Searching, I nsertion, Deletion from leaf node and non -

leaf node.

B+ Tree, Digital Search Tree, Game Tree & Decision Tree

Self-learning Topics: Implementation of AVL and B+ Tree 06

CO1,

CO 2

III Graphs

Representation of graph: adjacency matrix, adjacency list,

Transitive closure of a directed graph and path matrix.

Traversals: Breadth First Search, Depth First Search.

Self-learning Topics: Implementation of BFS, DFS 03

CO1, CO3

IV Searching

and Sorting Searching: Hashing: Hash Functions: Truncation, Mid -

square Method, Folding Method, Division Method. Collision

Resolution: Open Addressing: Linear Probing, Quadratic

Probing, Double Hashing, Separate Chaining Bucket Hashing.

Analysis of all searching techniques

Self-learning Topics: Implementation of different sorting

techniques and searching. 03

CO 4,

CO5

V Applications

of Data

Structures Applications of Linked Lists: Addition of 2 Polynomials and

Multiplication of 2 polynomials.

Applications of Stacks: Reversal of a String, Checking

validity of an expression containing nested parenthesis,

Function calls, Polish Notation: Introduction to infix, prefix

and postfix expressions and their evaluation and conversions. 04

CO6

## Page 381

Applications of T rees: Huffman Tree and Heap Sort.

Applications of Graphs: Minimum Spanning Tree: Prim’s

Algorithm, Kruskal’s Algorithm.

Self-learning Topics: Implementation of applications for

Stack, Queues, Linked List, Trees and Graph.

Text Books:

1. S. K Srivastava, Deepali Srivastava; Data Structures through C in Depth; BPB

Publications; 2011.

2. Yedidya Langsam, Moshej Augenstein, Aaron M. Tenenbaum; Data Structure Using C

& C++; Prentice Hall of India; 1996.

3. Reema Thareja; Data Structures using C; Oxford.

References:

1. Ellis Horowitz, Sartaj Sahni; Fundamentals of Data Structures; Galgotia Publications; 2010.

2. Jean Paul Tremblay, Paul G. Sorenson; An introduction to data structures with

applications; Tata McGrawHill; 1984.

3. Rajesh K . Shukla; Data Structures using C and C++; Wiley India; 2009.

Online References:

Sr. No. Website Name

2. https://www.nptel.ac.in

3. https://opendatastructures.org/

3. https://www.coursera.org/

Assessment:

Internal Assessment (IA) for 20 marks:

IA will consist of Two Compulsory Internal Assessment Tests. Approximately 40% to 50%

of syllabus content must be covered in First IA Test and remaining 40% to 50% of syllabus

content must be covered in Second IA Tes t

Question paper format

Question Paper will comprise of a total of six questions each carrying 20 marksQ.1 will

be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the syllabus

Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (part (a) and part (b) of each question must

be from different modules. For example, if Q.2 has part (a) from Module 3 then part (b)

must be from any other Module randomly selected from all the modules)

A total of four questions need to be answered

## Page 382

Course Code

Course

Name Teaching Scheme

(Contact Hours) Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical

/Oral Tutorial Total

ITC303 Database

Management

System 03 -- -- 03 -- -- 03

Course

Code

Course

Name Examination Scheme

Theory Marks

Term Work Pract. /Oral Total Internal assessment End

Sem.

Exam Test1 Test 2 Avg.

ITC303 Database

Management

System 20 20 20 80 -- -- 100

Course Objectives:

Sr. No. Course Objectives

The course aims:

1 To learn the basics and understand the need of database management system.

2 To construct conceptual data model for real world applications

3 To Build Relational Model from ER/EER.

4 To introduce the concept of SQL to store and retrieve data efficient ly.

5 To demonstrate notions of normalization for database design.

6 To understand the concepts of transaction processing - concurrency control & recovery

procedures.

Course Outcomes:

Sr.

No. Course Outcomes Cognitive levels

of attainment as

per Bloom’s

Taxonomy

On successful completion, of course, learner/student will be able to:

1 Identify the need of Database Management System. L1, L2

2 Design conceptual model for real life applications. L6

3 Create Relational Model for real life applications L6

4 Formulate query using SQL commands. L3

5 Apply the concept of normalization to relational database design. L3

6 Demonstrate the concept of transaction, concurrency and recovery. L2

Prerequisite: C Programming

DETAILED SYLLABUS:

## Page 383

Sr.

No. Module Detailed Content Hours CO

Mapping

I The Entity -

Relationship

Model Conceptual Modeling of a database, The Entity -

Relationship (ER) Model, Entity Type, Entity Sets,

Attributes and Keys, Relationship Types,

Relationship Sets, Weak entity Types

Generalization, Specialization and Aggregation,

Extended Entity -Relationship (EER) Model.

Self-learning Topics: Design an ER model for any

real time case study. 05 CO2

II Relational Model

& Relational

Algebra Introduction to Relational Model,

Relational Model Constraints and

Relational Database Schemas, Concept of Keys:

Primary Kay, Secondary key, Foreign Key,

Mapping the ER and EER Model to the Relational

Model, Introduction to Relational Algebra,

Relational Algebra expressions for Unary

Relational Operations,

Set Theory operations,

Binary Relational operation

Relational Algebra Queries

Self-learning Topics: Map the ER model designed

in module II to relational schema. . 05 CO3

III

Structured Query

Language (SQL)

& Indexing Overview of SQL, Data Definition

Commands, Set operations, aggregate function,

null values, Data Manipulation commands, Data

Control commands.

Integrity constraints in SQL. Database

Programming with JDBC, Security and

authorization: Grant & Revok e in SQL Functions

and Procedures in SQL and cursors.

Self-learning Topics: Physical design of database

for the relational model designed in module III and

fire various queries. 06

CO4

IV Relational

Database Design Design guidelines for relational Schema,

Functional Dependencies, Database tables and

normalization, The need for normalization, The

normalization process, Improving the design,

Self-learning Topics: Consider any real time

application and normalization up -to 3NF/BCNF 04

CO5

Text Books:

1. Korth, Slberchatz, Sudarshan, Database System Concepts, 6th Edition, McGraw Hill

2. Elmasri and Navathe, Fundamentals of Database Systems, 6th Edition, Pearson education

3. Raghu Ramkrishnan and Johannes Gehrke, Database Management Systems, TMH

References:

1. Peter Rob and Carlos Coronel, ― Database Systems Design, Implementation and Management‖,

Thomson Learning, 9th Edition.

## Page 384

2. SQL & PL / SQL for Oracle 11g Black Book, Dreamtech Press

3. G. K. Gupta : “Database Management Systems”, McGraw – Hill

Online References:

Sr. No. Website Name

1. https://www.nptel.ac.in

2. https://www.oreilly.com

3. https://www.coursera.org/

Assessment:

Internal Assessment (IA) for 20 marks:

IA will consist of Two Compulsory Internal Assessment Tests. Approximately 40% to 50%

of syllabus content must be covered in First IA Test and remaining 40% to 50% of syllabus

content must be covered in Second IA Test

Question paper format

Question Paper will comprise of a total of six questions each carrying 20 marks Q.1 will

be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the syllabus

Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (part (a) and part (b) of each question must

be from different modules. For example, if Q.2 has part (a) from Module 3 then part (b)

must be from any other Module randomly selected from all the modules)

A total of four questions need to be answered

## Page 385

Course Code

Course Name Teaching Scheme

(Contact Hours) Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical

/Oral Tutorial Total

ITC304 Principle of

Communication 03 -- -- 03 -- -- 03

Course

Code

Course Name Examination Scheme

Theory Marks

Term Work Pract. /Oral Total Internal assessment End

Sem.

Exam Test1 Test 2 Avg.

ITC304 Principle of

Communication 20 20 20 80 -- -- 100

Course Objectives:

Sr. No. Course Objectives

The course aims:

1 Study the basic of Analog and Digital Communication Systems .

2 Describe the concept of Noise and Fourier Transform for analyzing communication systems.

3 Acquire the knowledge of different modulation techniques such as AM, FM and study the

block diagram of tr ansmitter and receiver.

4 Study the Sampling theorem and Pulse Analog and digital modulation techniques

5 Learn the concept of multiplexing and digital band pass modulation techniques

6 Gain the core idea of electromagnetic radiation and propagation of waves.

Course Outcomes:

Sr.

No. Course Outcomes Cognitive levels

of attainment as

per Bloom’s

Taxonomy

On successful completion, of course, learner/student will be able to:

1 Describe analog and digital communication systems L1,L2

2 Differentiate types of noise, analyses the Fourier transform of time and

frequency domain. L1, L2, L3, L4

3 Design transmitter and receiver of AM, DSB, SSB and FM. L1,L2,L3 ,L4

4 Describe Sampling theorem and pulse modulation systems. L1,L2,L3

5 Explain multiplexing a nd digital band pass modulation techniques. L1, L2

6 Describe electromagnetic radiation and propagation of waves. L1,L2

Prerequisite: Basic of electrical engineering

DETAILED SYLLABUS:

## Page 386

Sr.

No. Module Detailed Content Hours CO

Mapping

I Introduction Basics of analog communication and digital

communication systems (Block diagram),

Electromagnetic Spectrum and application, Types of

Communication channels.

Self-learning Topics: Applications areas of analog

and digital communication. 02 CO1

II Noise and Fourier

Representation of

Signal and System Basics of signal representation and analyses,

Introduction to Fourier Transform, its properties

(time and frequency shifting, Fourier transform of

unit step, delta and gate function. Types of Noise,

Noise parame ters –Signal to noise ratio, Noise factor,

Noise figure, Friss formula and Equivalent noise

temperature .

Self-learning Topics: Practice Numerical on above

topic. 06 CO2

III Amplitude and

Angle modulation

Techniques. Need for modulation,

Amplitude Modulation Techniques: DSBFC

AM,DSBSC -AM, SSB SC AM - block diagram

spectrum, waveforms, bandwidth,

Power calculations.

Generation of AM using Diode, generation of DSB

using Balanced modulator, Generation of SSB using

Phase Shift Method.

AM Transmitter (B lock Diagram)

AM Receivers – Block diagram of TRF receivers and

Super heterodyne receiver and its characteristics -

Sensitivity, Selectivity, Fidelity, Image frequency and

its rejection

and double spotting

Angle Modulation

FM: Principle of FM - waveforms, spectrum,

bandwidth. Pre - emphasis and de -emphasis in FM,

FM generation: Direct method –Varactor diode

Modulator, Indirect method (Armstrong method)

block diagram and waveforms.

FM demodulator: Foster Seeley discriminator, Ratio

detector.

Self-learning Topics: Use of AM and FM in Modern

Communication Technology . Challenges faced by

radio business . 12 CO1,

CO2,

CO3

Text Books:

[1]. George Kennedy, Bernard Davis, SRM Prasanna, Electronic Communication Systems, Tata McGraw

Hill, 5th Ed

[2]. Simon Haykin, Michael Moher, Introduction to Analog & Digital Communications, Wiley India Pvt.

Ltd., 2nd Ed.

[3].Wireless Communication and Networking, Vijay Garg

References:

[1]. Wayne Tomasi, Electronic Communications Systems, Pearson Publication, 5th Ed.

[2]. B P Lathi, Zhi Ding, Modern Digital and Analog Communication Systems, Oxford University

[3]. Herbert Taub, Donald L Schilling, Goutam Saha, Principles of Communication Sys tems, Tata

## Page 387

McGraw Hill, 3rdEd.

[4]. K Sam Shanmugam, Digital and Analog Communication Systems, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd, 1st Ed.

Online References:

Sr. No. Website Name

1. https://www.nptel.ac.in

2. https://www.classcentral.com

3. http://www.vlab.co.in/

Assessment:

Internal Assessment (IA) for 20 marks:

IA will consist of Two Compulsory Internal Assessment Tests. Approximately 40% to 50%

of syllabus content must be covered in First IA Test and remaining 40% to 50% of syllabus

content must be covered in Second IA Test

Question paper format

Question Paper will comprise of a total of six questions each carrying 20 marks Q.1 will

be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the syllabus

Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (part (a) and part (b) of each question must

be from different modules. For example, if Q.2 has part (a) from Module 3 then part (b)

must be from any other Module randomly s elected from all the modules)

A total of four questions need to be answered

## Page 388

Course Code

Course

Name Teaching Scheme

(Contact Hours) Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical

/Oral Tutorial Total

ITC305 Paradigms

and

Computer

Programming

Fundamentals 03 -- -- 03 -- -- 03

Course

Code

Course

Name Examination Scheme

Theory Marks

Term Work Pract. /Oral Total Internal assessment End

Sem.

Exam Test1 Test 2 Avg.

ITC305 Paradigms and

Computer

Programming

Fundamentals 20 20 20 80 -- -- 100

Course Objectives:

Sr. No. Course Objectives

The course aims:

1 To introduce various programming paradigms and the basic constructs that underline any

programming language.

2 To understand data abstraction and object orientation

3 To introduce the basic concepts of declarative programming paradigms through functional and

logic programming.

4 To design solutions using declarative programming paradigms through functional and logic

programmin g.

5 To introduce the concepts of concurrent program execution.

6 To understand use of scripting language for different problem domains

Course Outcomes:

Sr.

No. Course Outcomes Cognitive levels

of attainment as

per Bloom’s

Taxonomy

On successful completion, of course, learner/student will be able to:

1 Understand and Compare different programming paradigms. L1, L2

2 Understand the Object Oriented Constructs and use them in program design. L1, L2

3 Understand the concepts of declarative programming paradigms through

functional and logic programming. L1, L2

4 Design and Develop programs based on declarative programming paradigm

using functional and/or logic programming. L5, L6

5 Understand the role of concurrency in parallel and distribu ted programming. L1, L2

6 Understand different application domains for use of scripting languages. L1. L2

Prerequisite: Students must have learned C Programming (FEC205 and FEL204),

## Page 389

DETAILED SYLLABUS:

Sr.

No. Module Detailed Content Hours CO

Mapping

I Introduction to

Programming

Paradigms and

Core Language

Design Issues Introduction to different programming paradigms.

Names, Scopes, and Bindings, Scope Rules, Storage

Management.

Subroutine and Control Abstraction: Stack Layout,

Calling sequence, parameter passing

Generic subroutines and modules.

Self-Learning Topic: Implementation of basic

concepts using programming language.

07

CO1

II Declarative

Programming

Paradigm:

Functional

Programming Introduction to Lambda Calculus, Functional

Programming Concepts, Evaluation order, Higher order

functions, I/O -Streams and Monads.

Self-Learning Topic: Implementation of programs

using functional programming Language Haskel can

refer to hacker rank website for problem statements. 07

CO3,

CO4

III Declarative

Programming

Paradigm: Logic

Programming Logic Programming with PROLOG - Resolution and

Unification, Lists, Arithmetic execution order,

imperative control flow, database manipulation,

PROLOG facilities and deficiencies.

Self-Learning Topic: Identification of different

application domains for use of Prolog and Logic

programming 06 CO3,

CO4

Text Books:

1. Scott M L, Programming Language Pragmatics, 3rd Edn., Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2009

2. Graham Hutton, Programming in Haskell, 2nd Edition, Cambridge University Press, 2016

3. Programming Languages: Concepts and Constructs; 2nd Edition, Ravi Sethi, Pearson Education

Asia, 1996.

References:

1. Harold Abelson and Gerald Jay Sussman with Julie Sussman foreword by Alan J. Perlis, Structur e

and Interpretation of Computer Programs (2nd Edition) (February 2, 2016)

2. Programming Languages: Design and Implementation (4th Edition), by Terrence W. Pratt, Marvin

V. Zelkowitz, Pearson, 2000

3. Rajkumar Buyya, Object -oriented Programming with Java: Esse ntials and Applications, Tata

McGraw Hill Education Private Limited

4. Max Bramer, Logic Programming with Prolog, Springer ISBN -13: 978 -1852 -33938 -8

Online References:

Sr No Website Name Link

1 Principles of programming Languages

(Videos) https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106/102/106102067/

2 Edx course Paradigms of Computer https://www.classcentral.com/course/edx -

## Page 390

Programming – Fundamentals paradigms -of-computer -programming -

fundamentals -2298

3 Udemy Couses https://www.udemy.com

Assessment :

Internal Assessment (IA) for 20 marks:

IA will consist of Two Compulsory Internal Assessment Tests. Approximately 40% to 50% of

syllabus content must be covered in First IA Test and remaining 40% to 50% of syllabus content

must be covered in Second IA Test

► Question paper format

Question Paper will comprise of a total of six questions each carrying 20 marks Q.1 will be

compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the syllabus.

Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (part (a) and part (b) of each question must be from

different modu les. For example, if Q.2 has part (a) from Module 3 then part (b) must be from any

other Module randomly selected from all the modules)

A total of four questions need to be answered

## Page 391

Lab Code

Lab Name Teaching Scheme

(Contact Hours) Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total

ITL301 Data

Structure Lab -- 02 -- -- 01 -- 01

Lab Code

Lab Name Examination Scheme

Theory Marks

Term Work Pract. /Oral Total Internal assessment End

Sem.

Exam Test1 Test 2 Avg.

ITL301 Data Structure

Lab -- -- -- -- 25 25 50

Lab Objectives:

Sr. No. Lab Objectives

The Lab experiments aims:

1 To use data structures as the introductory foundation for computer automation to engineering

problems.

2 To use the basic principles of programming as applied to complex data structures.

3 To learn the principles of stack, queue, linked lists and its various operations.

4 To learn fundamentals of binary search tree, implementation and use of advanced tree like

AVL, B trees and graphs.

5 To learn about searching, hashing and sorting.

6 To learn the applications of linked lists, stacks, queues, trees and graphs.

Lab Outcomes:

Sr.

No. Lab Outcomes Cognitive levels

of attainment as

per Bloom’s

Taxonomy

On successful completion, of course, learner/student will be able to:

1 Understand and use the basic concepts and principles of various linked lists,

stacks and queues. L1, L2, L3

2 Understand the concepts and apply the methods in basic trees. L1, L2

3 Use and identify the methods in advanced trees. L3, L4

4 Understand the concepts and apply the methods in graphs. L2, L3

5 Understand the concepts and apply the techniques of searching, hashing and

sorting L2, L3

6 Illustrate and examine the methods of lin ked lists, stacks, queues, trees and

graphs to various real time problems L3, L4

## Page 392

Prerequisite: C Programming

Hardware & Software Requirements:

Hardware Requirement:

PC i3 processor and above Software requirement:

Turbo/Borland C complier

DETAILED SYLLABUS:

Sr.

No. Module Detailed Content Hours LO

Mapping

I Linked Lists Insertion, deletion operations with Singly linked

lists

Insertion, deletion operations Doubly linked lists

Insertion, deletion operations Circular linked

lists.

Reversing a singly linked list.

* Linked List implementation 03 LO 1

II Trees * Implementation of operations (insertion,

deletion, counting of nodes, counting of leaf

nodes etc.) in a binary search tree. 02

LO 2

III Advanced Trees * Implementation of AVL tree.

Implementation of operations in a B tree. 04 LO 3

IV Graphs

Implementation of adjacency matrix creation.

Implementation of addition and deletion of

edges in a directed graph using adjacency

matrix. 02

LO 4

V Applications of

Data Structures * Implementation of infix to postfix

conversion and evaluation of postfix

expression

* Implementation of Josephus Problem using

circular linked list

*Implementation of hashing functions

with different collision resolution

techniques 02 LO 6

Text Books:

1. S. K Srivastava, Deepali Srivastava; Data Structures through C in Depth; BPB Publications;

2011.

2. Yedidya Langsam, Moshej Augenstein, Aaron M. Tenenbaum; Data Structure Using C & C++;

Prentice Hall of India; 1996.

3. Reema Thareja; Data Str uctures using C; Oxford.

References:

## Page 393

1. Ellis Horowitz, Sartaj Sahni; Fundamentals of Data Structures; Galgotia Publications; 2010.

2. Jean Paul Tremblay, Paul G. Sorenson; An introduction to data structures with applications;

Tata McGrawHill; 1984.

3. Rajesh K. Shukla; Data Structures using C and C++; Wiley India; 2009.

Term Work: Term Work shall consist of at least 10 to 12 practical’s based on the above list. Also Term work

Journal must include at least 2 assignments.

Term Work Marks: 25 Marks (Total marks) = 15 Marks (Experiment) + 5 Marks (Assignments) + 5 Marks

(Attendance)

Practical & Oral Exam: An Oral & Practical exam will be held based on the above syllabus.

## Page 394

Lab Code

Lab Name Teaching Scheme

(Contact Hours) Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total

ITL302 SQL Lab -- 02 -- -- 01 -- 01

Lab Code

Lab Name Examination Scheme

Theory Marks

Term Work Pract. /Oral Total Internal assessment End

Sem.

Exam Test1 Test 2 Avg.

ITL302 SQL Lab

-- -- -- -- 25 25 50

Lab Objectives:

Sr. No. Lab Objectives

The Lab experiments aims:

1 To identify and define problem statements for real life applications

2 To construct conceptual data model for real life applications

3 To Build Relational Model from ER/EER and demonstrate usage of relational algebra.

4 To Apply SQL to store and retrieve data efficiently

5 To implement database connectivity using JDBC

6 To understand the concepts of transaction processing - concurrency control & recovery

procedures.

Lab Outcomes:

Sr.

No. Lab Outcomes Cognitive levels

of attainment as

per Bloom’s

Taxonomy

On successful completion, of course, learner/student will be able to:

1 Define problem statement and Construct the conceptual model for real life

application. L1, L3, L4, L6

2 Create and populate a RDBMS using SQL. L3, L4

3 Formulate and write SQL queries for efficient information retrieval L3, L4

4 Apply view, triggers and procedures to demonstrate specific event handling. L1, L3, L4

5 Demonstrate database connectivity using JDBC. L3

6 Demonstrate the concept of concurrent transactions . L3, L4

Prerequisite: C Programming

## Page 395

Hardware & Software Requirements:

Hardware Requirement:

PC i3 processor and above Software requirement:

Any SQL Compiler, Java Programming Language

DETAILED SYLLABUS:

Sr.

No. Detailed Content Hour

s LO Mapping

1. I Identify real world problem and develop the problem statement. Design an

Entity -Relationship (ER) / Extended Entity -Relationship (EER) Model. 02 LO1

2. I

I

I Create a database using DDL and apply integrity constraints.

02 LO2, L O3

3. I

V Perform data manipulations operations on populated database. 02 LO3

4. V

I Implement Basic and complex SQL queries. 02 LO3, L O4

5. V

I

I Implementation of Views and Triggers.

02 LO4

6. V

I

I

I Demonstrate database connectivity using JDBC.

01 LO5

7. X Implement functions and procedures in SQL 02 LO3, L O4

Text Books:

1. Korth, Slberchatz, Sudarshan, Database System Concepts, 6th Edition, McGraw Hill

2. Elmasri and Navathe, Fundamentals of Database Systems, 6th Edition, Pearson education

3. Raghu Ramkrishnan and Johannes Gehrke, Database Management Systems, TMH

References:

1. Peter Rob and Carlos Coronel, ― Database Systems Design, Implementation and Management‖, Thomson

Learning, 9th Edition.

2. SQL & PL / SQL for Oracle 11g Black Book, Dreamtech Press

3. G. K. Gupta : “Database Management Systems”, McGraw – Hill

Term Work:

Term Work shall consist of at least 10 Practical’s based on the above list, but not limited to. Also, Term

work Journal must include at least 2 assignments:

The first assignment may be based on: Relational Algebra and Second may be based on

Transactions

Term Work Marks: 25 Marks (Total marks) = 15 Marks (Experiment) + 5 Marks (Assignments) + 5

Marks (Attendance)

Practical & Oral Exam: An Oral & Practical exam will be held based on the above syllabus.

## Page 396

Lab Code

Lab Name Teaching Scheme

(Contact Hours) Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total

ITL303 Computer

programming

Paradigms

Lab -- 02 -- -- 01 -- 01

Lab Code

Lab Name Examination Scheme

Theory Marks

Term Work Pract. /Oral Total Internal assessment End

Sem.

Exam Test1 Test 2 Avg.

ITL303 Computer

programming

Paradigms

Lab -- -- -- -- 25 25 50

Lab Objectives:

Sr. No. Lab Objectives

The Lab experiments aims:

1 Understand data abstraction and object orientation

2 Design and implement declarative programs in functional and logic programming languages

3 Introduce the concepts of concurrent program execution

4 Understand run time program management

5 Understand how to implement a programming solution using different programming

paradig ms.

6 Learn to compare implementation in different programming paradigms.

Lab Outcomes:

Sr.

No. Lab Outcomes Cognitive levels

of attainment as

per Bloom’s

Taxonomy

On successful completion, of course, learner/student will be able to:

1 Implement Object Oriented concepts in C++. L1, L2, L3

2 Design and Develop solution based on declarative programming paradigm

using functional and logic programming. L6

3 Understand the multi threaded programs in Java and C++ L1, L2

4 Understand the need and use of exception handling and garbage collection

in C++ and JAVA L2, L3

5 Implement a solution to the same problem using multiple paradigms. L6

6 Compare the implementations in multiple paradigms at coding and

execution level. L4

## Page 397

Prerequisite: Students mu st have learned C Programming (FEC205 and FEL204)

Hardware & Software Requirements:

Hardware Requirement:

PC i3 processor and above Software requirement:

C++ compiler, Java Languge support, SWI

Prolog, GHC Compiler .

DETAILED SYLLABUS:

Sr.

No. Module Detailed Content Hours LO

Mapping

I Declarative

Programming

Paradigm:

Functional

Programming Tutorial Introduction to Haskell programming

environment

Tutorial exercise on operators, types etc. in

Haskell

At least 5 Haskell Programs to demonstrate

Functional Programming Concepts.

Sample Programs but not limited to:

◦ Implement safetail function that behaves in

the same way as tail, except that safetail

maps the empty list to the empty list,

whereas tail give s an error in this case.

Define safetail using: (a) a conditional

expression; (b) guarded equations; (c)

pattern matching. Hint: the library function

null :: [a] -> Bool can be used to test if a list

is empty.

◦ Simple List Comprehension

◦ Higher -Order Funct ions

◦ Write recursive function to multiply two

natural numbers that uses pre defined add

funion.

◦ Implement the game of nim in Haskell to

apply list processing.

◦ Haskell code to represent infinite list e.g.

fibobacci series

◦ Implement simple Calculator

Students should clearly understand the syntax and the

execution of the Functional Implementation using

Haskell. 06 LO2

II Declarative

Programming

Paradigm: Logic

Programming Tutorial Installation and working of SWI

Prolog Environment

Implement at least 5 Prolog programs to

understand declarative programming concepts.

Students should clearly understand the syntax and the

execution of the Prolog code Implementation.

05 LO2

III Programming

Assignment For

comparative study

of Different

Paradigms At Least two implementations each implemented on

multiple paradigms like procedural, object oriented,

functional, logic.

The implementations should be done in a group of

two/three students with appropriate difficulty level. 02 LO5,

LO6

## Page 398

Student should prepar e small report and present the

solution code and demonstrate execution for

alternative solutions they build.

Text Books:

1. Scott M L, Programming Language Pragmatics, 3rd Edn., Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2009

2. Harold Abelson and Gerald Jay Sussman with Julie Sussman foreword by Alan J. Perlis, Structure

and Interpretation of Computer Programs (2nd Edition)

3. Graham Hutton, Programming in Haskell, 2nd Edition, Cambridge University Press, 2016

4.

References:

1. Sethi R, Programming Languages Concepts and Constructs , 2nd Ed, Pearson Education

2. Yogesh Sajanikar, Haskell Cookbook, Packt Publishing, 2017

Online References:

Sr

No Website Description Link

1 University Stuttgart Germany Lab Course on

Programming Paradigms http://software -

lab.org/teaching/winter2019/pp/

2 Course at MIT Structure and Interpretation of

Computer Programs [2019] https://web.mit.edu/u/6.037

3 Edx Course Paradigms of Computer

Programming – Fundamentals, https://www.edx.org/course/paradigms -

of-computer -programming -

fundamentals

4 Tutorials point link for Haskel https://www.tutorialspoint.com/haskell

Term Work: Term Work shall consist of at least 15 Practicals based on the above modules, but not limited

to. Also, Term work Journal must include at least 3 tutorial reports and 01 report of programming assignment

as mentioned in module VI.

Term Work Marks: 25 Marks (Total marks) = 15 Marks (Exp eriments/Tutorials) + 5 Marks (Assignment

write up) + 5 Marks (Attendance)

Practical & Oral Exam: An Oral & 1 Hr Practical exam will be held based on the above syllabus

## Page 399

Lab Code

Lab Name Teaching Scheme

(Contact Hours) Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total

ITL304 Java Lab

(SBL) -- 04 -- -- 02 -- 02

Lab Code

Lab Name Examination Scheme

Theory Marks

Term Work Pract. /Oral Total Internal assessment End

Sem.

Exam Test1 Test 2 Avg.

ITL304 Java Lab

(SBL) -- -- -- -- 25 25 50

Lab Objectives:

Sr. No. Lab Objectives

The Lab experiments aims:

1 To understand the concepts of object -oriented paradigm in the Java programming language.

2 To understand the importance of Classes & objects along with constructors, Arrays ,Strings and vectors

3 To learn the principles of inheritance, interface and packages and demonstrate the concept of

reusability for faster development.

4 To recognize usage of Exception Handling, Multithreading, Input Output streams in various

applications

5 To learn designing, implementing, testing, and debugging graphical user interfaces in Java using

Swings and AWT components that can react to different user events.

6 To develop graphical user interfaces using JavaFX controls.

Lab Outcomes:

Sr.

No. Lab Outcomes Cognitive levels

of attainment as

per Bloom’s

Taxonomy

On successful completion, of course, learner/student will be able to:

1 Explain the fundamental concepts of Java Programing. L1, L2

2 Use the concepts of classes, objects, members of a class and the relationships among

them needed for a finding the solution to speciﬁc problem. L3

3 Demonstrate how to extend java classes and achieve reusability using Inheritance,

Interface and Packages. L3

4 Construct robust and faster programmed solutions to problems using concept of

Multithreading, exceptions and file handling L3

5 Design and develop Graphical User Interface using Abstract Window Toolkit and

Swings along with response to the events. L6

6 Develop Graphical User Interface by exploring JavaFX framework based on MVC

architecture. L6

## Page 400

Prerequisite: Basics of Computer Programming

Hardware & Software Requirements:

Hardware Requirements Software Requirements Other Requirements

PC With Following

Configuration

1. Intel PIV Processor

2. 2 GB RAM

3. 500 GB Harddisk

4. Network interface card 1. Windows or Linux Desktop OS

2. JDK 1.8 or higher

3. Notepad ++

4.JAVA IDEs like Netbeans or

Eclipse

1. Internet Connection for installing

additional packages if required

DETAILED SYLLABUS:

Sr.

No. Module Detailed Content Hours LO

Mapping

I Inheritance,

Interfaces. Inheritance : Inheritance Basics, Types of Inheritance

in Java, member access, using Super - to call superclass

Constructor, to access member of super class(variables

and methods), method overriding, Abstract cl asses and

methods, using final.

Interfaces : Defining, implementing and extending

interfaces, variables in interfaces, Default Method in

Interface ,Static Method in interface, Abstract Classes

vs Interfaces.

(Perform any 3 programs covering Inheritance,

Interfaces).

Experiments

1) Create a Teacher class and derive Professor/

Associate_Professor/Assistant_Professor class from

Teacher class. Define appropriate constructor for all the

classes. Also define a method to display information of

Teacher. Make necessary assumptions as requ ired.

2) Create a class Book and define a display method to

display book information. Inherit Reference_Book and

Magazine classes from Book class and override display

method of Book class in Reference_Book and Magazine

classes. Make necessary assumptions required.

3) A university has two types of students — graduate

students and research students. The University

maintains the record of name, age and programme of

every student. For graduate students, additional

information like percentage of marks and str eam, like

science, commerce, etc. is recorded; whereas for

research students, additionally, specialization and years

of working experience, if any, is recorded. Each class

has a constructor. The constructor of subclasses makes

a call to constructor of the superclass. Assume that every

constructor has the same number of parameters as the

number of instance variables. In addition, every

subclass has a method that may update the instance

variable values of that subclass. All the classes have a 08 LO1

LO3

## Page 401

function display _student_info( ), the subclasses must

override this method of the base class. Every student is

either a graduate student or a research student.

Perform the following tasks for the description given

above using Java :

(i) Create the three classes with pro per instance

variables and methods, with suitable inheritance.

(ii) Create at least one parameterised constructor for

each class.

(iii) Implement the display_student_info( ) method in

each class.

4) An employee works in a particular department of an

organization. Every employee has an employee number,

name and draws a particular salary. Every department

has a name and a head of department. The head of

department is an employee. Every year a new head of

department takes over. Also, every year an employee is

given an annual salary enhancement. Identify and

design the classes for the above description with suitable

instance variables and methods. The classes should be

such that they implement information hiding. You must

give logic in support of your design . Also create two

objects of each class.

5) Consider a hierarchy, where a sportsperson can either

be an athlete or a hockey player. Every sportsperson has

a unique name. An athlete is characterized by the event

in which he/she participates; whereas a hock ey player is

characterised by the number of goals scored by him/her.

Perform the following tasks using Java :

(i)Create the class hierarchy with suitable instance

variables and methods.

(ii) Create a suitable constructor for each class.

(iii) Create a method named display_all_info with

suitable parameters. This method should display all the

information about the object of a class.

(iv) Write the main method that demonstrates

polymorphism.

6) Create an interface vehicle and classes like bicycle,

car, bike etc, having common functionalities and put all

the common functionalities in the interface. Classes like

Bicycle, Bike, car etc implement all these functionalities

in their own class in their own way

II Exce ption

Handling,

Multithreading. Exception Handling: Exception -Handling

Fundamentals, Exception Types, Exception class

Hierarchy, Using try and catch, Multiple catch Clauses,

Nested try Statements, throw, throws, finally , Java’s

Built -in Exceptions, Creating Your Own Exce ption

Subclasses

Multithreaded Programming: The Java Thread

Model and Thread Life Cycle, Thread Priorities,

Creating a Thread, Implementing Runnable, Extending 05 LO1

LO3

LO4

## Page 402

Thread, Creating Multiple Threads, Synchronization:

Using Synchronized Methods, The synchro nized

Statement

(Perform any 3 programs that cover Exception

Handling, Multithreading )

Experiments:

1) Write java program where user will enter loginid and

password as input. The password should be 8 digit

containing one digit and one special symbol. If user

enter valid password satisfying above criteria then show

“Login Successful Message”. If user ente r invalid

Password then create InvalidPasswordException stating

Please enter valid password of length 8 containing one

digit and one Special Symbol.

2) Java Program to Create Account with 1000 Rs

Minimum Balance, Deposit Amount, Withdraw

Amount and Also Throws LessBalanceException. It has

a Class Called LessBalanceException Which returns the

Statement that Says WithDraw Amount(_Rs) is Not

Valid. It has a Class Which Creates 2 Accounts, Both

Account Deposite Money and One Account Tries to

WithDraw more Mo ney Which Generates a

LessBalanceException Take Appropriate Action for the

Same.

3) Create two threads such that one thread will print

even number and another will print odd number in an

ordered fashion.

4) Assume that two brothers, Joe and John, share a

common bank account. They both can, independently,

read the balance, make a deposit, and withdraw some

money. Implement java application demonstrate how

the transaction in a bank can be carried out concurrently.

III GUI

programming - I

(AWT, Event

Handling, Swing) Designing Graphical User Interfaces in Java :

Components and Containers, Basics of Components,

Using Containers, Layout Managers, AWT

Components, Adding a Menu to Window, Extending

GUI Features

Event -Driven Programming in Java : Event -Handling

Process, Event -Handling Mechanism, Delegation

Modelof Event Handling, Event Classes, Event Sources,

Event Listeners, Adapter Classes as Helper Classes in

Event Handling.

Introducing Swing: AWT vs Swings, Components and

Containers, Swing Pa ckages, A Simple Swing

Application, Painting in Swing, Designing Swing GUI

Application using Buttons, JLabels, Checkboxes, Radio

Buttons, JScrollPane, JList, JComboBox, Trees,

TablesScroll pane Menus and Toolbar 12 LO1

LO4

LO5

## Page 403

(Perform any 3 programs that contain AWT, E vent

handling and Swing to build GUI application).

1)Write a Java program to implement Swing

components namely Buttons, ,JLabels, Checkboxes,

Radio Buttons, JScrollPane, JList, JComboBox, Trees,

Tables Scroll pane Menus and Toolbars to design

interactive GUI.

2) Write a program to create a window with four text

fields for the name, street, city and pincode with

suitable labels. Also windows contains a button

MyInfo. When the user types the name, his street, city

and pincode and then clicks the button, the types details

must appear in Arial Font with Size 32, Italics.

3) Write a Java program to create a simple calculator

using java AWT elements.

.Use a grid layout to arrange buttons for the digits and

basic operation +, -, /, *. Add a text felid to display the

results.

4) Write a Java Program to create a Student Profile

form using AWT controls.

5) Write a Java Program to simulate traffic signal light

using AWT and Swing Components.

6) Write a Java Program to create a color palette.

Declare a grid of Buttons to set the color names.

Change the background color by clicking on the color

button.

7) Build a GUI program that allows the user to add

objects to a collection and perform search and sort on

that collection.(Hint. Use Swing components like

JButton, JList, JFrame, JPanel and JOptionPane.)

IV GUI

Programming -II

(JavaFX) JavaFX Basic Concepts, JavaFX application skeleton,

Compiling and running JavaFX program,Simple

JavaFX control:Label,Using Buttons and events,

Drawing directly on Canvas. 01

LO1

LO5

LO6

Text Books:

1. Herbert Schildt, “Java -The Complete Reference”, Tenth Edition, Oracle Press, Tata McGraw Hill

Education.

2. E. Balguruswamy, “Programming with Java A primer”, Fifth edition, Tata McGraw Hill Publication

3. Anita Seth, B.L.Juneja, “ Java One Step Ahead”, oxford university press.

References:

1. D.T. Editorial Services, “Java 8 Programming Black Book”, Dreamtech Press.

2. Learn to Master Java by Star EDU Solutions

3. Yashvant Kanetkar, “Let Us Java” ,4th Edition ,BPB Publications.

Term Work:

The Term work shall consist of at least 15 practical based on the above list. The term work Journal must

include at least 2 Programming assignments. The Prog ramming assignments should be based on real world

## Page 404

applications which cover concepts from more than one modules of syllabus .

Term Work Marks: 25 Marks (Total marks) = 15 Marks (Experiment) + 5 Marks

(Assignments/tutorial/write up) + 5 Marks (Attendance)

Practical & Oral Exam: An Oral & Practical exam will be held based on the above syllabus.

## Page 405

Course Code

Course

Name Teaching Scheme

(Contact Hours) Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total

ITM301 Mini Project

– 1 A for

Front end

/backend

Application

using JAVA -- 04 -- -- 02 -- 02

Course

Code

Course

Name Examination Scheme

Theory Marks

Term Work Pract. /Oral Total Internal assessment End

Sem.

Exam Test1 Test 2 Avg.

ITM301 Mini Project –

1 A for Front

end /backend

Application

using JAVA -- -- -- -- 25 25 50

Course Objectives

1. To acquaint with the process of identifying the needs and converting it into the problem .

2. To familiarize the process of solving the problem in a group .

3. To acquaint with the process of applying basic engineering fundamental s to attempt solutions to the

problems.

4. To inculcate the process of self -learning and research.

Course Outcome: Learner will be able to…

1. Ident ify problems based on societal /research needs.

2. Apply Knowledge and skill to solve societal problems in a group.

3. Develop interpersonal skills to work as member of a group or leader.

4. Draw the proper inferences from available results through theoretical / experimental/simulations .

5. Analyse the impact of solutions in societal and environmental context for sustainable development.

6. Use standard norms of engineering practices

7. Excel in written and oral communication.

8. Demonstrate capabilities of self -learning in a group, which leads to life long learning.

9. Demonstrate project management principles during project work.

Guidelines for Mini Project

Students shall form a group of 3 to 4 students, while forming a group shall not be allowed less than

three or more tha n four students, as it is a group activity.

Students should do survey and identify needs, which shall be converted into problem statement for

mini project in consultation with faculty supervisor/head of department/internal committee of

faculties.

Students hall submit implementation plan in the form of Gantt/PERT/CPM chart, which will cover

weekly activity of mini project.

A log book to be prepared by each group, wherein group can record weekly work progress,

guide/supervisor can verify and record notes/comments.

Faculty supervisor may give inputs to students during mini project activity; however, focus shall be

on self -learning.

## Page 406

Students in a group shall understand problem effectively, propose multiple solution and select best

possible solution in consultation with guide/ supervisor.

Students sh all convert the best solution into working model using various components of their

domain areas and demonstrate.

The solution to be validated with proper justification and report to be compiled in standard format of

University of Mumbai .

With the focus on the self -learning, innovation, addressing societal problems and entrepreneur ship

quality development within the students through the Mini Projects, it is preferable that a single

project of appropriate level and quality to be carried out in two semesters by all the groups of the

students. i.e. Mini Project 1 in semester III and IV . Similarly, Mini Project 2 in semesters V and VI.

However, based on the individual students or group capability, with the mentor’s recommendations,

if the proposed Mini Project adhering to the qualitative aspects mentioned above gets completed in

odd sem ester, then that group can be allowed to work on the extension of the Mini Project with

suitable improvements/modifications or a completely new project idea in even semester. This policy

can be adopted on case by case basis.

Guidelines for Assessment of Mini Project :

Term Work

The review/ progress monitoring committee shall be constituted by head of departments of

each institute. The progress of mini project to be evaluated on continuous basis, minimum two

reviews in each semester.

In continuous assessment focus shall also be on each individual student, assessment based on

individual’s contribution in group activity, their understanding and response to questions.

Distribution of Term work marks for both semesters shall be as below;

o Marks awarded by guide/sup ervisor based on log book : 10

o Marks awarded by review committee : 10

o Quality of Project report : 05

Review/progress monitoring committee may consider following points for assessment

based on either one year or half year project as mentioned in genera l guidelines.

One-year project:

In first semester entire theoretical solution shall be ready, including components/system

selection and cost analysis. Two reviews will be conducted based on presentation given by

students group.

First shall be for finalisation of problem

Second shall be on finalisation of proposed solution of problem.

In second semester expected work shall be procurement of component’s/systems, building of

working prototype, testing and validation of results bas ed on work completed in an earlier

semester.

First review is based on readiness of building working prototype to be conducted.

Second review shall be based on poster presentation cum demonstration of working

model in last month of the said semester.

Half-year project:

In this case in one semester students’ group shall complete project in all aspects including,

o Identification of need/problem

o Proposed final solution

o Procurement of components/systems

o Building prototype and testing

Two reviews will be conducted for continuous assessment,

First shall be for finalisation of problem and proposed solution

Second shall be for implementation and testing of solution.

## Page 407

Assessment criteria of Mini Project.

Mini Project shall be assessed based on following criteria;

1. Quality of survey/ need identification

2. Clarity of Problem definition based on need.

3. Innovativeness in solutions

4. Feasibility of proposed problem solutions and selection of best solution

5. Cost effectiveness

6. Societal impact

7. Innovativeness

8. Cost effectiveness and Societal impact

9. Full functioning of working model as per stated requirements

10. Effective use of skill sets

11. Effective use of standard engineering norms

12. Contribution of an individual’s as member or leader

13. Clarity in written and oral communication

In one year, project , first semester evaluation may be based on first six criteria’s and

remaining may be used for second semester evaluation of performance of students in mini

project .

In case of half year project all criteria’s in generic may be considered for evaluation of

performance of students in mini project.

Guidelines for Assessment of Mini Project Practical/Oral Examination:

Report should be prepared as per the guidelines issued by the University of Mumbai.

Mini Project sh all be assessed through a presentation and demonstration of working model by the

student project group to a panel of Internal and External Examiners preferably from industry or

research organisations having experience of more than five years approved by head of Institution.

Students sh all be motivated to publish a paper based on the work in Conferences/students

competitions .

Mini Project shall be assessed based on following points;

1. Quality of problem and Clarity

2. Innovativeness in solutions

3. Cost effectiveness an d Societal impact

4. Full functioning of working model as per stated requirements

5. Effective use of skill sets

6. Effective use of standard engineering norms

7. Contribution of an individual’s as member or leader

8. Clarity in written and oral communication